ARTEC-#31215-v1-84_078481

Manual de funcionamiento Instalaciones de trituración semi-móviles Banda IV M BECHTEL - DAVY Joint Venture Proyecto COLLAHUASI Año de fabricación 1997 84/078 481 aaaaaaaa

Krupp Fördertechnik GmbH (Krupp técnica de elevación y transporte S.L.) P.O. Box 10 22 51 – D - 45022 Essen Altendorfer Str. 120 – D - 45143 Essen Teléfono: (02 01) 828-04 – Telex:857 817 Fax: (02 01) 25 66

16.02.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

16.02.98

Índice 0

Guía del usuario ........................ Banda I

1

Descripción de la instalación de trituración semimóvil

1.1

Condiciones de operación y visión general

1.2

Construcción y forma de funcionamiento

1.3

Datos técnicos

1.4

Indicaciones de seguridad

2

Operación de la instalación de trituración semimóvil .................................. Banda I

2.1

Notas generales sobre la operación

2.2

Equipo eléctrico para la operación

3

Mantenimiento .......................... Banda I

3.1

Mantenimiento e inspección

3.2

Reparación

3.3

Cambio de lugar de la instalación

4

Documentos de entrega ............ Banda II

4.1

Martillo hidráulico

4.1.1

Instalación

4.1.2

Operación

4.1.3

Localizando fallas

4.1.4

Mantenimiento

4.1.5

Hidráulica

4.1.6

Equipo eléctrico

4.1.7

Manual del martillo perforador

COLLAHUASI

Grúa hidráulica de mantenimiento ......... Banda II

4.2.1

Características técnicas

4.2.2

Normas de seguridad

4.2.3

Descripción

4.2.4

Servicio

4.2.5

Mantenimiento

4.2.6

Equipo eléctrico

4.2.7

Sistema hidráulico

4.2.8

Montaje y desmontaje

4.2.9

Listas de repuestos

4.2.10

Documentación -piezas suministradas por terceros

4.3

Transportadores de descarga................ Banda III

4.3.1

Arrastres de transportador

4.3.1.1

Esquema 521588A y 521589A Montaje - caja de timbre

4.3.1.2

Motores eléctricos

4.3.1.3

Cajas de cambio y componentes

4.3.2

Arrastre de lanzadera

4.3.2.1

Motor eléctrico

4.3.2.2

Caja de cambio y componentes

4.3.3

Bloques de rueda para lanzadera

4.3.4

Poleas y guirnaldas

4.3.5

Cilindros

4.3.6

Correa de caucho

4.4

Equipo complementario y auxiliar ......... Banda III

4.4.1

Tracciones mediante cadenas de mano

4.4.1.1

Datos técnicos

4.4.1.2

Instrucciones de instalación

4.4.1.3

Manual de funcionamiento

4.4.1.4

Lista de piezas de repuesto para elevador con engranaje de dientes rectos 2000 kg.

4.4.1.5

Lista de piezas de repuesto para elevador con engranaje de dientes rectos 5000 kg

4.5

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

4.5.1

Introducción al sistema aglomerador para supresión de polvos COLLAHUASI

16.02.98

4.2

Instrucciones para instalación

4.5.3

Procedimientos de operación

4.5.4

lista de partes

4.5.5

Instrucciones de los fabricantes

4.6

Aire acondicionado............................... Banda IV

4.6.1

Unidad de manipulación del aire THERMO AIR

4.6.2

Ventilador eliminador de arena SCHRÖTER

4.6.3

Acondicionador de aire KUTHE

4.6.4

Acondicionador de aire ROCA

4.6.5

Válvula multihoja TROX

4.6.6

Válvula cortafuego TROX

4.6.7

Rejilla resistente a la intemperie con válvula de seguridad TROX

4.6.8

Rejas TROX

4.6.9

Manómetro de contacto AIRFLOW

4.6.10

Interruptor de presión diferencial para aire DUNGS

4.6.11

Calefactor DEVITEMP / sala de control

4.6.12

Lista de cables y esquema de conexiones eléctricas para la caja de mecanismos del interruptor del acondicionador de aire Kuthe

4.6.13

lista de piezas para el esquema no. 2504 925

4.7

Ascensor............................................... Banda IV

4.8

Plataforma de trabajo de grúa .............. Banda IV

16.02.98

4.5.2

COLLAHUASI

16.02.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos 4.5.1

Introducción al sistema aglomerador para supresión de polvos

4.5.2

Instrucciones para instalación

4.5.3

Procedimientos de operación

4.5.4

lista de partes

4.5.5

Instrucciones de los fabricantes

23.01.98

4.5

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

MANUA1

dE

@ERACiON

y MANTENCiON

Krupp Fordertechnils/ Compania Minera Dona De Collahuasi Job No.: TRC 294C

Elaborado per:

The Raring Corporation 12117 NE gdh street, suite 1900 Vancouver WA 98682 Tel: (360) 8921659, Fax: (360) 8927624

Seccion INFORMAC1ON INTRODUCTION

1:

GENERAL

........................................................................................................................... 1

AL SISTEMA

LISTA DE COMPONENTS:

AGLOMERADOR

PARA SUPRES1ON DE POLVOS ....................... 3

.......................................................................................................................... 7

Toberas FP: .............................................................................................................................................. 9 Toberas hlH: ............................................................................................................................................. 9 GABINETE DECONTROL MULTIF~CIONAL: ................................................................................................... 1I Conzponentes yDescripci6n de Fzlncionamiento : .................................................................................. 11 CONJUNTO MODULARCAJAREGULADOR DEPRES1ON............ . ....... ............... ......... . . . . ...... ........ . . . .. 13 Cc~mponentes yDescripci6n de Fz[ncionatniento: .................................................................................. 13 CONJUNTO MODULARCAJACOMBINACION: COMBO .................................................................................. 15 Componentes& Descripcibn de Flincionamiento: ................................................................................. 15 CONJUNTOCAJA COMBINATIONHIDR.4ULICA................................................................................................ 17 Componen[es& Descripcibn de Fztncionamiento : ................................................................................. 17 CONJUNrO MODULARCAJ.ADE DISTRIBUC’ION............ . . .......... . . ...... . . . ...... ..... . . .................. . ........... 19 Ct~mponentes yDescripci6n de Fl!ncionanlienlo: .................................................................................. 19 GABINErE DE FILTROSDE AIRE& AGUA........................................................................................................ 21 Conzponentes >lDescripcibn de Fl[ncionamiento: ..................................................................................2l CONJUNTOMODULAR PARAFILTRATIONPRIMARIADELAIw/AGuA .............................................................22 Componentes yDescripci6n de Ftincionamiento : ..................................................................................22 MODULODE SOPORTEDE LATOBERA............................................................................................................. 25 Soporte Articuladodela Tobera:... ....................................................................................................... 25 Montajede Toberwen Tol\asd eDescargad eCamiones . .................................................................... 26 Mon[aje Soldado De Tobera .............. .................................................................................................... 27 GABINETE DLCONTROLESELECTRICOS( SIN PROTECTIONCONTR.4CONGELAMIENTO)................................ 29 Componentes yDescripcibn de FuncioncImiento: . 29 GABINETE DE CONTROLESELECTRICOS( CON PROTECTIONANTI. CONGELAkIIENTO)................................... 31 Componenfes yDescripcibn de Funcionatnien[o: . 31

Seccion lNSTRUCCIONES 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. 7. 8.

11: PARA lNSTALACION:

....o............................................................................................ 33

MONTAJEDE LAS TOBERAS...................................................................................................................... 34 GABINETES MODULARESPARAREGULADORESDE PRESIONYCOhiBINACIONES. ..................................... 35 CABLE DE CONEXIONDE LASTOBERAS. ................................................................................................... 37 GABINETESMULTIFUKIONW: ................................................................................................................ 38 TuBERi,4swiwLos GABINETESMULTI.FUNCIOYYLOSGABWETES PRV . .......................................... 39 GAB[NETESDECONTROLS ELECTNCOS. ................................................................................................ 40 CONJWTO MODULAR FILTROPRIMAWO AIRE/AGUA: .............................................................................4l GABINETEDE FILTROSAIRE/AGUA:..........................................................................................................42

Seccion

Ill:

PROCEDIMIENTOS

DE OPERAC1ON

PROCEDIMIENTOSPRELIMINARESAL PLIESTA F:NNIARCH..\

....................................................................................................... 43

ARMNQUE

DE LOS GABiNE"rES

MULT1:

... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .. . ... ...43 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...43

Arranqu edelGabinet eMULT1-1& Muiti-2: ................ .. .................... . ........... . . 43 Arranqued elGabine teMULT1- .5&MULTI-6 .................... . ,, .................45 PROC’EDIMIENTO DE PUESTA EN MARCHA: (TIPK’O PARATODOSLOSPUNTOSDE APLICAC16N),, . .... .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 48 PROCEDIkIIENTODIARIODE CALIBRATION/INSPECCION.,.,...,.,...,,.,.,.,...,.,.,...,.,.............,,,.,.,..,.................,....48 MANTENCION 1, 7-.

/ PARAMETROS

DE OPERACION

................................................................................. 49

INTRODUcclON: ............................................................ .........................................................................49 TOBERAS..................................................................................................................................................49 llescwmcdo delc~ Tobera .................................................................................................... ....................5 I Limpiezadela Tobera . ......................................................................................................... ................sI Re-armadocklu Tobera. ....................................................... .............................................................5l

4. SOPORTES DE LAS TOBERAS .. .. .. .. ... .. . ... . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...53 Desmontaje delsoporte delu!oberaparaacceso ala Tobera. ............................................................53 Desmontc~e delsoporte dela Tobera- parainspeccibn internay senicio . ...........................................55 5. REARkI,ADODEL SOPORTEDE LATOBEu.., ................................................................................................ 55 6, TUBERiAS DE CONEXIONDE LAS TOBERAS .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . .. .. .. .... ... .. .. ... . ... . .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. ... .. ..... .. .. . .. .. .. ....57 Co)le.yiones . .............................................................................................................................................57 7, REGULADORES DE PRESION . .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....59 Comohfantener los Regl[ladores . ...........................................................................................................59 Cuando Reemplazar los Reguladores. ..,,,., .............................................................................................59 P4rc!idas (Fligas) . ....................................................................................................................................59 8. VALVULAS SOLENOIDES . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. .. . . .. ......63 9.

FILTROS DE AIREYAGUA,

10.

INSTRUIMENTOS

. .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .... ... .. .. . ... ... . .. ....6j

INDICADOREs

. . .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... ... . .. .. .. .. ....65

AIRE.........................................................................................................65 12. PROCEDIMIENTOSDIARIOSDE INSPECTION ... ... .. .... . . .. . . .. .... .. ... .. .. . ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .....65 11. COhIPRESORESY

lNVESTIGACION

Seccion LISTA

TANQUES

DE FALLAS

DE

.................................................................................................................... 67

IV:

DE PARTES ......................................................................................................................c..................7l

LISTAS

DE PARTES DE REPUESTO .................................................................................................

Lists De Components

No.:

I L____

P~gina 14

—— —. I 41tl.

COM-P/&

XMcsfdAIV

296

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Conjunto

Modular

DE

OpERAcioN

Y MANTENCiON

Ltd.

TRC No,: 296

Caja Combination:

COMBO

El Conjunto Modular Caja Combination es una combination de valvulas solenoids y valvulas reguladoras de presion. Todos Ios components estan alojados en un gabinete Nema 3R o !2 para su debida protection. En la modalidad anti-congelamiento, dicho gabinete es termicamente aislado y calefaccionado por un malefactor electrico de 200 Watts, con regulation automatic. La caja COMBO standard mide 20x20x8° Nema 3R. Otras variaciones modular controls hasta 8 toberas.

Components Sigue a continuation

& Description una description

Este conjunto

de Funcionamiento:

del equipo y su funcion normal de operation:

1,

Gabinete:

2.

Filtro de Aire/Valvula Reguladora: (PRV) Item #2. Combina la funcion de un fiitro y un regulador de presion en una sola unidad compacta, con option para drenaje automatic. La valvula debera ser ajustada manualmente para mantener una presion de 65-70 PSIG en Ias toberas. El elemento filtrante esta dimensionado (40 micrones) para remover Iiquidos y particular solidas contenidas en el aire comprimido de suministro,

3.

Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion del Agua: (PRV) Item #3. Manualmente ajustadas para mantener una presion de 3-15 PSIG en Ias toberas. Las valvulas duales de regulation permiten el control de dos grupos de toberas ubicadas en diferentes elevaciones,

4.

Valvulas Solenoids de Bloqueo Aire/Agua: (SV 1-1, SV 1-2) Item ##4& #5. Normalmente cerradas. Se energizan cuando existe la presion de aire en la tuberia de suministro y la serial remota de comando, en Ias instalaciones del “cliente, establece contacto.

5.

Valvula Solenoide de Purga: (SV 1-3) Item #13. Normalmente abierta. Se cierra cuando Ias valvulas solenoids de sire-y aqua se energizan. Abierta, cuando el permisivo remoto esta abierto. El aire va a fluir a traves de _ia~alvula sole~oide de agua, para purgar el agua de Ias Iineas de agua, por el periodo de tiempo estipulado, Ala expiration de dicho tiempo, la valvula solenoide de bloqueo del aire (SV l-l) interrumpira el suministro de aire, para asi concluir la operation de purga.

6.

Indicadores

7.

Valvulas de Aislacion: Las valvulas individuals salida.

8.

Malefactor:

9.

Caja de Conexion Electrica: Item #11. Nema 4. Proporciona la fuente externa de suministro y Ios components internos.

10, Cabezales 11. Conectores montura.

20x20x8”.

Nema son opcionales.

Nema 3R.

de Presion

del Agua & Aire:

Son usadas para aislar Ias valvulas reguladoras, con fines de mantencion. de aislacidn en cada tobera, permiten desconectar cualquier circuito de

Item 14. Para protection

de Aire & Agua: (3/4”):

(l”): 12. Conectores la caja COMBO.

Item #6 & #7. Auto explicative.

contra congelamiento.

Cabezal de 8 toberas con valvula individual de aislacion.

Item #1 O. Se usan para conectar el cable de la tobera con su respective Son usados para conectar la lines de agua de suministro entre la caja MULTI y

rapidos: Item #8 & #9. Conectores 13. Conectores para conectar Ias tuberias de aire y agua. 14, Valvula Check para el Agua (4/8”): del aire en Ias tuberias de agua.

/ %ta De Con7ponentes

medios de conexion electrica entre

para desconexion

rapida de la tuberia.

Item #14. V41vula check en-lines,

Pdgina 15

Se usa

para prevenir flujo reverso

294cstbfAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUAl Cliente: Minera Escondida

DE

OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN

Ltd.

TRC No.: 296

Conjunto

Caja Combination

Hidr6uIica

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

1 ~

m

MHCOMBOF

‘7

...’-

J,

contaminants,

:$iip!q/’’EE:E ;_

‘

II

“ *X-.<

INLYCADOR

, ,..,= ,

\ //’

OE PREStON

~,

AUTOMATIC SOLENOID tw.A,NvALvE Box VAL VUU SOL ENOJDE AUTOMA TIG4 DE ORENADO

2FlL-sKl

Conjunto

Lists De Compomwtes

de Filtros

Duplex

P4gina 22

Para Aqua

Y Aire

294cWAN

solidas

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

DE 0pERAci6N Y MANTENCi6N TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

FIL TRO DE A IRE

BALL VALVE

/-” VAL

VUL4

DRENAJE

WATER FILTE FIL TRO DE AGUA

Filtro

Y-l / \

7

Duplex

en serie

para AgualFiItro

de Aire

DE

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Chente

Mmera Escondlda

DE

OpERAci6N

Ltd

TRC No

Conjunto

1

Modulo

Y MANTENcioN

Tobera

Modular

10

Tobera

Conectorpara Flexible

2

Cuerpo Adaptador

11

Conducto electrico Flexible

3

Conector para el Aire

12

Tuberia de aire

4

Conector para el Agua

13

Tuberia de Agua

5

Tubo de Protection

14

Perilla Manual

6

Tornillo de Fijacion

15

Soporte-U

7

Adaptador reductor

16

Perno de 5/8”

8

Tornillo de Fijacidn

17

Tuerca de 5/8”, B-line

9

Tubo Guia

18

Canaleta, B-1ine

Lkta De Cumponentes

296

PAgina 24

.—.. 254~5~~,4/\j

..——

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Modulo

de Sopotie

0pERAci6N

DE

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

de la Tobera

Se ofrecen variados modos de soporte de Ias toberas, para acomodar Ios requerimientos especificos de la faena a cumplir. La funcion especifica de dichos soportes es proteger Ias toberas contra datios causados por Ias condiciones

Soporte

ambientales

atmosfericas,

Articulado

o por el equipo de operaciones,

objeto de esta aplicacion.

de la Tobera:

Esta constituido por una tobera con un cuerpo tinico, que facilita su instalacion, ajuste directional y su mantencion. Fabricado con acero galvanizado, es especialmente robusto. Un cuerpo “adaptador” es incluido con cada soporte, para acomodar toberas tipo FP o MH, cualquiera sea el case. H tipo de soporte facilita la protection contra congelamiento o ambientes mas calurosos.

NZM2ASSY

Soporte

— . . . i f.-d !2.2 Con fpommtes

. . .,....——

Articulado

de la Tobera

——.

—

-.-—,

+&J~~~ ?5

.

,.—. .— 294CSII

z

. . ...— —

Sistetna Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Montaje

DE

OpERAcioN

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

de Toberas

en Tolvas

de Descarga

de Camiones

Este tipo de montaje esta diseflado para ser usado en una tolva de descarga de camiones; o sobre parrillas alimentadoras, donde no se necesita ajuste de la direccion del rociado.

/75

Montaje

—— L2A Lk Cfmpxwntes

de Toberas en Tolvas de Descarga de Camiones

. —.. Ptigina 26

294cWAN

‘-‘-

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Montaje

DE opmAcioN

Y MmwmcioN TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

Soldado

De Tobera

NZM3ASSY

,/

- -/-

2 1/2- PIPE CUT AT SPECIFIED ANGLE, AND WELDED ON THE COVER PLATE WITH AN OPENING HOLE TUBER[A DE 2 1/2.. CORTAR AL ANGOLO ESPECIFICADO Y SOLDAR ALA CU8ERTA, DEJANOO UNA PERFORATION.

Montaje Soldado De Tobera

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Gabinete

DE

OpErwcioN

Y MANTENcioN

Ltd.

De Controles

TRC No.: 296

Electricos

(Sin Protection

contra

Congelamiento)

F

(r+

II

I HOA-4

1 1

POWER ON

I-=---7

,BI ,@l #

o

w’

ENERGIZADO

## @

ON

*

((j?)

.

OFF

)

, ENERGIA DE CONTROLO

EQUIP. NO. 130-DS017

Pzzr!zl OFF HAND AUTO

i @ ~

[d

Lkta De Cornponentes

HOABOXS

Pdgina 28

L @

294csMAW

“—

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Gabinete

DE

opErmci6N

Y MANmNcioN TRC

Ltd.

de Controles

Electricos

(Sin

Protection

contra

No.:

296

Congelamiento)

El gabinete de controles electricos contiene una cantidad de Switches selectors Manual / Off/ Auto, Los components se encuentran alojados en un gabinete Nema 4 de tamafio standard de 12x12x6”. Las dimensioned de [OSgabinetes varian segun sea el numero de circuitos de control y/o potencia. Otras variedades Nema pueden ser proporcionadas a pedido. El numero de circuitos de control requerido en un determinado sistema ADS, depende primordialmente del numero de sub-grupos de equipos que van a funcionar simultaneamente. Dicho numero de circuitos depende tambien de la cantidad de juegos de valvulas solenoids existences en e] sistema, siendo a veces, menor.

Components

y Description

La funcion del equipo y una description

de Funcionamiento: de su funcionamiento,

1.

Gabinete:

2.

Lutes piloto: Auto-explicative.

3.

Switches Selectors:

4.

Breakers:

5.

Relay de Control.

6.

Relay de tiempo.

es como sigue:

Nema 4.

Son utilizados para energizar o desconectar

Para protection

contra fallas electrical

a tierra.

el sistema.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Gabinete

DE

OPE!_?ACiON

Y MANTENciON

Ltd.

TRC

de Controles

Electricos

( Con Protection

No.:

Anti-Congelamiento)

@

I HOA-4

I

I

I

POWER ON

?$

:)

o ,6, ENERG12AD0

ON

.

.pREslON

OFF

cm AGUA 13AJA0 PLL.2226

,( @

,iiii, , ENERGIA DE CONTROL .

OFF HAND AUTO

@

@

Lish Oe Components

J

OFF HAND AUTO

OFF HAND AUTO

@

@

HOABOX2S

PAgina 39

294 CSMAN

296

Sistema Aglomerador para Conirol de POIVOS

DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENcioN

MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

Gabinete

TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

de Controles

Electricos

( Con Protection

Anti-Conge/amiento)

El gabinete de controles electricos contiene una cantidad de Switches selectors Manual/ Off/ Auto. Los components se encuentran alojados en un gabinete Nema 4 de tamatio standard de 12x12x8”. Las dimensioned de Ios gabinetes varian segun sea el numero de circuitos de control y/o potencia. Otras variedades Nema pueden ser proporcionadas a pedido. El numero de circuitos de control requerido en un determinado sistema ADS, depende primordialmente del numero de sub-grupos de equipos que van a funcionar simultaneamente. Dicho ntimero de circuitos depende tambien de la cantidad de juegos de valvulas solenoids existences en el sistema, siendo a veces, menor.

Components

y Description

La funcion del equipo y una description 1. Gabinete:

de Funcionamiento: de su funcionamiento,

es como sigue:

Nema 4.

2.

Lutes piloto:

Auto-explicative.

3.

Switches Selectors:

4.

Breakers:

5.

Relay de Control.

6.

Relay de Control para Ios circuitos de calefacion.

7.

Relay de Tiempo:

8,

Switch de Temperature.

Son utilizados para energizar o desconectar

Para protection

contra fallas electrical

a tierra.

Es utilizado para controlar el tiempo de purga.

el sistema

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Instrucciones para instalación

23.01.98

4.5.2

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA[ DE OpmAcioN Cliente: Minera Escondida

Y MAffTENcioN

Ltd.

TRC No.: 296

lNSTRUCCiONES PARA INSTAIACiON: La figura ilustra Ias posibles ubicaciones tipica.

de Ias toberas individuals,

en una tolva de transferencia

(l c (TRA

Seguir Ios pasos siguientes para instalar Ias toberas: ●

●

.

●

●

Las toberas deben ser apuntadas hacia el area generadora de polvos, como se recomienda; y deben estar montadas en forma tal que la forma de la dispersion no interfiera con otras supefilcies. Las toberas deben ser montadas en forma tat como para evitar que la velocidad no tree otras fuentes generadoras de polvos.

de rociado

La tobera debe ser montada con miras a evitar datios potenciales provenientes que esta siendo transportado, triturado, harneado y/o descargado.

del material

La tobera debe ser montada en forma tal como para minimizar su exposition directs a Ias corrientes de aire cargadas de polvo, que pudiesen erosionar Ios miembros resonances, Las toberas deben ser montadas en forma tal como para optimizar Ios voltimenes protegidos, proporcionados.

P ES ALTAMENTE RECOMMENDABLE PROPORCIONAR ACCESOS A CADA TOBERA, DURANTE LA OPERACION DE LA P.LANTA.

Instucciones

Fafa lnstalacion

SEGUROS

Y EXPEDITOS

—. P~gina 33

294CSMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

7.

Montaje

DE

Y MANTENcioN

OpERAcioN

TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

De Las Toberas

Favor de referirse a Ios pianos del sistema para Ias ubicaciones exactas de Ias toberas. Un representante de TRC, determinara la ubicacion precisa de Ias toberas en el terreno, una vez que todo el equipo haya sido instalado (excepto en aquellos cases en que la information esta en Ios pianos). Muy a menudo no results posible o noes aconsejable determiner Ias ubicaciones desde la oficina, debido a que obstrucciones en el terreno, tolerancias, u otros factores que afecten la mantencion o la performance, no resultan evidentes en Ios pianos de equipos de la planta.

r%

,

I

I

,111/1

)

“%

““”a

,— /’Y/

MATERIAL FLO#/ FLUJO DEL AU TE6.L

SWIVEL

k

MOUNT

MONTAJEARTICUL4D0

(

I I 1 I 1

,)

J 1 I

1

I

A

L

I 1

(

\ ,1

I ,

‘

NOZLOC

WELD MONTAJE

SLIP MOUNT EN TUBO

SOLDADO

Notese el unistrut (o canal B-Line) utilizado para asegurar el montaje articulado. Aun cuando existen otros metados, el uso de! unistrut proporciona flexibilidad y evita soldaduras en terreno.

Ins fucciof]es Para lnstakfci6n

P&gina 34

2!34csMA/V

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

2. Gabinetes

DE

opERACiON

Y MANTENCiON

Ltd.

Modulares

TRC No.: 296

para Reguladores

de Presion

y Combinaciones.

/ -..

“@..@

PRV-ISOF

/

“’Y?..*

Los modulos reguladores de presion (PRV) deben ser instalados en una estructura solids y cerca de Ias toberas que controlan. Dicho soporte podria ser una columns, una baranda, o una muralla, Results mejor montar Ios gabinetes sobre soportes unistrut soldados a la superficie de montaje. Se proporcionan 20 pies de cable de conexion por cada tobera suministrada, Por 10tanto, el gabinete de control no puede estar ubicado a m~s de 20 pies de cada tobera. >

— hw:ticciones

ES NECESARIO PROPORCIONAR FAC/L ACCESO AL GABINETE PRESl~N DURANTE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA PLANTA

REGULADOR

DE

. —...l-— Para hsta/aci6n

PAgina 35

:gdcsf:?,’i[:

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN Cliente: Minera Escondida

Ltd.

TRC No.: 296

Wu, .,.,

/

TRACE ( TW.m 0.,.,.’,”,

/–

,16’.0

/ /

7“,,

_ .’

.’/

,2’ /

FOml.,”ur,.m (AWA.TE

,’

// /

,52,”.

r .,.

/ m FOAM,

S.”40 MNF N8PPL5 .r(!,, mm*.

/

FIELD c“, HOLE m

,,, ‘“

, .———-—

\

.-—

—.

—.

‘/

>-

i.g ii

.——.

/

L

——-—..

, Nyo=--------

‘\

, ~ ~,

‘“. -

%473* SEALIIGHT Comnm ,Tua. Cww, SIu n.. r,

‘,

‘

“

‘,,

,..

t,,,

! $4.00 WATER TuBE W50 .CA.LU,

.---ir

----1,

m..=?+

,!

,.

\

Al. CO+WECTION

a ~:

v

w,,.,, /

,,

P mu.,

, !m’,>PE

—-

ll~MP~fi~l~oD m .!..,

,CO.EXJW w,,,.

COFWEC710”

I, WMPT. ,,..0. (co.ExfON

OE AGUA)

)

AIR MANIFOLD 2ND SET

i AIR MANIFOLD ) J:LmE:,RE 1

CABEZ.4L LIE A!RE 20 GRUPO

iER GRUPO I j [ ),

I

WATER MANIFOLD 1ST SET

WATER MANIFOLD 2ND SET CA BE2AL DE A IRE 20 GRuPO

CABE2AL DEAGUA fER GRUPO

1

[

Lwtucciones

P.wa hstalacidn

Pdgina 36

294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

DE

OPERACiON

Y MANTENciON TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

3. Cable de Conexion

de /as Toberas.

La conexion entre Ias toberas individuals y Ios gabinetes respectivos de PRV, COMBO, y DIST, es Ilevada a efecto mediante el cable de conexion proporcionado por TRC, en cantidades al por mayor de Ios varies components: ●

Conducto

●

Tubo plastico para el agua X“ Diametro Externo.

●

Tubo plastico para el aire, 5/16“ Diametro Externo.

Los siguientes toberas:

flexible y conectores

de %“ Diametro Interno.

pasos deben ser seguidos para medir e instalar Ios cables de conexion de Ias

1. Montar Ios gabinetes PRV, COMBO, o DIST conforme se indica en Ios pianos de montaje, o segun determinado por Ios ingenieros de TRC (Ver la seccion anterior para instrucciones de instalacion). 2.

Montar Ios mddulos individuals, ingenieros de TRC.

segun pianos de montaje, o por instrucciones

de Ios

3.

Utilizando una huincha de medir de acero, medir la distancia desde el gabinete de control hasta la parte posterior de la tobera. Considerar en la medicion material suficiente para curvas y extras que permitan seguir un camino adecuado y convenience que no interfiera con el acceso a otros equipos.

4.

Cortar el Iargo medido de tuberia flexible sealtight de %, del rollo de 100 pies, y cortar Iimpiamente con sierra o herramienta adecuada.

5.

Unir Ios extremes de Ios tubes de Y.” OD, 5/16” OD, y Ios conductors del alambre malefactor, enhuincharlos con cinta aisladora; y proceder a insertarlos dentro del conducto flexible, ya sea en forma manual o pescandolos con un alambre o Iaucha, Para permitir un deslizamiento suave de Ios tubes, usar Iubricante para cables tipo GB VJre-Aide #79-006 o equivalence; y mantener el tubo flexible, derecho.

6.

Dejar 6“ adicionales en el Iado de la tobera, y 18“ adicionales gabinete de control.

7.

Conectar Ios extremes apropiados en el gabinete y en la tobera. Dentro del gabinete, cuando se usen Ios 8 circuitos de toberas, parear en 4 pares de tubes agua/sire y conectar a Ios cabezales de salida respectivos (en la parte superior de la caja) en el mismo Iado del gabinete. Evitar que Ios tubes se crucen dentro de la caja.

8.

Conectar Ios conductors del alambre malefactor a Ios terminals caja de empalme, ubicada encima del gabinete.

9.

En el Iado de la toberas, terminar Ios conductors del alambre calefactory aislar con cinta aisladora o cinta termica. Verificar que el adaptador de sujecion no este mas alla de 1/8” del tubo de protection. (ver la figura).

para terminaciones

en el

de conexion dentro de la

—-. ,... l,~b[i;:{.iWl!3S Para /Ls!alaci6n

%g.ha

37

234”.=

#

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

4.

Gabinetes

DE OpERAci6N Y MANTENci6N TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

Multi funciones:

Los gabinetes multifunction deben ser instalados en una estructura estable, en una ubicacion central con respecto a Ios reguladores de presion en servicio, o por consideraciones de montaje de Ias tuberias. Dicho soporte puede ser una columns, un pasamanos, o un muro. Resulta mejor instalar Ios gabinetes en canales unistrut o canales B-Line soldados o apernados a la superficie de montaje. Las tuberias deben ser montadas en forma tal como para impedir esfuerzos mecanicos en el equipo

Q! a

PRV BOX

(CAJA PRV)

>

Instucciones

ES NECESAR/O PROPORCIONAR ACCESO EXPEDITO DURANTE LA OPERACION DE LA PLANTA.

Para Instalacion

Pdgina 38

AL GABltdETE MULTIFUNCTION

294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

DE

Cliente: Minera Escondida

Ltd.

5.

Ios Gabinetes

Tuberias

entre

opERACiON

Y MANTENCiON TRC No.: 296

Multi-Funcih

y los Gabinetes

PRV.

Las tuberias de aire entre Ios gabinetes Multi-funcion y Ios gabinetes conteniendo Ios reguladores de presion, son generalmente de fierro negro. Las tuberias de agua debieran ser de PVC, Bronce o Acero Inoxidable. En algunas aplicaciones donde la capacidad de agua y aire no es critics, se usa tuberia de nylon de Y.” OD y 3/8” OD, contenidos en flexible sealtite de 1”, 10que facilita la instalacion y la mantencion. La tuberia de agua debe ser aislada termicamente en zonas de congelamiento. El tamario de Ias tuberias aparece indicado en Ios diagramas de Tuberias e Instrumentation, en la seccion dibujos, de este manual. >

hstccciones

CUANDO SE USE FIERRO NEGRO PARA LAS TUBER/AS DE AGUA O A IRE, DEBE EJERCERSE EXTREMO CUIDADO PARA IMPEDIR WE PAR TICULAS METALICAS O SUCIEDAD, ENTREN EN EL SISTEMA. S1ASI OCURRIERA, DEBEN ESPERARSE AL GUNOS PROBLEMAS DURANTE LA PUESTA EN MA RCHA.

Pwa Instaiac;on

Pqfi”la

39

294c~MAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

6.

Gabinetes

DE

OPERACiON

MANTENCiON TRC No.: 296

Ltd.

de Contro/es

Y

Electricos.

Los gabinetes de controles electricos (HOA) deben ser montados 10mas cerca posible de! equipo que controlan, a fin de poder proporcionar un control local para efectos de arrancar/apagar el servicio. El arranque automatic del equipo es iniciado mediante contactos remotos (per otros) conectados a estos conjuntos modulares, Los gabinetes deben ser montados en una superficie solids y estable, con acceso expedito para servicio y operation.

I

Sisterna Aglotnerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Minera Escondida

7. Conjunto

DE

Y MANTENcioN

OpErwcioN

Ltd.

Modular

TRC No.: 296

Filtro

Primario

AirelAgua:

1,

Asegurar el marco de la base a la cimentacion, para Ios pernos de anclaje suministrados.

2.

Conectar Ias tuberias de aire y agua en Ias entradas correspondientes.

3,

Las tuberias deben instalarse en forma tal como para impedir transmission de esfuerzos mecanicos a Ios equipos de este modulo. Con el objeto de minimizar perdidas de presion en Ias tuberias, debe usarse un diametro de tuberia apropiado para la instalacion, y usar el menor posible numero de codos o curvas.

4.

Conectar Ios circuitos electricos al gabinete de Ios solenoids. Referirse a Ios diagramas electricos para este modulo filtrante en la seccion pianos, para mas detalles. -

usando para tal efecto, Ias perforaciones

(F$T

FILTER TRO DE AIRE

/ =?!%/ v

SHUT OFF VALVE VAL VU-A DE CIERRE PRESSURE INL?ICADOR

.

k

GAUGE DE PRESION

/’:A?%&

/J!ll

lb&”

DRENAJE

(’ J -2

I Ii

lea

““”\.

J .b

- ,In.stucciones Fara Instalacion

1 Pdgina 41

.—. 294 ASEGURARSE DE QUE LAS VA LVULAS DEL REGULADOR DE PRESl~N DE AGUA UBICADO DENTRO DE LAS CAJA MULTI ES TEN COMPLETAMENTE CERRADAS E INDIQUEN UNA PRESl~N DE O PSIG (O KPA).

l%w~dimientos

De Operacidn

Pdgina 45

294CSMAN

‘%

““

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Cliente: Compania

Y MANTENCiON TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

ELECTRICAL ~\CONNECTOR ‘

H

] PSL 5-1

:,

AIRhVATER OUTLE1 1. OIA CONDUIT (SEE NOTE NO 5)

II

\

:,

PI 5-2

L l!l

4.

En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch de potencia HS-300 en position ON. La Iuz piloto debiera encenderse. Caso contrario, revisar Ios interruptores. Girar e! switch selector HS-501 a la posici6n “HAND”. Las valvulas solenoids FV 5-1, FV 5-2, y FV 5-3, dentro del gabinete MULTI-5 debieran estar energizadas.

5.

Inspeccionar

6,

Verificar el indicador de presion de aire de suministro sobre 80 PSIG (550 Kpa),

7.

Verificar el indicador de presion de agua PI 5-3 & PI 5-4, para asegurarse sobre 40 PSIG (300 Kpa).

8.

Calibrar el interlock del switch de presion de aire PSL 5-1 a 60 PSIG (420 Kpa). Normalmente, dicho switch viene pre-calibrado por TRC,

9.

En el gabinetePRV-1, abrir Ias v~lvulas de aislacidn del aire y agua de entrada. Ajustar Ias valvulas reguladoras sire/agua PCV 2-1, PCV 2-2, y PCV 2-3 para maxima presion. Agua: 25 psig (172 Kpa), aire: 70 psig (480 Kpa) (Puesta en marcha initial solamente). Abrir Ientamente Ias valvulas del regulador de agua. No exceder el rango de presion del instrument indicador de presion. Abrir todas Ias valvulas de cierre de Ias toberas. Permitir flujos de aire y agua por espacio de 5 minutes.

todo el sistema por fugas de aire o agua. PI 5-1, y asegurarse

10. En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch selector HS-501 a la position 11. En Ios conjuntos de toberas, instalar Ias toberas en sus respectivos

que la presion este

que la presion este

“OFF”.

soportes.

12. En e! gabinete electrico, girar el switch selector HS-501 a la posicidn “HAND”. ~-[o.wdimiefrtos

De Operacidn

P4gina 46

294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Pohos MANUA1 DE I Cliente: Compania

OpEr?AcioN

Y MANmNcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No.: 294C

f=~——~’–-=--—=-=

‘~-’”~

I

NOZZLE ISOLATION VALVE [AIR)

NOZZLE ISOLATION VALVE (WATER)

13. Ajustar el regulador de presion de aire PCV 2-1 a 70 PSIG (480 Kpa). Ajustar el regulador de presion de agua PCV 2-2 y PCV 2-3 entre 5-15 PSIG (35-100 Kpa). 14, Revisar todas Ias toberas para verificar que esten rociando adecuadamente. Ajustar Ios reguladores de presion de aire y agua a valores determinados por la inspection visual del sistema. En general, la presion del agua estara dentro de un rango de 1 a 10 PSIG (10-70 Kpa); y la presion del aire, entre 60-70 PSIG (400-480 Kpa). 15. Despues de haber ubicado todas Ias toberas en su sitio, girar el switch selector HS-501 a la position “OFF”. Abrir el gabinete de control para calibar el relay de tiempo de purga KD1, como se indica: a.

Colocar el relay de tiempo KD1 en modalidad “D”, para 5 a 8 minutes

b.

Girar el switch selector HS-501 ala position

“AUTO”.

d.

Cerrar el contacto permisivo remoto. Confirms que el sistema ADS arranca y que Ias toberas empiezan a nebulizar antes que el material Ilegue a cada punto. Si existiese retardo en e! nebulizado, adjustar el proceso de operacibn remoto, a fin de permitir tiempo suficiente para iniciar el atomizado antes de empezar la alimentacion del material.

d.

Girar el switch selector HS-501 a la position “OFF”. Medir y tomar nota del tiempo que se necesita para purgar e! agua de Ias toberas y de Ias cafierias, y ajustar el relay de tiempo KD1 en forma correspondiente. Anotarlo en la cubierta pl~stica del relay.

El gabinete MULTI-5 esta Iisto para funcionar. > ~ mwdimi.entos

REPET!R

EL MISMO PROCEDIMIENTO

De 0peraci6n

CON TODOS EL GABINETE

P4gina 47

MULTI-6. ~94csMA\V

I

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN Cliente: Compania

Y MANTENcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Procedimiento de Puesta aplicacion). Asegurarse

en Martha:

TRC No.: 294C

(Tipico

para todos

Ios puntos

que todas Ias toberas esten instaladas, antes de proceder.

1.

Abrir todas Ias valvulas de bloqueo de entrada/salida

2.

En el tablero de control electrico, girar el selector HOA a la position

3.

El sistema ADS estaria Iisto para trabajar.

Procedimiento

de

Diario

de Calibration/

dentro delos gabinetes

MULTI y PRV.

“AUTO”.

lnspeccion.

1,

Inspeccionar una vez al dia cada tobera en operation para verificar su espectro apropiado de rocio. Si alguna de ellas no estuviese operando correctamente, removerla y reemplazarla con, una tobera de repuesto,

2,

Un observation visual de la eficiencia del control de Ios polvos debiera Ilevarse a efecto varias veces al dia. Si se observasen emisiones excesivas, se deberia anotar de inmediato en la bitacora, con su posible causa, Si Ios delantales de protection estan gastados, debieran ser reemplazados 10mas pronto posible. Si existiesen puertas a medio cerrar o no totalmente apernadas, debieran ser cerradas y aseguradas de inmediato. Si aparecieran agujeros ocasionados por desgaste, debieran ser reparados en la proxima parada por mantencion. Si nada de 10anterior muestra problemas, se deberia proceder a recalibrar Ios reguladores de presion a fin de aumentar o disminuir la relation agua/sire. Si esto aun no solucionase et problems, inspeccionar cada tobera para asegurarse de que esten funcionando apropiadamente. Si ninguna falla obvia es Iocalizada, Ilamar a The Raring Corporation.

3.

Revisar el nivel de aceite de Ios compresores, presion diferencial en el filtro, la temperature presion del aire de descarga, y la presion diferencial en el separador de aceite.

y la

.. t%cecfinkwtos

De 0peraci6n

Ptigina 48

294csMAN

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE OpErzAcioN Y MANwNcioN TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

MANTENCiON / PARLMETROS DE OPERACiON 1.

h’ltroduccion:

El factor contribuyente mas importance en Ias fallas del sistema ADS, 10constitute la falta de mantencidn. La operation del sistema ADS va a desarrollar su propio programa y frecuencia de mantencion. Este programa es generalmernte determinado por la calidad del agua y del sire; y tambien por la composition de Ios materials que estan siendo manejados. Si la calidad del aire y del agua es pobre, fallas en Ias toberas y en Ias valvulas seran comunes. Para asegurar una operation continua y adecuada de sistema ADS, se requiere de una mantencion rutinaria establecida. Ademas de Ias cubiertas y delantales de protection, Ios components que pueden requerir reparation o reemplazo, son: ●

Toberas

●

Soportes de Ias toberas

●

Tuberias

●

Reguladores

s

Valvulas Solenoids

●

Filtros de Aire y Agua

●

Instruments

indicadores

●

Compresores

y Tanques Acumuladores

de conexion de Ias toberas de Presion

de Aire

Deberia mantenerse un stock de repuesto para todos y cada uno de estos components. continuation Ios procedimientos de mantencion:

2.

Siguen a

Toberas Si una tobera no estuviese rociando perfectamente, debiera ser puesta fuera de servicio en forma inmediata, cerrando Ias valvulas de desconexion ubicadas dentro de Ios gabinetes PRV. Idealmente, debieran mantenerse a la mane, en todo memento, toberas nuevas o reparadas, de modo que se pueda proceder al cambio inmediato de la tobera defectuosa. Las toberas defectuosas debieran ser Ilevadas a un lugar Iimpio y proceder a su reparation cuando sea mas convenience. Existen cuatro components que requieren de reemplazo ocasional debido a desgaste o abuso del mismo. Ellos son el resonador, el orificio, y Ias dos empaquetaduras anulares “O”. La carcaza, el vastago, y el adaptador no debieran requerir reemplazo (salvo perdida o maltrato) pero deberian ser Iimpiados antes de proceder a re-armar.

-—!.

!Wmkmcion / Parametms

De O,oeracion

Pdgina 49

294csI!:~~iW

.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE Cliente: Compania

OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENCiON

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC

No.:

294C

~$ $$ @‘“ p? @) Po +9 (Pd~

9‘,

NOZ4DPT2

tWZAE

Mantencion / Farametros

De Operation

Pdgina 50

294csA4.4N

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

OpErwcioN

Y MANTENcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Desarmado

TRC No.: 294C

de la Tobera

Desatornillar et sub-conjunto tobera del adaptador. Usar una Ilave de dado de 12 puntos, 5/8”, para evitar daiiar el resonador. Cualquier posterior desarme debiera hacerse en area Iimpia de trabajo Para remover el resonador reemplazable, deslizar la punta de una navaja Ias piernas y aflojarlo cuidadosamente. No trate de sacar la pierna de su de la navaja Ilegue a la seccion inferior curva del alambre. En ese punto, de su alojamiento, Repetir este procedimiento con la segunda pierna, Si pierna se rompe en la carcaza, esta debe ser reemplazada.

pequeria debajo de una de ranura, antes que la hoja tirar la pierna y removerla la seccion curva de la

Para remover el orificio fuera del alojamiento, colocar la carcaza en un tornillo prensa. No apretar el tornillo. Con una Ilave ajustable o una Ilave de punta de 1/4”, desatornillar el vastago fuera de la carcaza. Golpear suavemente sobre el banco de trabajo, cabeza abajo, para aflojar y desalojar el orificio. Si este procedimiento no trabajase, usar un mandril piano y un martillo Iiviano.

Limpieza

de la Tobera.

Cualquier mugre o particula que haya encontrado su camino hasta la tobera, resultara obvia, excepto aquellas alojadas en Ios pasajes de Iiquido del orificio, Para Iimpiar estos, usar un alambre de diametro pequetio y baquetear dichos pasajes, Una herramienta para limpiar boquillas de soldadora, serviran igualmente para este proposito. Lavar todos Ios components y secar con un patio Iimpio.

Re-armado

de la Tobera.

El rearmado consiste en una repetition del proceso de desarme, pero a la inversa. Existen sin embargo dos sutiles diferencias. Es importance que Ias piernas del resonador esten orientadas con su centro entre el mayor espacio entre pasajes de agua en el orificio, Al gunos orificios tienen una marca grabada en su cara frontal para indicar el alineamiento apropiado, pero otras no, El mejor procedimiento que hemos encontrado, consiste en insertar el orificio en la carcaza y rotarlo a su position corrects ya sea usando un clip para papeles, o la punta de un instrument afilado, y Iuego aplicar suficiente fuetza con un tornillo prensa, para forzarlo en position, Atornillar et vastago y apretarlo suavemente, procurando no apretar demasiado, Verificar nuevamente la orientation. La instalacion de Ios nuevos resonadores tambien tiene ranuras y perforaciones en la carcaza esten totalmente ranuras, cogiendolo por la parte aguda de modo que se Ias respectivas perforaciones. Ambas piernas deberian tiempo. Normalmente van a resortear en su Iugar, pero cada Iado, para plenamente insertarse en posicidn.

sus mafias, Primero, asegurarse que Ias Iimpias. Deslizar un nuevo resonador en Ias vaya abriendo a medida que se aproxima a alcanzar Ias perforaraciones al mismo pueden necesitar de un pequetio golpe a

Cada vez que una tobera sea Iimpiada y provista de sus respectivos empaquetaduras anulares ‘lO” deben ser reempladas.

kkntencion

/ Pararnekos

De Operation

Pdgina 51

repuestos, ambas

,. —.. 2$’f~,5A,l.A:.\

.—. —.

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

Y MANTENcioN

OpERAcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No.: 294C

/ NZM2ASSY

Cojunto

Soporte

Articulado

NZM3ASSY

TIJL7ERIA DE 2 1/2-. CORTAR AL ANGOLO ESPECIF/CADO Y SOLDAR A LA CUBER TA, DEJANDO UNA PERFOR430N.

Soporte

Man[encion /Parametros

De Operation

Modular

Soldada

F%gina 52

—294CSMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

4. Soportes

DE

OPERACiON

Y MANTENCiON

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC

No.:

294C

de Ias Toberas

Se indican a continuation

Desmontaje

Ios tipos de soportes para toberas que se usan en la Planta de molinos

del soporte

de la tobera-

para acceso

a la Tobera.

Los soportes de montaje de Ias toberas han sido disefiados para permitir facil acceso a la tobera, con fines de servicio, generalmente, con la planta en operation. Aflojando el tornillo de fijacion (8), et conjunto tubular puede ser removido tirandolo fuera del tubo guia (9) y girado a una position convenience para inspection y servicio. Las valvulas de aislacion de la tobera, ubicadas en la caja PRV debieran ser cerradas, 12 puntas, 5/8” puede ser usado para remover la tobera, si fuese necesario

Wmkncion

1

Conjunto Tobera

a

Tornillo de Fijacion

2

Tubo Adaptador

9

Tubo Guia

3

Conector Tuberia del Aire

10

Conector de tubo Flexible

4

Conector Tuberia del Agua

11

Tubo Flexible Sealtite

5

Tubo Protector

6

I Tornillo de retention

7

Copla reductora

/ Paramefros

De Operacioti

12 13

-a

Un dado de

Tuberia del Aire I Tuberia

53

del Agua

29,4z~MAN

“

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

OpERAcioN

Y MANTENcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

1

Conjunto Tobera

2

Tubo Adaptador

TRC No.: 294C

10 11

Tubo Flexible Sealtite

Conector Tubo Flexible

3

Conector

Tuberia

del Aire

12

Tuberia

del Aire

4

Conector

Tuberia

del Agua

13

Tuberia

del Agua

5

Tubo de Proteccibn

14

6

Tornillo de sujecion

15

Escuadra de montaje Pemo de Montaje de 5/8”

7

Copla

16

Tuerca

8

Tornillo

17

Canaleta

9

Tubo

A4ahnc+cw I Parametros

Reductora de Sujecion

B-Line B-Line

guia

De Operation

P4gina 54

294csM4N

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

OpErzAcioN

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Desmontaje

del soporte

de la Tobera - para inspection

interna y servicio.

Ocasionalmente existe la necesidad de ganar acceso al interior del soporte de la tobera, ya sea para reparar o reemplazar Ias tuberias, o el adaptador. En dicho case, remover el conjunto, segun se indica en 2,1. Remover la tobera (1), Remover el tornillo de sujecion (6) en el tubo de protection (5) (tuberia de 2“), Golpear suavemente el extremo del tubo de protection en una superficie dura con el objeto de forzar el adaptador (2) fuera del tube. Desatornillar el tubo de protection (5) de la copla reductora (7). Remover Ias tuberias de aire y agua (12&13) de sus respectivos conectores (3&4) mediante la aplicacion de presion en Ias ferulas de Ios conectores (3&4), al mismo tiempo que se tira et tube.

5. Rearrnado

del Soporte

de la tobera.

Una vez que se haya procedido a corregir cualquier problems existente y/o reemplazado proceder a rearmar el conjunto tobera, segun se indica a continuation:

partes,

1. Asegurarse de dejar 9“ adicionales expuestas del alambre malefactor, y de que no existen tortes en la aislacion, y que el extremo terminal sea debidamente aisldo, Doblar el alarmbre malefactor y reinsertar el extremo aislado dentro de la misma tuberia electrica de alimentacion. Usar huincha de encogimiento termico o cinta aisladora, para aislar el extremo del alambre malefactor.

Matt[enuon

2.

Usar meterial termico aislante para catierias tipo Armaflex, para aislar la tuberia flexible electrica. La aislacion viene en tramos de 6 pies de Iargo. El Iargo total de la aislacion debe ser igual al Iargo del conducto electrico. Usar pegamento Armaflex para unir todas Ias junturas de la aislacion.

3.

Asegurarse que por 10 menos 3“ de la tuberia negra del aire (12) se proyecten mas alla de la copla reductora (11), cuando se empujen dichas tuberias en el conducto flexible (15). Proceder en forma similar con la tuberia del agua (13). Insertar Ias tuberias dentro de sus repectivos conectores (3&4). Algunas veces se requiere presion extra para conseguir un asiento adecuado de Ias tuberias en sus respectivos conectores, Abrir el aire y el agua para asegurarse de que no haya fugas.

4.

Atornillar el tubo protector de 2“ (5) a la copla reductora herramientas.

5.

Deslizar el tubo adaptador dentro de la tuberia protectors (5), Aplicar presion para fomar Ias tuberias de aire y agua de regreso dentro del conducto flexible (15) hasta que el adaptador quede insertado 1/8” del horde del tubo protector (5). Apretar el tornillo de sujecion (6) a fin de retener el adaptador en su position.

6.

Reinstalar

/ Parametros

(11) firmemente,

pero sin usar

la tobera y verificar la calidad del rociado, espectro y direccion.

De Operation

PAgina 55

294csfi~4N

—

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

OpEr?AcioN

Y MANTENci6N

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No,: 294C

,----

\.

\.

.-.

Mantencicm / Parametros

De Operation

PAgina 56

W4CE,I{A!J

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE

OpErwcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Y MANTENci6N TRC No,: 294C

6. Tuberhs de Conex~on de /as Toberas. Conexiones. Las conexiones neumaticas e hidraulicas entre Ias cajas reguladoras de presion y Ios conjuntos de toberas son Ilevadas a cabo mediante un conjunto flexible consistence de tuberia plastica de 1/4” OD para la conexion del agua, y una tuberia de plastico de 5/16” OD para la conexion del aire, alojadas dentro de un conducto flexible electrico tipo sealtite. Dichas interconexiones estan disefiadas para facilmente remover [as tuberias de la caja reguladora de presion, simplemente desconectando Ios conectores rapidos respectivos en Ios cabezales de distribution de aire y agua, y desatornillando el conector del conducto flexible en el costado de la caja de regulation. Asegurarse que Ias valvulas respectivas de aire y agua esten cerradas, antes de proceder a desconectar Ias tuberias. En el supuesto que el conjunto de tuberias este dafiado, la forma mas facil de reparation consiste en el reemplazo total de dicho conjunto. No se recomienda tratar de parchar Ias tuberias contenidas dentro del conducto flexible. Se recomienda asimismo mantener inventario de repuesto en bodega, a fin de poder fabricar nuevos tramos de dichos conjuntos flexibles

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

DE OpmAcioN

MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

Y MANTENCiON

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No.: 294C

—

PANEL NUT (TUERCA

DE RETENCION)

(0)

--

PLASTIC

BONNET

(BONETE PLASTICO)

-..

ION) REGULATING

SPRING

(RECORTE DE REGULATION)

O -— @

----

SLIP RING

(ARANDEM)

~

DIAPHRAM

(DIAFRAGMA)

(DIAF.%lGMA)

DIAPHGRAM

p -.. @

●

VALVE SEAT ASSEMBLY (AS:EN

TO DE LA VAL VULA)

(CUERPO) SEAL

&5-

BODY

(SELLO)

VALVE

9-

(VALVLJ4

VALVE SPRING

*.

(RESORTE)

~

o—

O-RING (EMPAQUE

i

---

TADURA -O)

PORTED REGULATOR* (APERTURA

REGULADORA)

@

R43-/SO

Valvula Ma f:tencbn

Reguladora

/ Parametros

de Agua R06

De Operation

Viilvula Pt4gina 58

Reguladora

de Agua R43 294csMAN

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

DE

OpEr?AcioN

Y MANTENcioN

Cliente: ComDania Minera Dona De Collahuasi

7. Regu/acfores

TRC No.: 294C

de Presion.

Los reguladores de presion del agua y del aire deben ser mantenidos en buenas condiciones de operation para permitir el grado de control requerido y asi evitar humectacion del producto, y tambien mantener la calidad de atomization requerida para controlar Ias emisiones de polvos. Las setiales que indican que un regulador requiere servicio, son:

Como

●

El regulador no permite regresar a su punto de cero presion

●

El regulador no abre 10suficiente para alcanzar un valor de presion alto.

●

Existe aire soplando por la ventila de soplado, en la parte superior del regulador. reguladores de presion de aire solamente).

Mantener

(en Ios

Ios Reguladores.

Cerrrar la valvula de aislacion del regulador a ser mantenido. Remover la tapa inferior del regulador (la que debiera estar apretada con presion manual solamente). Retirar el v~stago de la valvula y Iimpiar el asiento. Volver a colocar ambos, en su lugar. Remover el bonete superior del regulador que permite acceso al diafragma. Remover e inspeccionar el diafragma para asegurarse de que no tenga agujeros. Devolver el diafragma a su Iugar, cuidando de que selle apropiadamente cuando se coloque de regreso el bonete. Abrir Ias valvulas de bloqueo del aire y del agua, y proceder a recalibrar Ios reguladores,

Cuando

Reemplazar

Ios Reguladores.

Proceder a reemplazar Ios reguladores Ios problemas de operation,

Perdidas

cuando la simple solution

sugerida mas arribal no resuelva

(Fugas).

El regulador de agua puede gotear si la empaquetadura anular “O”, en la tapa inferior del cuerpo, esta dafiada. Debiera mantenerse un stock adecuado de dichas empaquetaduras, y proceder a cambiarlas cuando quiera sea necesario. >

PARA MAS DE TALLESJ REFERIRSE

AL MANUAL DE OPERA Clones,

EN SU SECCl~N

5.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE OpERAcioN

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

i ADJUSTMENT PERILLA

~

KNOB

BONNET &.

/./ .

DE AJLLS TE)

—–

(BONE,,)

BONNET

SCREW

(70RNILL0

DEL

BONETE)

BONNET

—

SCREW (TORN/LL BONETE)

O DE

9 —

a a

*

WASHER

~ +i

(A~NDELA)

~%i’;;H~TE)

.

CENTER POST (POSTE CENTRAL)

.—---

‘1

-& ! o e .

. . . . . REGULATING (RESORTE

DEFLECTOR (OEFLECTOR)

FILTER

(EL EMENTO

SPRING

FIL TRANTE)

8

DE REGuLATION)

@i

0

-:~~f$)

SPRING (RESOR TE REGUblCION)

e,

l!!il-

,/

+ ,4’

@

@

e

@

@

B

R084S0

e

.

&--

0

(RESORTE)

SPRING

“

.—

O.RING

“

ASSEMBLY

(MODULO DE AUTO-ORENATE)

(EMPAQUE

VALVE BOD (CUERPO)

o~~~lofl FL @ TADURA -0)

BOTTOM

PLUG

(TAPON

INFERIOR)

e hd t.. .

NJTO.IJWIN

O-RING “

~~~~

---

“,

(VAL VULA)

VALVE “

VALVE

. Iiii!l

OIAPHRAM (0/AFRAGMf

,.’-” 0

(KITS DE REPARATION)

.—

+ I

m

e.:

(“) REPAIR KIT

n

—BAFFLE OEFLECTOR

REGULATING

ol~ @ Jo) ,f& fL” (0 # (VAL VULA) —

VALVE

“

A

&

VALVE SPRING

“

(RESORTE~/

O-RING “ (EMPAROUE TADURA -O)

Valvula

Reguladora Aire R08

Mantencion / Parametros

METAL BOWL (RECIPIENCE METAL ICO)

ON

de

De Operation

—

\,//

Valvula

./” ~~~~RK,T (KITS OE REPARATION)

ReguIadora/Filtro

Ptlgina 60

90

—

NUT (TUERCA)

de Aire

B08

294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

Man!encinn

DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANIENcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

/ Parametros

De Operation

TRC No.: 294C

F%gina 61

2?4csMA. N

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 (_!Iiente” Comoania

Minera

OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN

DE

TRC No.: 294C

Dona De Collahuasi

CAP Q--”-”---~

(GORRO)

--

TOP

(GORRO)

PLATE

TOP PLATE

TAPA SUPERIOR)

D8-”

TAPA SUPERIOR)

23

COIL

COIL

(BOBINA)

(BOBINA)

—— 8 &SPRING WASHER (ARANDELA PRESION)

SPRING WASHER

DE

(ARANDELA

DE

PRESION)

BONNET SCREW

TORNILL O DEL BONETE)

0

o

BONNET SCREW

SOLENOID BASE

...—— —— !!!!/ TORNILLO

(BASE DEL

o

x

SOL ENOIDE)

@- .

(RESORTE DEL DIAFRAGMA)

DEL BONETE)

SOLENOID BASE (BASE

DEL

SOL ENOIDE)

DIAPHRAM SPRING

DIAPHRAM SPRING

(RESORTE

ft.

DEL

DIAFRAGMA)

CORE ASSEMBLY (NUCLED)

CORE ASSEMBLY

0

0.

(NUCLED)

DIAPHRAM (DIAFRAGMA)

+

o

0

l—

o (EMPAQUE

‘-

0.

DIAPHRAM

TADURA)

GASKET

(DIAFRAGMA)

+

,~

0

o

GASKET - (EMPAQUE

1“

VALVE BODY (CUERPO DE LA VAL VULA)

/v

TADURA)

A

./ VALVE BODY (CUERPO

DE LA

VAL VULA) 1s0

Valvula

Wmtencion

Solenoide

/ Parametros

de Aire

De Operation

& Agua

Valvula

P4gina 62

Solenoide

de Purga

294csMAIV

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

8. Valvulas

DE

OpERAcioN

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 294C

So/enoides.

En el supuesto que una valvula solenoide falle, sea porque su bobina se quemo o por dafios en el vastago, la solucidn mas simple y adecuada consiste en reemplazarla con una nueva, Generalmente, dicha operation puede ser Ilevada a cabo sin tener que remover el cuerpo de la valvula de la tuberia. Simplemente remover Ios cuatro tornillos de sujecion que conectan la parte superior de la valvula, al cuerpo principal, e instalar una mitad superior nueva, El costo de Ios kits de repuesto no justifica el reemplazo de partes individuals. >

PARA MA YORES DETALLES, OPERA Clones.

REFERIRSE

A LA SECC16N 5 DEL MANUAL DE

I

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

f!? —

FILTER NUT

fluERC4

DE

RETENC/ONJf@

SEAL RING—

@

#f fjti @ @ b

@@’

./05’

— .% 0’

OpEr’tAcioN Y kh-wENci6N

DE

FILTER CANISTER HEAD (C4BE2AL

DEL FIL TRO)

@

Z!jj) \/— -_

TADURA -O)

FILTER CARTRIDGE

_

v

FILTER CARTRIDGE iELEMENTO

POST

fIL TRANTEJ

(POSTE CENTRAL)

a

II

—

L--’J

\ m !

Q“

FILTER

ELEMENT

●

(EL EMNETO FIL TRANTE)

o

I

–BAFFLE (DEFLECTOR)

.-AU TO-DRAIN ASSEMBLY

(MODULO DE AUTO-DRENAJE)

FILTER CANISTER (CUEI?PO DEL FIL TROJ

– METAL BOWL (RECIPIENCE METALICO)

WF/L ./S0

DRAIN VALVE @’ALVUL.4 DE DRENAJE)

F74-ISO ~) REPAIR KITS (KITS DE REPARATION)

@

Conjunto

Mantencion / Parametros

Filtro

Conjunto

de Agua

De Operation

—

Pdgina 64

NUT (TUERCA)

Filtro

de Aire

294CSMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

9. Filtros

DE

OpERAcioN

Y MANTENcioN TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

de Aire y Agua. Los conjuntos modulares de filtros de agua necesitan de mantencion periodica en una base regular. El cartucho filtrante deberia ser reemplazado mensualmente, por 10 menos, para impedir una perdida de eficiencia en el sistema de control de POIVOS. El reemplazo del cartucho se Ileva a efecto, mediante la remocion de Ios tornillos que aseguran la parte superior del conjunto, previo cierre de Ias valvulas de aislacion correspondientes, procediendo a remover el elemento filtrante, procurando un minimo de derrame de agua. Colocar un nuevo cartucho y proceder a rearmar el conjunto. Atin cuando e! filtro de aire viene suministrado con una option de drenado, el elemento aire necesita ser cambiado, una vez que se sature con contaminants.

10. Instruments

filtrante de

Indicadores.

Los instruments indicadores suministrados con el sistema de supresion de POIVOS,vienen todos Ilenos con glicerina y con ranges apropiados a su aplicacion. Cada vez que alguno resulte dariado, debiera ser reemplazado por uno de igual rango, del stock de repuestos. No se recomienda el uso de instruments sin Iiquido interno, o instruments de calidad inferior, como reemplazos.

71. Compresores

y Tanques

de Aire.

Los manuales de mantencion y operation de Ios compresores, se encuentran en la seccion equipos, de este manual. Referirse a dichos manuales, para Ias correspondientes instrucciones de operacidn y mantencion.

12. Procedimientos

diaries

de Inspection.

1.

Una vez cada dia, cada tobera debe ser visualmente inspeccionada, para verificar el espectro apropiado de rociado. Si la tobera no estuviera funcionando correctamente, debiera ser removida y reemplazada con una de repuesto.

2.

Una observation visual de la eficiencia del sistema de control de polvos, debiera ser Ilevada a cabo varias veces al dia. Si se observasen demasiadas emisiones, su causa debiera ser inmediatamente determinada y registrada en el bitacora. Si Ios delantales estan gastados, deberian ser reemplazados tan pronto fuese posible. Si se encuentran puertas o escotillas, a medio cerrar o desapernadas, proceder a cerrarlas y asegurarlas de inmediato. Si se notasen agujeros de desgaste, ellos deberia ser reparados en el proximo paro de la planta. Si nada de 10anterior constitute una causa obvia de falla, proceder a reajustar Ios reguladores de presion de aire y agua, aumentando o disminuyendo sus respectivos flujos. Si esto no solucionase e! problems, inspeccionar nuevamente, cada tobera del area para asegurarse una vez mas que esten operando correctamente. Si no se pudiese encontrar la causa aparente, Ilamar a The Raring Corporation.

3,

Revisar Ios compresores de aire, vigilando su nivel de aceite, presion diferencial en el filtro, temperature y presion del aire de descarga, y presion diferencial en el separador de aceite.

>

S1 LA CONDICION DEL AGUA ES MUY MALA, CAMBIAR LOS ELEMENTOS TAN A MENUDO COMO SEA POSIBIE.

,-. .—. — hfs.~!encion / Pararnetros

De Clpe:xion

... .....-— Pdgin3 65

FILTRATES

294csMAN

-

.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 I Cliente: Compania

DE

OPERACiON

Y MANTENciON TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

!NVESTi~ACiON dE FA1lAS Verificar

iintomas a tobera no esta rociando

Electrica: Verificar que el sistema este energizado, que el switch selector este en Manual o en Auto; que Ias valvulas solenoids esten energizadas

●

●

Que haya presion de aire y agua.

c

Que Ias valvulas de cierre esten abiertas. Que Ias Valvulas Reguladoras regulando,

●

.a Tobera no estd rociando orrectamente

●

Resonador

●

El orificio esta tapado.

●

Valvulas solenoids

●

●

3 Sistema no Opera

~westg~cion

De Fallas

esten abiertas y

de la tobera, gastado o daiiado.

Los reguladores reemplazo,

dariadas.

de Aire o Agua necesitan Iimpieza o

Los elementos filtrates en Ios filtros de Agua o Aire estan saturados. (Reemplazar Ios cartuchos).

●

Empaquetadura datiada.

●

El adaptador reemplazo.

●

Las tuberias de agua o aire estan obstruidas..

●

Electrico: Verificar que haya energia electrica, que Ios interruptores esten cerrados, que Ios switches selectors esten en position Manual o en Auto, que Ias valvulas solenoids esten energizadas,

.

El aire comprimido en el sistema no tiene la presion sufciente para activar el switch detector de presion. (60 P.SIG, por 10menos).

●

Existe la suficiente presion de aire en el sistema, pero @ste no funciona

por Causa Probable

anular “O” en el Vastago esta

de la tobera necesita Iimpieza o

El switch de presidn de aire esta dafiado o no esta calibrado adecuadamente. Asegurarse que el conductor rojo (contacto normalmente abierto) este conectado en el terminal apropiado.

.

El contacto permisivo remoto esta dafiado o no esta funcionando adecuadamente,

●

Relays de control o switches selectors

●

daiiados,

Electrico: Verificar que haya energia electrica, que Ios interruptores esten cerrados,. que Ios switches selectors est~n en posicidn Manual o Auto, que Ias v~lvulas solenoids est~n energizadas

P@ina 67

2WCSM.4N

I

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Comr)ania

DE

OpEr?Aciofv Y MANTENCiON TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Verificar

,intomas

Revisar el alambrado electrico para asegurarse esta conectado a Ios terminals asignados.

●

El switch de presion esta defectuoso calibrado correctamente.

●

El permisivo funcionando

.

Valvulas

●

Relay de control, defectuoso.

●

La Valvula solenoide de aire no sells completamente, debido a suciedad en la valvula o diafragma dariado.

●

El tiempo de purga en el relay de tiempo, ubicado en el gabinete HOA ha sido modificado, o esta en una calibration incorrect.

Uperiodo de purga no se desconecta

no funciona 9

●

●

~o

●

Existe airefiltrbndose

Humedad excesiva transportadoras.

Investgacidn

De Fallas

de presibn no baJ“a

en la Ihea de agua.

en

Ias

corre as

solenoids

o no esta

o sus bobinas,

La temperature 400 F.

datiadas.

exterior ambiente no esta bajo Ios

El switch de temperature erroneamente ajustado.

●

indicador

remoto esta dafiado correctamente.

Electrico: Asegurarse de que haya energia electrica, y que el interruptor este cerrado.

●

El instrument a cero.

o no ha sido

●

I sistemu nose apagu

Las Vcilvulas regliladoras de Agua o Aire estcin operando correctamente.

que

El filtro de aire en la caja MULTI (o COMBO) esta tapado, No hay presion suficiente para activar el switch de presion.

●

2 sis(ema de calefacci6n

por Causa Probable

●

esta dafiado o

El relay del malefactor en el gabinete HOA esta dafiado o funcionando incorrectamente. Contaminantes reparar.

en el cuerpo de la valvula.

Regulador dafiado.

Limpiar y

Reparar o reemplazar.

Aire o agua entremezcl~ndose en Ias tuberias, debido a orificios tapados en Ias toberas.

●

Instrument

.

Orificios tapados en Ias toberas.

●

Empaquetadura

●

Valvula check dariada en et adaptador de la tobera.

s

Demasiadas

.

Resonador de la tobera desgastado

.

Insuficiente presion de aire.

●

Excesiva presion de agua.

●

El sistema es activado antes que el material empiece P~gina 68

indicador datiado.

anular “O” dafiada.

toberas para el volumen a controlar. o dariado.

294csM.4N

““

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN Cliente: Compania

Y MANwvciofv TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

Sintomas

Verificar

por Causa Probable

a ser procesado, ●

. El Sistema ADS no eski abatiendo el po[vo en forma efectiva. ●

●

Tipo de tobera inadecuado, Delantales y sellos en Ias correas y cubiertas de contention no estan siendo mantenidos en forma apropiada. Los voltimenes de contention 10suficientemente grandes, Insuficiente

de Ias correas no son

numero de toberas.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

lista de partes

23.01.98

4.5.4

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

LisTA

DE OPEt7ACiON

Y MANTENCiON TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

dE PARTES Conjunto

Modular

de Toberas ADS:

FP2S3V

100002

FP-2S3V, Conjunto de Toberas, con Vastago de Bronce

101005

FP-1 Resonador, Acero Inoxidable

101501.2

FP-2S3V,

102003

Cabeza, Tobera, Bronce

102011

Vastago, Tobera, Bronce

104010

Empaque “O”, Sello del Vastago

104011

Empaque “O”, para alineacion

Conjunto

Modular

Orificio, Acero Inoxidable

de Toberas ADS:

FP5

100005.2

FP-5, Conjunto de Toberas, con Vastago de Bronce

101003

FP-5 Resonador, Acero Inoxidable

101503.2

FP-5, Orificio, Acero Inoxidable

102003

Cabeza, Tobera, Bronce

102011

Vastago, Tobera, Bronce

104010

Empaque “O”, Sello del Vastago

104011

Empaque “O”, para alineacion

Conjunto

Gabinete

Del MULTI-I, -2,-3, y -4

Multi-Funcion:

210034

Gabinete,

42x42x12”.

300063

Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2” NPT,

550001

Filtro de Agua, 1/2” NPT,

303005

Valvula Solenoide para Aire, 1 1/2” NPT, N. C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

303003

Valvula Solenoide para Aire, 1/2” NPT, N. C,, 110 VAC, 50 Hz.

303003

Valvula Solenoide para Agua, 1/2” NPT, N.C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

303013

Valvula Solenoide,

401001.2

Switch de Presion

200002

Indicador de Presion, O-100 PSIG

200003

Indicador de Presidn, 0-160 PSIG

210029

Caja de Empalmes E16ctricos.

301203

Valvula de Bela, 1/2” NPT.

1/2 NPT, N. O., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

..=.— Lists De Parks

FMgina 71

294csIMWJ

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

DE @) ERACiON Y MANTENCiON

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No,: 294C

300110

Regulador de Aire, 1/2” NPT.

300003

Regulador de Agua, 1/2” NPT.

301213

Valvula de Bela, 1/2”, Mazzer

301210.2

Valvula de Buje, 1/8” NPT

600003

Conector Macho, 1/2” MPTxl/2°

600014

Codo Macho, 1/2” MPTxl/2°

600017

Codo Macho, 1/2” MPTx3/8° OD, Conector tipo R~pido

210029

Caja de Empalmes

420002

Malefactor, 200W, 220VAC/50Hz

450004.3

Conector, Tuberia flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4” NPT

Conjunto

Gabinete

OD, Conector tipo Rapido

OD, Conector tipo Rapido

Electricos

Del MULTI-5 y 6

Multi-Funcion:

210007

Gabinete,

300107

Filtro de Aire, 1/2” NPT.

550001

Filtro de Agua, 1/2” NPT.

303003

Valvula Solenoide para Agua, 1/2” NPT, N, C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

303013

Valvula Solenoide,

401001,2

Switch de Presion

200002

Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG

200003

Indicador de Presion, 0-160 PSIG

210029

Caja de Empalmes

301203

Valvula de Bela, 1/2” NPT.

300110

Regulador de Aire, 1/2” NPT.

300003

Regulador de Agua, 1/2” NPT.

301213

Valvula de Bela, 1/2”, Mazzer

301210.2

Valvula de Buje, 1/8” NPT

600003

Conector Macho, 1/2” MPTxl/2°

600014

Codo Macho, 1/2” MPTxl/2°

600017

Codo Macho, 1/2” MPTx3/8° OD, Conector tipo RApido

210029

Caja de Empalmes E16ctricos

420002

Malefactor, 200W, 220VAC/50Hz

450004.3

Conector, Tuberia flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4” NPT

Conjunto

Gabinete

36x30x I 2“.

1/2” NPT, N.O., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

Electricos.

OD, Conector tipo Rdpido

PRV:

210025

Gabinete, 20x16x8”,

300107

Filtro de Aire/Regulador,

/ kfa De Parks

OD, Conector tipo R6pido

Nema 3R. 3/8” NPT. PAgina 72

294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERACiON Y MANTENCiON Cliente: Compania

TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

200011

Indicador de Presibn, 0-30 P.SIG.

200012

Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG.

210023

Caja de Empalmes

301210,2

V~lvula de Buje, 1/8” NPT.

300412

Valvula Check, 1/4” OD, en-lines.

300105

Regulador de Agua, 1/4” NPT.

600003

Conector Macho, 1/2” MPTxl/2°

OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600022

Conector Macho, 1/4” MPTxl/4°

OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600017

Codo Macho, 3/8” MPTx3/8° OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600018

Codo Macho, 3/8” MPTxl/2°

OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600022,2

Codo Macho, 1/4” MPTxl/4°

OD, Conector tipo R5pido.

600019

Codo Macho, 1/4” MPTxl/2°

OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600004

Codo Macho, 1/8” MPTx5/16° OD, Conector tipo Rapido.

600011

Codo Macho, 1/8” MPTxl/4°

420001

Malefactor, 30W, 220VAC/50Hz

450043

Conector para tubo flexible tipo Sealtite, 1“ MPT.

450004.1

Conector para tubo flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4” MPT.

Conjunto

Gabinete

Electricos

OD, Conector tipo R~pido,

HOA:

Gabinete,

Nema 4.

460100

Switch Selector de 3 Posiciones.

460100.5

Switch Selector de 2 Posiciones.

460002

Relay, DPDT, 220 VAC.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Com~ania

LisTAs

DE

OpERAcioN Y MANTENCiON

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

DE PARTESDE

TRC

No

294C

REpUESTO PARA PUESTA EN MARCHA Descripci6n

Parte No

Cantidad

Repuesto

Costo Unitario

en uso 100002,5

I

I

I

I Conjunto Tobera, FP5, Acero Inoxidable

I 120

I 12

I

$115.00

101503

Oritlcio, FP5, Acero Inoxidable

120

12

$26.50

101003

Resonador, FP5, Acero Inox, (Para tobera FP2S3V)

120

24

$22.75

100005.3

Conjunto Tobera, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable

32

6

$115.00

101501.2

Orificio, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable

32

6

$26.50

101005

Resonador,

32

8

$22.75

100358.3

Tobera, MH60 (tip)

o

0

$9.75

100357.1

Tobera, MH300 (tip)

o

0

S9.75

102004

I Tobera,

FP1, Acero Inox. (Para tobera FP2S3V)

Cabeza, Acero Inoxidable

!152

10

I

$35.00

102012

Tobera, Vastago, Acero Inoxidable

104010

Empaque “O”, Sello del Vastago

152

25

$0.24

104011

Empaque “O”, para Alineamiento

I 152

I 25

$0.36

550103

Cartucho Filtro, Agua, 10 Micrones

12

24

$7.38

300107.2

Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de Aire/Regulador,

4

1

$4.45

300060,2

Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1/2”, F74

300057.2

I Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2”, FI 8

152

318”

0

2

1

11

11

$19.80

$11.25 $35.00

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 Cliente: Compania

OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENCiON

DE

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

TRC No.: 294C

PARA UN ANO DE OPERACION

Descripci6n

Parte No

Repuestos

Cantidad en uso

Repuesto

Costo Unitario

para Mantencion

1 100005.2

Conjunto Tobera, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable

32

16

$115.00

1101501.2

Orificio, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable

32

32

$26.50

1 101005

Resonador,

32

96

1 100002.5

Conjunto Tobera, FP5, Acero Inox.

120

120

101503.2 1

orificio, FP5, Acero Inoxidable

120

120

$28.50

1 101003

Resonador,

120

360

$22.75

101002

Tobera, Cabeza, Acero Inox 303

152

30

$35.00

100357.1

Tobera Hidraulica,

MH60, 1GPM (tip)

o

0

$9.97

100358.1

Tobera Hidraulica,

MH300, 5GPM (tip)

o

0

$9,75

102012

Tobera, Vastago, Acero Inoxidable

152

30

104010

Empaque “O”, Sello del Vastago

152

200

$0.24

104011

Empaque “O”, para Alineamiento

152

200

$0.36

1 550103

Cartucho Filtro, Agua, 10 Micrones

12

300

$7.38

FPI, Acero Inox. (Para tobera FP2S3V)

FP5, Acero Inoxidable

$22.75 $115.00

$19.80

, 550102

Filter Gasket, water

12

48

300060.2

Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1/2”

2

1

$10.83

300063.2

Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2”, F18

4

1

$45.00

300107.2

Elemento

Filtrante para Filtro de AirelRegulador,

4

1

S4.45

318”

$5.75

Partes de Reemplazo 102020.2

Tobera, Adaptador,

401001.2 300105

152

20

Switch de Presion, dentro del Gabinete MULTI

12

2

$101.20

Regulador

8

2

$26.58

200011

Indicador de Presion, 0-30 PSIG

8

2

$26.63

200012

Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG

4

1

$26.63

200003

Indicador de Presion, 0-160 PSIG

18

3

$36.40

303020

Kits de Reparation NPT, N.C.

para Valvulas Solenoids,

112”

8

1

$64.00

303022

Kits de Reparation NPT, N.O.

para Valvulas Solenoids,

1/2”

4

1

$85.00

300107.1

Kits de Reparation B08, 3/8” NPT

para Filtro de Ake/Regulador,

4

1

$15.60

300107.3

Empaque “O” para el Filtro de Aire B08, 3/8”

4

1

$2,25

300063.3

Empaque “O” para el Filtro de Aire F18, 1 %“

4

1

$4.25 ---W. f 3

300060.4

Delrin, Para tipo Neblina

de Agua, 1/4” NPT, R06

I Empaque “O” para Filtro de Aire F74, 1/2”

Lists De Partes De Repuesto

P&Jina 76

12

$28.80

]1

294csMAbJ

—

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA\ Cliente: Compania

DE OpERAcioN Y

MANTENcioN

I

TRC No.: 294C

Minera Dona De Collahuasi

DiAQRAMAS y ESPECihCACiONES 294 C-1 OA

Diagrama De Tuberias

& Instrumentation

294 C-1 OB

Diagrama De Tuberias

& Instrumentation

294 C-1 OC

Diagrama De Tuberias & Instrumentation

294 C-IOD

Diagrama De Tuberias

294 C-20A1

Diagrama Esquematico

Electrico

294 C-20A2

Diagrama Esquematico

Electrico

294 C-20B1

Diagrama Esquematico

Electrico

294 C-20C

Diagrama Esquem~tico

Electrico

294C-20D

Diagrama Esquematico

Electrico

294 C-30A

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion,

MULTI-1

294 C-30B

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion,

MU LTI-2

294 C-30C

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcidn,

MU LTI-3

294 C-30D

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion,

MU LTI-4

294 C-30E

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcir5n, , MULTI-5

294 C-30F

Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion,

294C-40

Conjunto Modular para Filtraci6n Primaria del Agua

294C-41

Conjunto Modular para Filtration

294C-50

Distribution

294C-51

Conjunto Gabinete Regulador Presibn

294C-60

Connjunto

294C-61

Connjunto Soporte Modular Soldado de la Tobera

& Instrumentation

MULTI-6

Primaria del Agua

Box Assembly

Soporte Modular Soldado de la Tobera

BK53970-01 O V9A9P701 VI A9P701 V9A9P703 V9A9P702 V8A9P701 307 EAU815 204 EAU546 —. “Diagtamas y Especfkaciones

.——— .. .. . p@;,% ??

— 294(wWW

...

.9.7

—

I

1

I I

1(

I

m

c-i

I

,,

II

WZ2?7T--T-55H-55% ++---?

1

I

I

1

Y ,7

Y

I

(--.-FJ$=%-

I

I

I I I 1 I I I I I I L

— ——

-w-

A

11111111111

\,-~

-,-

a

_________!

Y I

I

,&x,+&i\j

+-?-XN-X

I’1lll’1l’I’1

1

~

I

I 1 I

1

~,-

I

II

II

II

I

----4-------J

II

)111

I

I I

v

-i —-+-—-+

--—

I I

I I

1 I

–g____– –__ JH-i-ELGg E 0

.

ti

c

LL

z

w

2

g

z

0

w t--

1

__—

1/

1

i

~.-r

1-

---

I

--!—=+~y~-

J ‘-7r--

%

I I

I

I

I

I

(

—

I

I

I

I

I

1

LX o

L&

z

6

J lx w z

L----

a’-

__~ /

v

s \

WI 0

I I

,

GENERAL I

HOA-4

NOTES:

ALL PIPING ANO FITTINGS FROM FILTER SKID TO MULTl BOX AsSEMBLY BY OTHERS.

120 VAC/50 nZ. CONTROL CIRCUIT

BE

2z0 VAC/50 Hz. - HEAT CIRCUIT

— ——— —

-—

,

T

~

3

I ‘ PAL

TEMP. SWITCH (RfMOTE MOUNTED)

.---_-J

I

~ _

I I

_

FP2 NOZZLES

f=-xl-

-a’

---; I

I

4. CONOUIT SUPPORT, B-LINE CHANNEL, ANO B-LINE PIPE CLAMP (OETAILS ‘1” & ’11) SUPPLIED BY TRC.

~REMOTE PERMISSIVE

I

MS

\’Jl” I !

I

1

I

AIR/WAER OUTLET FROM PRV BOX(ES) “0.0 ASSEMBLY TO NOZZLE MOUNT TO BE 5/16 NYLON AIR TUBING 1/4”0.0. NYLON wATER TuBING, & 3 WATTS/FT, HEAT TRAcE ~RE RUN INSIOE 3/4DIA. SEALTICHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE lNSuLAnoN (PROVIOEO BY TRC)

I

,@‘0’. ;_

.

..-

7’%’..,J-Lx-

T’fi? (8) PLC’S (sEE OWG 294 C-61)

I----II

, I I

J

1 +;

1/1” A

+x

r

I

l-__——————————J

r-

h-l I

6~1

i ROM DWG. :94C-1OA

BOX

PRV-3

U

PRESSURE REGULATOR BOX ASSEMBLY

I

(SEE

-1

DWG.

294 C-51)

CRUSHER

I

4

B

(BY OTHERS)

./ PAL

220v/50Hz 200W

\

02

JUNCTION

,.

@

I

I

I

BOX

TYPICAL) [ sEE DWG.

I

I

I

294C-1OB I/2”10

I

294 C–52)

\/

1/2”

X 5’LG HOSE

(BY OTHERS)

-F4-

I

“

I

+

PRV-4 BOX r--——————————1

I

1

I

I

I

._—

I

I

--

COARSE ORE CONVEYOR

#;-’&&?::. (sIE

DWG. 296-30f)

FP2 NOZZLES TW. (8) PLC’S (SEE DWC. 294C-61)

l-_———————————J PRESSURE REGULATOR BOX ASSEMBLY (SEE

DWG.

KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK cOLLAHUASl PROJECT PuRcHASE ORDER NO.: EQUIPMENT NO.:

294 C-51)

TAG NO.:

I“

n----n

“pE’N”LAT’ON\

OIA. SEALTICHT

,/’%1:‘“E

3/4.

II “pE’NsuLAnON\

DIA. SEALTIGHT ~

In”

CONOUIT

CONOUIT

The Raring J Corporation

TR(’ 1

s WATTS/FT. HFAT TRACE MRE

3 WATTS/FT,

WATER TuBE

~EAT TRhCE WRE ““””D,,A,L,,,,,

mB_~~~

““-””~~AILm:i:NEc

HNNEL

294C-61 B 294C-52

E==---l

624

— E&If!=’.

—.

—— -

.—

300667 fJ7/OIB

I

( I

I

1

I I I

I I

I

I

,r______

II

I 1

;

I

I I I I I

I

1

I

I I I I

I

I

I

I I

I I

I

I

I I

I I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

,

I

I

I

I I

I *_–—–-~

I

L.J______ I

I

I I

1-

)

II II

I

I

2-.YL ~––__

-J

n

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I

\

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

I

I I

I

1

I I

II

I

I

1

I

) I

d

—(3

/1

mm

-

1

m

1

m

I

L_J

ml--l

“u



1

1

h@

—-— r,!--l ,

>

:1 I

gl

I

g, Q’p: > El

::

l>, ~-



ANO

RELAY

.4,r R.udm r. (360) 892 ,,5,,

m m c-

BYTRc

KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PROJECT PuRCHASE OROER NO.: EQUIPMENT NO.:

I

“b

ELEMENTs

TAG

2POT

BOX.

PRV-’.

RELAY

LOW WATER

)

OIST-*,

4.

/.

CR6

01 e

–

PAL 401 ./ A

MULTI-FUNCICN

INSIOE

5.

LOW AIR ALARM

A .

IN510E

RELAY

402

PAL

14 AWG. MIN.

‘6) TERMINAL (.) E TERMINAL

3 I

WIRING

1. ALL DUMP

WALL

w

d.mmted

.It. o.t .r;tten

R.r,nq C,m Or3! !r. m svccKcoIIm d::: m

my

my

.c

..m WiZOtbn 01 1.:

z

ELECTRCIAL SCHEMATIC OIACRAM FOR DUST SUPPRESYON SYSTEM FOR SULFIDE TRUCK DUMP POCKET

CUSTOMER COMPANIA

MINERA DONA OE COLLAHUASI

-

DRAWN : Kuch CHSCK

~KU(W

DWG NO :

sCALE

: NONE

~:.,

294 C20B1 I SHEKS

] I

OF

O !

.. . I

220 ‘“/50

~

I

HEATfR

‘z

“m.

.

..— ,

.,.

!

“..

.,

---~

CIRCUIT L.?

L1

❑

•1

J — — — — — — — — )

J

CB2 50 A––––-––––––– )

MULm–3 —— 200W HEATER AA

— CB3

— — — —

—

m J.,

~H1>AAA

Ml

—

=2

... (N1)

NI

~\l\l\l\l\r– Vvvvv

HEATER CIRCUIT #l FOR MULn-3 BOX

–

PFIL-2 DIST-8. BOXES

—

_

(H!)

PFIL–2 BOX — 200WHfA1E; – ~H>AAA AA ~\l\l\l\l\~ “ “ v “

BOX, OIST-7, AND OIST-9

T --IY

1

(N)

~

II I L I

—

l--

I

HEATER mACC -----

s--.---

(N1)

TII

m

— ---1

7---{1

AA r -7~.J\l\l\l\ll

I

lRACL

II

HEAT2R lRAC[ ------

------

I --l 1

BOX — DIST–9 .JOWHEATE~ – ~H)4AAAA -Jll\lll\l\r*

r

.-7*

GENERAL

1] (N) ---

Vvvvv

1. ALL WRING

11

II

I

L

HCAXR

------

—

I

NOTES:

(N1) ,1

lRACE ------

14 AWG. MIN

(m)

I

❑ TERMINAL

INSIOE

MULn-FUNCmON

(.) LS TERMINAL

INSIOE

DIST--,

2.

-J

MULTI-4

3. (-

–

(_

_

I

– _

–

–)

FIELO

WIRING.

_

c)

HEAT

TRACE

4. ALL CONTROL 5

ELEMfNTS

FIELD RUN WRING HEATER CIRCUITS.

PRv–

BOX ‘.

BY TRC

ANO PFIL-*

ANO

TO BE SQUARE

TO POWER

HEATER

BOXES

INSTALLEO

BY OTHERS.

0, INSIOE

MULn

BOXES

FROM

D n n .

I

.“ .

508x406x203 2Dx16xBBox NEMA4

5

KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO.ICT PURCHASE OROER NO: EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO,:

u .

I

(H2J

‘u

n n —

—

_-l

BOX — DIST–12 — 30W HEAIEF – ~H>.4AA AA

r

1

liEAi’ER

!-------L--

1 (N)

Il\r+ Vvvvv

II

I

1

HEATER lRACE ----d

k------

--y+~\l\l\l

n 3 -u u Gn M 0

\

1

I

L-

l--l

1

[N2)

II I

TRACE -----d

—

— ---1

1’

Raring Corporation

KL

.4>7 FwIdm

a

1

b +J-

thermostat

3C066787/018

,.

7,,9

5W HEATER

d,,.

(,,,)

.q

,,2

i,

!65 59,

the

.,...,,,, “,....

C.nld so.

(>80) .,

@92 W>. .,“.

m.

.

Ror,.

g

C,, pw,,,

cn

cUSTOMER

D.s,q. “1,

”

inlwmaticm, dm.inqs. det. ~s, .0! be reprdu,xd w duplicate, .,, rnof my “m< ,-..:,. her, fr. m .,!.,., .,, t,en OUmo,,zol, on of 1..

I:r::cmoration-

‘~

0“”’&

CR2

ACTIVE

PSL

003

– ~%=

–

––—––

17

J=+3---

II

——

.OW

——————

PRv-1 — ———

AIR ALARM HI]

[ I

I

I

2POT

~r

(H)

--

T-

(Nl)

J\,A\lA\/A\;\F~-Vvvvb

II

RCLAY

1+ II

30W HEATSR INYDE PRV EOX

PSL

1.

PAL-SO>

5–2 (5-73

KS-6)

LOW WATER

––1-~1–––––

ALARM

------

II

J

---HEATER mAEl

1-

——

PRV-2 — ——

——

e

“* >

-1

— _—

––––––––––-

.

I.!&lWw

+

~H,4AA

1

2POT RELAY

007

MU~~–5 3-7

CRI-7

_______~mq-

FV 5-3

r

AA

f

N!)

(N)

\l\l\l\l vvvvk~---

Ir

1 II

11

30W H2AISR lNYDf

PRV BOX

II

II

L ------

J

---HEATER mAm

I

u

009

----~

WATER SOLENOIO VALVE. N.C.

~1

——

1-

——

J

1

PuRGE SOLENOID VALVE. N.O.

FV 5-2

1

I 3-8

KO1

— —

— — —

010

-’

-(5* 1

sz-----

011

012

TS-3-1

r--7 —— —–iT–r–-––-–––– ––––– _

TS 3-1

HOA–3 I

—

h

II

I

1 1

J

PAL-501

I L—————.

004

{]

7RACS

— _—

L

I

I

+

_J_-_J HCAIIR

1/2”

II

HEATER INSJDE UUL1-EOX

L-----

10

___

-

N)

(N) r-—

Vvvvv

R[LAY

3/4” 19

~\l\l\\\l\

lc.3w

jPOT

3C5

——

REMOTE ,Lc

,~

I

005

MULTI–5

CH>AhAAA

HI

+~––––

/.

5–1

AIR PR[SS, SMTCF N.O. S[1 0415 kPo

12”

–-–

I

1° ,

–––

~)

_.—

UL-501 ./

-\~~_-_-_

–-–

)

HS-501

~--a -

.––––––––––

I

ON

,.

013

1=, .

,

1

HS-300 bfF

CBIO_____-___––

008

“A-.

I

,.

N

I

006

,..,

HZ

I

002

“C-r.

k~

AIR SOLENOID VALVE. NC.

DELAY TIMER

II 10W HEATER

THERMOSTAT

b

406x305x152 16x112x6 NEMA4 Box

OFF

TEMP. SWITCH HEATER CONTRCL

RELAY

I

@:@[y HEATER ON

014

=

REMOTE ml-3 015

—i

TO DCS

3-10 —

—

_---+

KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO&CT PURCHASE OROER NO.: EOUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO.:

OR PLC ----

_-_

S!’

SYSTEM OXIOE

ACTIVE FEEO

OISCHARGE

GENERAL

REMOTE TO OCS OR PLC 01(

~_D------

CR2-1

3-12

MULn-5

CR-I 01”

~l_~_______

TO DCS

1. ALL 2.

OR PLC

3-14 +--_

--:;

~;~

LOW WATER MULn-5

3. (–

–

(-

---

4. 5.

14 GA.

ALL

–

–

MIN.

INSIOE

MULTI-FUNCTION

INSIOE

OIST-’.

–)

FIELO

~RINC.

-)

HEAT

TRACE

CONTROL

ELEMENTS

PRV–*,

BOX. ANO

PFIL-”

I

RSF.

DWC

A,,

I BY TRC AND

TO BE SQUARE

FIELO RUN W4RINC TO POKR HEATER CIRCUIT.

HEATER

INSTALLED

AXSV NR,

—-..

.

——-

————--..

m

COd

IQi

I

W-”d MuLn

be r.>r.duced o,” a. Pl!c. tcd .,, r“. y my .wk >. ?x:cu ted ner, fr, m , {“out .,1! !.

10 1/2”

~.

-

‘\\t,/A

(6-2)

PSL

)

ON

UL-601

—1

I

–...

HS3601

MULTI-6 ———— (6-I) ;~~l

___–_––-––__

T

,-. 002

____________

-J

[~/

e

ALARM

F

007

2PLIT

~_-T MULTI–6

RELAY II 30W HEATER lNSIOS PRv BOX

—— __

OOB

J_’6-Q

‘D FV

009

‘N’

— I

6-3

FV 6-2

KO1

4-0

010

—

(6-5) — —

-

SOLINOIO NC,

PURGE VALX.

SOLENOIO N.0,

—

J

TRACE

— ——

J

——

1 1

‘—>~

[N)

X*

----HfAIER

L

I

i

v

L ----WATER VALE.

II II

II

AIR SOLENOID VALVE. MC.

10W

THERMOSTAT

@-@

P5EEl

P==yl 1[

HEATER 406,305,152 16 MI12x6. NEMA4 Box

CR1-2

011

012

KD1

c1

OELAY TIMER

TS 4-1 ~––7

o

——-_}T_l

013

I

c

l––––––-––––––– TS 4-1

–

I

&Q;:w)J

-%

014

m 3

CR1-3 015

REMOTE

4-1o

~~.

_.__

REMOTE CR2-1

016

TO DCS

--+-

OR PLC

E

______$’

TO DCS

OFF

TEMP. SWITCH HEATER CONTROL

HEATER

RELAY

ON KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PROJfCT

SYSTEM

ACTIVE

SULFIOE

FEEO

_._.

OISCHARGE

GENERAL

____y

TO DCS

m +--------

BOX

OR PLC LOW WATER

PRESSURE

3. (–

MULn-6

TERMINAL –

–

–

INSIDE

jFIELO

OIST-0,

PRv-*,

ANO

PFIL-*

BOXES.

The

,TRC

Roring

WYRINC.

Corporation

(-

-b

---

4. ALL

L“

30066787/018

NOTES:

1. ALL YARING 14 GA, MIN. (n) 2. 0 TERMINAL INSIOE MULT1-FUNCnON

LOW AIR PRESSURE

4-14

017

m r

NO.:

NO.:

OR PLC

__+---

REMOTE

m

NO.:

TAG

MULTI-6

——-~-------

OROER

EOUIPMENT

4-12

——--++--.---

CR3- I

PuRCHASE

-)

CONTROL

5. FIELD HEATER

RUN

HEAT

TRACE

ELEMENTS

WIRING

By

TRC

ANO

TO BE SWARE

TO POWFR

HEATER

INSTALLEO

BY

OTHERS.

A,,

D. INSIDE

Th

of

b.

,,,. Ro,,nq

E,,Do,o,,

c.

~,!, Ws,q” :“f.r,n.i,m .j,awkq,, d.to~,, o, SO, C>I>CO!>C. may not E. ,.produced w ..,1,.. !:4 “m nloy my .C.-. of T,, 0. ,,,.” {,5 “c, cfrmn “,t,. ut .ri Ll,” o,thof)mtb. am. q CwPoro,;on

FROM

CIRCUIT.

TITLE

... —____

fblltiwn

1. (,,0] 8,,

—

.——

——

:

ELECTRCIAL FCR DUST AT SULFloE

CUSTOMER BECI+TEL CCiLAHUASJ

:KUCti

CHECK

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SUPPRESSJON SYSTEM FEEDER OISCHARGE

DAVY PROJECT

DP.AWN :KUCH

DWG NO SCALE

, NONE

SHEET

I

OF

1

-.

Y

1?

;–VOH

S7VN11’!E13L

._.~.—_ NIISNI

E E 3 .

WO&

t

[

0

I

.9

L

I

I

n

/“’’’’” El a“

n

@Kb-

.-

-T-

:OJ 866J ~./:FIJ

Zi

t-

i

Uer UOW 6MP” eOE-W6Z\L

,L6EL /\:0

GENERAL 1, ALL

PIPING,

HEAT

TRACE

ASSEMBLY

NOTES: FITTINGS,

FROM

BY

INSULATION,

SOURCE

3. APPROX. &

MIGHT

4. ASSEMBLY

TO MULTI-1

(250

LBS)

TO BE COMPLETELY

SHOP

ASSEMBLED.

OTHERS.

2. FIELD PIPING TRAN5MlSWt4 EOUIPMENT.

5. AIR/WATER OUTLET FROM MULTI-1 ASS[MBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1 /2” O D. NYLON AIR TUBING, 3/80.12 NYLON WATER TUBING, & 3 WA TTS/FT HEAT TRACE WIRE RUN INSIDE 1“ DIA SEALTIGHT CONDUIT, & INSULATED W/ PIPE INSULATION. (PROVIOEO BY TRC)

TO BE ARRANGED TO PREvENT OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS

_ & ,.-..--+

[N)

(N)

T:RM

$

(N)

703mm

7 1/4”

TERM.

l-i5

TERM

1-14

-. -

---

---

‘1

CONNECnON ~

1-15

TEr?w TERM,

l–l 1-12

,

(2-5)

A,E

(N)

VALVE

(Nj

SOLENOIO

VALVE

(N)

SCLENOIO

VALVE

(NC)

(2-4)

SOLENOID

VALVE

(ho)

(2-4)

W4ZF

SOLENOIO

VALVE

(NC)

(2-7)

w3TER

PRESSURE

SWITCH

(2-6)

w4TER

PRESSURE

SWITCH

.... . . .. .. .

(2-3)

AIR

PRE5SURE

SWITCH

(NC)

(2-2)

A,?

PR!SSURE

SWITCH

(NO)

(2-1)

4,?

PRESSURE

SWt TCH

(COMtiON)

TERM

1–9

-----------

TERM

1-1

---------

1

P

-P

7

F I

TEfik!

——–

VALVE

SOLENOID

?Q7GE

184rnm 2’” 51mm

SCLINCID

=

———=_~2E -—–— ),> ‘E?

(N)

a.

GETAIL

(NC) (COMMON)

/

“l”

I

T

r-

E TAG : MULTI–2

AIR ~B; UNION

,, SHIPPEO

LOOSE)

~.—

,

Kmlw lmmmtlw CV.M+UAS WCT PIMXm mR no<

mwmr

xodk7

.57/ma

w.

lAC !0,

r-l BY OTHERS

I

— 14

303013

13

420002

1

HEATER 200

210029

1

JUNCTION

11

450043

4

SEALTIGHT

10

200012

3

AIR

WATT,

BOX

NO.,

1/2

NPT

HOFFMAN

12x6x4”

CC%40UIT

PRESSURE

VAC.

NEMA

4

CONNECTOR,

GAUGE,

0–100

DIA.

200011

3

WATER PRESSURE

200003

3

INLET PRESSURE

u

7

300D03

BRA

3

WATER PRESSURE

WATER INLET 1/2- NPT

6

300110

ALUM

3

AIR

1/2-

NPT

5

303003

BRA

1

SOLENOIO VALVE,

120

VAC,

NC.,

1/2”

4

303006

BRA

1

SOLENOIO VALE,

120

VAC,

N. C.,

1 1/2.

3

300062

ALUM

1

AIR FILTER,

2

550001

s/s

2

WATER FILTER,

1

210025

I

ENCLOSURE

SPRING NUT KIT (sHIppEO LOOSE)

n m

ITEM

PART NO

,,,

PRESSURE

R.ar!nq TTrEE

..-— .

PSIG PSIG

REGULATOR

1 1/2”

NPT NPT

NPT

1/2.

NPT

42x36x12-

NEMA

3R

DESCRWTION

C.nlmi 1 F.. (,60] 8,2 !,2.

of m. Raring CmO0.3! #an !3es8.v kforrno!im. drowinq~, dem;ls, or me.tf,cot, cn d,!, rnoy no, be ,cP, oduc,d w d.;licot, d “o, rn,y ,ny ● o,, O.thwizoti.n of 1.. ,, ,Xe. uled h,r,f, om .1(.. ”! .r;it.”

==3

0–30 0–160

REGULATOR,

MATL QTY

A,, MIId,m 1. (MO, egg ,65,, inq

GAUGE,

-1

I

Ih, s dr>.

GAUGE,

1“

PSIG

9

o

m m r

120

8

T

“A

SOLENOID VALVE,

12

1

~

1

is

the

pmper?y

~JSTOMSR COMPANIA

UINCRA

00NA

DE COLLAHUAS!

COrPOrdlm.

CHECK

:

MULTI-FUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY OXIDE TRuCK DUMP POCKET MUL-R-2

FOR

.KUCW

DWG NO : SCALE : 3/0

~:

294 C–30B ISHEST

I , I

OF

1

GENERAL

NOTES: 3. APPROX. WIICHT

1. ALL PIPING, FIITINCS, INSULATION. & HEAT TRACE FROM SOURCE TO MULTI- I ASSEMBLY BY OTHERS. 2

FIELO PIPING TO BE ARRANGEO TO PREvENT TRANSMISSION OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS EOUIPMENT

4

(250

LBS)

ASSEMBLY TO BE COMPLETELY SHOP ASSEMBLED.

5. AIR/WATER OUTIET FROM MULm-1 ASSEMBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1/2- 0,0. NYT.ON AIR TUBING, 3/8” 0.0, NM-ON WATER TuBING & 3 WA TTS/FT HEAT TRAcE WIRE RUN INSIOE lL DIA SEALnGHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE INSULATION, (PROVTOEO BY TRC).

‘ ‘“’) I “2’ H

T,u ,~:,”

8-

L,

‘4 ,,.

“2)i’”’~~~~..,2,,,_4 II EAT

TERM

(G)

TER~A

(N)

Mi LT1-2 c

A k

~-’—

(N)

7 1/4”

TERM

184rnm 2“ 51mm

1

ELECTRICAL CONNECnON ~

1-14

.

..-

{;)

VJ.~E

~,~-:-

50 LENC12

VA, VE (L;

SOLENCIC

CJ2GE

VALVE

SOLENOID

[:)

(N)

V4LV[

(N)

—

l~~”E? SOLENOID VALVE (N) AR SCLENOIO VALVE (NC)

(2-4)

—

?U%CE

SOLENOIO

VALVE

(No)

(2-4)

—

WA_ER

SOLCNOIO

VALVE

(NC)

(2-5)

---------

VALVE

5CLEN!3C

A = _

(N)

.

SOLENGIC

i -IX -

(N)

2G5mm TERM. 1-15

T. ALE

~,,,,,-

,.,,””

-qyy

TERM

1-15

(2-7)

‘N) TE?

PRESSURE

SWITCH

(NC)

TERu

1–1

(2-6)

WATER

PRESSURE

SWITCH

(COMMON)

TERM.

1-12

. . . . . . . . ..-

(2-3)

AIR

PRESSURE

Swl TCt+ (NC)

A,?

pRESSJRE

SWITCH

(NO)

A<

P! ESSuRE

swTcH

(coMuoN)

m

TERM

1-9

.

. . ..-

(2-2)

TERM

1-1

.

. . ..- -

(2-1)

k

1

?

DETAIL

“l”

t

T I

.r-~

TAG : MULTI–2

—

—

?l;/%PT (BALL VALW & u UNION SHIPPEO LOOSE)

—rrT++..

,,

—--—..

----x\

——

~.L KmJFQ Kmmmm4. CCILAHWS FWICT Pumm mR no. CWFUM1 m. lAC m

I

‘co

r--l BY OTHERS

—

I

M I\\l

v/ rl—1——=

O

u

(a u

WATER INLET 1/2- NPT

L8

IJ-lJ

Lrl-J

m 3

!!

n

SPRING NUT KIT (SHIPPEO LOOSE)

m

14

303013

I

SOLENOIO VALVE,

13

420002

1

HEATER 200

210029

1

JUNCTION

11

450043

4

SEALTIGHT

10

200012

3

AIR PRESSURE

9

200011

3

WATER PRESSURE

B

200003

3

INLET PRESSURE

3

WATER PRESSURE

ALUM

3

AIR

5

303003

BRA

1

SOLENOIO

4

303006

BRA

1

SOLENOIO

3

300062

ALUM

1

AIR FILTER.

s/s

2

WATER FILTER,

I

ENCLOSURE

550001

PRESSURE

PART NO

TRr

R.amg

——_ ._

________

——

.—

—. ___

..——

-—

0–30 0-160

PSIC PSIG

REGULATOR 1/2”

NPT

vALVE,

120

VAC,

NC.,

1/2”

VALVE,

120

VAC,

NC

1 1/2”

1 1/2”

NPT

NPT

NPT

1 /2”

NPT

42x36x12-

..-.

A,, [1s0)

MATL

NEMA

3R

I $s59.

DESCRIPTION

The Roring Corporation

RIIuIwn cm

QTY

oraw>nq

;s

the

Cmid F..

Droper!y

(ma) of

a,>

1 3$,.

7?’.

CUSTOMER

COLIPAN!A

UINERA

DONA DE COLL4HUA51

COWm.atiM

TITLE

AS5Y Nil

GAUGE,

1“ OIA.

PSG

REGULATOR,

Ro,,nq Cor,c+.tic. Des;qn hf.,,notim. d,o.inqs, d,ioil,, 0, Spcc; l,..l, c. d,t, r“,y “0! b, rep,. du.,d w d.rl;.at. d ,., mar any hock ,: CX:. ulcd hefef, nm .1!.,., .,;, !.. ..,,.,,2 .!;.. of 1,, This

294 C-1OE

NPT

,,,

I

294C-20B

1/2

4

0–100

GAUGE,

BRA

210025

NO.,

NEMA

GAUGE,

300003

,.

1

12x6x4”

300110

1

VAC.

HOFFMAN

C0f4DUl T CONNECTOR,

7

ITEM

DWG

BOX

6

2

120

WATT.

12

,!

SIF

xcd67a7/ma

MULTI-FUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY OXIOE TRUCK DuMP POCKET MULTI-2

CELSCK

FOR

DWG

NO

:

KUCh’ :

SCALE , 3/9

]

SHEET

1

OF

I

\

/

I

WVWIVIO 211VW3HJS 3313 HCJ z130nt.6z T IFIOZW6Z ma m

v

—

[

[

[

o

c

E

0

.

ti

mm

-L t

,!-”.

!dt

.,n

——.

GENERAL

NOTES:

1. ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, INSULATION, & HEAT TRACE FROM SOURCE TO MULTI- I ASSEMBLY BY OTHERS. 2. FIELD PIPING TO BE ARRANGED TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS EOUIPMENT.

3. APPROX. WEIGHT : (250

\

.—

LBS)

4. ASSEMBLY TO BE COMPLETELY SHOP ASSEMBLED 5. AIR/WATER OUTLET FROM MULTI-1 ASSEMBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1/2- 0.0. NYLON AIR TUBING, 3/8” O.D. NWON WATER TUBING. & 1- DIA. 3 WATTS/fT HEAT TRACE WTRE RUN INSID[ SEALnGHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE lNSULAnON. (PROVTDEO BY TRc).

1==1 8“ 203mm

‘

7 1/4”’ 184mm z., 51mm

7

e ELECTRICAL CONNECTIOND

Q

P

IT

1

f

P

I.--__k

— I

P

r

~A’:g;E~R TYP. (3) PLC’S

ri

.

(13111(-31-

w

11%

I

I

al o-l m ( [

‘cc

0

.+

{ I’

AIR INLET 1 1/2” NPT u (13ALLvALw & uNION SHIPPEO ~.– LOOSE)

.1 BY oTHERS

WATER INLET 1/2- NPT

—

F

.

r 1A

I d7nnn7

I

@

u

,----10

II

!7

I

‘i .R

I

.-

~,

!.

.”..

4

I

20001 I

---.mnnn . . .

I

1

. .T

4

,/-

AIR PRESSURE

GAUGE,

4

WATER PRESSURE

3

INLET PRESSURE

4

WATER PRESSURE

[ )–loo

GAUGE, GAUGE.

j,,

4

INECTOR,

!

1

1

200012

BRA

1“ OIA.

Pslc

0–30

PSIG

0–160

PSIC

REGULATOR

~

oR,

1/2”

NPT

AC

NC..

1/2”

NPT

&

,

I

2

I 550001

1s/s

I 2 I WATER FIL

1

1210025

I

I

III

II

ITEM

PART

NO

_t_n

I

n

DESCRIPTION

M .ATL QTY

The

I

Ik’(,%%%tion ,,, -.

[ ,.

.4,r (!44)

.JwIt ,,2

,65,.

ilo. ,0.

1

C.timl (,60)

5,2

,62.

Tht, dr..inq ,, !M Dr. c,r!y ,f h, R.r,nq CO,, OrOt,,n, drowhgs, LMQ3S. or wcc,flcni,m d=i, O T:= 50 LENIJC i’AL’K (N; AR SaLENO!C VALVE (NC)

. TERM ,~z~

VALVF

SCLENOIO

REGULATOR

REGULATOR,

1 1/2” 1/2”

42x36x12”

1/2”

NPT NPT NEMA DEscRIpmON

3R

NPT NPT NPT

I

0“ .0

w

C-1 bm1b62\L68Ur-V\UW3\’1 ,BVN 9.0 OV2

,--

wvH3klu

““~

?IIVW314>S

i -VOH

2313

u(3>

30 Z-2+6C

I

301SNl 51VNIWU31 NOW

1

2M0

33S

L

—1

2 Ld n

,,ZL

,,,\,>c(Jr

I

I

I

n

+

—

L

h.

0

w

,

(

r.

GENERAL 1. APPROX.

WEIGHT

:

(150

5. AIR/WATER

LBS)

NYLON

ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, HEAT TRACE, & INSULATION FROM SOURCE TO MULTI-BOX BY OTHERS.

OUTLET

4.

FIELD PIPING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

TO BE ARRANGED OF ANY STRAIN

TO BE COMPLETELY

6.

3/8”

3 WATTS/FT

1“ DIA.

pIpE

FROM

ASSEMBLY TUBING,

&

INSIDE

TO PREVENT TO THIS EQUIPMENT. SHOP

AIR

TUBING, w/

3.

[

--

I

NOTES: TO PRV-BOX

2.

I

ELECTRICAL

WTRING

O.D. HEAT

SEALTIGHT

IFt5ULAn0N

MULTI-BOX TO BE

O.D.

NYLON

WATER

TRAC[

CONDUIT,

(PROVTDED NOT

ASSEMBLY

1/2”

SHOWN

WIRE, RuN &

By FOR

INSULATED

mc) CLARITY

ASSEMBLED

8-

TE7M (h)

203mm

–

~.,

(N)

A,= S!lLEhOID VALE

(N)

?LRCE

53 L:NOI0

*ATER

SOLENOID VfiLVI

(N) 152mm

7 1 /4’”

7

184mm

2“ 51mm

TERM

4-8

---

ERM

4–7

---

TEF?M, 4-6

9

P ELECTRICAL ~ C’WNICTOR

(6-5)

=

---

(—

A!?

(N)

VALVE (N)

SOLENOID “AL<

(N)

[ NC)

(6-1)

PuRGE

S9LENOID

VALE

(NC)

[6-+)

WAE3

50 LEN010

VALE

[Nc)

(6-7)

WAXR

PRESSURE

S!+l TCH (NC)

TERU

4–:

–

(6-6)

*AIIR

PRESSURE

SWITCH (COMMON)

rEfvJ

4–5

– --

(6-3)

WATER

PRESSURE

SW~CH

TERM

4-2

–-

(5-2)

AIR

PRCSWRC

TE*U

4–1

---

[6-1)

A!R

PRE58u RE WTCH

‘-s

\

DETPIL

@

(NC)

SMTCH

“

(COMUON) )

“l”

m

u

I SHIP

LOOSE

1~

t 1/2’

TAG :

NPT BY OTNERS J

-

7~

WATER lNLrT

+

MULTI-6

L

SHIP LOOSE

BY OTHERS ~

> — 12 11

— 12” 305mm

L

2s Im .

& 12

1/2’”

T

SHIP LOOSE

I

303013

9

210093.1

I

BRA

BRA

450043

I

I

7

401001.2

6

200003

5

303003

4

303003

3 2 1

210003

200

SWITCH,

WATTS/50

1

PURGE SOLENOID

1

JUNCmON

BOX.

VALVE, 8X6X4-

CONOUIT

INLET PRESSURE

GAUGE,

0-160

BRA

1

WATER SOLENOID

VALVE,

N. C.,

BRA

1

AIR SOLENOID

VALVE,

550001

s/s

2

WATER FILTER,

1/2”

300060

ALUM

1

AIR FILTER.

1

ENCLOSURE,

MATL

cm

I

..--.-—— ——

-.. —- —. —..—.—...— ——

NPT

1/2”’

NPT

1“ DIA.

1/8”

NPT PSIG

120

VAC,

1 ZD VAC,

I /2”

NPT

NPT

2 NEMA

3R

The R.UIIIIO. w

! 659.

J

C.rAt.I ,.1

(,,0)

m,

!52.

i,

cUSTOMSR

MULil-FUNCTION SULFIDE FEEDER M(II n–f,

COMPANIA

MINERA

[ DRAWN : K, WSS

mbm.

[ CHECK

TITIE.

-.——.

1/2”

DESCRIPTION

,.”. .....--. ,

—

VAC,

NPT

30x30x1

the Pr.ac. rtf of The R,rInq Cm,m, !!c. 3.s skan . mform.all, n. dr.awin,,. det. als. m SOCC,FICO! IO” CCt, . . . . .“, -.. .“. .?., may .0! be rm, tiu.,d 0, dub. .... ..-. Cc. fp.

120

-.

,4ir (MO)

N. O.,

N. C.,

NPT

4

CONNECTOR,

3

Th,,s drming

——

N. O,, NEMA

SVJTCH,

1/2”

1/8”

HOFFMAN

AIR PRESSURE

,,,

Rorq

NC.,

HZ,

1

T_mn

r.

WATER PRESSURE

2 I SEALTIGHT

BRA

PART NO

ITEM

1

I 1 I HEATER,

42 CH303.2i

10

8

4

I

401001.2

BOX ASSEMBLY DISCHARGE

FOR

: KUC#

DWG NO , -r,l

F

T/n

00NA

LX COLLAHUA3

6-24-9

CONT’RACT NO

7-II-97

TRC 294C

REV

294 C–30F 1 SHHFl

I , 1

OF

1

1

r @

‘3UWN ~RO OV1

1-

––-1< % \’cl _-

/4-” _

Ob 9fi2\96?\W1\>J

(ssr)”*’

(019)

.~z

+

Gzl)

“s

“dAL

ti w t-z

0 -1 <

IY w

z w

(-3

\

\\

i

~

/

u

\ , , \ !,

\i

,,

,

–---se’-

1

—.-—--*.._--—.-_

1

\

--. —.-—

1

—-.

“HddV 211

—

Z9L .-

—-. .

\

--_--_--—

------m~ —..

I “n>

“nT

>T

IIPP

llflW

fiMfl”(lb-3bKi’\6.

%?

--tL––

1

/ Gcll

‘g

—

i\

:(1

‘

>

c

—.. —.. —--— —.. —-. —.—. -—-r-. DKCT

‘0 15-

30” 762 I /2” TYP,

-

[

A

1.25

[1-~

351

A“

-

J

I

4 1/4. F--

~TYP.

GENERAL I

FIELD

PIPING

PRE’vENT

.

SURFACE

CONTACT

\

TO EE

ARRANGED

TO

OF ANY STRAIN

TRANSMISSION

TO ~ls

‘/,, /“’---

LAYOUT

NOTES:

EQuIPMENT

2. APPROX. WEIGHT : (300

LBS)

‘, /

.

\

“\

C4X5.4 CHANNEL / (TW). HINGEO

‘DOOR ACCESS

--’’’”

120 VAC (-) )

k=420vAc~i’ )’20‘AC I-J \GROUND

e --\.- \.- / \.- \.. —.- ..—.-—--—..—--—--

HINGED

--1

[

%

a L-

4:

—

l–

n n m

0

AIR INLET 2“ NPT

Pm

L

DETAIL

L

220V/50Hz 200W

WATER OUTLET 1- NPT

ml I

7

I

Tn7ni7

--4”,

294-30D

L L.

3.

294-30C

75

294 C-30S 294 C-30A

L–

294 C-1OB

24’

294 C-1OA REF.

I

(IL

DW’C

ASSY

WI

610

--l ———

_.—.

.. —-.

-,.

.

BRA

I

1 I AIR

.‘

I ❑ .,, “n.. I

PIIRCF -----

-—--

5

300064

ALUM

1

AIR FILTER.

4

301203

BRA

2

BALL VALVE,

3

301205

BRA

..

2

200003

1

550007

I m., , ❑ fiLL I

5 s/s

The

,,. ,,r vfiLv L,

..

2“

.

MDT .

.,

.

1/4”

NPT

.,

Fill.

. I.

P17RT .-, .

NpT 1/2,8

7 i WATFR FN TER .—--1

N C

—.-.

1I 1.,-/>.

NPT .,0. ,Vr ,,

PRESSURE GAUGE,

PART NO I MATL IQTY A

FNOID

Sol

$,., ,“L. \.?= L,

301215,0

~n

M

!RRA

,

6

ITEM

w

o

KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO$CT PuRCHASE OROER NO: 30065787/018 EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO,:

A

11[

‘* .

(SEE DETAIL-I.)

%’

u

“l”

DRAIN TO GROUNO

WATER INLET 1- NPT

HEATER

,.,--’”

4

L

--i---l

SOL,NOIO

INLET FROM AIR FILTG? D

2

I

41R OUTLET 2. NPT O*

ACCESS DOOR

m!, , r“..

RARING,

lnor r“r. 8

❑

0-160

NS-151. . 1“ NPT

PSIG

4

DESCRIPTION i

N \

t t

2\3*6Z\’bW

-v\WM1\

J

I

-+

3WW WJ

UV2

-< -’-. m

L

,,

I I

II II

I

I

3

I

GI I

9

.——

bmcnZZ2’ Inmu)u)lnul ———

JIJIJJ

Oonnoo

n

UL

n>

L._.

0 n

g

. . —.._--—--—--

+ @

D

+

—--—

!-+0 .,-

-r

k

B o—

+

I I

__

+ @

-i

L

-—--—-

.-mm1111 >>>> EIXCCK Qnnn

In

Q

-

Illf - —.

.

_.

-—--—--

+

--l

I

3 z

ISn

I

RI+’

al c1

-_IM

–1

—’

_ E

0 m

x

---

w

aicio:c-++t

--

iti

u

(3! 1-

r

Oi

z

o i= m Z v v)

w

n

iii @

o z z

c) 7

5 <

‘a

CK k-

c1

w u 3 w)

0

-1 (-) 15

n

II

II

z c-)

1’42

I r-

o

i? 1-

z

0

xl

I

1111111

1-

z 0

v w oin w

)/

. .. .

. . .

PL2 OFF ~1_8

(8)

1

PL1 –2

PBI

PB2

START

STOP 2 ,1-l!~c)

I I

(12)

JQ.!4-

T1-12

o

1 I

I I

3

T1–14

%~cs

(13)

T,_,3

NOTE ALL

!

CONTROL

WIRING

TO

BE

#18AifJ M, (JF .ESS

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA

I I

—— — lNTERM~AL

M40E

10/02/97 IIATE

FIRST

ISSUE DESCRIPTION

NOTED.

AL

RL

AL

BY

CHK

APPR

IN HOUSTON,

~ATEXAS

U. S-A-

TtilS MATERIAL IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPER~ OF TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION ANO SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCE. USED, OR OISCLOSEO TO OTHERS UNLESS PRIOR WRITfEN AUTHORIZATION IS OBTAJNEO.

SCALE:

REVISION:

rlT’LE:

I

I

I

OTHERWISE

WIRING DIAGRAM – L.V. DOOR (REAR VIEW) MEDIUM VOLTAGE FVNR STARTER JOB

CUSTOMER:

GARDNER DENVER

NUMBER:

BK53988-O1O

l. O=l.O

o FIXED

TYPE JK CONTROLLER

DR4WING NUMBER:

V9A9P701 .

—-

.

. .._

I

..

. .

I

3’”00 ~r

F

“’’O”’””’ ““’”G ‘“

LOW v LE CONNEC TIONS ITCH

FI R

OUWM

Ju.

—.—

=

1 9

T1

T2

T3

--xl

ISOLATION SWITCH VIEWING WINDOW

1---1 FRONT VIEW o 0

coo 0.0

z

(3)0

CABLE

‘xrq

) 0.00

0.00

RIGHT



~

~_____ I I I I I

cO

.—

/ .

[

I I Ml.

---

0.0

Isw

1,-. f

R~cp

[o

1

:}

L-

.-

I&l

I

I I I I

,1

LOCATEO BEHIND HIGH VOLTACE COMPARTMENT DOOR. ACCCSSIELE ONLY WHEN RACKING HANOLE IS IN ‘OF~ POSITION,

PLUG

~

H

-.1

t

)

(1)

I

I

I L---

F]

-i

v

u 1 I I

[’~ ,gA I I I

1

I 1 I 1 I I ■

. CT1’

~c1)T2-1

I I

:2.BA

11–12 (12)

~

IL1

* RE#pTE

I I

w

1 1

+’-133-+ ;

I

START

L_~&__ (C3)T2-3 w

I L~

“l-9

=

1

J

:T2

l’-r!’-b’b

75/!

sEr

PB2 STOP

T1-11

co

1

111

PL1 RUN

M

(10)

m

21

T1-10

SET CONTACTOR TO 100-11

I

I

I

!

2-74LRA

OV

(-)

1 AC

w

DLJ

2 AC

w

(+) .

(34)

3 KJ

[

(5)

L5G.ENQ c? CPI 1 CPT CT1,2,3 F;.! Isw MM.1. MR

I

PBl!!i PL1.2 11,2

-

CURRENT LIMITING FUSE CONTROL POWER INTERLOCK. CONTACT HELD CLOSED (AS SHOWN) WHEN RACKING HANOLE IS IN ‘Or POSITION. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER CURRENT TRANSFORMER DRIVE UNIT

15:

,.

(7)

TI-5

T1 -7

’125

: -

SPARE CONTACTS FOR CUSTOMER USE (MAX. 7A. 120VAC CONTINUOUS RATING)

*-

4 1 REMOVE JuMPER #FfER

INSTALLING REMOTE OEWCE

2 I a lml m mm

Su&

I

_T~SHIBA

I *X ~

—

Alm m Iw

— mm—m-

a -

m.?rau.~—— ———== --—e-— --——=

~o

&HEMATlC D~GRAM

—“

W —

MEDIUM —

VOLTAGE

FVNR

GARDNER OENVER

fl~Eo lyPE JK CONTROL1

STARTER Ja~ BK53988-O

1.1391.C

~~ 10

w3A9P701

-

,-

- — ..-., --,-- -*..”..-----,-.-, ., . “,))->

,“

,“

-.,

--

.,

.

-..,.

s..

-,

--, l-= ~!-.

.-

~, -,

,..

,.’,.

I

I

I 1

i/ v

I

u I

au

-t

In

4

\

u-----------------

,.7 .—

U hmf

1’ ‘

r 1

I

Illlv

! ~,,,q

-f---r

nolcm J

I

/ w

\

J===--l .>

CllH

UIIHJ

10

UtohdF,m *O UIIMJ

lV1$

1

* LIE!?l !1

mlvtidm no m nmnm UJJ arnm m -f

—L.

‘1

\

]lVIS

,~188sm,

u \

1

mob

7-.

i\n

m

w“

Ivlw

ml Mum!!

Wlrw?s

..—— -) pju Lli!l! 2,!

#

_—

/

o

Is.

..

.~

(3

-

--

=:--

-

boa

d$l 0S2-----30OflV] lMOM

kumd J

9NIu O11OJ

WI

01

Slllddl

lN171n0

SIUt

31V0

I

W1C41 MOsswnm

AE a]l~lJ#]3

\

\

I

I

Ulv

NOIJ

II

$ION,

IMt

‘+

1a,,-,

1N3111H>VR

W,,,,,,

Alk

llI

uIAH30

Ii10

UlhOMV9

ltYv N IJIHolsfl) MOJ

OIIJI: HI)

JINO

lNIMd

51H1

———

.—-..—

—

_

—— .—. -——____

.

..

-

——. -—. —.——

_—.. —

I

———

I

U.-@.)

-s.

I,, ---

w

—.....

—.—_—.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Instrucciones de los fabricantes

23.01.98

4.5.5

COLLAHUASI

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE Cliente: Minera Escondida

lNsTRuccioNEs

opEt’?AcioN Y MANwvcioN TRC No

Ltd.

DE Los

Fabricates

ASCO

Valvula Solenoide

ASCO

Switch De Presion

GARDNER

DENVER

Intersection

D.C.

296

NORGREN

Conectores

NORGREN

Filtro Aire/Valvula

NORGREN

Valvula Reguladora

De Agua

NORGREN

Valvula Reguladora

De Aire

UE

Switch De Presion

Rapidos Reguladora

- ...- -.

—. ,ZIzffim;io,o es De Ifis” ,Fati:?cantes

FV@na 79

294csa44AIW:? ;

PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC

INTERFACE

Characteristics Swltchlng Pressure Hysteresis SwltcPllngCapaoillty Arnblent Temperature Pneumatic Connechon Eleclricai ConnectIons Maximum Wire Size

i

Function Tmsf!erface

w!l changs a pneumatc

jb-”-’

Electrical contocls SPDT 5Afllov

signal Into an electr,ca!

S}gna!

Electrico! output - commlo~ . norms; closed contoct normal open con!act

K

Adjustment knob prt?jjur~ 15 tO 115 PSI Turn clockwise to decrease pressdre seRing Counter clockwise to increase pressure setiing

—-.—,.XY7S

Connections

Manual o~errlde

—-7, ~-,

Visual indcafion pneurna:lc inlet Marklrlg tag

4%

El‘s !.!

of

:,-,I

,,

, .-. .,.

. .,.

(>.

,,

Pressure Inlet

Reference Description Pneumallc

Model Numbers

El~cklc lnt~rfoce u.,lto h+fanugt Ojerrlde

30400009

50 Blonk Llarhng Ta~s

33400042

DIn RGII (Pkg 5) 3 Lengths .

33400033

D,a CIIPS (Pkg 10) “

33400036 “ See page 150 for ordering Information

Pneumatic/Electric

interface

1,

P 0

l?_ 1A.

X 71

d c—

.’.

, .. ...

c

4 125

318

2

1

SERIES

302/304

MODUIAR INTERFACES ELECTRO/PNEUMATIC

Modular Construction and Rapid Installation r,’ ;mlmr/

at ‘2 IWAS

of furl~tlons as sho’//n on opposl!~ ~~g~ elect(oInlerface ccm?nslng of 3 components which can be f,rred cn CIcommcn subbase sulfable for both 3/2 normally closed CI-Id 4~2 v~[jloris Tn{sbase bu!lds in the electrical cmd pn?umatlc connectfom h!XJ!3rlh/ of assembly the subbases of the interfaces connect tog.?tr.er t~ build UP a compact cssembly with a widtn of each ~CJJ+standardized at 69”, certain cwmectlons are built in and the cIs;ercbly can be f!tied on to s$(mmetr~calrail. See page 150 for ordering informahon on clip and roil.

~,bdlJl(3rt’/ pr,wmol,c

DIN L/ltg rail ,=.

‘i,

G

— I d+ 165rrr- .69”)

Simplified Connections Flectrlcal connectlms 1 wre to connect for each interfoce — 1 common suppl’< bull! in – 1 ground connection Pneumatic conrlectlons Pi] the ports are frted wltn plug-in connections — cnly 1 tube ro connect each 3/2 module — 2 tuces to conriect fo( each 4/2 module — 1 common pressure port and 1 common exhaust port built in Whch can be piped tc efther the left or to the righl.hand side P!ug the pressure pod wh,ch is not to be used

Common ex?,ausl Common buill.in pressure

‘educed Maintenance and Simple Fault Finding SUQImdlcaton of the electrical input by LED(opt Ion) and visual )d ca!lonof Ihepneumatlc output, a’[ow}ng simple fault diagnoses S3no’ can be forced by manual override on the solenoid pilot and m ti;:~ Dneumatlc.e!ectric interface Fur,ctlanal sylmbols I,denllflca::on of the electrical terminaj Ident,flcatlon of the pneumahc portt S:mp;e Iabelllng Due to the f~ct tnct the subbase has no moving components, the VC’U2 modu!es can be removed from an assembly without cf”sct~mg the w’rmg or piping

LED—-—

:,

---

Manual override Labell)ng Pressure mdicatar 3

.,1. ‘ .Function symbol

$- = ~

dther Possibilities Electrical connections: Tne Integral electrical common supply can be removed by removing the tag so that a different supply voltage can be used on eoch module Fneumatlc connecl~ons DlffSrent supply pressurescan be used by building in a separate slJpp]v base into the assembly.

Separ~:2 supply base

_.

Separate Supply Base Use.@fthe separate SUPPIYbase a!lows blocking into the manifold for use of two or mole pr~ssures.The supply base isblocked on one side, Fof three pressures.two separate supply bases are required, For eight or more VQIVeSit iSnecessary 10increase volume by having two inputs.

PI

Interfaces supplied at pr~ssure PI

ASWWWMC JouCOMATIC DIVISION

or P3

Interfaces supplied at pressure P2

53

Installation

& Maintenance

Instructions

SERIES

I

~Red-Hatf” OPEN-FRAME,

GENERAL

PURPOSE,

WATERTIGHTiEXPLOSIONPROOF

SOLENOIDS

8016G Form

No. V6583R4

Fox [I,x-x E,( , ().( rttT,II,.s 7 ~\n Y O,\,,

A C,\LTIOS: T()prevent fireor~IPio.ion, cjn notinstall s,,lerr,,id ial>r

where

ignilion

165”

C. On }filkes

temperature

of

hazardous

atmosphere

xnd

i> less

,,,

th.i,)

used for steam semice or when a CIJSS ‘“}1’” si)len(, id i~

used. do not install Itsj

DESCRIPTION caI:Ilog numbers W16G 1 find 8016G? nrc eIwxy errcap,ul~kd pull-IyF s~~ltnoids.“TIC green solLnoiJ wi!h lead wires and 112” conduit connection is designed [(~mcel Enclosure Type l- Gerrer~l Purpose. l~Iw 2- Dripprmf, IJPLJ ~ a[id .*>- Kwrllghl and lypcs -1 and 4~-Walerllghl. l%c blfick

so[crroid on CfltJlog numhc!s pr~hXd “’~~”’ i$ d~Sigfl~Ll10nl~~l ~flCkISUre Tyws 6 mrd “rypc$ 3 and 3S-R.lin[ighl, “Ijpv 4 and 4X-M!ller[igh[. 61’- Suhmcrsihlc, TYpc 7 (A B, C. & D) F.xplosi~onprcof CIJM 1, Groups A. [1, C. .& D and “ry~ 9 (E, F. & G)- Dus[-Igniticmprrmf Cl~ss II, Groups E, 1-, & G. “Ilre Class 11, Groups F & G Du$t l~a[ions designation is not appllcahlt fur wicno ids or solenoid v~]lvcs umf f!~r slcarrl semicc or when a class ‘“ll“’solcrroid is usccf. See Ternpcrawre Lirnifufiwu scc[ion for solenoid idcn!ifi L’aliorl ~lnd Il:lnlc pt:lle!rclaillcr for scwicc. Whc’n insl.allcd jusl as a

solcnoiJ find n(>[ al[achcd to ~rr ~\SCO vfilve, ~hecore has ~ 0.250-28 [JXF-211 IJPP-J hold. 11.3Fminimum full thrcmf.

Series 8016G solenoids are awiluble . Open -Fr.ime Conslru:lion

in:

hl~ck explosiorrproof ~dust-ignllionprcofcnclowres (“lypw 7 & 9). ——— .—— —.—— .._ 1>11’OX”r,\\T: or filter,

meets Enclosure

Types 2,3.3S,4.

W’hen the solenoid is energized, the core is drawn into the solenoid base sub-assembly. lkIPORTA.XT When the solenoid is de-energized, the initial

force for the core, whether developed by spring, pressure, or weigh~ must exert a mhrimum force to o~ercome residual magnetism created by the return

hlinimum

return

force

for AC construction

is 11 ounces, and 4

ounces for DC construction.

INSTALLATION Check nameplalc for correct cakrlog number, sewice, and waltngc. Check front of solenoid

for volmge and frequency.

A WARNING: TO prevent the possibility of electrical shock from the accessibility of live parts, install the open-frame solenoid in an Enclosure. o AuImtwhi

Smttch (h

MCMXC1 All Rights Reserved

setwice conditions.

Limitations

For nmximurn valve amhiertf

!empcra[urcs, refer [o chwt. The Icrnpera[urc Iin]itations Iis[cd, only indica{e matimum application tempcra!ures for fiel(l wiring rated a! 9u” C. Check ca!filog numhcr prefix and W;III rating on nanlcpl:lte to de[ermilw maximum ambient tcm~raturc, See \aI\c ill>[all:llicm and mainlcn:lncc ins[ruc[ions for moximum fluid Icnlperature. NOTE: For sleam service, refer 10 B’irin,g scclion, Junc[ion Bo,r for Icmp--rarure ra[ing c)f supply wires. Temperature

Limitations

Valves

For Series 8016G at 6.1, 8.1, 9.1, 10.6,

Rated

Watt

Number

Solenoids

Coil

for use on

or 11.1 Watts

Class of

Catalog

Rating

Insulation

Maximum Ambient

Prefix

“F

None, FE. KF, KP SF, SP, SC, & SD

F

125

6.1, 8.1,

HE!,HT, KB. KH, SS. ST,SU, & ST

H

140

106

None. KF, SF, &SC

F

104

10,6

HT KH, SU. & ST

H

104

Thlinimum

ambient

Positioning _flissolenoid isdcsigncd

7

Temp.

61,8.1, 91, &11.1

and

OPERATION

solenoid.

as possible. Clean periodically depwsdingr)n Serirs 8600, 8601. and 8602 for strainem.

s.l, &ll.1

4X. Only solmtoids wilh 1/4” spade or screw tcrmirrals may have a junction box. The junction box provicfes a 1/2” conduit connection, grounding and spxfc orscrcw [crmirml conncctionswithin !hejunction box (See Figure 5). DIN Plug Cnnnwtor Kit No. K236-034 Use this kit only for solcrroids wi!h DIN terminals. The DIN plug connector kit provides a two pole with grounding contact DIN T@ 43650 construction (See Figure 6).

.

To protect the soltn,oid vol}e or opcrmtor, insta]l a straintr for the service in>olved in the inlet side as close co thevalvr

Temperisture

Optional Features For Type 1- General Purpose Construction Only . Junction Ilox box con=,truction

suitable

or operator See ASCO

green mlcrroid may be supplied with 1/4” spaJc. screw, or DIN It, rminals (Refer 10 Figore 4). l’anel hlounted Construction ‘I”hcsc solenoids are specifically dcsigrrccl to bc panel mounted by the cusmmcr through a panel having n .062 to .093 maximum wall Ihickrress. (Refrr 10 l:igurc 3 and section on lf[s~~ll(~(ion o{ PurrtJ ,%lwnled So[cnoid).

This junc[ion

i.

NOTE: Ilcse solenoids have an intern:ll non-reschhlc !hcrmat fuw I(I Ilrr:jt solenoid tcmperoture in the event Ihn[ extraordinary conditions mxur which could ci]uw excessive !empera!ures, These corrdiiion; include high inpu[ vull Jgc, a jammed core, cxccxitc amhicnt tempcr~lurc or a sh~~rlrd SO! CnL>iI_f, C[C. Thi S Uni~UC fC3[(lrC ij a $[iinlhrd ftatur~ t)fll)’ in SOkn(>id>!4i[tl

Ilc

.

in hararduus atmnsph~re where igniti, )n temperature 180” C. See namrplate/retainer for stnwice.

then

iemperaturc

to ~rform IIowever. for op!imum life and mrwnled vertically and upright to accumulating in Ihe solenoid base

-40°

F (-40”

C).

properly when mounted in anyposi{ion. performance, the solenoid should be reduce the possibility of foreign mailer sub-assembly area,

\\iring \Ylrirrg mus[ conlply with ]ocal codes and Ihe National Electrical Crxfe. .411 solenoids supplied with Ieod wires are provided with a grounding wire which is green or green wilh yellow stripes and a 1/2” conduit connec!iorr, TO facilitate wiring. the solenoid may be rotated 360°. For the watertight and explosion proof solenoid, electrical fillings must be approved for use in lhe approved hrmrdous locations.

Additional ●

Opco-Frame

Wring

Instructions

solenoid

with

For Optional

Features:

1/4” spade tt’rminals

For solenoids supplied with screw termirr.al connections use #12-18 AW’G slrarrdccf cop~rwire rated at 90 °Corgrealcr. Torque ;erminal bloekscrc~s IO 10 ~ 2 in-lbs [1,0 t 1,2 Nm]. A lopped hole is provided in the solenoid for grounding, use a # 10-32 machine screw. Torque grounding screw to 15 -20 in-lbs [ 1,7 -2.3 Nm]. On solenoids with xrew terminals, the socket

Page 1 of 4

head screw holding the tcrm!n~! hlc~k to thcscrlenoicf IS~hc grounding screw, Torque the screw to 15- 20 in-lhs [1,7 - 2,3 Nm]. with a 5/32” hex key wrench . Junctinn ‘IIw juncliorl

Box hox is used with sPadc or screw terminal

solenoids only and is ~rov]dcd V.l{h a grourrd!ng screw and a 1/2” conduit connection, Connect # 12-13 AWII stan~l~rd cop~r wir~ only to the ~rew terminids Within the iurrcticon h~x MC field w!re lhal is ral~d 90° Cor grcalcr for connections. For ~!cam service use l~5°C rated wire Up to SO psi or use 125° C rated wire at>,~ve 50 ps!. After clcctri~al h~x~kup, rcpla~~ cover gaskel, cover, and screw5, Tighten screws evenly in a cri.s’icros$ manner.

Cleaning Al! solenoid operators

and valves should he clcancd prwxlic:!lly 1 he lime hetwecn clclct, ~)n,ltll,)ns In general, If ihc voltage to the solcrroid I, c,lrrcct. \lugxI,lI volt, ~,pr:!ll[~n, excessive noise or leakage will indlca[c lha: clc, !n:ng ii ICLIIIIrCI1. f’lean strainer or fill~~rwhen clcarring [he vJl\t

Alaintenance Kctp the mmt!unl flowing through thu

Preventive

.

MJkil, NL] ()~tir,:{l, {d \Jlve as flee from dirl and foreign rrmlcrial a> (.Js, ~i W,J!Cillsi~c~i{m O( i:l~cr”rlal VJIVCparts for damage or excessilc wear is rcconlmcndcd. Thoroughly clean all parts. Replace any w,xn or r.l:]magccl parls

. .

.

DIS Plug Connector kit SO. K236-034 o~n-frame solenoid is proiicfcd wi[h DIN terminals IO 1. ~C accommwlate the DIN plug connector kit. -) Remove cenlcr screw from plug connector. Using a small ~rewdri~er, -. ply terminal block from connec[or cover. 3. Use #12-18 AWG s~randed cop~r wire rated at 90”C or greater for connections. Strip wire leads back approximately l/4’’ for installation in socket mrminals. The II= of wire-end skevcs is tslso recommended for [hdsc s[xkcl terminals. h[aximum length of wire-end sleeves to be ~PProximotcly 1/4”. Trnning of the ends of Ihe lead wires is no! recommended. 4 Thrc:id V.irc lhrough gland nut. gland gasket. washer. and connector cuvcr.

Causes of Improper Operutioo . l’.r111 IYcnntrnl Circuit: Check the clcc(:wal sys:em by tincrgl~ing the solenoid A mc!allic L./(ck signifies !h.+t lhc s~lcrroid is (:lwra[ing. Ahwnce of the click indicates loss of V>wer supply. Check f,)r Imxc or hl,)wn fuses. Opn-circuilcd or gruundcct solcn,>i,i, hr~,kc.n !C;ILIwires or spl Icc ctlnnccl inns, llurned-Out Solenoid: Check for open-circuited s[>lcn(,id. Replace if nec] keypad keys, and will be identified on the display. These include: 1.

Reservoir

pressure

2.

Separator

differential

3.

Resewoir

temperature

4.

System pressure

5.

Compressor

6.

Remaining

blowdown

7.

Remaining

auto time

discharge

the compressor. 2,

Relieve all air pressure.

3.

Disconnect,

4.

Perform necessary maintenance, maintenance log,

5,

Following service, put the enable switch in the down, “+” position,

6.

Restore power to the unit. The display will read: “SHUTDOWN-POWER FAILURE” (or “READY” if auto-restart is enabled).

7.

Press the [STOP/RESET] key, The display will indicate “READY” in the lower right hand corner.

8.

Press [ENTER].

pressure

temperature

tag, and lock out power supply. and record it on

The display will read:

“ENTER TO SETUP - AUTO TO SERVICE

time

Press [AUTO]. The display will read: “OIL FILTER – HOURS TILL CHANGE”

9.

Remaining blowdown and auto times are only available in Low Demand, Automatic, and Sequence modes, as appropriate.

10. Press [ENTER]. The display will read: “HOURS TILL NEXT OIL CHANGE”

If no keys are pressed for 5 seconds, the display will revert to its normal mode.

11. Press [ENTER]. If an advisory is present, it will be

The display is also used as a service reminder for normal maintenance items. When these conditions are sensed, the yellow “ADVISORY” light will come on, and the message will alternate with the normal lower line message. These messages are intended to advise of conditions that require service or may lead to a shutdown.

12.

Press [ENTER] to clear the adviso~. When all are cleared, the display will read: “ENTER TO SETUP – RESET TO EXIT’

13.

Press [STOP/RESETl state.

If a protective shutdown has occurred, the display indicate “SHUTDOWN” and the cause and the shutdown indicator will be lit. The compressor may be operated until the conditions are corrected and controller is reset.

will red not the

displayed at this time.

To prevent unauthorized programming, disconnect, tag, and lockout power supply and return the ENABLE switch to the up, SET position. Restore power, press [STOP/RESET] to place the controller into the READY state, and select an operating mode to start compressor operation. PROTECTIVE

SERVICE ADVISORIES The “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” controller turns on an advisory when it detects operation which needs service attention, but does not warrant shutting down the compressor. Some of these are normal maintenance procedures, and are intended to serve as a reminder to perform routine service. Others are conditions which can reduce the maximum compressor performance. It will remain in effect until reset. Check the display during routine inspections, and perform maintenance as suggested. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each advisory. Temperature advisories may be cleared while the unit is running by simply pressing the [ENTER] key. To reset the service advisories,

perform the following

steps: 1.

Press the [STOP/R ESETl key to stop operation of

13–9/1 0-647

to return to the READY

SHUTDOWNS

The “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” will shut down the unit following any fault detected in the following devices. Following a shutdown, a message will be displayed, with the top line indicating “SHUTDOWN” and the lower line indicating the cause, The shutdown light will be steadily lit if the cause still exists, or will flash if the cause has been cleared. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each shutdown. To resume operation, the cause of the shutdown must be corrected and the controller reset by pressing the [STOP/RESET] key. Motor Protective Devices - Overload heaters are furnished for the starter in the voltage range specified. There are three (3) overloads in the starter of proper size for the starter and its enclosure. Note that motor nameplate current must be multiplied by 0.577 for wyedelta starters. The display will indicate which overload relay has tripped. The overload relay is reset by press-

Page 27

ing the button on the relay itself, then the controller may be reset. Measure motor current (amps) and voltage in the affected motor wiring to locate the cause for high current. Overload relays provided in standard units are sensitive to both overload and phase imbalance for improved motor protection. Proper starter coil and contact action

and errors in operation with the cause displayed as a

are also monitored

will cause a shutdown starl error

High Temperature – The compressor is protected from high discharge temperature by a thermistor probe located in the c-ompressor discharge elbow. The “AUTO SENTRY’S’–ES” will shut the compressor down if temperature exceeds 225° F (or lower per user adjustment) or if rapid temperature rise is detected. Resetvoir / separator temperature is also monitored, and will provide high temp shutdowns. The location of the temperature fault will be displayed. Thermistor probes are also checked for open or shorted circuits, and the display will indicate the location of the defective probe.

~CAUTION Machine damage will occur if compressor is repeatedly restarted after high temperature stops operation. Find and correct the malfunction before resuming operation.

Separator Differential Pressure – The “AUTO SENTRY9–ES” continually monitors the pressure drop across the oil separator. The unit shuts down at a differential pressure of approximately 15 psid. This becomes active only after the compressor has been running and pressures have had time to stabilize. High Pressure – The “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” will first attempt to unload and blow down the unit if excessive pressures are detected in the reservoir or the plant system. If unsuccessful, a shutdown will occur. Shut down will also occur if a defective transducer is detected. The display will indicate the location of the high sensed pressure or transducer (xducer) error. Check that all adjustments have been properly made, and all connections are secure. Low Oil Pressure – The “AUTO SENTRY5–ES will shutdown the unit if inadequate oil reservoir pressure is detected after starting and loading. If this occurs, check the wiring and piping to the solenoid valves. Emergency Stop - Press the emergency stop button to shut down the unit and the controller. To restart, pull the button out to its normal position and reset the con-

13-9/1 3-617

troller. This should be used for emergency purposes only – use the keypad [STOP/RESET] for normal controlled stopping. Power Failure – Follov~lng power interruphons, the controller will remain in a shutdown state (unless programmed for auto restart), High Vibration (optional) – This optional feature will shut down the unit if abnormally high vibralion is detected. Connection Failure – The “AUTO SENTRY’S’–ES” controller checks input connectors and will shutdown if they become unplugged. Other Shutdowns – The controller runs continuous diagnostic checks of its own operation and the sensors to which it is connected. Refer to the sewice section for a complete listing of shutdowns and remedial actions. PROGRAMMING AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE AUTO SENTRY3-ES CONTROLLER All compressor control adjustments are made through the controller keypad. This provides a single location for all adjustments, coordinates all related controls, and eliminates the need for additional gauges and meters, The controller stores all adjustments digitally. These are permanent unless changed by further programming. General – Programming and setup is accomplished with the PROGRAM keys, In all steps, the [ENTER] key will cause the controller to accept the displayed value into memory and advance to the next programming function, The plus [+] and minus [–] keys will increase and decrease displayed numeric values, or step through menu selections, During numeric adjustments, the right [ < ] and left [ > ] arrow keys move the cursor (flashing digit) to the position desired. The number at the cursor will be the number that is changed by the [+] and [–] keys. At any point in the programming and setup routine, press the [STOP/RESET] key to exit and return to the READY state without altering the adjustment. In all steps of the programming the display will give a description programmed, while the bottom that is capable of being altered

routine, the top line of of the parameter to be line shows the variable by programming,

The following is a step by step guide to programming the “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” controller, Remember, between each step, it is necessary to press the [ENTER] key to store the new value and advance to the next step. Programming 1.

Steps:

The compressor must be stopped prior to making any adjustments. If the unit is running, press the [STOP/RESET] key to place the control in the

Page 28

“READY”

state.

NOTICE

Adjustments can also be performed from the After adjustments are “SHUTDOWN” state. completed, the “AUTO SE NTRY@–ES” controller returns to the this state until the cause is repaired and the controller is manually reset. 2.

3.

Press the [ENTER] key to begin programming, If the enable switch on the circuit board is in the set (up) position, the control proceeds to step 7 below. If the switch is in the “+” (down) position, the controller will display “ENTER TO SETUP – AUTO Press [ENTER] to go directly to TO SERVICE”, step 7 below. Press [AUTO] to perform the following steps.

Setting the value in step 8 to one indicates that no sequencing is to take place. Consequently, steps 9, 10, and 11, which relate to sequencing, are skipped by the “AUTO SENTRYz-

ES”; step

The display shows “OIL FILTER” and the hours remaining until the next advisory are displayed on the bottom line. Press [ENTER] to go to step 4 without any change.

The display shows “OIL CHANGE” and the hours remaining until the next adviso~ are displayed on the bottom line. Press [ENTER] to go to step 5 without any change.

If any semice advisories are in effect (yellow ADVISORY indicator is on), they will be displayed. Press [ENTER] to clear the advisory.

6.

The display will indicate “ENTER TO SETUP This indicates that all the RESET TO EXIT”. maintenance adjustments have been completed. Press [STOP/RESET] to go back to the READY state, or press [ENTER] to go on to step 7.

7.

The top line shows “DISPLAY UNITS”. The bottom line indicates “ENGLISH” (PSIG, Fahrenheit) or “METRIC” (Bars, Celsius) units of measurement. Select the desired display units and press [ENTER] to proceed.

8.

The top line displays “NUM OF SEQ UNITS”. The bottom line indicates a number in the range of one through eight. This will be factory set at “l”. Set this to a number corresponding to the number of compressors that are currently installed on this air system that also have “AUTO SENTRYO–ES controllers, It should be noted that all “AUTO SENTRY@3-ES” compressors on the system must have the same number programmed here to operate correctly in SEQUENCE mode.

13-9/10-647

at

This is the only setting which must be different for each member of a sequenced system. All other settings should normally be the same for all members.

10.

Press [AUTO] only if the oil change has been performed early. This will reset this timer back to the oil change interval (see step 20). 5.

commences

The top line displays “UNIT NUMBER”. The bottom line will again indicate a number of one through eight and be factory set at “l”. Each “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” in a sequenced system must have a unique number here, The sequence mode will not function if two or more compressors have the same UNIT NUMBER. Use low numbers for the most efficient machine–to-machine communications. Example: Use 1, 2, and 3 for a three compressor installation.

9.

Press [AUTO] only if the oil filter change has been performed early. This will reset this timer back to the oil filter interval (see step 19). 4.

Programming 12.

The top line displays “TRANSFER The bottom line indicates a number 1 to5000, It is factory set at 24. This of hours that this machine will stay “mastef ’ or “lead” compressor.

INTERVAL”. of hours from is the number in the role of

Normally it is desirable to set this to the same value on all sequenced units to equalize running hours. Different values may be programmed, if desired, to help equalize hours.

11. The

top line displays “LAG START DELAY”. The bottom line indicates a number from 15 to 600 seconds. It is factory set at 30. This is the length of time this machine will wait before starting when the pressure drops below the reset point. Set this to the same value for all sequenced units. Its setting will depend on the amount of air storage volume in the system. Too small a number will result in more compressors being started than is necessary to satisfy demand. See “Sequencing Compressors With The Auto Sentry” ES”, page 31, for more details on optimizing a sequenced installation.

12.

The top line displays “BLOWDOWN TIME”. The bottom line indicates a time between 5 and 20 minutes. It is factory set at 10 minutes. This is the minimum time interval between blowdowns. A longer blowdown time minimizes wasteful dumping of compressed air when loading is likely to occur in ashorltime. Longer periods also have been

Page 29

is to be set at the nameplate

shown to prevent oil foaming. 13,

The top line displays “AUTO line indicates

a time between

TIME”.

The bottom

5 and 20 minutes.

It too, is factory set at 10 minutes. Its function is to prevent frequent motor starting, and to allow the motor a ‘cool–down’ period before stopping.

17.

is disIn the top line, “RESET PRESSURE” played. The bottom hne will indicate a pressure value. This setting determines the point at which machine startup occurs in AUTO and SEQUENCE modes and when the compressor will load up from the blown down condition. Note that RESET PRESSURE can beset up to 5 PSI below SET PRESSURE. Set this lower to reduce compressor cycling. All sequenced machines must have the same SET and RESET PRESSURE setpoints.

18.

The top line displays “REMOTE STOP”. The bottOm line indicates either “TIMED” or “lMMEDlATE”. Refer to the description of “Remote On / Oft” later in this section for additional details. Select the desired response to the remote input and press [ENTER] to proceed.

19.

The top line displays “FILTER CHNG lNTERVAL”. The bottom line indicates a time interval of 500 to 1000 hours. After the machine has run for the programmed setting, an advisory will be displayed, requesting an oil filter change. Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to go on.

20.

The top line displays “OIL CHANGE lNTERVAL”. The bo~om line indicates a time interval of 1000 to 8000 hours, After the machine has run for the programmed setling, an adviso~ will be displayed, requesting an oil change, Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to proceed.

21,

The top line displays “OVERTEMP LIMIT”. The bottom line indicates 225° F. This is the maximum (and proper) setting for compressor operation. It may be temporarily lowered to verify the function of the temperature shutdown system.

22.

“FAN TYPE” is displayed next on the top line. Select “AIR COOLED” for units with packagemounted air coolers only. This will delay fan stafiup until the oil has warmed up in the package. Select “WATER COOLED” for water cooled units or any unit with a remote cooler. This will run the fan whenever the compressor motor runs.

23.

In the top line, “AUTO RESTART” is displayed. The bottom line will indicate either “OFF;’ or “ON”. The factory setting is “OFF”, and the controller will display a power failure shutdown after power has been restored.

In the top line, “STARTTIMER” is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 3 and 10 seconds. This is the time that the controller spends in the unloaded ‘start’ mode. This also controls the operation of package–mounted wyedelta starters, if so equipped. Set this adjustment for the amount of time needed for the motor to reach its highest speed while starting. This is typically 3 seconds for full–voltage starters, 7–9 seconds for wye–delta starters.

14.

If a remote–mounted, reduced voltage starter is used, set this adjustment 1–2 seconds longer than the starter’s internal timer. If the setup switch is in the up position, the controller returns to the READY state after this adjustment,

NOTICE Unit setup adjustments are normally required only at the time of unit installation. To prevent accidental access, these will not be available if the “SET” The switch is in the up position. “SET” switch is located beneath the power the

15.

transformer

left edge

of the

mounting main

circuit

plate

on

board.

If the switch is in the down position, “HI SYS PRES LIM” is displayed on the top line. The bottom line indicates a value that is factory set 20 – 25 PSI above name plate. This is the pressure that will cause a forced blowdown if approached due to a malfunction such as a stuck inlet valve or broken control line. The controller will shut down if this pressure is exceeded. The upper limits for the following two adjustments are based on the setting of the high system pressure limit. If necessary, the controller automatically reduces them following this step, and the display will briefly indicate “ADJUSTING PSETAND PRES”.

16.

In the top line, “SET PRESSURE” is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a pressure value. It

13-9/10-647

rating of the compres-

Under NO circumsor for normal operation. stances, is this adjustment to be set in excess of the compressor nameplate pressure. It may be set lower, if desired, to reduce pressure and power consumption.

Set this feature to ON when it is necessary to have the compressor automatically restart after a power interruption. There will be a brief delay, then the

Page 30

brate the transducer output to viously, pressure measurement ‘zeroing’ is done with pressure If large errors are detected, the

control resumes the mode it was in prior to the interruption. This feature shall only be enabled

when the owner determines that it is safe to do so. It is recommended that compressor access be limited to only trained service personnel when this feature is used. This step happens only if the AUTO RESTART function was set to ON in step 23. The top line displays “RESTART TIME”. The bottom line indicates a time between 5 and 60 seconds. It is factory set at 10seconds. This is the amount of delay introduced before restarting after power has been restored to ensure a stable supply and staggered stanting. Adjust to any value per user preference.

24.

The top line displays “AIR END TYPE”. The bottom line indicates either “TURNVALVE” or “NON TURN VALVE”. Set as appropriate for the compressor.

25.

In the top line, “SYSTEM VOLUME” is displayed. The bottom line may be selected as “SMALL”, “MEDIUM”, or “LARGE”. This tunes the response of the modulation control loops to optimize loop stability. It is factory set to MEDIUM. Set as follows:

26.

SMALL if estimated volume is less than .25 gallon per CFM. MEDIUM if estimated volume is between .25 and 1.0 gallon per CFM. LARGE if estimated gallon per CFM.

volume is greater than 1.0

NOTICE This setting is not critical. When set to its most appropriate value, the controller will maintain discharge at the closest possible value. If not set correctly, pressure will vary from the desired setpoint to a somewhat greater degree but the compressor and its components will not be adversely affected.

27.

The top line displays “REMOVE SYS PRESS”. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed at the package discharge. At this point steps must be taken to ensure that system pressure is really zero psig. Remove the line to the system pressure transducer. Pressing [ENTER] will now cause the “AUTO SENTRY@–ES to cali-

13-9/1 0-647

mand

that the transducer

zero P.SIG. Oberrors will occur if at the transducer.

controller be checked.

will de-

28.

The top line shows “REMOVE RES PRESS”. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed in the reservoir. The reservoir pressure transducer may now be ‘zeroed’ by following the steps outlined in 27 above.

29.

The display now reads “PRESS CNST RUN TO JOG MOTOR”. Press the [CONSTANT RUN] key to briefly energize the starters, and rotate the compressor 1/4 to 1–1/2 revolutions to allow a rotation check, This is limited to three tests.

30

This completes the programming and setup procedures for the “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controller. Press the [STOP/RESET] key to return the compressor to the READY state.

OTHER CONTROL

FEATURES

Auto Restart After Power Failure – The “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controller normally displays “SHUTDOWN – POWER FAILURE” after power has been interrupted and restored. Press the [STOP / RESET] key and select an operating mode to restart the compressor. If programmed for automatic restart, The “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controller pauses and begins counting down when power is restored. This time is adjustable in the programming steps noted above. This must be at least several seconds, but maybe set Iongerto allow other plant loads to start up first. After the countdown is complete, the “AUTO SENTRY@-ES” controller resumes the mode of operation prior to the power interruption, SEQUENCING COMPRESSORS SENTRY@’–ES”

WITH THE “AUTO

General – The sequencing mode is used to operate multiple compressors in a common plant air system. The individual units operate similarly to operation in the automatic mode, except that the setpoints are under control of the sequencing system, One of the units assumes the role of a master, with the remainder of the control distributed among the individual “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controllers and compressor units. Communications between the controllers keep the system coordinated. Sequencing is intended to start, run, unload, blowdown, and stop compressors in response to changes in demand during the day or week. The “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” controller is designed for systems of two through eight compressors piped into a common air receiver for distribution to the plant. In any such system, the receiver is an important part of the application; it supplies air to the plant and allows

Page 31

compressor units to be unloaded and stopped. This stored reserve eliminates the need tooperate’’spinning

reserve” of unloaded compressors. This storage may bean air receiver, or maybe the volume of air in a large distribution system. In either case, the compressors must be piped to this volume with a minimum of restricThe control system will operate only as many tion.

compressors

as are needed to supply the CFM de-

mand of the plant, and to maintain tem pressure programmed

the compressor

between the SET and RESET into the controllers.

sys-

pressures

The “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controllers are completely set up to operate this system. The only required additional part is the cable which runs from controller to controller. A kit, 200 EAP752, is available which contains all material needed to sequence up to five compressors, This kit contains 500 feet of cable, eight modular connectors, and a crimping tool to install the connectors.

NOTICE Though similar in operation and installation, this sequencing system is designed specifically for the “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controller. Communications cables should not be connected to compressor units with “AUTO SENTRY@ –ES+” controllers part numbers 200 EAU1173, 300 EAU1173, or 301 EAU1173. Multiple compressors with each type controller may be operated as independent groups piped to the same plant demand.

In spite of the fact that it is a standard feature and its inherent installation simplicity, the sequencing function of a multi–compressor “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” system contains all necessary functions for operation. Compressor System – A proper sequencing installation requires two or more Gardner–Denver rotary air compressors complete with “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” controllers, piped into a common air system, interconnected as described above. Connect the units directly to a common header and receiver, without any intervening dryers, filters, or other restrictions, There should be no check valves or other devices which isolate a member from the air system. During operation, be sure that any unit is taken out of the sequence mode before closing its service valve,

13-9/1 0-6-$7

The receiver should also be sized to prevent excessive drops or rapid rises in pressures during the operation really applies as described below, Note that “receiver” to the entire storage volume of a physical receiver and the volume of the air dlstrlbutlon throughout the plant, Modulating systems work best when the receiver is at least one gallon for the rated CFM of a member compressor in the system (the largest if they differ). Note that when demand exceeds the capacity of the running unit(s), there will bea delay until the next unit starts and delivers additional air. The stored air serves the plant during this period. With a properly sized receiver, pressure changes on a receiver gauge should be very slow and gradual. All standard practices common to sound air compressor installations such as proper sizing of piping, proper electrical supply and conductor sizing, and grounding are to be observed, Run the compressors in the system in Automatic mode for at least one week to evaluate system performance. Sequencing installation – Once the compressor system is set up, sequencing compressors with the “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” controller is as simple as plugging in a telephone to a wall jack. The only item required to make the system functional is a cable similar to a phone cable. The cable and connectors used in kit 200 EAP752 have been specially selected to meet the needs of an industrial application, One less cable than the number of compressors to be sequenced is required. For example. to sequence four compressors, three cables are required. The serial communications interface meets RS-485 standards, the most widely used interface in harsh, industrial environments today. However, the communications cables should be routed through metallic conduit to provide them with both mechanical protection and electromagnetic shielding. Do not run the communications cable in a conduit with other wiring. Each controller has two modular jacks which accept RJ–12 telephone plugs, located on the side of the controller, One jack is vacant, the other has a short pigtail plugged into it, To interconnect two compressors, plug the cable into the vacant jack on each controller. For installations of more than two units, the pigtail plug must be disconnected on all controllers except the two at each end of the communications line. The order of interconnection has no effect on the system operation. The following conditions are necessary and sufficient for proper operation: 1.

Every compressor must have a cable connecting it to another compressor. One less cable than the number of units sequenced must be used.

2.

Each board that has only one cable connected to it must have its pigtail plugged into the unused jack, All installations will have two such units.

Page 32

Program all members of the system, as described in the programming procedure on previous pages. All adjustments

should

be identical

for each member,

except

done by the individual compressors. Instead, they will wait until the master assigns them a rotation number.

for unit number. The sequencing system will make any necessary adjustments to the setpoints to properly run the compressed air system.

Rotation numbers are displayed in the bottom display line, with the mode indication. For example, the mode indication for the current master is SEQ1 ; for the first lag compressor, SEQ2; second lag, SEQ3,

Operation

2.

1.

ESTABLISHING

THE INITIAL

SEQUENCE

Press the [SEQUENCE] key on each of the compressors to start operation of the sequenced system. Since the sequencing algorithm includes provisions for automatic replacement of a failed master or ‘lead’ compressor, it is important for the operator to be aware of the hierarchy of events when starting the system. The first compressor placed into sequence mode will become the master. However, since any compressor first placed into sequence has no way of knowing whether a master exists, it will first assume the highest rotation number available. For example, if the number of units to be sequenced is programmed at four, any compressor will start out in position four when placed in sequence mode. It will then listen on the communications line for a call from the master. If no call is received, it will assume position three and again wait for a call from the master. After another lack of a master call, it assumes position two. Subsequently, it assumes position one, which makes it the master. As soon as a master is established, it immediately attempts to call all other units and assigns them successive rotation positions. The system is now active. Before a master is established, the system is not deprived of air. This is due to one of the outstanding features of the “AUTO SENTRY8–ES” sequencing system: pressure control is always executed locally at each compressor. The effective setpoint for compressor control is the programmed setpoint minus 3 ● (rotation number – 1). So while a compressor is counting down towards establishing a master, it is also capable of delivering air at a pressure determined by the above formula. To ensure that two or more machines do not simultaneously decrement their rotation numbers and simultaneously become masters, place the desired master in sequence mode first and wait until the first decrement in rotation number is seen (about 7 seconds). Then place subsequent compressors in sequence mode. To dictate the complete initial sequence manually, wait until the previous machine decrements one position and then place the next desired compressor in sequence mode, To let the master determine the initial sequence, simply wait until the master has decremented its rotation number once, and then place all remaining compressors in sequence mode. Remember that once a master is established, no further self–decrementing is

13-9/1 O-647

HOW THE “AUTO SE NTRY=–ES” CONTROLS PRESSURE WHILE SEQUENCING

Each compressor operates exactly the same as if it were in AUTO mode with one exception: it has a dynamic setpoint. The initial setpoint is determined by the equation shown above. A compressor starts when the system pressure drops below its programmed reset point, after waiting for [ ‘LAG START INTERVAL’ times (rotation number - 1)] seconds. This prevents all lag compressors from starting at once. Note that a compressor’s [’LAG START INTERVAL times (rotation number – 1)] timer is not reset to zero until that compressor is started or until another unit in the system stops. This means that the time for the next lag compressor to come on may be somewhat less than ‘LAG START INTERVAL’. EXAMPLE: In a three compressor sequence system, SET PRESSURE = 100 PSI; RESET PRESSURE =90 PSI; LAG START INTERVAL = 15 seconds. The lead compressor is running alone, maintaining 100 PSI by modulation when an air tool comes on line and causes the air demand to exceed the capacity of the lead compressor. When the pressure drops to 90 PSI, the #2 unit times out its 15 second timer and starts. It takes 5 additional seconds for the pressure to rise above 90 PSI. The #3 unit whose timer was initially set at 30 seconds (15x [3 – l]), has counted down 20 seconds (the total time that system pressure was below 90 PSI). If air demand increases again, the pressure will have to fall below 90 PSI for only 10 seconds more to start unit #3, As was previously stated, a lag compressor’s modulation setpoint (PSET for short) is [SET PRESSURE – 3(rotation number – l)]. Thus in the above example, the first lag compressor (rotation #2) has a PSET of 97 PSI; the second lag, 94 PSI, and so on. But look what happens in an eight compressor installation: The eighth compressor will have an initial setpoint of [100 – 3(8 – l)], or 79 PSI. Does this mean that an eight compressor installation must operate 21 PSI below the desired operating point when all compressors are running? NO! This is where the “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” dynamic setpoint control takes over. This is how it works: Whenever the system pressure is below the programmed RESET PRESSURE, the PSET of each lag compressor is incremented 1 PSI every thirty seconds. Thus, after a short interval (about five minutes in this example), the PSET of the last sequenced compressor will climb until either it equals the RESET PRESSURE, or a decrease in demand causes the ac-

Page 33

tual system pressure to rise above the RESET PRESSURE. The “AUTO SENTRY@ –ES”, with its dynamic

setpoint control, will maintain system pressure between the limits of RESET PRESSURE and SET PRESSURE. Remember, RESET and SET PRESSURE values are programmed by the operator so the operating range is completely programmable and predictable. Dynamic setpoint control will also work in reverse of the operation described above. Obviously, incrementing setpoints will cause overlap of the compressors’ modulation ranges. While this enables us to maintain a higher pressure than competitor’s sequencers, overlap is undesirable as demand decreases, because a system could end up with several compressors running partially loaded instead of running the minimum number of fully loaded compressors. To overcome this, as pressure rises through the range between RESET and SET, the lag compressors’ PSET’S are now decremented. This reverses the effect described above during periods of high demand. The “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” keeps track of all functions so there is never any mix–up of setpoints and the proper rotation sequence is always maintained.

The Automatic

Sequence

Change

A controller will be the master (lead) compressor for the time programmed as TRANSFER INTERVAL. Then it assigns itself the highest available rotation number. The lag compressors detect the loss of the master and becomes decrement their rotation numbers. Number2

number 1, the new master; number3 2, etc.

becomes number

Whenever the master detects a missing rotation number, such as when a compressor is turned off that was previously in the rotation, it will automatically ‘close the

gap’ by decrementing the rotation numbers of all compressers whose rotation numbers were greater than the missing number. Likewise, if for whatever reason, the master compressor fails to carry out its role, all lag compressors begin decrementing their rotation number until a new master is established. Regardless of the scenario, the result will always be that the compressors that remain in rotation will always end up with the Iowest possible rotation numbers. Other Features Any air system will exhibit pressure differences from one point to the next. Even a well–designed multi– compressor installation will show ‘minor’ pressure variations between one compressor’s discharge point and another compressor’s discharge. These points will also vary from the central system (normally the air storage receiver). The “AUTO SENTRY@–ES” sequencing system is designed to tolerate minor variations. These pressure differences wreak havoc with conventional sequencers. Central sequencers sense a lower

13-9/[ 0-647

pressure

than is seen at each compressor,

With such

systems, there is always a chance that the sequencer could cause a compressor to over pressure due to this

pressure drop. The alternative has been to set the central sequencer to a lower pressure to prevent this or allow local override of the sequencer by the local pressure control, neither of which is desirable in the scheme of maintaining plant pressure efficiently with sequencing, The “AUTO SE NTRY:–ES” sequencing system will automatically adjust the system to prevent over pressures in any individuals, The “AUTO SENTRY3–ES” sequencing system lets each compressor control itself independently about a setpoint (PSET) derived to cause staggered operation, or sequencing, The aforementioned pressure drops can also cause derogatory effects (mainly skewed, or out of sequence operation) to the sequencing algorithm used by the “AUTO SENTRY8–ES”, Since these pressure variations are not constant (they will vary duetodemand changes, compressor load percentage changes, and number of compressors running), any scheme to compensate for the pressure variations must be dynamic. The exclusive dynamic setpoint control feature accomplishes this error correction scheme rather easily. Here’s how it works: The master continually receives system pressure values from every machine in the sequence rotation. The values are averaged and this average is distributed to all lag compressors. All compressors, lead and lag, then compare their local pressure reading to the average and adjust their PSET by the amount of error. The effect is that all compressors are controlling to a single pressure reading, a reading that is not one that is picked up somewhere removed from the compressor, discharge pressures.

but an average

of actual

The pressure displayed on the top line by all sequenced compressors is this average. CONNECTION

TO EXTERNAL

CONTROLS

The “AUTO SENTRYS–ES” controller offers interconnection points for external controls and indicators. This allows simple connection to remote controls and indicaters, or integration into any plantwide controls system. Remote On / Off – Remote on–off control of the systern requires only a simple two-wire control, with an isolated contact suitable for 120 volts, 1 amp. This may be a switch, a timer contact, a relay contact, or a PLC output. To connect, simply run the two wires to the control enclosure, remove the jumper between terminal 6 and terminal 9 on the terminal strip, and connect the two wires to terminal 6 and terminal 9. The air compressor will operate normally in its selected mode whenever this contact is closed (turned on). Note that the keypad is always the master control; the

Page 34

mode must be selected at the keypad, and the remote is not capable of starting a unit after the [STOP/RESETl key has been pressed to place the controller in the READY state. When the contact is opened (turned off), operation depends on how the controller has been programmed and what it is doing prior to opening the contact.

operating

If the compressor was already stopped in automatic or sequence modes, it will remain stopped and will not restart until the contact is closed. The display will flash STOP” to indicate that it is the message “REMOTE waiting for the remote signal. If the compressor was running in any mode when the contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for “IMMEDIATE”, the compressor will immediately unload, blowdown and stop the motors. The unit is then in the “REMOTE STOP” mode as indicated above. If the compressor was running in any mode when the contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for “TIMED UNLOAD”, the compressor will immediately unload and blowdown. It will then continue to run unloaded for whatever period has been programmed for “AUTO TIME” (or will complete the remaining auto time if already blown down). After completion, the motors will stop, and the unit will be in the “REMOTE STOP” mode as indicated above. This is the preferred setting for automatic remote controls that may cycle in less than 1/2 hour, as the motor is always cooled evenly and rapid start cycles are prevented.

When the remote is turned back on, the unit will start immediately in the CONSTANT or LOW DEMAND

13-WIQ-64?

modes. Loading in these modes, or starting in AUTO or SEQUENCE modes will occur when the pressure drops below the set pressure. Alarm Relay - The “AUTO SENTRYq–ES” controller provides an alarm relay that maybe connected to a remote mounted indicator light, horn, or into a PLC input of a plantwide control system, The contact is commercial rated 2 ampsat 120volts. The relay turns on whenever there is a shutdown condition requiring service at the compressor, and remains off during normal operation, stopping, or power off conditions. The external connections from the controller are from an isolated form C (single–pole, double–throw) contact. This allows control of either a “compressor okay” or a “compressor shutdown” remote indicator. To use this relay, connect the supply wire for the remote circuit to terminal 21 (relay common) on the terminal strip. Connect a wire to the indicator from either terminal 19 (normally open) or from terminal 20 (normally closed). Connect the other side of the indicator to its neutral. Serial Communications in sequence,

- If units are NOT connected the serial port is available forcommunica-

tions of compressor data to external monitoring systems. Data available include all pressures and temperatures, and a report of internal service data. This is accessible with a PC or PLC with an RS-485 communications port. For protocol information, request draw-

ing 200 EAP1255. Wiring Diagrams – The following wiring diagram shows connections in typical units. Refer to the wiring diagram shipped with the compressor unit for actual connections.

Page 35

,,.}... IUIK

WI(S

w

101

,MIK8C1 Slal

Q ,,

‘tJ #J

!!E3i-

T I

“:%

‘“”~E#x=i!O’

m,. mu,

.01[

,, 10R”

C OH”

CO.l AC~ 10S “!{

i,

O1”[M $“”TDow

CO”lACI oMnA1[$IOU 0.1”0 Co”m[sloa

,,,,”0.

,1,”.[, F 4., MOI1 2, 10, “$1 .,1” OPIIO”U VI UA!IO. S.IICH ,t”o”t WC, W,9![” ,M”, ”!l, , , , co”,(C, “c. “mm,,, ” ,.!,,” C., ,,(1 ,, Hm,Uu, 1 & ,. llO1t 3 101 COMI, OL 11 MMO1[ COlll ACl, ,[MOV[ NW[i 1[1-[, l[RM!,U! , L , CO.*LCI CO, lAC1 10 11,”,”,, s , , , “,,1 * m,, , M,, M ,,, “,1 w 0,110. M CO. MW#CA1t O.S CAUC ,01, > -.(, A -.1[” ,O”l*M %0,(.080 WA,.[ 1, ,,[0 .,”[ ,. ,f””, ”.,, ,, i !0

l[O[”B A,, ,,” ,“, ,,0

Kc.

rimz

cl- ‘0’”’’”0” 0- PU,,

,,””I”U

=

I [UL

L-.x_

Ill

Nv

,,[ f,, l[e ,Acum WIC” - SLOW,.” $0, [.,,0 ,Jl,[ - ,“, [1 “AI, ( moi[ 10 L[”O, B !*Y[ I.L(l “.,., w,. !,!,,0,0 ,, L,,

m,, cm,

‘rl, ,7

!40,,,

w%

I

0 In la

I

I

I

I

k.

I

J

I

.,- .,.,.

202 EAQ546-C (Ref. Drawing)

-1[

A

6UM mclulul

FIGURE 2-2 -

WIRING

DIAGRAM

‘t

,

II

w

,0’/(’ ,

‘0 C“’(’M“A*’

10

?

a

11 +--W

- ES CONTROLLER

-U

B

MU[1OOU

1mMt8T01 aumvolm

I

I

I

a I

I

1

I

8

lKWHIM 1CCUUS80U

A

TROUBLE DISPLAY

SHOOTING

AUTO SENTRYS

ES CONTROLLER

MODES

The normal display indicates the package service pressure, the airend discharge, the total running hours, and one of the following operating modes. The green light will be on for any operating mode, whether the compressor is running or not. READY

The compressor

has been stopped by pressing the [STOP/RESET]

CON

The compressor

is operating in the Constant Run mode.

LDM

The compressor

is operating in the Low Demand mode.

AUTO

The compressor

is operating in the Automatic

mode.

SEQ n

The compressor

is operating in the Sequence

mode.

key.

The following alternate displays may be called by pressing a cursor [c] or [>] key SYS PRES

The pressure at the service connection

RES PRES

The pressure in the oil reservoir

DIF PRES

The pressure drop across the air/oil separator

TOT HRS

The total hour of compressor

DIS TMP

The temperature

at the airend discharge

RES TMP

The temperature

in the reservoir/

BD TMR

The time remaining before a blowdown will be allowed

running

(Low Demand, Auto, Sequence AUTO TMR

TROUBLESHOOTING

Modes)

The time remaining of unloaded motor operation (Auto, Sequence

ADVISORY

separator

Modes)

GUIDE

All advisories are indicated on the keypad by a yellow indicator in the Status area, and one of the following messages alternating with the normal lower line display. Perform service or maintenance as indicated, then clear the advisory as instructed on page 27. Message

Action

Needed

CHNG AIR FILTER

Excessive vacuum has been detected after the air filter, indicating it has become full, Change the air filter to ensure maximum air delivery.

CHNG SEPARATOR

The differential pressure across the air/oil separator has risen to over 8 psid. Change the separator to ensure maximum performance.

CHNG OIL FILTER

The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last filter replacement. Change the filter to ensure an adequate flow of lubricant.

CHANGE OIL

The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last oil change. If high operating temperatures are encountered, the “AUTO SENTRY”–ES” controller will automatically adjust the time interval for the change oil advisory. Change the oil to ensure lubricant quality.

13-9/1 0-647

Page 37

ADVISORY

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE (Continued)

Message

Action

Needed

HIGH TEMP OPER

The temperature was greater than 210° F (99’ C) at the airend discharge or the separator. Ensure that the compressor receives adequate cooling air or water, and that the coolers are not plugged,

LOW AMB TEMP

The temperature separator.

was less than 40’

Ensure

F (4’ C)

that the compressor

at the

is located

airend discharge or the in a room kept above

freezing.

SHUTDOWN

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

All shutdowns are indicated on the keypad by the word “SHUTDOWN” on the top line of the display, and one of the following messages on the lower line of the display. The red indicator in the Status area will be steadily lit while the conditions exist, and will flash after the condition has been corrected. Perform service as indicated. Press the [STOP/RESETl key to clear the shutdown.

Action

Message CHANGE

SEPARATOR

Needed

The differential pressure across the air / oil separator has risen to over 15 psid. Change the separator to ensure maximum compressor performance,

CHECK CN7

All inputs at connector 7 of the controller are off. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out. Plug the connector back in firmly,

CHECK CN8

120 volts has been removed from ALL inputs to connector 8 of the controller. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out. Plug the connector back in firmly.

EMERGENCY

STOP

The Emergency Stop button has been pressed, Pull it back out to its normal position. If the button has not been pressed, check that the contact block is firmly mounted in the right or left (not center) position of the operator, Check for loose connections which would remove 120 volts from connector 8–8 of the controller.

FAN OVERLOAD

The motor overload relay for the fan motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped. This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse). Disconnect and lock out power, open the box, and press the reset button – it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating. If overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 8–1 of the controller.

FAN START ERROR (while stopped)

The controller has attempted to turn off the fan, but is still receiving a return signal from the starter’s auxiliary contact. Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter.

FAN START ERROR (while running)

The controller has attempted to start the fan, but did not receive a return signal from the starter’s auxiliary contact. If the starter does not pick up when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but this message appears, check that the auxiliafy contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 3.

13-9/1 N47

Page 38

SHUTDOWN

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE (Continued)

Message

Action

Needed

HIGH DISCH TEMP

This indicates that the controller has detected temperature in excess of the programmed high temperature limit, ora high temperature rate of rise, at the airend discharge. The most common cause for this is inadequate package cooling. Ensure proper air flow for aircooled units, or adequate water for watercooled units. Monitor temperature carefully during restarts after servicing.

HIGH RESVR PRESS

Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. This shutdown will occur if a loss of pneumatic controls occurs. Check the inlet valve, all control piping, solenoid valves, and all other control devices to find the cause for the inlet valve not closing. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit.

HIGH RESRVR TEMP

This indicates that the controller has detected temperature in excess of the programmed high temperature limit, ora high temperature rate of rise, at the air/oil separator. The most common cause for this is inadequate package ventilation. Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing.

HIGH SYSTEM PRESS

Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. The most likely cause is other, higher pressure compressors on the same air system; separate these from this compressor unit. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit.

HIGH VIBRATION

120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch.

LOW OIL PRESS

The controller has attempted to start and load the compressor, but pressure is not building up in the oil reservoir. This may indicate either a failure of the motor to turn the compressor, or a failure of the inlet valve to open. If the latter, check also the wiring and piping to solenoid valves IVO and IVC; these are both turned on to load up the compressor.

MAIN OVERLOAD

The motor overload relay for the main compressor drive motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped, This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse). Disconnect and lock out power, open the box, and press the reset button – it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating. If overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 8–2 of the controller.

MAIN START ERROR (while stopped)

The controller has attempted to turn off the compressor, but is still receiv– ing a return signal from the starter’s auxiliary contact. Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter.

MAIN START ERROR (while running)

The controller has attempted to start the compressor, but did not receive a return signal from the starter’s auxiliary contact. If the starter does not pick up when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but the message appears, check that the auxiliary contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 4.

13-9110-647

Page 39

SHUTDOWN

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE (Continued)

Message

Action

OPEN THERM

The controller has detected an open connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge, or (B) separator. This normally indicates a loose or broken connection at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection, This could also be indicating a broken wire or thermistor probe, This may also occur from excessively low temperature,

OPEN XDUCER

Signal voltage has fallen too low at transducer: (A) Final discharge, or (B) Reservoir. This error is frequently the result of the transducers being improperly zeroed. Disconnect the air lines to the transducers and follow the procedure indicated in the adjustment instructions. This may also indicate a loose connection of the red wire to the transducer or a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary.

POWER FAILURE

The power to the compressor unit has been turned off and back on. Press [STOP/RESET] and select an operating mode.

SHORTED THERM

The controller has detected a shorted connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge or (B) separator. This normally indicates a faulty connection (e.g. wire strands touching) at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection, This could also be indicating a damaged wire or thermistor probe.

SHORTED XDUCER

Signal voltage has exceeded approximately 4,6 volts at transducer: (A) Final discharge or (B) Reservoir. This may indicate a loose connection of the black wire to the transducer or a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary,

CONTROLS

TROUBLESHOOTING

Needed

GUIDE

The following are recommended service actions. Observe all instructions cal service is to be petiormed only by a qualified electrician.

Recommended

Symptom No display, compressor

Compressor

stopped.

will not start.

Display indicates “NOT BLOWN DOWN”

noted elsewhere in this manual. All electri-

Action

Check incoming power to the compressor unit. Ensure that the disconnect is on and that fuses have not blown (or circuit breaker tripped). If power is being properly supplied to the control box, check the fuses located at the fan starter, the control transformer fuses, and the fuse located on the Auto Sentry”-ES controller chassis near connector CN-6, To operate, the controller must be placed into an operating mode (e.g. “AUTO”); press the [STOP/RESET] to put the control in the READY state, then select a mode with the operating mode keys. In AUTOMATIC and SEQUENCE modes, compressors will not start until the pressure drops below the reset pressures, The controller prevents attempts to start the main motor if the reservoir pressure is over 5 psig (.35 Bar). Pressure continues to be relieved from the reservoir while this message is on, and the compressor will start automatically after the pressure has dropped. If this message remains with NO pressure in the reservoir, follow the transducer zeroing procedure found in the controls adjustment section.

“13-9/1 0-647

Page 40

CONTROLS

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

Recommended

Symptom Display indicates ‘(REMOTE STOP”

The controller

Action is provided

with an input for user-furnished

trols. This display indicates that 120

remote

con-

is removed from terminal 6 of the terminal strip. Check all connections of the facto,~) installed jumper, or the customer–provided controls, if applicable. volt

Display indicates “SHUTDOWN”

If the display indicates “SHUTDOWN”, refer to the shutdown troubleshooting section for assistance. In addition to the messages shown, there are several internal and system diagnostics periormed by the controller. Consult the factory for additional assistance.

Compressor runs, but does not load

In the CONSTANT RUN and LOW DEMAND modes, the compressor will not load until the pressure drops below reset pressure. Refer to the operating instructions for further information. If pressure is below the reset pressure, check that the inlet valve operates freely, Check that the IVO and IVC valves are wired and operating properly.

Compressor runs, unloads at low pressure

If the inlet valve closes at low pressure, check the wiring to the blowdown valve and the piping and check valves in its discharge line.

Compressor modulate

The Auto Sentry”-ES controller operates the inlet valve to maintain pres– sure near the set pressure, matching delivery to demand, If the pressure continues to rise above set pressure, check that the inlet valve operates freely, and that control air is supplied to the WC valve, If modulation does not close the valve, it will be closed during a blo~vdown as pressure approaches the high pressure limit.

does not

Compressor cycles rapidly between load and unload

The external air receiver should be sized appropriately to prevent rapid cycles. The rapid response time in CONSTANT RUN mode will operate with small receivers, but any plant air system will operate more efficiently with adequately sized storage. Refer to the operating instructions for further information,

Display is illegible

Extra segments or “ghosting” of characters indicates damage probably from excessive high voltage, Replace the controller, and install protection to prevent further damage to electrical equipment,

Erratic pressures in SEQUENCE only

The sequencing system transmits low–level signal between units to com– municate pressures. Units must be properly grounded to a good ground system, the communications cable should use only appropriate quality cable, and the cable should be run in its own conduit.

Compressor cycles rapidly in SEQUENCE mode only

In the sequence mode, the operating system requires all compressors be piped directly to receiver, such that all transducers sense the same pressure, Check valves or restrictions between compressors and the storage will cause system instability. Run units in AUTOMATIC mode until the system is corrected.

LOW OIL PRESSURE in SEQUENCE mode only

If this shutdown occurs in the sequence mode only, it indicates instability due to rapid changes in pressure of the system. Remove restrictions between the compressor and receiver, increase receiver size if necessary to slow down the pressure swings.

Pressure

Accuracy of the pressure display and controls requires that the controller and transducers be calibrated together. This MUST be done with no pressure at the transducer, or errors will occur. This is easiest to check with all pressure removed. All pressure displays should indicate O psi (0,0 Bar) +/– 1 PSI. If the display indicates greater pressures, recalibrate the system as instructed in the configuration adjustments. Note: reservoir pressure may drop below zero psig when the compressor is stopped, but will return slowly to zero as the vacuum is relieved.

display error

13–9/1 O-647

Page 41

SECTION 3 REMOTE–MOUNTED

MAIN MOTOR STARTERS

CONNECTION OF REMOTE-MOUNTED MOTOR STARTERS TO ES CONTROL

MAIN SYSTEMS

The majority of our rotary screw compressor packages feature starters completely wired and tested at the factory, Some special applications and large units, however, do not have the main motor starter mounted on the package. The following information describes special requirements for applications with a remote–mounted main starter. Starter Regardless required: ●

of starter type or brand, the following are

The starter must have its own fused control circuit (and control transformer, if required for the starter).

●

The starter must have provision for connection to a two–wire control circuit.

●

The starter must have an isolated normally-open auxiliary contact.

Installation

(dry contact)

and Wiring

The starter should be mounted and wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s instructions. Wiring from the load terminals of the starter to the motor should include flexible conduit to the motor junction box to allow for normal movement of the motor in the package. The compressor package control box must have If own disconnect and overcurrent protection. package has a fan, the wiring should be sized for fan horsepower and voltage. If the package does include former.

a fan, the only package

its the the not

Connect the starter auxiliay contact to the compressor control box. When connecting this contact, make sure that no other wires are connected to it in the starter it has to be an isolated contact. These two wire connect to terminals 4 & 9 on standard packages, Use the pair of red wires; this is powered from the compressor control panel control transformer. Controls

Checkout

Lock the disconnect switch for the starter in the open position. Energize the compressor package control panel. If the display indicates “SHUTDOWN - MAIN START ERROR”, “SHUTDOWN – MOTOR CONTACT,” or “SHUTDOWN - MAIN STRT CONTCT”, the starter auxiliary contact is disconnected. Remove all power and correctly wire as indicated above. Enter the adjustments menu and perform a jog to check for proper fan rotation. If it is incorrect, disconnect power and switch two of the three wires to the fan motor. Restore power to the control box when done. With the main motor power still disconnected, press the [CONSTANT RUN] key. After a brief delay, The control should stop and display “SHUTDOWN –MAIN START ERROR”, “SHUTDOWN - MOTOR STARTER” ,or “SHUTDOWN – MAIN STARTER”. This properly indicates that the starter did not function because it is turned off by the disconnect switch.

load is the control trans-

Install a separate conduit from the starter to the package control box for control wiring. Label and pull four

control wires through this conduit. Since two separate supplies are involved, run one pair of red wires and one pair of yellow wires for identification. Controls

the control relay contact in the control box to the starter terminals for two–wire control. The terminals are identified in the control box as 40 & 41 on standard packages. Refer to the starter instructions for identification of the control terminals for two-wire control. Use the pair of yellow vjires to indicate that this circuit is from a different source.

Connect

Connections

Disconnect and remove any manual starter controls which may be mounted on the starter or elsewhere. The starter must be controlled by the compressor controls for proper operation. The following is general information; refer to the unit wiring diagram for detailed connection.

Unlock and close the disconnect switch for the main motor. Enter the adjustments menu to jog the compressor and check rotation. If it is incorrect, disconnect and lockout all power, reverse two of the three power phases at the starter. Restore power when done. Press the [CONSTANT RUN] key. If the controller displays “SHUTDOWN – MAIN START ERROR” , “SHUTDOWN – MOTOR STARTER” ,or “SHUTDOWN - MAIN STARTER” and stops the unit, the starter auxiliary contact is disconnected. Remove all power and correctly wire as indicated above. Press the [STOP/RESE~ key to stop the compressor. The control should perform an orderly stop of the compressor unit and motor.

SECTION 4 REMOTE COOLING MODULE STARTERS CONNECTION OF REMOTE STARTERS TO ES CONTROL

C“OOLING SYSTEMS

MODULE

The majority of our rotary screw compressor packages feature starters completely wired and tested at the factory. Some applications and large units, however, will have the air cooled cooling module mounted remotely from the compressor package. Standard pratice is to

Connect the five control wires to terminals control box. 22, 23 in the compressor

9, 10, 18,

At the cooling module starter, connect wire 10 to one terminal of the starter coil, wire 18 to the other coil terminal. Connect wire 9 to one terminal of the aux contact and to one terminal of the overload relay contact

provide a combination starter (with fused disconnect) for the cooling module. The following information de-

terminal. Connect wire 23 to the other aux relay contact. Connect wire 22 to the other overload relay contact terminal.

scribes tions.

Controls

connection

requirements

for these

applica-

Starter Regardless required:

is complete, energize both the module and the compressor package. In the controller adjustments, select “WATERCOOLED” fan type. This operates the fan whenever the compressor operates, and must be used with remote-cooled units as well as watercooled units. This ensures that the oil piping does not accumulate a large quantity of hot oil before the fan starts. This setting also starts the enclosure vent fan (if so equipped) whenever the compressor runs to cool the main drive motor. Check rotation of both the compressor and the cooling fan during the jog motor test.

After installation

of starter type or brand, the following

are

●

The starter must have an isolated 120 volt coil.

●

The starter must have an isolated (dry contact) normally closed overload relay contact.

●

The starter must have an isolated normally-open auxiliary contact.

(dry contact)

Standard starters are generally provided by the manufacturer with interconnecting wires between the coil, overload relay contact, and auxiliary contact. Remove all of these to isolate the three control components. Installation

Checkout

and Wiring

Start the compressor unit by pressing the [CONSTANT RUN] key. The compressor and cooling module should both start. Run forapproximately one minute. Stop the compressor by pressing [STOP/RESET]. The compressor and cooling module should both stop.

The starter should be mounted and wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s instructions. Wiring from the load terminals of the starter to the motor should include flexible conduit to the motor junction box to allow for normal movement of the motor in the package. Use tire% delay fuses in the disconnect, to allow for motor starting. Follow instructions in the starter for proper sizing and application of overload heaters.

If the controller shuts down before a start is attempted and displays “FAN STRT CONTACT” or “FAN START ERROR”, check and correct wiring to the auxiliary contact,

Install a separate conduit from the starter to the package control box for control wiring.

If the cooling module fan does not start, check the fuses in the combination starter and ensure that the disconnect switch is closed.

Label five control wires: 9,10,18,22, this conduit. Controls

23; pull through

Connections

Disconnect and remove any manual starter controls or other control wires which may be mounted on the starter or elsewhere. The starter must be controlled by the compressor controls for proper operation. The following is general information; refer to the unit wiring diagram for detailed connection.

13-9110.-547

If the cooling module fan does not start, and the controlIershuts down and displays “FAN STARTER” or’’FAN START ERROR”, check and correct the wiring to the starter coil.

If the cooling module fan starts, but the controller then shuts down and displays “FAN STARTER” or “FAN START ERROR”, check and correct the wiring to the auxiliary contact. If the controller shuts down and displays “FAN OVERLOAD”, check both the cooling fan and the package fan (if applicable) motors for overload or disconnection,

Page 43

SECTION 5 SERVICE AND FIELD MODIFICATION CONTROLLER

REPLACEMENT

The controller is mounted into the starter enclosure with fourteen nuts and Iockwashers. On most slope– top enclosures (4O-1OOHP models), these are visible when an access panel on the back of the box is removed. ponents

Drape cloths over the starters and other comin these boxes to prevent loose parts from fal-

ling into the electrical devices,

CONTROLLER

UPGRADES

The AUTO SENTRY3–ES and AUTO SENTRY@–ES+ controllers share all mounting dimensions and are field interchangeable. To upgrade controller types, order Kit

This contains all parts and 204 EAU6003. instructions needed for retro fit of the AUTO SENTRY”–ES+ into older units.

number

To maintain the environmental integrity of the enclosure,

ACCESSORIES

and nuts must be used when installing all Iockwashers the replacement controller.

FOR AUTO SENTRY@–ES+

The following kits contain all electrical AUTO SENTRY@–ES+ controllers.

parts and instructions

for field installation

of accessory

Kit number 203 EAU6003

provides a current monitor for units built without the monitor.

Kit number 205EAQ4014

provides a water pressure switch for installation

Kit number 207EAQ4014

provides a voltage/phase

monitor for 200-208

Kit number 208EAQ4014

provides a voltage/phase

monitor for 230–240 volt units.

Kit number 209EAQ4014

provides a voltage/phase

monitor for 460480

volt units.

monitor for 575-600

volt units.

Kit number 210EAQ401 4 provides a voltage/phase

13-9110-647

Page 44

inputs for units with

on the water supply line. volt units.

GARDNER

13–10-614 2nd Edition

DENVER@

March, 1997

ELECTRA–SAVER@ STATIONARY

BASE-MOUNTED

COMPRESSOR AUTO SENTRY@–ES+

CONTROLS

AUTO SENTRY@–ES

CONTROLS

DOMESTIC

MODEL

EAU ——G – 200 – 300 HP INTERNATIONAL

MODEL

EAU ——H – 150-225KW

OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL

Gardner

T’aiiEi

MAINTAIN

COMPRESSOR RELIABILITY AND PERFORMANCE GENUINE GARDNER DENVER COMPRESSOR PARTS AND SUPPORT SERVICES Denver air compressor

Denver Compressor genuine parts, engineered to original tolerances, are designed for optimum specifically for Gardner Denver corndependability— pressor systems. Design and material innovations are the result of years of experience with hundreds of different compressor applications. Reliability in materials and quality assurance are incorporated in our genuine replacement parts.

Gardner

Trained parts specialists to assist you in selecting the correct replacement parts.

2.

Factory warranted new and remanufactured rotary screw air ends, Most popular model remanufactured air ends are maintained in stock at MDC for purchase on an exchange basic with liberal core credit available for the replacement unit.

3.

A full line of factory tested AEON m compressor lubricants specifically formulated for use in Gardner Denver compressors.

4.

Repair and maintenance kits designed with the necessary parts to simplify servicing your compressor.

work of authorized distributors provides the finest product support in the air compressor industry. Your local

authorized distributor maintains a large inventory of genuine parts and is backed up for emergency parts by direct access to the Gardner Denver Machine~ Inc. Master Distribution Center (MDC) in Memphis, Tennessee. distributor

Authorized distributor sewice technicians are factorytrained and skilled in compressor maintenance and repair. They are ready to respond and assist you by providing fast, expert maintenance and repair services.

can supponl your Gardner

For the location of your local authorized Gardner pages of your phone directory or contact: Distribution Center: Gardner Denver Machine~ Master Distribution Center 5585 East Shelby Drive Memphis, TN 38141 Phone: (901 ) 542-6100 (800) 245-4946 Fax: (901 ) 542-6159

Denver

Whenever an air end requires replacement or repair, Gardner Denver offers an industry unique, factory remanufactured air end exchange program. From its modern Remanufacturing Center in Indianapolis, IN, Gardner Denver is committed to supplying you with the highest quality, factory remanufactured air ends that are guaranteed to save you time, aggravation and money. Available

Repair downtime costs you money, which is why there are over 200 remanufactured units in inventory at all times, ready for immediate delivery. Skilled

Craftsmen

Our Remanufacturing assembly technicians average over 20 years experience with air compression products. Precision

Air Compressor

distributor

Factory: Gardner Denver Machinery 1800 Gardner Expressway Quincy, IL 62301 Phone: (217) 222-5400 Fax: (21 7) 224–7814

Inc.

REMANUFACTURED

Immediately

with these services:

1.

Your authorized Gardner Denver Compressor distributor offers all the backup you’ll need. A worldwide net-

Your authorized

WITH

Remanufacturing

All potentially usable parts are thoroughly cleaned, inspected and analyzed. Only those parts that can be brought back to original factory specifications are remanufactured. Every remanufactured air end receives

13-10-614

refer to the yellow

Inc.

AIR ENDS a new overhaul kit: bearings, gears, seals, sleeves and gaskets. Extensive Testing Gardner Denver performs testing that repair houses just don’t do. Magnaflux and ultrasonic inspection spot cracked or stressed castings, monochromatic light analysis exposes oil leaks, and coordinate measurement machine inspects to +/- .0001”, insuring that all remanufactured air ends meet factory performance specifications. Warranty Gardner Denver backs up every remanufactured air end with a new warranty. ..18 months from purchase, 12 months from service. Gardner Denver remanufactured air ends deliver qua/ity withou[ question . . . year in and year out. Call Gardner Denver for information on the air end exchange program and the name of your authorized distributor. Phone Number: 800–245-4946 or FAX: 901–542-61 !59

Page i

FOREWORD Gardner Denver Rotary Screw compressors are the result of advanced engineering and skilled manufacturing. To be assured of receiving maximum service from this machine the owner must exercise care in its operation and maintenance. This book is written to give the operator and maintenance department essential information for day–to–day operation, maintenance and adjustment. Careful adherence to these instructions will result in economical operation and minimum downtime.

A

Danger is used injury,

death,

Warning al injury,

to indicate

or substantial

the

DANGER

presence

which will cause severe if the warning is ignored.

of a hazard

property

damage

-A/

WARNING

is used to indicate the presence death, or substantial property

personal

of a hazard which can cause severe damage if the warning is ignored.

person-

~cNJTlOhi Caution personal

is used to indicate injury or property

the

presence

damage

of a hazard

if the warning

which

will

or can

cause

minor

is ignored.

NOTICE Notice which

is used to notify people of installation, is important but not hazard–related.

13-10-614

operation

Page ii

or maintenance

information

This

book

covers

the following

DOMESTIC

models:

MODELS:

Controller PSIG

Air Cooled

Water Cooled

Parts List

Manual

200

100, 125, 150

EAUQPG

EAUSPG

13–10-512

13–9/1 o-647

250

100, 125, 150

EAUQQG

EAUSQG

13-10-512

13–9/1 O–647

300

100, 125, 150

EAUQRG

EAUSRG

13-10-512

13–9/1o-647

HP

INTERNATIONAL

HP

PSIG

(KW)

(Bar)

200 (150)

100, 125, 150

MODELS:

Controller Air Cooled

Water Cooled

Parts List

Manual

EAUQPH

EAUSPH

13-10-513X

13-9/1O-647

EAUQQH

EAUSQH

13-10–513x

13-9110-647

EAUQRH

EAUSRH

13-10-513X

13-9/1O-647

(6.9, 8.6, 10.3) 125, 150

250 (186)

(6.9, 8.6, 10.3)

300 (225)

100, 125, 150 (6.9, 8.6, 10.3)

100,

INSTRUCTIONS

FOR ORDERING

REPAIR PARTS

When ordering parts, specify Compressor MODEL, Method of Cooling, HORSEPOWER and SERIAL NUMBER (see nameplate on unit). The Serial Number is also stamped on top of the cylinder flange to the right of the inlet housing,

required per unit, quantity is indicated in parenthesis. SPECIFY EXACTLY THE NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED.

All orders for Parts should be placed with the nearest authorized distributor,

To determine the Right Hand and Left Hand side of a compressor, stand at the motor end and look toward the compressor. Right Hand and Left Hand are indicated in parenthesis following the part name, i.e. (RH) & (LH).

Where NOT specified, quantity of parts required per compressor or unit is one (l); where more than one is

DO NOT ORDER BY SETS OR GROUPS.

Page iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Remanufactured

Air Ends.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..i

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ii

instructions

for Ordering Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..iii

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..v

List of illustrations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.

Section l, General information

. . . . . . .,.,

,,..

... . Vlll

...... ............... .. .................... .. .... .. 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,..

Section 2,1nstallation

Section 3, Starting&Operating

Procedures

Section 4, Controls &instrumentation

Section 5, Lubrication,

................ ............. ............. .. ...

.......................... ........... ..... .......

Oil Cooler, Oil Filter&Separator

.......... ...... ..

. . . . . ..,,...

..

8

. . . 15

. . . . . . . . 17

. . . . . . . . . . . 30

Section 6, Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Section 7, Coupling

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO . . . . . ...44

Section 8, Maintenance

Schedule

Section 9, Troubleshooting

Warranty

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...46

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Last Page

13-10-614

Pageiv

INDEX

Actuator, Turn Valve

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21

Addition of Oil Between Changes Aftercooler

Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . 34

6........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2o

Air Flow in the Compressor Air Receiver, Auxiliav Air–Cooled

System . . . . . . . . . . . 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10

Units, Location

Alignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 Cushion Design

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

. . . . . . . . ...42

Air Filter Element Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 Air Filter Vacuum Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44

Individual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33

AIR FILTER, SECTION

Coupling

.................. 8

Auto Sentry Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17

Auxiliary Alr Receiver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10

Daily Check Decals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6.7

Discharge

Setvice Line

Discharge Thermistor Drain, Oil Reservoir

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20 . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9

Draining and Cleaning Oil System

. . . . . . . . . . . 36

Electric Motor Grease Recommendations Blowdown Valve

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,20

Blowdown Valve Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12

Electric Motor Regreasinglnterval

. . . . 14

. . . . . . . . . . . 14

Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 Standard Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13

Change Procedure,

Lubricant

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...34

Element Life, Ak Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42

Check, Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16

Emergency

Stop Push–Button

Cleaning and Draining Oil System

Enclosure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9

. . . . . . . . ...36

Cold Ambient Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34

Cold Weather Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10

Fan Stader

installation

Filter, Compressor

Cold Weather Operation,

for . . . . . . . 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1

. . . . . . . . . . . ...20

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...22 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37

Compression

Principle

Compressor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1

Filter, Heavy Duty Air(Standard)

Compressor

(GDEliminator)

Foreword

Compressor

Capacity Control

Compressor

Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37

Oil Separator

. ..40

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...20

Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ii

Foundation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 35

Compressor Oil Cooler -Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...38

Gauge, Oil Level

Compressor

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37

Grease Recommendations,

Compressor

Oil System

Grounding,

CompressorOil

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11

Control Transformer Controller

instruments,

Controls &instruments, Cooler, Compressor

SECTION

General Description

4 .17 . . 17

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37

Cooling, Seaiing and Lubrication COUPLING,

INFORMATION,

SECTION1

. . . ...1

Electric Motor . . . . 14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Heat Exchanger High Temperature

(Oil) Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17

CONTROLS&

GENERAL

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . ...41

Control Devices Control Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30

. . . . . . . . . ...42

SECTION

7........

Inlet Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 inlet Screen and Tube

Inlet Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19 INSTALLATION,

............. 1

installation,

. . . . . . . . ...44

installation

13-10-614

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43

Page v

SECTION2

General

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8

for Cold Weather Operation

....... 9

INDEX Lifting Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . ...8

Compressor

Line, Discharge

. . . . . . . . ...12

Oil Cooler

Oil Pressure

Differential,

. . . . . ..41

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11

Oil Cooler

Temperature

Differential

. . . . ...41

Oil Cooler

Water

Line, inlet Location

Service

...,.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.,,.8

Air-Cooled

Units

Water–Cooled Lubricant,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8

Units

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9

Recommended

. . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . ..3o

Oil lnletTemperature

Pressure

Oil inlet Pressure

Cold Ambient.............,,,. High Temperature

Lubrication,

Motor .,, ..,....

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...14

Optional Switches.........,..

Lubrication,

Cooling and Sealing

Parallel Piping

. . . . . ...41

. . . . . . ...34

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30 . . . . . . . . . . ...20

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...22 SECTION 8 ..,45

Pressure Valve

. . . . . . . . . 18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Blowdown Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . ...11 Heat Exchanger

Moisture in the Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35

Parallel

MoistureSeparator/Trap

Series

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13

Piping Aftercooler

Discharge

. . ...41

............. 1

LUBRICATION, OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER & SEPARATOR, SECTION 5....... . . . . ...30

Minimum

. . . . . 41

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...34

MAINTENANCESCHEDULE,

Differential

. . . . . . . . . . . . .,,

Lubricant Change Procedure

Main Stafler

,,,

(Oil)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..13

. . . . . . . . . . . 14

Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12

Motor Lubrication

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Pressure Differential Gauging . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40

Motor Regressing

Interval

Pressure Regulator

Motor Grease Recommendations

. . . . . . . . . . . . .,...4

14

Prestart-Up Oil Change Interval

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Oil Cooler, Compressor Oil Filter, Compressor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

. . . . . . . . . . , . ., . . . . . . . ...19

instructions

Air Filter...............,,. Compressor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 . . . . . . . . . . ...15

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Coupling

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15

Oil Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 35

Electrical

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15

Oil Resemoir

Enclosure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16

Grounding

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Oil Reservoir Drain

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..m 9

Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, ...,.16

Oil Separator Compressor Inspection

(GD Eliminator)

. . . . . . . . . . . ..4o

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...0.041

Oil Carryover

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40

Removal for inspection Oil Specifications

or Replacement

. ..41

Piping ..,........,....,..,..

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 System Pressure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16

Purge Air Valve..........,.,..

., . . . . . . . ...20

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30 Recommended

Oil System

Regressing Compressor

. . . . . . . . ...15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30

Draining and Cleaning Oil System Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...36

. . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . ...41

Air and Oil Discharge Temperature

... ,...41

13-10-614

Lubricant . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . ...30

interval, Electric Motor

Regulator, Pressure Relief Valve

. . . . . . . . . . 14

. ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Remote Mounted Elevated Cooler Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33

Pagevi

INDEX

Repair Patis, Ordeting

instructions

. . . . . . . . . . . iii

Reservoir,

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40

Reservoir

Pressure Transducer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Safety Precautions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.5

Sealing, Lubrication

and Cleaning

Separator,

Compressor

Separatorflrap,

............ 1

(GD Eliminator)

Moisture

Oil . ..40

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

System Thermistor

Terminal Strip.............,..

SERVICE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13

CHECK LIST, AIR FILTER

Service Checklist

125 Hours

. . . . . . . . . . ...45

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . ...45

Every 6000 Hours Operation Every 8 Hours Operation Every Year

. . . . . . . . . . ...45

Motor Lubrication.........,..

St luttle Valve

. . . . . . . . ...45

. ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45

Discharge System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”20 . . . . . . . . . ...””

Solenoid Valves lVCandlVO

Specifications,

. . . . . . . . . . . . ...19

WO.

. . . . . . . . . . ...21

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30

Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...”

System Pressure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21

TROUBLESHOOTING,

SECTION . . . . . . ...46

Tube, inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..””

”.””

”.43

Turn Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“”-”””1’21 Turn Valve Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 Valve Blowdown Inlet

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..;;F;i;;;’”LAToR

CHECK VALVE

~

FIGURE 44-

13-?0-614

TO TRANSDUCER

INLET VALVE

Page 19

VALVE

VALVE

RISERVOIR ~ TOWER

203 EAU797-A (Ref. Drawing)

from

to supply a constant and low control pressure to pre-

TO

AIR

control

signals

the “AUTO SENTRYS”. With both valves de–energized, the normally open IVC valve allows control pressure to the inlet piston to close the valve. If IVC only is energized, the inlet valve is held in its current position. If both valves are energized, control pressure is relieved from the inlet piston to allow the valve to open.

VALVE

ring for sealing, valve orifices for restriction, and valve seat for burrs and dirt.

Valves IVC and of

VALVE

The

to prevent loaded starts, monltoroil itor the condition of the separator.

pressure, and mon-

Air Filter Vacuum Switch - This switch is used to monitor air filter condition and alert the user if the filter requires sewice or replacement. Discharge Thermistor - This sensor is located directly in the compressor discharge. Its signal is used to monitor compressor temperature and shut down the compressor if a coolant problem is detected. Reservoir Thermistor – This sensor is located in the reservoir / separator housing and is used to monitor temperature and shutdown the compressor if temperature problems occur at the separator.

FIGURE

4-5

-

SHUITLE

VALVE

Shuttle Valve (FIGURE 4–5) – Also known as a double check valve, the shuttle valve is a device which will take two (2) supply signals and allow the one with the highest pressure to pass through. The shuttle valve is used to provide control air pressure from either the reservoir or plant air system, ent operating conditions.

as required

during

differ-

Purge Air Valve-The purge valve isanormallyclosed two-way air actuated valve that admits purge air from the final discharge manifold to the compressor to counteract the oil knock that occurs in oil–flooded rotary screw compressors when they are completely unloaded with pressure in the oil reservoir. This valve is controlled by the same control pressure which controls the inlet valve. Blowdown Valve (FIGURE 4–1, page 18) –The blowdown valve is a two-way solenoid valve which is piped into the air/oil reservoir outlet ahead of the minimum pressure valve. When the solenoid is de-energized, the valve opens and the coolant system is blown down. When the solenoid is energized, the valve closes to allow the coolant system to pressurize. A control air check valve is provided to ensure that the inlet valve is closed during blowdown. System Pressure Transducer – This transducer is connected after the minimum pressure valve. It converts the pressure in the plant air system into an electrical signal for use by the “AUTO SENTRY@” controller for modulation and control. Reservoir Pressure Transducer – This transducer is connected to the coolant system. Its signal is used

13-10-6’I4

Optional Switches - The “AUTO SENTRY@” controller has one additional input available for dealer or user installed optional shutdown switches. If the contact is opened, the compressor will be shutdown, and will display a message. Emergency Stop Pushbutton – This is a maintained pushbutton, and removes power from the controller outputs regardless of controller status. It is located on the upper section of the panel, next to the keypad. This should be used for emergency purposes only–use the keypad [STOP/RESET] for normal controlled stopping.

I

~wARNING Automatic restarting or electrical shock can cause injury or death. Open, tag and lockout main disconnect

and

servicing

COMPRESSOR

any

other

circuits

before

the unit.

CAPACITY

CONTROL

The capacity of the compressor is controlled by the action of the Turn Valve and the Compressor Inlet Valve. The turn valve controls compressor delive~ to match demands of 400/. to 100% of the compressor’s maximum capacity. The inlet valve throttles to control compressor delivery to match demands of O% to 407. of the compressors maximum capacity.

Page 20

Example with normal setting of 100 P.SIG:

Compressor Delivery

Inlet Valve

Turn Valve

Jischarge Manifold Pressure

Full Capacity

Open

Closed

100

70% Capacity

Open

50% Open

100

4070 Capacity

Open

Full Open

100

30”/0 Capacity

Closing

Full Open

103

200/0 Capacity

Closing

Full Open

103

07’0 Capacity

Closed

Full Open

103

ders are adjusting screws which limit the travel of the actuator. When looking at the rear of the compressor, the adjusting screw on the right on the compressor adjusts the fully closed (full load) position of the valve. The full load position of the actuator may be checked by removing the adjusting screw at the unloaded end of the actuator (left side of the compressor) and using a rod to push the pistons to the full load position. The rod must be clean and free of burrs and scale. Take care not to scrape the cylinder walls when moving the pistons.

Turn Valve - The turn valve is a helical valve which, when rotated, opens and closes a series of ports cast into the compressor cylinder. When these ports are open, they direct some of the air which would otherwise be compressed back to the inlet, reducing both capacity and power consumption. Turn Valve Actuator (FIGURE 4–6) – The turn valve actuator is a rotary rack and pinion device which positions the turn valve according to system demand. Filtered oil from the reservoir is directed to the outboard ends of the two actuating cylinders to move the rack and rotate the valve, Located on the end of the cylin-

\

I

SOLENOID VALVE “TVO”

FIGLIFiE

4-6

-

13-!

Control Transformer – This changes the incoming power voltage to 110-120 volts for use by all unit control devices. Two ~rimaw fuses and one secondarv fuse are provided. “ Refer” to adjacent labeling for re: placement information.

I

I

TURN

Sofenoid Vafves TVC and TVO – These valves control position of the turn valve in response to signals from the “AUTO SENTRY3° controller. With both valves de–energized, equal pressure is supplied to both sides of the actuator to hold it in its current position. ff TVC only is energized, the right side of the turn valve actuator is exhausted to the compressor inlet cavity, causing the turn valve to move towards the full load position. If TVO only is energized, the left side of the turn vafve actuator is exhausted to the compressor inlet cavity, causing the turn valve to move towards the unload position.

SOLENOID VALVE ‘TVC-

VALVE

O-+14

ACTUATOR

Page

21

(SECTIONED)

7

Terminal Strip – This provides connections for all 11O–120 volt devices not contained within the enclosure. Fan Starter – The starter is used to provide control and overload protection for the fan. Overload heaters should be selected and adjusted based on the motor nameplate amps and the instructions located inside the cover of the electrical enclosure. The starter must be present even for packages without a local fan.

Main Starter – This starter is used to provide control and overload protection for the main drive motor. Full voltage starters employ a single contactor; overload heaters should be selected and adjusted based on the motor nameplate amps and the instructions located inside the cover of the enclosure. Wye-delta starters employ three contractors which are controlled sequentially to provide low current starting. For wye–delta starters, the motor nameplate amps must be first multiplied by 0,577 before using the heater table.

BLOWT)OWN LINE>

/-_ cHECKVALVE~

ORIFICE B 1 D

N

SOLENOID VALVEBDV-

B

SOLENOID VALVE.IVO”

-RESERVOIR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

2$ :>

13-10-614

Page24

-J?%

I

BLOWDOWN VALVE_

/_ cHECKVALVE/--

I

ORIFICE B

~

SOLENOID VALVEBDV”

-RESERVOIR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

D SOLENOID VALVE‘IVO.

SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

/-AIR

*

D

FILTER VACUUM SWITCH

SOLENOIDVALVE “lVC\ CHECKVALVE

c A, FULL OIL PRESSURE

PRESSLFK REGWATOR

B. FULL AIR PRESSURE C, CONTROL AIR PRESSURE( 15-20 PSI) D. ATMOSPHERICPRESSUREOR EXHAUSTING

SHUTTLE VALVE

0

[

JI

D +

.

SERVICE VALVE

&

c

,+. [ MINIMUM PRESSURE CHECK VALVE

ta

AIR INLET

VALVE “CLOSED-

El!b

D

PURGE VALVE

D

J

(n

SOLENOIDVALVE ‘TVC-

LElf

208EAU797–A (Ref. Drawing)

D

D

A STATFILTER

FIGURE4-9

- CONTROLSCHEMATIC-COMPRESSOR

FULLY UNLOADED-

LOW DEMAND MODESWITCHON

I

Ilw

J-P--w+lll

THe#

I

13-10-614

Page26

I

1 IISID[

vIcw (DOOR

or

BOX

OPfN)

@:

3:: m

m:

‘::

LEAD LOW

cONNfclt VOLIAGC

CONNICT!ON$

RCAR

VICW

OF

DOOR I 1-

--l

202 EAU546-A (Ref. Drawing)

FIGURE 4-11 -

WIRING DIAGRAM - 202EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,

AIR COOLED)

ON

fon

lwfLiC+fAO HIGH COHNICI

uorons VOITAG[ IOHS

HI

H4

1

I

Ll—

,

t’%i--

r

--i

F c1

[U[R . . . .

~,

51

51

52

52

Tr

51

H!

iFL

H4

..

”.,...

.

r, ..,,,.

.

.

,, M,” A1

SIR,

CH7

r 9

—

LCOCIW cri-s A[V BDV

-

Ivc lVO

-

Tvc

-

OvmoAD AIR flLT1fi BLOWDOW?I

RELAY cuRRn21 VACUUM SWITCH 30 L[HOID VALV[

TRANSFORMER

R[D

B1 AC

... TRAusbuc[R A lllHAL DISC HAQO[)

Tvo THA

-

lHS

-

XDA KM

-

CT4 -

1RAF15DUCCR u lRIsIRv OIR)

Molt

WV

5 ADwl c0t4f ROLLt R ron bA7t RCOOLf D. MODL. 6, Im UO1OR 13 NOT US[D OH WA ICRCOOLID UHII1 Wtl HOU1 CMCL03UES. UNITS wI1”OU1 FAN HAV[ MO COMIKCT IOH 10 Ill, 112 & ITJ MOTC 7, Wll[)l A UAGIII TIC WATCR VALVE IS US CD, COM fAH

Cn -

HOIC

❑✍

.0””,,710”,0

~-,,”,,

co”,,,, ,,R”l”Al

,,0,,

!0

,O,m

n[cl VOL1,

10 T[f1241MAL5 LOM MOT 10

!8 L to. vALvc [xCCCD 10VA

tOIL

IS

120

FIGURE 4-12 - WIRING DIAGRAM - 205 EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,

WATER COOLED)

7HA

IHCRUISIOR 1H[5[MVO16’I

B

7HERMIs IoB ICOLIPHCS50H1

A

---1

ISID[

VIIW

IDOOR

Or

BOX

OPCN1

m

MfnOIMcv S1OP

-&b-I

m:

,.,} ““ Ills lHA

A [-&

B

n

I

TM’ 4 11 12

w

Y %, R[AR

VIIW

Of

000R

C13

14

r2

9

56

ELI

‘w 1

JJ

L

T 3 0L2 ,*,

j rAM 10

Uo!on Mwv

(01 10PIIO

10 MAL1— At 1

WIRING DIAGRAM

- 205 EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,

WATER COOLED)

lWf

LVf-lf

AD

MO1ORS

VOLIACf

CON NICTIOIIS 11

!21

205 EAU546–A (Ref. Drawing)

FIGURE 4-13-

15

FOR

HIGH

iii 78

Hz

Moron

OU

VOLIAC[

CONU[C110M5 1!

1!

izcl

CII

CONNCC1t LOW

‘w i

BJ

LfAD

T

lb

I

SECTION 5 LUBRICATION OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER & SEPARATOR

COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM (FIGURE 5–1, page 31) cools the compressor, lubricates moving parts and seals internal clearances in the compression chamber.

~CAUTl

maintenance Improper equipment with use of synthetic lubricants will damage equipment. Oil filter and oil separator change intervals remain the same as for AEON w 4000 — See Maintenance Schedule, page 45.

The oil inlet line is connected at the bottom of the oil reservoir. Air pressure in the oil reservoir forces oil through the oil cooler, thermostatic mixing valve, oil filter and into the compressor main oil gallery The oil passes through internal passages for lubrication, cooling and sealing. The air-oil mixture is then discharged to the oil reservoir where a large part of the entrained oil drops out of the air stream; the air then passes through the final oil separator where most of the remaining oil is removed. The separated oil is returned to the compressor and the air passes to the final discharge line.

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT – Gardner Denver compressors are factory filled with AEON lubricants. These lubricants are formulated to the highest quality standards and are factory authorized, tested and approved for use in rotary screw compressors. AEON lubricants are available through your authorized Gardner Denver compressor distributor.

OIL SPECIFICATIONS: EAU (Domestic and international) –The factory fill compressor lubricant is Gardner Denver AEON N 9000 SP lubricating coolant which can be used for year–round operation. AEON m 9000 SP is a synthetic, extended life lubricant which can extend hJbricant change intervals up to 4 times that of a petroleum based lubricant, A lubricant analysis program for a periodic checkof lubricant quality and remaining life can maximize the change intewal.

ON

HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION - Gardner Denver AEON 9000 SP lubricating coolant will operate at a sustained discharge temperature up to210° F (99”C) when unusually high ambient air temperature is encountered.

I

~ DANGER L— Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

I

~WARNING ~cAuTION Use of improper lubricants will cause damage to equipment. Do not mix different types of lubricants or use inferior lubricants.

13-10-614

High temperature operation can cause damage to equipment or personal injury. Do not repeatedly restart the unit after high temperature stops operation. Find and correct the malfunction before resuming operation.

Page 30

GG

E! E

4WI MR

Q

ir

K

—

)-n

w

v

M

•1

DD

,, u

T

A

.

)

.

)BB

AA

F

)Cc f —

4----

11111

41

t

1

tG

I

t *—-

J’

1

---+ *---

*---

*---

J

--’”D

\ll

Itm

o’L— AIRIOIL---O

z

(a (3

w

-l-f’

‘ATER-

~

Y

A

B C D [ F G II J K L M N P O -

u

MOTOR COMPRESSOR AIR FILTER OIL RESERVOIR AI RIOIL SEPARATOR MINIMUM DISC HARG[ PRf SSURE CHECK VALVE AfTERCOOLER OIL COOLIR ST ATfl LTIR OIL FILTER ELEMENT SEPARATOR TO CYLINOER OIL RETURN LINE CHECK VALVE PRESSUR[ RELIEF VALV[ PURGE AIR VALVE PNEUMATIC BLOWDOWN VALVE

T-

uvwxYzAA LIB -

cc DD EE ff GG -

SHUTTLE VALV[ PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE “IVC” SOL INOID VALVE “IVO” FAN ANO MOTOR WAT[17 FLOW CONTROI VALVE MAGNETIC WAT[R SHUTOFF VAIV[ AIR FILTER VACUUM SWITCH SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSOUCIR DISCHARGE PRESSUR[ TRANSDUCER TURN VALVE ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE ‘TV OSOL ENIOO VALVE “TVCBLOWOOWNLINE

FIGURE 5-1

-

FLOW DIAGRAM

210 EAU797-A

(Ref. Drawing)

OIL

10 COOLER GAII

OIL

FROM COOLER

--h VkVE

-3’

-433

OAE Vuw

fRou ‘CHECK

—-OIL

VALV[

~T:;

r m PIPf S4J+IIED BY CUSTCACR

,*Lv[

3 .,A,

SUGGESTIO CUS1OMER SUPPLIED PIPIMG ARRAN6[MEMT

\ /

#/

/

L

6

202 EAU797 (Ref. Drawing)

—

“---*’R L-kl GAT[

A12101L

VALVE \

OIL FILL

L-

AIR FLOW

EL[VATED

COOLERS

FIGURE 5-2 - OIL FLOW DIAGRAM - REMOTE OVERHEAD

13-10-614

MAIN

COMPRESSOR

c-

INLIT FILTIR OIL RESERVOIR OIL SCPARATOR OIL COOLIR AFTCRCOOLER MIXING VALVE BODY OIL FILTIR OIL STOP VALVE CHECK VALVE RfLIEf VALVE MIN PRESS /C HCCKVALVE PNEUMATIC3 WAY VALVE

D[FGhJKLh4PR-

—OIL

---

A-

0-

Page 32

MOUNTED

MOTOR

A! WARNING All materials used in Gardner Denvera compressor units are compatible with AEON” 9000 SP Lubricating Coolant. downUse caution when selecting stream components such as air line lubricating bowls, gaskets and valve trim. AEON-U 9000 SP Synthetic Lubricant is not compatible with low nitrile Buna N or acrylic paints. AEON-” 9000 SP is compatible with most air system downstream components.

___________ ~_.

—

4 R(.339) DRi LL THRJ 1/8 NPT ONE HOLE WELD

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available for all AEON lubricants from your authorized Gardner Denver distributor or by calling 21 7–222–5400. FIGURE 5-3 - COOLER DRAIN DETAIL

REMOTE MOUNTED ELEVATED COOLER ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE – The Compressor package will be built and tested with the coolers mounted on the package. On enclosed units, the fan motor will be disconnected after test and the vent fan motor connected in its place. The vent fan will be mounted in the enclosure. A contactor (starter) will be shipped loose and remote mounted with the cooler by others upon start-up at the job site. The control box will be wired for remote elevated coolers at the factory.

NOTICE All requirements should be followed.

of

local

AFTERCOOLER PIPING – At shutdown of the system, all units should be drained completely of condensate if there is any possibility of freezing or corrosion damage. To help remove the condensate, the cooler may be tapped per FIGURE 5–3 and a drain cock installed, After opening the drain cock, blow air into the cooler from a connection on the opposite side of the cooler. At the same time the connection on the drain side of the cooler should be plugged. The drain cock should be left open until the machines are ready for start-up,

~WARNING

codes

When connecting pipe fittings to the cooler, support the threaded coupling with a pipe wrench when tightening the connection. Use silicone sealant on all steel to aluminum threaded connections. All piping should be firmly supported to avoid strain on the cooler manifold and connections. Flexible connections should be installed in all interconnecting piping, adjacent to the cooler, to avoid transmitting piping weight or vibrations to the cooler elements. Before beginning installations, check to be sure that no debris or foreign matter remains in the couplings or cooler bodies. Be certain interconnecting piping is clean to avoid clogging the cooler passages.

13-10--614

Failure to remove condensate from an idle cooler in freezing temperatures will cause permanent cooler damage. Drain condensate after system shutdown. It is the owner/operator’s responsibility to ensure that condensate has been drained and cooler dried out to prevent cooler damage.

HEAT EXCHANGER (OIL) PIPING – All remote elevated cooler applications must be sent through Engineering for approval and for recommending pipe size. When the cooling module is removed from the pack-

Page 33

age, the thermal mixing valve (H) remains on the package, Control group part number 202 EAU4002 will be mounted on package at the factory This group controls the oil stop valve as well as not allowing machine to run blowndown. See FIGURE 5–2, page~2.

ADDITION OF OIL BETWEEN CHANGES must be made when the oil level is in the red range on the gauge as read while the unit is on, To add oil, follow these steps: 1.

Be sure the unit is completely off and that no air pressure is in the oil reservoir.

2,

Disconnect, the starter.

3.

Wipe away all dirt around the oil filler plug.

4,

Remove the oil filler plug and add oil as required to return the oil level to the center of the green range on the gauge.

5.

Install the oil filler plug, restore power, run and check for leaks.

NOTICE Remote mounted elevated coolers have a maximum pipe length of 30 feet (9 M) (each way) and a maximum height of 20 feet (6 M) with a minimum of fittings. Engineering will review all remote elevated cooler applications pipe size on an indiand recommend vidual basis. Customer Service should include the engineering recommendation in the special order sent to Engineering.

tag and lockout the power supply to

DO NOT OVERFILL. The quantity required to raise the oil level from the red range center of the green range is shown in FIGURE 5-4, page 35. Repeated addition of oil between oil chanaes may indicate excessive oil carry-over and should-be investigated.

DANGER

~

Kit number 205EAU4013 includes the oil stoD valve,. check valve and flanges and must be installed on all remote elevated coolers per FIGURE 5–2, page 32, and the following instructions. 1

Mount the check valve (90J113) as shown.

2,

Mount the drain valves in the lowest section of the pipe on each side of the cooler connections,

3,

Mount the oil stop valve (90 AR243) in the line after the thermal mixing valve as shown.

Modifications tothecontrol lines will be made at the factory per 263 EAU81 Oschematic. Air to the oil stop valve must come from the upper fitting in the separator housing, then pass through the 3-way pneumatic valve. Control air to the valve must be from the line between the tee and the orifice in the blowdown muffler line per FIGURE 5–2, page 32. When the machine blows down, it will activate the pneumatic valve and it will shut off the air and vent the line between the pneumatic control valve and the oil stop valve to atmosphere. This will shut the oil stop valve and prevent excessive oil from running into the reservoir. Failure to install these parts could result in high oil carryover and cause the machine to shutdown on high discharge temperature. COLD AMBlENT OPERATION – See “installation Cold Weather Operation,” page 9.

for

13-10-614

Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

~

DANGER

Compressor, air/oil reservoir, separation chamber and all piping and tubing may beat high temperature during and after operation.

~CAUTION Excessive oil carry-over can damage equipment. Never fill oil reservoir above the “FULL” marker.

LUBRICANT CHANGE PROCEDURE - Upgrading to a longer life lubricant is essentially a very worthwhile practice. Following are the primary steps to be com-

Page 34

pleted when upgrading cant. 1.

Thoroughly —

or changing

the type of lubri-

drain system:

Drain oil from air end and cooler while hot. Break low point connections from pipe runs.

and drain oil

Dump oil from the filter and reinstall used filter. 2.

Fill the system with a 50 percent charge of the new lubricant: Start the machine and stay there to obsewe. Allow the machine to run about five minutes at temperature, or until temperature stabilizes, then shut down.

3.

Thoroughly

drain the machine.

4,

Change to a new filter and separator.

5.

Fill the system with a full charge of the new lubricant, then reinstall drain plug.

6.

Machine should then be run normally, however, total run time after the initial changeout should be 50 percent of normal anticipated service life of the new lubricant.

FIGURE S4

center of the green range on the gauge as read when the compressor is on. MOISTUFIE IN THE OIL SYSTEM – In normal humidity and with normal operating temperatures and pressures, the thermal mixing valve controls the oil temperature and prevents moisture contamination of the oil. Unusual cooling of the oil reservoir, short loaded cycle in high humidity or malfunctions of the thermal valve may result in moisture in the oil system which is detrimental to compressor lubrication and could cause oil carryover. If moisture is observed in the oil reservoir, drain the moisture and correct the condition causing See “Compressor Oil System the accumulation. Check,” page 41 and “Thermal Control (Thermostatic Mixing) Valve,” page 38.

Drain all lubricant from the system, change the filter and separator, and replace with a full charge of the new lubricant. 7.

- OIL LEVEL GAUGE

Subsequent lubricant changeouts should be at normal intetvals. (See “Oil Change Interval” and chart below.)

OIL LEVEL GAUGE (FIGURE 1–3, page 2, and FIGURE 5-4) indicates the amount of oil in the oil reservoir. Read oil level only when unit is on. In operation the oil level will fluctuate as the compressor loads and unloads. Add oil only when the oil is at the bottom of the red range on the gauge as read when the compressor is on. Drain oil only when the oil level is above the

OIL CHANGE INTERVAL– Recommended oil change intervals are based on oil temperature. FIGURE 5–5 shows how the change interval is affected by temperature.

Discharge Temperature

AEON 4000 Change Interval

AEON 9000 SP Change Interval

to180° F (82”C)

4000 hrs.

8000 hrs.

180° to 190° F (82° to 88°C)

3000 hrs.

6000 hrs.

190° to 200° F (88° to 93°C)

2000 hrs.

4000 hrs.

200” F+

1000 hrs.

2000 hrs.

Up

(93”C)

FIGURE S-5 - OIL CHANGE INTERVAL

13-”! 0-614

Pnge 35

When operating conditions are severe (very dusty, high humidity, etc.), it will be necessary to change the oil more frequently. Operating conditions and the appearance of the drained oil must be surveyed and the oil change intervals planned accordingly by the user. Gardner Denverm offers a free oil analysis program with the AEON w lubricants and we recommend a sample be sent in at 100 hours on a new unit, DRAINING

AND CLEANING

.~ Air/oil severe

2.

If the unit is elevated so that the oil reservoir drain can be used, empty the oil reservoir through the drain valve to a suitable container or sump.

3.

If the drained oil andjor the oil filter element are contaminated with dirt, flush the entire system: reservoir, oil cooler, mixing valve and lines, inspect the oil separator elements for dirt accumulation; replace if necessary If a varnish deposit exists, contact the factory for recommendations for removal of the deposit and prevention of varnish.

OIL SYSTEM

DANGER

FILLING

pressure will cause injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

under personal

A

Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation.

separaand tubduring

Always drain the complete system. Draining when the oil is hot will help to prevent varnish deposits and carry away impurities. To drain the system, use one of the following methods: If the unit is not elevated high enough to use the oil reservoir drain line to drain oil, a small hand, electric or air operated pump should be used to drain reservoir through the oil filler opening or from the drain valve.

DANGER

Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

I

A DANGER ———

1.

OIL RESERVOIR

1.

Be sure the unit is completely off and that no air pressure is in the oil reservoir.

2.

Disconnect, the starter.

3.

Wipe away all dirt around the oil filler plug.

4,

Remove the oil filler plug and add oil as required to return the oil level to the center of the green range on the gauge.

5.

Install the oil filler plug and operate the unit for about a minute allowing oil to fill all areas of the system. Check for leaks.

6.

Shut down unit, allowing the oil to settle, and be certain all pressure is relieved.

7.

Add oil, if necessary, to bring level to the center of the green range on- the gau~e,

tag and lockout the power supply to

200, 250 & 300 HP (150, 186 & 224 KW) Refill Capacity For Normal Oil Change Redto Yellow Range

., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . ...35.0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5

FIGURE S-6 - APPROXIMATE

13-10-614

OIL SYSTEM CAPACITIES

Page 36

U.S. Gallons (132.5 Liters) U. S. GaOlons(l9.O

Liters)

On unloaded operation and after shutdown some oil will drain back into the oil reservoir and the oil level gauge will read “FULL.” DO NOT DRAIN OIL TO CORRECT. On the next start, oil will again fill the system and the gauge will indicate operating at the proper level. DO NOT OVERFILL asoil carryover will result. The quantity of oil required to raise the oil level from “ADD” to “FULL” is shown in FIGURE 5–6, page 36, Repeated addition of oil between changes may indicate excessive oil carryover and should be investigated.

&A Improper cause

maintenance

to equipment.

element

every

1000

will Replace

hours

of op-

More frequent replacement could be required depending on operating conditions. A filter element left in service too long may damage equipment.

Use only complete oil filter for replacement. The part number is on the filter head and in the parts list,

Excessive oil carry-over can damage Never fill oil reservoir equipment. above the “FULL” marker.

I

NOTICE The head and the filter body are bonded together and cannot be purchased separately.

COMPRESSOR OIL FILTER (FIGURE 5-1, page 31) – This patented design screw on oil filter is a vital part in maintaining a trouble–free compressor, since it removes dirt and abrasives from the circulated oil. The oil filter relief valves are located in the top manifold of the filterstat. To replace, unbolt the manifolds and remove valves. The relief valve opens in the event the element becomes dirty enough to block the flow of oil,

Use the following procedure to replace the filter. Do not disturb the piping.

DANGER

,~ ?.

DANGER

Air/oil

under

pressure

severe

personal

injury

down all

Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of disconnect, tag and all pressure, lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

before fittings,

separaand tubduring

13-:0

compressor, pressure,

lockout

DANGER

Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation.

filter

eration.

~cAuTloN

~

oil

damage

filter

Use only CLEAN containers and funnels so no dirt enters the reservoir. Provide for clean storage of oils. Changing the oil will be of little benefit if done in a careless manner.

~

UT ION

will

cause

or death.

relieve disconnect,

Shut

system tag

power supply to the removing valves, caps, bolts, and filters.

of and

starter plugs,

1.

Stop unit and be sure no air pressure is in the oil reservoir.

2.

Unscrew oil filter from housing and remove,

3.

Screw new oil filter into housing.

4.

Run the unit and check for leaks.

COMPRESSOR OIL COOLER - RADIATOR TYPE (FIGURE 1-5, page 3) - The oil cooler motor and fan is mounted on the oil cooler module; air is exhausted through the oil cooler and away from the unit. Do not obstruct air flow to and from the oil cooler. Allow a minimum of three (3) feet clearance around the cooler.

614

Page 37

CAPILLARY r

(FIGURE 5-1, page 31) are stuck open. Remove the mixing valve and clean all parts thoroughly when flushing the oil system.

TUBE \

h

A74099A

~ I=lJ

Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs,

ADJUST SCREW

. SE TTIN SCALE

fittings,

bolts,

~

VALVE

HEAT

FIGURE 5-7

SENSING

BUL8

- WATER CONTROL

and

filters.

,

DANGER

/

Compressor, air/oiI reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may be at high temperature

VALVE

and

after

Keep both faces of cooler core clean for efficient cooling of compressor oil.

A!

DANGER

WARNING

Ducting will be required on air cooled quiet enclosed machines.

THERMAL CONTROL (THERMOSTATIC MIXING) VALVE is installed in system as shown in FIGURE 5–1, page 31. This valve is used to control temperature of the oil in both air-cooled radiator and water-cooled heat exchanger type oil cooler systems. On start-up with unit cold, element is open to bypass, allowing oil to pass directly from the reservoir to compressor during warm–up. As oil warms, element gradually closes to the bypass allowing more of the oil from the cooler to mix with oil from the bypass. After the unit is warmed up, the mixing valve maintains oil injection temperature into the compressor at a minimum of 150° F (66° C). This system provides proper compressor warm–up and helps prevent moisture contamination of oil. To check the element, heat in oil – it should be fully extended at 150° F (66° C). If the unit shuts down due to high air discharge tem’perature, it may be that one or both thermostatic mixing valve elements

13-10-614

separaand tubduring

operation.

A! WARNING It is mandatory that any water cooled unit be installed in a shelter heated to temperatures above freezing (32° F,

0° c.

COMPRESSOR OIL COOLER - WATER-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER (FIGURE 5–1, page 31) – The heat exchanger oil cooler is a multiple pass type, with water in the tubes and oil in the shell. The oil temperature is controlled by the thermal (thermostatic mixing) valve. The optional water control valve may be used to conserve water. Oil cooler malfunction may be traced by checking pressure at oil inlet and outlet. At normal operating air service pressure (65 to 150 psig, 4.5 to 10.3 Bars) with the unit warm, a pressure drop of 3 to 15 psi (,2 to 1 Bar) can be expected between the oil inlet and the oil outlet. Water pressure drop from water inlet to outlet will vary with the inlet pressure and amount of water flowing. A normal pressure drop may range from 5 to 10 psi (.3 to .7 Bar). Any change in the pressure drop from that normally held may indicate tube leakage or fouling and should be investigated.

Page 38

.

,

24o 230 220 210 ~ 200 190 , 180 , 170 160 150 . 140 130 . I 21) 110 ,

I

I

1

I

I

I

I

i/-

I

I I

I Y

I

A

/

F/

%

/l

I A I H L-’ ,w-

/“l

/-+ _.-’ :

, I I

I

I

a/“

10

-lo

30

AM31ENT

m

!03

BAR

TEMP

.

.

63

50

40

20

‘C BAR

FIGURE S-8 -

I

40

In many instances, the cooling water supply for the heat exchanger will contain impurities in solution andlor suspension. These substances can cause scale formation, corrosion and plugging of any water-cooled heat exchanger equipment. Disregarding the possibiiitythat one or more of these conditions exist may result in increased maintenance and operation expense, reduced equipment life and emergency shutdown. It is strongly recommended that a reputable, local water treatment concern be engaged to establish the corrosion, scale forming and fouling tendency of the cooling water and take steps necessary to remedy the situation if a problem does exist. The need for water treatment may involve only filtration (screening) to remove debris, sand andlor salt in the cooling water supply. However, chemical treatment methods may be necessa~ in certain instances to inhibit corrosion andjor remove dissolved solids, to alter the water’s tendency to form scale deposits, or prevent the growth of microorganisms. The normal maintenance program for the unit should also include periodic cleaning of the tubes (water side) of the heat exchanger to remove deposits which enhance fouling and corrosion. Hex head zinc anodes are used in the return bonnet (opposite end to the water pipe connections) of heat exchangers to provide internal water system corrosion protection. These anodes should be inspected periodically and replaced when the zinc has been reduced to about 1/2 inch (13mm) in length. WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE FOR HEAT EXCHANGER (Optional Equipment) (FIGURE 5-7) The water flow control valve is adjustable to compensate for varying water inlet temperatures and pressures and is to be mounted in the water outlet line after the oil cooler (FIGURE 5–1, page 31). Use the compressor discharge air temperature gauge on the instrument

13-104514

89

60 ❑

DEW POINT TEMPERATURE VS. AMBlENT (100% RELATIVE HUMIDITY)

I \ I

I

R , I

.“

I A

4-

I

.--’

100 90

[

N+21EMT

7EMP

150 Pslc

.

.

1’30

120

.F

103 PSIG

TEMPERATURE

panel in setting the flow control valve. The compressor discharge temperature must be maintained a minimum of 10° F (5” C) above the dew point temperature at the maximum anticipated ambient; refer to FIGURE 5–8, page 40, for the dew point temperature at the operating pressure and ambient temperature of the application. To decrease water flow (increase compressor discharge air temperature) turn the adjusting screw from left to right, increasing spring tension, To increase water flow (decrease compressor discharge air temperature) turn the adjusting screw in the opposite direction. The groove at the lower edge of the adjusting screw is an index line for use with the index scale Oto 8 in obtaining a desired setting. These valves must be handled with care and proper tools and techniques must be used when working on the valve. Care must be used when handling the capillary tube; a kink or break in the tubing or connections will make the valve inoperative. Never attempt to change capillary length. Excess capillary tube should be carefully coiled and placed so that damage will not occur in normal maintenance or traffic past the unit. If the leak develops through the packing, tighten the packing gland nut firmly with a wrench to reseat the packing around the valve stem, then back off the nut until loose, and finally retighten the nut finger tight. Tightening the packing nut too tight may cause erratic operation. An occasional drop of oil on the valve stem at the packing nut will prolong packing life. If valve malfunctions, check for bent or binding, paint or corrosion on valve stem, foreign material in valve, erosion, or thermal system (capillary) failure. If foreign material or scale is likely, the use of a strainer in the inlet water line is recomnlended.

Page39

COMPRESSOR (GD ELIMINATOR) OIL SEPARATOR located in a separate housing, consists of a renewable cartridge-type separator element and provides the final removal of oil from the air stream (FIGURE 5-9),

FINALAIR OISCHARGE

Oil impinging on the inside of the separator element drains directly back into the oil reservoir by gravity. Oil collected outside the element is returned through tubing to the compressor cylinder, Oil carryover through the ser~ice lines maybe caused by a faulty oil separator, faulty minimum pressure

[D SEPARATOR OIL RfXRVOIR TOVJIR

- OIL SEPARATOR

~

Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation.

of the oil resewoir,

malfunction

or waler

oil that

condensate

foams,

oil

in the

oil.

Oil separator element life cannot be predicted; it will vary greatly depending on the conditions of operation, the quality uf the oil used and the maintenance of the oil and air filters. The condition of the separator can be determined by pressure differential gauging or by inspection.

I

DANGER

line

Oil carryover malfunctions of the oil separator are usually due to using elements too long, heavy dirt or varnish deposits caused by inadequate air filter service, use of improper oil or using oil too long for existing conditions, A ruptured or collapsed separator element is usually due to heavy dirt or varnish buildup in the filtering material. Excessive tilt angle of the unit will also hamper separation and cause oil carryover.

WATER SHUTOFF VALVE - WATER-COOLED Equipment) HEAT EXCHANGER (Optional (FIGURE 5-1, page 31) - A magnetic solenoid-operated water shutoff valve rated at 150 psig (10.3 Bars) water pressure should be mounted in the water outlet line after the oil cooler. The valve should be wired into the compressor control circuit so that the valve opens to allow water to flow any time the compressor is running. When compressor stops under automatic control, orisshut off manually, thevalve should close, stopping water flow through the system. See Wiring Diagrams, pages 26 thru 29.

I

over–filling

return

If oil carryover occurs, inspect the separator only after it is determined that the oil level is not too high, the oil is not foaming excessively, the oil return line from the separator housing to the compressor cylinder is not clogged or pinched off, the check valve in the oil return line is functioning properly, and there is not water or an oil/water emulsion in the oil.

RETWN LINE

FIGURE 5-9

valve,

separaand tubduring

Pressure Differential Gauging – The “CHANGE SEPARATOR” advisory will flash when the pressure differential across the oil separator reaches approximately 8 PSID (,55 Bar), Replace the oil separator element at this time. If ignored, the unit will shut down and the advisory will illuminate steadily when the pressure differential reaches 15 PSID (1 Bar).

~cAuTlON

OIL RESERVOIR – The oil reservoir-separator combines multiple functions into one vessel. The lower half is the oil reservoir, providing oil storage capacity for the system and the top portion, a primary oil separation means. The reservoir also provides limited air storage for control and gauge actuation.

13-10-614

Using an oil separator element at excessive pressure differential can cause damage to equipment. Replace the separator when the “Change Separator” advisory appears.

Page 40

screws,

I

I

NOTICE A sudden

drop

ential

or

may

indicate

of zero pressure

sudden

heavy

a ruptured

oil

differ-

carryover

element.

Inspection – After removal of separator element, shine a light inside the element to reveal areas of heavy dirt or varnish deposits or breaks (ruptures) in the element media. Removal Of Oil Separator placement:

A

For Inspection

Or Re-

Run the unit and check for leaks,

COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM CHECK – The following readings are based on ambient temperature of 80° F (273 C) forair-+ooled oil cooler and 80- F inlet water on water-cooled oil cooler, with the system in good condition. Compressor should be at operating temperature at the time of checks, One–half hour of loaded operation is usually sufficient to reach level–out operating temperatures, Air and Oil Discharge Temperature – 165’ to 195° F (74° to 91 c C) – Read at gauge on the instrument panel or check with a thermometer at the discharge housing. Compressor Oil Inlet Temperature -150’ to 160° F (66° to710 C) - Install a tee at the oil filter outlet and check with a thermometer,

DANGER

Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

off and Be certain unit is completely pressure is in the oil reservoir.

9,

that

no air

2!.

Disconnect, starter.

tag and lockout power supply to the

3.

Remove screws holding the top plate to the separator housing. Lift the top plate from the separator housing.

4.

Lift the separator

5.

Inspect and/or replace the separator as necessary. Be sure the o–ring is not damaged. Before installing (or reinstalling) any separator apply grease to the o-ring. Oil will be wiped off by the chamfer and the o-ring could be damaged.

6.

Remove any gasket material adhering to top plate or separator housing, and install new gasket,

7.

Lower the separator into the housing and center the separator on the chamfer. Press separator down into the housing. Do not use excessive force as separator damage can occur.

8.

Place the spacer on the indent in the separator, Seat the top plate to the separator, spacer and separator housing. Install and tighten all cap

from the separator housing.

13-104314

Oil Inlet Pressure – Check at the fitting in the line near the compressor oil inlet. With air receiver pressure at 100 psi (6.9 Bar), oil inlet pressure should be 55-60 psig(3.84.l Bar). Oil Cooler Oil Pressure Differential (Air-Cooled Radiator) – Check differential across oil system by measuring oil inlet pressure as described above. Oil Cooler Oil Pressure Differential (Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger) – 2 to 25 PSID (.1 to 1.7 Bar) (65 to 150 PSIG, 4.5 to 10.3 Bars Receiver Pressure) – Check that oil inlet pressure is correct or measure the differential between drains on the oil cooler shell. Oil Cooler Temperature Differential (Air-Cooled Radiator) – The oil temperature differential depends on the temperature of the air at the oil cooler fan and cleanliness of core faces. As ambient temperatures and core restrictions increase, the oil cooler outlet temperature will increase. The oil inlet temperature is approximately the same as air discharge temperature –see the gauge on the instrument panel. The outlet oil temperature may be checked by installing a tee at the oil filter outlet. Oil Cooler Temperature Differential (Water–Cooled Heat Exchanger) –The oil temperature differential depends on the inlet water temperature and the water flow rate permitted by the water flow control valve setting. The oil inlet temperature is approximately the same as the air discharge temperature – see the gauge on the instrument panel. The oil outlet temperature may be checked by installing a tee at the oil filter outlet. Oil Cooler Water Pressure Differential (Water– Cooled Heat Exchanger) – The water pressure differential through the heat exchanger will depend on the supply pressure, flow rate, cooler tube cleanliness and outlet pressure. The inlet and outlet water pressure may be checked at the pipe fittings supplied by the cus tomer.

Page 41

SECTION 6 AIR FILTER

Al?

3.

Wash the element by soaking about 15 minutes in warm water with a mild nonsudsing detergent. Rinse the element thoroughly with clean water; a does not hose may be used if the water pressure exceed 40 psig (2,8 Bars),

4.

Inspect the element for ruptures or cracks in the pleated media; replace the element if any are found, Inspect the gasket on the bottom (outlet end) of the element; replace the entire element if the gasket is damaged, A spare element will keep down time to a minimum.

5.

Allow the element toairdry COMPLETELY. Do not expose the element to heat over 150° F (66° C). Install the element in the filter body and fasten securely with the wing nut.

IN TLET

‘t AIR OUTLET~

AuTOMATICUNLOAOERw

FIGURE 6-1

-

HEAW

DUTY AIR FILTER (STANDARD)

WARNING

A! HEAVY–DUTY AIR FILTER (FIGURE 6–1) furnished as standard equipment on units with an enclosure is a heavy–duty washable element dry type air filter. The air filter must receive proper maintenance if maximum service is to be obtained from the unit. Establishing adequate and timely filter service is MOST IMPORTANT. An improperly maintained air filter can cause a loss of compressor air delive~.

Do not oil this element. Do not wash in inflammable cleaning fluids. Do not use solvents other than water. improper cleaning may damage the element.

Filter Element – Service the air filter element when the “CHANGE AIR FILTER” LED is illuminated, Clean every 50 to 150 operating hours depending on dust conditions.

I

NOTICE Never operate the unit without the element. Never use elements that are damaged, ruptured or wet. Never use

I

NOTICE

gaskets

Use only genuine Gardner Denver air filter elements on Gardner Denver compressor units. Genuine parts are your authorized available through Gardner

Denver

that

elements duce

and

downtime.

protected

area

and moisture. care.

distributor.

won’t

seal.

gaskets Store free

from

Handle

on

Keep

spare

hand

to re-

elements damage,

all parts

in a

dirt with

To service: 1.

Remove the wingnut ment.

and pull out the filter ele-

2.

Visually inspect the element. If cleaning isnot necessary, reinstall the filter element. If the element requires cleaning, follow steps 3, 4 and 5.

13-10-014

Filter Element Life – The element should be replaced after six (6) cleanings or if: 1.

Visual inspection indicates a rupture, crack or pin hole in the pleated media. Inspection should be done by placing a bright light inside the element.

Page 42

Pressure drop through a filter with a freshly cleaned element is below three (3) inches (76 mm) of water with the compressor running at full Ioad - this would indicate a rupture or crack.

tube when required by ramming a clean dry cloth through the tube. Wipe the inside of the filter body to remove any dirt falling from the inlet tube before reinstalling the element.

Inlet Tube – Inspect the inlet screen and tube for dirt accumulation each time the filter is serviced. Clean the

Causes of short element life include: severe dust conditions, infrequent servicing, improper cleaning, or contamination by oil or chemical fumes.

2.

13-10-6!4

Page43

SECTION 7 COUPLING

UP

TOWARD

DIAMETER

RADIUS

OUTSIDE OF

r“’’”

COUPLING

EDGE

●

v TOWARD

(17 N-M)

●

SET SCREW

L

~ DOWN

‘CREW

23 FT-LBS

A **

l/16MlN

50 FT-LBS (37 N-M)

l/8

MAX

(1.6 mm to 3.2 mm)

SHAFT

. FIGURE 7-1

-

INSTALLATION

OF COUPLING

3.

Working through the coupling guard opening, center the coupling over the gap between the shafts, maintaining the gap as shown in FIGURE 7–1 between the ends of the jaws on one coupling body and the flange on the opposite coupling body. Tighten set screws in each coupling body.

4<

Insert individual cushions as shown in FIGURE 7–1 and slide the collar over the cushions and secure with cap screws. Reinstall the cover plate.

~ —. DANGER .—

Rotating machinery can cause personal injury or death. Turn the unit completely off, open the main disconnect, tag and lockout before servicing the coupling.

COUPLING – The motor and compressor are direct connected by a resilient type flexible coupling with several individual cushions. The coupling does not require lubrication. If maintenance on mating parts is requires, reassemble coupling as follows: Individual

Cushion

Design

(FIGURE 7-1)

1.

Slide coupling halves over shaft extensions. Be sure the collar is installed on the shaft behind one coupling body,

2.

Assemble

CUSHIONS

I

,~

DANGER

Rotating machinery can cause personal injury or death. Do not operate unit with either the coupling guard or the collar removed. All bolts and screws must be properly tightened.

Alignment - The coupling is permanently the flanges on the compressor and motor.

the motor to the compressor.

13-10614

Page 44

aligned by

SECTION 8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

SCHEDULE

CHECK LIST Every 125 Hours

Air Filter – Operating conditions determine frequency of service. If the “CHANGE AIR FILTER” message is displayed, air filter requires servicing or changing. See “Air Filter,” Section 6, page 42.

1.

Oil Separator – Operating conditions determine frequency of service. If the “CHANGE SEPARATOR” message is displayed, the oil separator element requires changing. See “Compressor Oil Separator” in Section 5, page 40, for further details.

1.

Operation

Change the oil filter element.

Every 8000 Hours Operation

1.

Check the reservoir oil level – add oil if required. See Section 5, page 34. [f oil consumption is high, refer to “Excessive Oil consumption, page 47. DO NOT MIX LUBRICANTS.

2.

Observe if the unit loads and unloads properly.

3.

Check discharge

4.

Check Panel LED’s for advisories.

1.

1.

SCHEDULE

Change Air Filter

●

Change Oil Separator

●

Check the relief valve for proper operation. Section 4, page 17.

(See detail

As Indicated By AutoSentry”

Action

Change the compressor lubricant. UNDER ADVERSE CONDITIONS, CHANGE MORE FREQUENTLY (refer to “Oil Change Intewal”, page 35). Flush system if required.

Every Year

pressure and temperature.

MAINTENANCE Maintenance

Check for dirt accumulation on oil/aftercooler core faces and the cooling fan. If cleaning is required, clean the exterior fin surfaces of the cores by blowing compressed air carrying a nonflammable safety solvent in a direction opposite that of the cooling fan air flow. This cleaning operation will keep the exterior cooling suriaces clean and ensure effective heat dissipation.

Every 1000 Hours Operation

Motor Lubrication – Refer to Section 2, page 14, and Maintenance Schedule Chart below. Every 8 Hours

Every 8 Hours

Check Reservoir Oil Level

●

Check For Proper Load/Unload

●

Check Discharge

●

Pressure/Temp

Check Dirt Accumulation

notes

Every 125 Hours

above)

Every 1000 Hours

Every 8000’ Hours

Every Year

●

●

Lubricant ●

●

(AEON 9000 SP)

●

Check Relief Valve

*

See

●

on Cooler

Change Oil Filter Element Change Compressor

Operation

See Oil Change Interval Chart, FIGURE 5–5, page 35, for specific lubricant life.

13-10-6

i4

Page 45

SECTION 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING

POSSIBLE

SYMPTOM

Compressor

fails to start.

Compressor starts but stops after a short time.

Compressor does not unload (or load).

Compressor cycles from load to unload excessively.

REMEDY

CAUSE

1.

Wrong lead connections,

1. Change leads,

2.

Blown fuses in control box.

2.

Replace fuse.

3.

Motor starter overload heaters tripped.

3.

Reset and investigate cause of overload.

4.

Pressure in reservoir.

4.

Inspect blowdown valve. and muffler.

5.

Read error message on control panel.

5.

Take appropriate action. See manual 13-9/1 O-647.

6.

Remote Contact is open (terminals 6 & 9).

6.

Replace switch or jumper.

1. High discharge temperature.

1.

See “High Discharge Air Temperature,” this section, page 47.

2.

High discharge temperature switch malfunction.

2.

Replace switch.

3.

Blown fuse in starter/ control box.

3.

Replace fuse (investigate if fuses continue to blow).

4.

Motor starter overload heaters trip.

4,

Reset and investigate cause of overload.

1.

Improperly adjusted control.

1.

Refer to manual 13–9/1 O-647 and adjust control.

2.

Air leak in control lines.

2.

Determine source of leak and correct.

3.

Restricted control line,

3.

Clean control lines.

4.

Blowdown valve malfunction.

4.

Repair, clean or replace valve.

1. Insufficient receiver capacity.

1.

Increase receiver size.

2

2.

Inspect and clean control tubing.

Restriction in control tubing,

13-10-614

Page 46

POSSIBLE

SYMPTOM

Compressor is low on delivery and pressure.

High discharge temperature.

air

Excessive Oil Consumption

Oil Carry-Over

CAUSE

REMEDY

1.

Restricted

2.

Sticking inlet valve.

2.

Inspect and clean inlet valve,

3.

Unload pressure adjusted too low.

3.

Adjust the unload pressure. See manual 13–9/1 O–647,

4.

Minimum pressure valve stuck closed.

4.

Disassemble valve,

1. Thermostatic mixing valve stuck open.

1.

Repair or replace valve.

2.

Dirty or clogged cooler face.

2.

Clean cooler.

3.

Insufficient air flow.

3.

Provide unrestricted of cooling air.

4.

Clogged oil filter or cooler (interior).

4.

Replace filter or clean cooler.

5.

Low compressor

5.

Add oil to proper level.

1.

Oil carryover

1.

See “Oil Carryover”,

2.

Oil leaks at all fittings and gaskets.

2.

Tighten or replace fittings or gasket.

1.

Overfilling

1.

Drain excess oil from system.

air filter.

cooling

oil.

through lines.

the reservoir.

1. Clean or replace filter.

and clean

supply

below.

~ DANGER —— Air/oil pressor,

under

pressure

relieve

to the starter

will cause

system

before

severe

of all pressure,

removing

valves,

personal

injury or death. Shut down comdisconnect, tag and lockout power supply caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.

2.

Clogged, broken or loose oil return lines

2,

Tighten or replace faulty lines.

3.

Ruptured oil separator element.

3.

Replace element.

4.

Loose assembly.

4.

Tghten all fittings and gaskets.

5.

Foam caused by use of incorrect oil.

5.

Use Gardner Denver” AEON “ 9000 SP Lubricating Coolant.

6.

Inoperative minimum pressure valve.

6.

Clean out or replace valve.

13-10-614

FagP .47

POSSIBLE

SYMPTOM

Oil Carry-Over

I

(Continued)

CAUSE

REMEDY

7.

Operation at elevated discharge temperatures.

7,

Reduce temperature. See High Discharge Air Temperature, page 47, this section,

8,

Scavenge line check valve failure.

8.

Replace check valve.

9.

Water condensate

9.

Check oil reservoir tempera– ture and if low, change thermal mixing valve element to higher temperature.

in oil.

I

NOTICE Gardner Denver factory remanufactured replacement compressor air end units distributor, on an exchange basis, for all rotary are available from your authorized screw compressor units.

13-10-6I4

Page 48

GARDNER

13-10-5I3X 2nd Edition February, 1997

DENVER@

ELECTRA–SAVER” STATIONARY

BASE-MOUNTED

COMPRESSOR AUTO SENTRY@–ES+ CONTROLS (STANDARD) AUTO SENTFiY”-ES CONTROLS

(OPTIONAL)

MODELS EAU —PH - 149KW (200HP) EAU —QH - 187KW (250HP) EAU —RH – 224KW (300HP)

PARTS

Gather Denver

LIST

FOR ORDERING REPAIR PARTS

INSTRUCTIONS

When

ordering

NUMBER

parts, specify

(see nameplate

Compressor

on unit).

MODEL,

Method

The Serial Number

of Cooling, HORSEPOWER

is also stamped

and SERIAL

on top of the cylinder

flange

to

the right of the inlet housing. All orders for Parts should be placed with the nearest authorized Where

distributor.

NOT specified, quantity of parts required per compressor or unit is one (1); where more than one per unit, quantity is indicated in parenthesis. SPECIFY EXACTLY THE NUMBER OF PARTS

is required

REQUIRED.

DO NOT ORDER BY SETS OR GROUPS. To determine the Right Hand and Left Hand side of a compressor,

stand at the motor end and Iooktoward the compressor. Right Hand and Left Hand are indicated in parenthesis following the part name, i.e. (RH) & (LH), when appropriate.

For

Operating

COMPRESSOR CONTROLLER

and

Service

SERVICE SERVICE

Instructions

MANUAL MANUAL

see:

13-1M14 13-9/1

H7

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. instructions

for Ordering

Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Inside Front Cover

Maintain Compressor Reliability and Performance with Genuine Gardner Denver Compressor Parts and Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2 Remanufactured Model/Matrix

Air Ends.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, ,. . . ...2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3

Bare Compressor Relief Valves

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.5

.. ..................... .............. .. .. . .. .. ..... .... ..... .............. ..... ... .. . ..

Oil Seal Detail

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6

Gear Groups

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6

ReliefVa]ves

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.,6

Turn Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 Inlet Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 Compressor

Base Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10.11

Oil Resewoir

Group

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12

Oil Separator

Group

.,,.....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I3

Mixing Valve and Oil Filter... Compressor

Discharge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14

Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15

Water Cooled Heat Exchanger –With

Aftercooler

Water Cooled Heat Exchanger –Without Air Cooled Cooler Group Control Piping

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16.17

Aftercooler

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18.19

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20.21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., ..,...,.............,...22,

23

Turn Valve Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...24 Enclosure–CommonParts-Air/Water Enclosure –AirCooled Enclosure –Water Enclosure -Vent

Standard Units

Cooled Panels –Standard Fan Assembly -(Water

Enclosure –Hardware– Enclosure –Hardware Enclosure –Quiet

Panels–

Cooled –Standard

orQuiet

Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26

orQuiet

Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...27

Cooled Units Only)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28

All Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...29 –Quiet

Baffle Units –Air Cooled

Baffle -Air

Cooled

Enclosure

Skirt -AirCooled-Quiet

Enclosure

Skirt-Water

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,..30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32

Cooled -Quiet

Motor Group (Main Drive Motors) -Wye

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33 Delta-60HZ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34

Motor Group (Fan Motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 Overload

Relay Heater Conversion

Controller

Assembly - 149/187/224KW-WyeDeltaStarters

ControllerAssembly–149/187/224 identification

and instruction

Listing . .,, , ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35 KW-Less

Group

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.......36,37

Main Motor Starter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...38.39

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40

Repair Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...41

13-1(1-513X

Pagel

,42

MAINTAIN

COMPRESSOR RELIABILITY AND PERFORMANCE GENUINE GARDNER DENVER COMPRESSOR PARTS AND SUPPORT SERVICES Denver air compressor

Gardner Denver Compressor genuine parts, engineered to original tolerances, are designed for optimum dependability — specifically for Gardner Denver cornpressor systems. Design and material innovations are the result of years of experience with hundreds of different compressor applications. Reliability in materials and quality assurance are incorporated in our genuine replacement parts. Your authorized Gardner Denver Compressor distributor offers all the backup you’ll need. A worldwide network of authorized distributors provides the finest product support in the air compressor industry, Your local authorized distributor maintains a large inventory of genuine parts and is backed up for emergency parts by direct access to the Gardner Denver Machinery Inc. Master Distribution Center (MDC) in Memphis, Tennessee.

Distribution Center: Gardner Denver Machinery Master Distribution Center 5585 East Shelby Drive Memphis, TN 38141 Phone: (901 ) 542–6100 (800) 245-4946 Fax: (901 ) 542-6159

Available

Repair downtime costs you money, which is why there are over 200 remanufactured units in inventory at all times, ready for immediate delivery. Craftsmen

Our Remanufacturing assembly technicians average over 20 years experience with air compression products. Precision

Trained parts specialists to assist you in selecting the correct replacement parts.

2.

Factory warranted new and remanufactured rotary screw air ends, Most popular model remanufactured air ends are maintained in stock at MDC for purchase on an exchange basic with liberal core credit available for the replacement unit,

3.

A full line of factory tested AEON Wcompressor lubricants specifically formulated for use in Gardner Denver compressors,

4.

Repair and maintenance kits designed with the necessary parts to simplify sewicing your compressor.

Air Compressor

distributor

refer to the yellow

Factory: Gardner Denver Machinery Inc. 1800 Gardner Expressway Quincy, IL 62301 Phone: (21 7) 222-5400 Fax: (21 7) 224-7814

Inc.

Whenever an air end requires replacement or repair, Gardner Denver offers an industry unique, factory remanufactured air end exchange program. From its modern Remanufacturing Center in Indianapolis, IN, Gardner Denver is committed to supplying you with the highest quality, facto~ remanufactured air ends that are guaranteed to save you time, aggravation and money.

Skilled

1.

Denver

REMANUFACTURED

Immediately

with these services:

Authorized distributor service technicians are factorytrained and skilled in compressor maintenance and repair. They are ready to respond and assist you by providing fast, exped maintenance and repair services.

Your authorized distributor can support your Gardner For the location of your local authorized Gardner pages of your phone directory or contact:

WITH

Remanufacturing

All potentially usable parts are thoroughly cleaned, inspected and analyzed. Only those parts that can be brought back to original factory specifications are remanufactured. Every remanufactured air end receives

13-10-5!3X

AIR ENDS a new overhaul kit: bearings, gears, seals, sleeves and gaskets. Extensive Testing Gardner Denver performs testing that repair houses just don’t do. Magnaflux and ultrasonic inspection spot cracked or stressed castings, monochromatic light analysis exposes oil leaks, and coordinate measurement machine inspects to +/– .0001”, insuring that all remanufactured air ends meet factory performance specifications. Warranty Gardner Denver backs up every remanufactured air end with a new warranty. ..18 months from purchase, 12 months from service. Gardner Denver remanufactured air ends deliver qua/ity without question. . . year in and year out. Call Gardner Denver for information on the air end exchange program and the name of your authorized distributor. Phone Number: 800-2454946 FAX: 901 –542-61 59

Fage 2

or

ELECTRA-SAVER STATIONARY SCREW COMPRESSOR 149 KW (200 HP), 187 KW (250 HP), 224 KW (300 HP) THIRTEEN DIGIT MODEL DESIGNATIONS NOTICE TO CUSTOMER – To find the construction options for your cornpressorunit, FILL IN THE BALANCE OF LE~ERS OR NUMBERS FROM

EAU

H

7777

ZK7T7

YOUR UNITNAMEPLATE. COLUMNNUMBER:

E

Follow the line down and over from each space thus fdled into find the appropriate construction option with which your machine is equipped. The number”9” in any column space indicates “NONAPPLICABLE. ” The number''8''inanycolumn space indicates SPECIALDESIGN-REFER TO FACTORY ORDER TICKET.

COLUMNS

1, 2 & 3-

COMPRESSOR

TYPE & SIZE

COLUMN 4- TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION Q. Air Cooled Base Mounted Water Cooled Base Mounted s. COLUMN

J

—

5 – HORSEPOWER 149 KW (200 HP) P. 187 KW (250 HP) cl. R. 224 KW (300 HP)

COLUMN 6-

ENGINEERING

—

SPECIFICATION

COLUMN 7- OPERATING PRESSURE N, 100 PSIG (50 t+z) P, 125 PSIG (50 Hz) 150 PSIG (50 Hz) R. COLUMN 8- CONTROUSTARTER 149 KW (200HP)– A. B. 149 KW (200 HP) 187 KW (250 HP) c. D. 187 KW (250 HP) -

BOX - Per H.P. and NEMA Class (Wye Delta) E. 224 KW (300 HP) - NEMA 12 NEMA 4 F. 224 KW (300 HP) – NEMA 4 NEMA 12 G, Less Motor Starter – Nema 12 NEMA 4 H. Less Motor Starter– Nema 4

COLUMN 9 – CONTROIX3TARTER A. 380 volt 415 volt B.

BOX - Per Voltage (Wye Delta)

COLUMN

10A. B.

c D. COLUMN

COLUMN

NEMA12

ENCLOSURE Without Enclosure – Air/Water Cooled With Enclosure - Air Cooled Only - Quiet With Enclosure - Water Cooled - Quiet – 380 Volt With Enclosure - Water Cooled - Quiet – 415 Volt

11- OIL COOLERS - AIR/WATER AIR COOLED A, 200 H.P. – Standard 200 H.P. – Seacoast B. c, 250/300 H.P. – Standard D, 250/300 H.P. – Seacoast 12A. B.

OIL COOLER ELECTRICS AIR COOLED 380 Volt 415 volt

COOLED E. F. G. H.

— T. u.

x. COLUMN

13ODP A, B.

Y,

COMPRESSOR - STD. 380 Volt 415 volt

- WITHrWITHOUT AFTERCOOLER WATER COOLED Fresh Water - Without Aftercooler Fresh Water – Wth Aftercooler Fresh Water – Wthout Aftercooler - With Water Temp Regulator Fresh Water – With Aftercooler - With Water Temp Regulator WATER COOLED (Msg. Water Shutoff NEMA 1 NEMA 4 No Water Shutoff Valve

DRIVE MOTOR TEFC - STD. c. 380 Volt D. 415 volt

Less Motor - ODP~EFC

“13-? O-513X

Page 3

Vlv-Fresh

Water Only)

13–l CI-513X

Page4

Order by Part Number and Description.

Reference Numbers are for your convenience

only.

BARE COMPRESSOR Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Name of Part

Qty.

BEARING-ROLLER ......... BEARING–ROLLER ......... ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-BEARING ........ PIN–DOWEL ............... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARING–ROLLER ......... SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATE-BEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATE–BEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING–WAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATE–BEARING COVER . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ●

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 20 20 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 9 10

Ref. No.

Part No.

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 49 51 52

12BA52 12W34 203 SSU01 O 204 SSUO1O 205 SSUO02 204 SSUO06 62M112 655 EF1OO 95B7 208 SSU715N 12BA79 77H55 202 SSU253 75 LM121N 12BA78 77 H50002 77 H50003 77 H50005 77 H50015 201 SSU253 655 EE06N 78W54 200SSU315 75P196 655 EF120

* ●

●

●

Name of Part

Qty.

Part No.

LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET-ELIMINATOR ...... RING-RETAINING .......... RING–RETAINING ..... ... .. SPACER–SHAFT ........... PLATE-BEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-GEAR ........... BEARING–ROLLER ......... SPACER–SHAFT ........... KEY–SQUARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIN–DOWEL ............... PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GUARD-COUPLING ........ SCREW-FLANGED .........

10 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 20 20 1 2 5 1 4

95B7 25 BC256 65W14 65W61 200 SSU600 2012387 655 EE06N 35L16 201 SSU151 12C60 201 SSU600 35L3 200 SSU050 655 EF1OO 95B7 209SSU715N 62M112 64AA5 200 SSU339 75LM51

PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG, . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 1 1 1

64AA6 64AA7 64AA3 64AA9

...... ...... ...... ......

.. .. .. ..

Not shown. RELIEF VALVES -

SERVICE PRESSURE BAR (PSI) 8.6 (125)

– BAR (PSI) 10.3 (150)

KW (HP)

BAR (PSI) 6.9 (100)

149 (200)

90AR51 o

90AR532

90AR909

187/224 (250/300)

90AR511

90AR533

90AR909

212 SSU81O–C (Ref. Drawing)

OIL SEAL DETAIL Ref. No. 36 37 38 39 40 45 46 47 48 81 82 * ●

●

●

●

“ ●

“ * *

Name of Part

Part No.

Qty.

SEAL-OIL (VITON), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-SEAL .. .......... .. .................................. O-RING ..................... .................................. SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ................................................. SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEAR SLEEVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEAL–OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKVALVE ....................... ......................... * included inOil Seal Kit. Seepage4’ 1. * Notshown.

60DD571 203SSU362 25BC205 655EE060 95B5 204SSY732 205SSY732 207SSY732 208SSY732 80M28 60DD689 90AR923

1 1 1 6 6 12 12 6 6 1 1 1

●

AIRENDS/GEAR

GROUPS – Gears

AirEnd

No.

SSUABD02

KW (HP)

BAR(PSI)

Gear Group

224(300)

10.3 (150)

187(250)

8.6 (125)

-

Driver

Driven

SSU76968

201SSU181

201SSU280

SSU76969

202SSU181

202SSU280

149(250)

6.9 (100)

224(300)

8.6 (125)

SSUABD04

149(200)

10.3 (150)

SSU76970

203SSU181

203SSU280

SSUABD05

149(200)

8.6 (125)

SSU76971

204SSU181

204SSU280

SSUABD06

149(200)

6,9 (100)

SSU76972

205SSU181

205SSU280

187(250)

10,3 (150)

224(300)

6.9 (100)

SSU76973

206SSU181

206SSU280

SSUABD03

SSUABD07

13-10-513X

Page6

Order by Part Number

and Description.

Reference

Numbers

are for your convenience

only.

78 CL

212SSU81 (Ref. Draw

TURN VALVE Ref. No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 88

Name of Part

Qty.

BEARING–ROLLER ............................................. SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RING-RETAINING .............................................. GEAR–AUXILIARY .............................................. KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAIT-CONTROL .............................................. RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL PISTON ASSEMBLY. ................................. PACKING-RING ................................................ HEAD-CONTROLCYLIINDER .................................... SEAL-FASTENER .............................................. NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEE–PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER-CON’ ROB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,..,. ....... ................................ ...’

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

13--IO-513X

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Page7

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 8 8

Part No. 12BA51 78W50 203SSU238 207SSU205 100522 200SSU031 35C114 76G21 N 200SSU081 200SSU360 75P11N SSU80565 60AM46 200RPA083 60DD65 50AW24 76D226 63D1 G 64G3G 64AA5 200SSU082 25BC138N 79AL5 50AW24

Order by Part Number

and Description.

Reference

Numbers

are for your convenience

only.

206SSU81O-B (Ref. Drawing)

CY 19

INLET VALVE Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 *

Name of Part

Qty.

HOUSING-INLET . ............................... .............. . CYLINDER-INLET VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP-CYLINDER ................................................ SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INLET VALVE PISTON ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE-INLET .................................................. GUIDE-VALVE ................................................. CLAMP-DISC .... ...................................... .. ...... DISC-VALVE . .............................. .............. ...... NUT–HEXCASTLE ............................................. PIN-COITER .................................................. GASKET RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ................................................. PIN–SPRING ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ●

Notshown.

13-10-513X

Page8

1 1 1 1 1 6 8 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 8 1

Part No. 200SSU041 S11542 203SSU715N 25C2683N S1 15274 655ED040 655ED050 95B3 78A366 S1 1543D 200SSW044 200SSW483 200SSW338 200SSW067 50E9 62E30 25BC160 655EG070 95B8 62R1OI

Order by Part Number

and Description.

Reference

Numbers

are for your convenience

only.

o 5

303 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)

Ref. No.

Qty.

Name of Part

Part No.

2

5L300

.............................................

8

75K48

.................................................

1

25C131N

..............................................

1

203EAU690

5

SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

655EG080

6

LOCKWASHER

.................................................

8

95B8

..... .. .............. .. ......... . .. ..... .. . ........... .. .

2

2009734

.................................................

4

2009499

. . ..... ................. .... ............ .. ....... .. ..

2

300EAQ1323

2

2117151

1

FILTER–AIR

. .... ...................... . .. .. ..... .... ... .. .. ... .

2

SCREW–FLANGED

3

GASKET RING

4

MANIFOLD–INLET

7

HOSE

8

CLAMP–HOSE

9 ●

REDUCER

ELEMENT, AIR FILTER *

NotShown-FGr

. .. c.....

.................................

Re~air,

13-10-5I3X

Page9

UJ

(A <

m

13-10-513X

Page lO

COMPRESSOR

Ref. No.

BASE GROUP

Name of Part

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............’o”.”..o.”o.

Qty.

Part No.

2

655EG240

2

95A7

1

SCREW

2

WASHER

3

LOCKWASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”. ”””. ””.. ”.’...

2

95B7

4

ISOLATOR-VIBRATION

6

49C48

5

SCREW–FLANGED

12

75LM135

6

NUT-FLANGED

12

50AW35

7

BASE

8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....co..o..”0”””””.o”””””

........ ........ .............. ........... . ........ ........... .............. ........... .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..”.

s....”””

.

1

209EAU285

8

50B8

8

95B8

10

NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .” ”-....”” LOCKWASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....,....””.””.. SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...’....””””.”

8

655EG140

11

NUT

2

50B7

12

WASHER

4

95A8

13

LOCKWASHER

4

95B8

14

NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................c”o.0””... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............”ccoo”o””.”00” SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ...”.””.”..

4

50B8

4

655EG240

2

300EAU165

9

15 16 *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. oc. . .. o” O”-. ..O.O””

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. oc. o. .. ”” ”C . . .. C.OOO.O”.O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........o.....o000’0”o.o” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...”””.”

FLEXDRIVECOUPLINGS 200 HP 250/300HP

●

SQ. KEY *

Not Shown.

51 L31 51 L32 35L27

OIL RESERVOIR

GROUP

244 EAU81 O-A (Ref. Drawing)

Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Name of Part

Qty.

RESERVOIR–OIL .......................................... COVER-FILLER, .......................................... O-RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAPTOR-GAUGE ........................................ GAUGE–FLOAT ........................................... SCREW-FLANGED ........................................ NUT-FLANGED ........................................... NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE-BALL ............................................. PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOW–PIPE ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ........................................... COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET ELIMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPAIR:

GASKET

- 54C204 (Float Gauge)

13-10-5I3X

Page 12

1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 12 1 1

Part No. 302EAU037 200SPF156 54C214 64AA5 200EDE058 200EAU303 75LM135 50AW35 63F1 G 64C4G 63F1 OG 90AR360 64LW7 64D9G 655EE090 95B5 202EAU225 25BC222

OIL SEPARATOR

GROUP

247 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)

Ref. No.

Name of Part

Qty.

Part No.

1

NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

63AM24X70G

2

SEPARATOR–AIWOIL

1

200EAU035

...........................................

13--fO-5l3X

Page13

MIXING VALVE AND OIL FILTER (With 150° Element)

\

‘1

FL8

I

101

-’\

-T>.“HI

261 EAU81O-B (Ref. Drawing)

Ref. No.

Name of Part

1

MANIFOLD~lL

2

O-RING

3

ELEMENT (1500’-STANDARD).

4

O-RING

Qty.

Part No.

.................................................

1

200EAU116

................. ............ ..... .. ......... ...........

1

25BC127

..................................

1

2109365

1

25BC175

5

............ ... ..... ......... ... ............ ............ CARTRIDGE-FILTER ... ..... .. ......... ............ .............

2

2116640

6

MANIFOLD41L

1

201EAU1” 6

8

................................................. O-RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O. . BODY-OIL FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO.. . . . . . .

9

PLUG

7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OO.OO. .Jo..c.

25BC380 200EDM0

1

64B7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO . . . . . ,: w 3. -1 y cl z

z: ~: z“

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

i

. . . . . . . .

Ll!l!?a w >m 3 m J& 3 Z

.mlmxtln(ah

. . . . . . . . . . .

.W

:n :: .-l

.L .,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

am

“I3-10-5I3X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

. . . . . . . . ..< . . . . .

:-

.n .T .

. . . .Z ... ... .mJ_

(5 3

-1

L

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

.l-mJo.loJTr

. . . . . . . . .

-1

5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I

iu

6i-

*

.

5s:

.

.

AIR COOLED COOLER GROUP

1 16

“?

3I4EAU81O–A (Ref. Drawing)

RESERVOIR

wcol-

. . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

o C9

ale. Nmm

. . . . . . . . u . . . . . . . . . . .

m m

.

0

N

m m

L

-1

w

II

z

.

.T--

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

cum

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

m

(0

m 0 6

al ma

$:

w+

L:

E.

w: n-:

. . . . . . . . . . . .

-ml

0 m

CY 5 i 0

.

In

. . . . . . . . . . . .

-ny~.m

rl

Wwmw

ii3>

aa

. .

. .

. .

.

. .

.s :2

. . . . . . . . . .

::2’ m Ocn al ma)

. .

. .

cudmm

. .

. .

mm O-1a

. .

. .

mCLl

u

/ 242 EAU81O-A (Ref. Drawing)

●

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure

Ref. No.

Part Numbers,

Name of Part

Qty.

Standard Part No.

1

PANEL,

.....................................................

3

207EAU216

2

PANEL

.. ....... .. .......... ....... ..........................

3

209EAU216

3

PANEL

......................................................

1

212EAU216

13-IO–513X

Page26

ENCLOSURE - WATER COOLED PANELS STANDARD OR QUIET UNITS

Q

/

243 EAU81 O-A (Ref. Drawing) ●

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers.

Ref. No.

Name of Part

Qty.

Standard Part No.

Quiet Part No.

1

PANEL

.... ............... ................

3

208 EAU216

218EAU21 6

2

PANEL

...................................

1

209 EAU216

217 EAU216

3

PANEL

...................................

1

211 EAU216

215 EAU216

4

PANEL

...................................

1

21 OEAU216

216EAU216

5

PANEL,

..................................

1

219EAU216

214EAU216

ENCLOSURE – VENT FAN ASSEMBLY (WATER COOLED UNITS ONLY)

262 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)

●

Refer to page 27 for Vent Fan Panel Part Numbers.

Ref. No.

Name of Part

Qty.

1 2 3

GUARD–FAN ........ ....................... .................... SCREW–FLANGED .............................................. WASHER, ......................................................

4 5

SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

WASHER,

7 8 9

LOCKWASHER . . . . . . NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUSHING–SHEAVE . FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 11 12 13

,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ......... ................... ................... ...................

.. .. .. ..

. . . .

.. .. .. ..

....... ....... ... .... .......

............ ............ ............ ............

. . . ,

GUARD-FAN ...................... .. ............ ... ............ SCREW–FLANGED ................................. ............ , NUT-FLANGED ...... ................ .. .......... .. .......... .. .

13-10-513X

Page28

1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 4 4

Part No.

200EBB393 75K48 9.5A5 75A35 2014731 95A2 95B2 50B2 22G27 200EBB701 200ECM393 75LM51 50AW5

ENCLOSURE - HARDWARE ALL UNITS

*

A 257 EAU81O-C (Ref. Drawing)

●

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure

Ref. No.

Part Numbers.

Qty.

Name of Part

1

LATCH

........................................................

2

SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

SCREW–FLANGED

4

NUT–FLANGED

5 6

Part No.

6

31 D58

84 Ft.

32E12

............................... ...............

104

75LM51

. .. .. ..... ... ....... .. ..... ...... ............ ....

92

50AW5

DECAL

... .... .. ..... ..... .. ....... ................ .......... .. .

6

203ESO077

DECAL

.. .. ... ... ........... .. ......... .......... .............. .

3

201EAP077

!3-10-513X

Page29

ENCLOSURE - HARDWARE QUIET BAFFLE UNITS – AIR COOLED

P 1

260 EAU81&A (Ref. Drawing) ●

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers,

Ref. No.

Name of Part

Qty.

1

LATCH

......... ....... ................................... ......

2

SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

SCREW-FLANGED

4

NUT–FLANGED

5

DECAL

6

SCREW-FLANGED

7

NUT–FLANGED

2 27 Ft.

Patl No.

31 D58 32E12

............ ..... .. ....... .. ..... .. ...........

30

75LM51

.................................................

30

50AW5

..,........,...,,.....,..

................................

6

203ESO077

............ ..................... .............

4

75LM135

. .. ................... ....... ................ ....

4

50AW35

13-10-513X

Page30

ENCLOSURE QUIET BAFFLE - AIR COOLED

/’ 256 EAU81O-A (Ref. Drawing)

/ ●

Ref. No.

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers.

Name of Part

Qty.

1

PANEL

2

PANEL

3

BASE

4

BRACE

5

POST

6 7 8

BRACE

...........................

9

PANEL

Part No.

.........................................................

3

218 EAU216

..... .............. .. .. ..................................

3

214 EAU216

..........................................................

1

215EAU285

.........................................................

1

204EAU326

................... .......................................

2

209EAU313

FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

222EAU314

FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,....,.

1

221EAU314

...........

1

205EAU326

.... .. ............ . .. ....... ... ..................... ....

2

213EAU216

.....................

...............

13-” ?J-5~?Y

Fage31

ENCLOSURE SKIRT AIR COOLED - QUIET

/

265 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)

●

Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers,

Ref. No.

Name of Part

Qty.

Part No.

1

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

200EAU1 367

2

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

201EAU1367

3

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

205EAU1367

4

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

206EAU1367

5

HANGER

6

200EAU380

.. .. ................... ......................... .......

I3-10-513X

Page32

ENCLOSURE SKIRT WATER COOLED - QUIET

3 b

/

%

*

/

264 EAU81 O (Ref. Drawing)

* Refer to page 25 for Enclosure

Ref. No.

Part Numbers.

Name of Part

Qty.

1

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

!5

SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

HANGER.

...................... ................................

13-~0-513X

Page33

Part No.

1

200 EAU1367

2

201EAU1367

1

203EAU1367

1

202EAU1367

1

204EAU1367

6

200EAU380

MOTOR GROUP (MAIN DRIVE MOTORS) WYE DELTA -50 HZ

COLUMN CODE

NAME OF PART

149 KW (200 HP) PART NO.

187 KW (250 HP) PART NO.

224 KW (300 HP) PART NO.

24CA1 034 24CA1 035

24 CA1022 24CA1 037

OPEN DRIP PROOF (ODP) 13A 13B

24CA861 24 CA862

MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V

TOTALLY

13C 13D

ENCLOSED FAN COOLED (TEFC) 24 CA863 24 CA864

MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V

24CA1 044 24CA1 045

MOTOR GROUP (FAN MOTORS)

AIR COOLED FAN MOTOR (COOLING MODULE) (T. E. F.C., 6 KW (10 HP), 1000 RPM, 50 HZ, 1.0 S. F.) VOLTAGE

PIN

MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V

24CA1 042 24CA820

WATER COOLED FAN MOTOR (ENCLOSURE VENT FAN) (T. E. F.C., 0.37 KW (1/2 HP), 1500 RPM, 50 HZ, 1.0 S. F.) VOLTAGE

PIN

MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V

24CA522

13-10–513X

24 CA523

Page 34

24CA1 046 24CA1047

OVERLOAD RELAY HEATER CONVERSION

LISTING

Refer to Motor Nameplate “Amperage” and Decal in Control Panel for Selection of Overload Relay Heater Packs.

CUTLER–HAMMER PART NUMBER

GARDNER DENVER PART NUMBER

H2002B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24 CA4101

H2003B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4102

H2004B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4103

H20056

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4104

H2006B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4105

H20076

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4106

H2008B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4107

H2009B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4108

H2010B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4109

H2011B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA411O

H2012B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4111

H2013B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4112

H2014B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4113

H2015B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4114

H2016B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4115

H2017B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4116

H2018

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2924

H2019

,....,.

H2020

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2926

H2021

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2927

H2022

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2893

H2023

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2894

H2024

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2928

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2925

t3-f10-Z?3X

l%ge35

CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 149/1 87/224 KW (200/250/300 HP) – WYE DELTA STARTERS

@@J@’ 4

1 (3 5

1 ‘;

INSIDE VIEW OF DOOR

Refer to parts listing on page 37.

%

.7.7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

N

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :> .E :~

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :>

.0

-m :< -n :Z

:0

. . . . . . . . . . .

.H

. .d, IOOP an c1’f, lilsecure and are true for both failsafe

OUTPUT

Loop Normal

B (Pulse)

-

Loop Failed

POWER

Loop Normal

Loop Failed

POWER

Vacant

Car

Vacant

OUT

Car

Vacant

Car

Vacant

OUT

NO.

Closed

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

N C.

Open

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

NO.

Mom. Closed

Open

Open

Open

NC, N 0, B (Presence) ‘-NC.

B (Fail)

FAlLSECURE POWER OK

Car

outputs A (Presence)

units.

RELAY CONDITIONS

FAILSAFE POWER OK

t

Lin~

Loop

Yellow

4

down

Model No.

PIN

I !5

(+)

(N. C,)

Am phenol

COLORS

12

326-24 (+) 24 VDC

Ground A Relay

Gray

The 326-38 is similar

112 VDC

Line

7

●Note:

~ 326-23

124 VAC,

6

I

I

Receptacle

MODEL NO,

802A CABLE ‘IN WIRE CO LORSI

5

—— Connector

Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed

Open Closed

Mom. Open

Closed Closed Closed

Open Closed

Closed Open

Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed

Open

Closed

Open

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Mom. Mom.

Closed

Open

N.0,

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Open

,N, C.

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Closed

!-326, Rev. 5- 8/25/97

Page 2

Closed Closed Open

Open

Open Closed

VITAL STATISTICS(Cont.) . SENSITIVITY: Vehicle detection results from

a sufficient change in loop inductance (-AL/L) settings, shown below, permd caused by a vehicle passing over the loop. 10 switch selectable selection of the lowest possible level to consistently detect a vehicle with a small underside area the

or one highest

with

the

setting.

highest Use

over-the-road

a pocket

clearance.

screwdriver

with

Level

a fine

O is the

tip to make

lowest

setting;

level

9 is

the adjustment.

~~ 0,0130/0

Level 4

Level 8

0,02%

Level 3

Level 7

O.O?J~o

Level

6 Level5

0.050/0 0.080/0

Level

Level

9

Level

POWER: > 20-28

.

.

●

✎

>

90-135

>

180-270

O.ls”lo

0.2’/0

2 Level1

(),3”/,

0.50/0

O

0.8%

VAC,50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max. VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max. VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max.

FUSE: > 24 VAC power: > 120 VAC power: > 240 VAC power: OPERATING

5x20mm, 5x20mm,

SIO-BIO

l/2A, l/4A,

SIO-BIO

10-16 > 20-32

>

VDC,

95 ma. max.

VDC, 65

ma.

max.

> 12 VDC power: 5x20mm, 1A, Fast-Blo > 24 VDC power: 5x20mm, 1A, Fast-Blo

5x20mm, l/4A, SIO-BIO.

TEMPERATURE:

-40”F to +180”F (-40”C to +82°C).

SIZE: Width = 1.5” (3.8 cm); Height= 2.7” (5.9 cm); Depth =4.6” (1 1.6 cm), excluding connectors and switches.

✎

WEIGHT:

10.4 oz. (295

✎

24 VAC VERSION:

grams).

Use with Class 2 approved transformer.

PLAY ITSAFE! BEFORE CONNECTING A UNIT, CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE PROVIDED MATCHES THE IS PROPERLY CONNECTED FOR THE INPUT VOLTAGE AND THAT THE INSTALLATION UNIT TO BE INSTALLED.

PO’A’ER/DETECT INDICATOR IS BAD = NO POW:,? Oi? FUSE = PC7iER APPL)ED TO DETECTOR, lNTEF?NAL FUSE IS GOOD, & NC) VEHICLE BEi NG DETECTED RED = VEHICLE 13El N: DETECTED FLASH~NG = L1310F FA.lLIj RE OF: GREEPd

SENSITIVIT’Y’ SWITCH 9 = HIG O = LO’.’; i: SUITAEILE 3o12~ FOR tv3ST APPLICATI:::3

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS CONTROLS SENSITiVITY BOOST NO SENSITIVITY 30CIST ON I?JCREASES SENSITIVITY 2 LEVELS ABOVE SE NSITI’J”ITT’ SWITCH SETTING CURli\l C DE TECTICh! uPPER ——”— I ItA>T OF ——— BOOST ——— CANNOT ——— .—— ——— ——— E~C_E~~_ ~EyE~ _: P~SIT~O~ 2 – CONTROLS PRESENCE MODE (OFF = NORMAL PRESENCE MODE ON = INFINITE PRESENCE MODE WARNl N G INFINITE PRESENCE MODE )/lAY BE LOST IN THE EVENT OF PO’WER INTERRUPTION GREATER TH/4N 3 SEC. -—— ——— ——— ——— ——. — ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— POSITION 3 – CONTROLS DELAY TIME OFF = NO CALL DELAY = 2 ——— SEC ——— CALL ——— DELAY ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— — ——— ———ON ——— POSITIONS 4 & 5 – CONTROLS EXTEN@ TIME POS 4–OFF, POS 5–OFF = NO C4LL EXTEND POS 4–ON, POS 5–OFF = 2 SEC CALL EXTEND POS 4–OFF, POS 5–ON = 5 SEC CALL EXTEND PC)S 4–oFd POS 5–ON = IO SEC_~4~L ExTE_NQ ___ __ ——— ——— ——.. !—.——— ——— ——— ——— POSITIONS 6 & 7 – SELECTS OUTPUT B MODE POS 6–OFF, POS 7–OFF = PULSE ON ENTRY POS 6–OFF, POS 7–ON = PRESENCE POS 6–ON, POS 7–OFF = PULSE ON EXIT POS 6–ON, POS 7–ON = FAIL.—— OUTPUT ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— — —— ——— ——— ——— — ‘POSITIONS 8 & 9 – LO(IP FREQUENCY SETTINGS POS 8–ON, POS 9–ON = LOVJ POS 8–OFF, POS 9–ON = MEDIUM LOW POS 8–ON, POS 9–OFF = MEDIUM HIGH POS 8–OFF, Pf3S Q–OFF = HIGH

POSITION

.. —

1 (11~

– = =

-——

-——

— -.

I

12,0\/’LC-

5x20’Vll/l

b

240\~AC–5x20i:l

Ll

24\/i3C–5x2CIMM

“1,/~A l/’4A

SLCI-BLC

SLO– BLC

1A SLO– BLO

I------’ ------i ❑ ❑ .

LOOP

FAIL

–

(A)

LOOP

FAIL

–

(B)

=

INDICATOR

GREEN

=

INDICATOR

RED

OUTPUT INDICATOR: Multi Ie function, If the indicator is off, no power is applied to the unit or the fuse IS bad and must \ e replaced. When power IS applied and no vehicle is on the loop(s), the indicator is green. When a vehicle is detected, the indicator becomes red. [fan one of the Wink -Blin@ indications intermittent or continuous loop fault occurs, it displays is out of the specified range or sud J enly changes more shown above. If the loop inductance will assume the condition as than 25°~, the indicator will displa condition (A and the outputs shown m the Output Relay Con J ition Table. I f the loop self-heals, the output will return to normal o eration and the indicator will display condition A), as long as no vehicle is on the loop(s . Pf a vehicle drives onto the loop, the indication wil\ change to condition (B as long as clears., the )ault was an the ve.Aicle is on the 100 (s). Reset the detector. If the fault indication intermittent condition. If the fault reappears must be repaired before the indication can

.

0039601

immediately be cleared.

RESET: To reset the detector, momentarily for 30 seconds or more.

after

reset,

the fault IS still current

and

change the sensitivity setting or remove power

I

Applies to Output B only when Output B is set to Presence M()[IES: ) switch position 2 = OFF). Hold time is nominally 30 to 60 minutes for cars. (1)11

. PRE:; ENCE .. /l ORMA1. } I,)ld

(IIY~~’IKjson

tlnl{!

IOOP 9eOff@V

and

of turns, vehicle size, and position of the

number

,,(:~)icler(~l,l[lv~! I(Jthe loop. 11/FINITE: (1)11‘ switch position 2 = ON). Continuous detection is maintained as long as a For If:;t]icle l ~re~ence:

AVallablewith

([ )It’ switch

position

the appropriate

settings

6 n OFF, position

of the

7 = ON),

switches shown below,

DIP

Output

B follows

Output

A,

t

DETCCTO?

P

[-~qj. “!

...

L

,9!0,

LOO?

I

F’(II

:;1

UN

LOOP

PULSE ON EXIT

ENTRY

. pULSE ON I; NTRY: (DIP switch position 6250 millis[!(:~~l~d Pulse outPut as vehicle >

PULSE

ON

EXIT:

(DIP

switch

position

6 =

OFF,

drives 6 = ON,

position

onto

>

~AIL: 6VCIII or

B

(DIP

switcl]

of an existlllg

position loQP

6 = ON,

position

OFF). Output

the IOOP.

position

2g0 n~illisecolld p~jlse output as vehicie drives off the

7 =

7 =

B generates

“

OFF).

-

Output B generates a

loop.

7 = ON).

Output

B generates

fault. This output maybe used to control an

an output

external

warning

in the device

otl~er signalil~g device.

OPTION: ALL DELAY 8 LJlflut U is affected only

Delays when

set

the

detect

to Presence

(call)

outputs

or Pulse

after

the

vehicle

enters

the

loop.

on Entry.

> (f)ll’ switch position 3 = OFF). O seconds. No delay. & (~lf> switch position 3 = ON). 2 second delay to ignore th~l~ 5 miles per hour (8 kph).

cars

passing

over the loops faster

* CALL EXTEND

OPTION: Holds the detect (cali) outputs for a fixed time after the vehicie clears Pulse on Exit will occur at the end tho 1001) Output B is affected only when set to Presence. output. of the Plosenw > (Dlf’ Qwitch position 4 = OFF, position 5 = OFF). O seconds. No extension. > (Dip Qwitch position 4 = ON, position 5 = OFF), 2 second extension. > (Dl[’ ~wi[ch position 4 = OFF, position 5 = ON). 5 second extension. > (Dip r;witch position 4 = ON, position 5 = ON). 10 second extension.

+ 1

F

DZTECT - ---(sENs 4 = 4) NO DETECT (SENS 4 =

DSTECTOR

-

OUTPUT t

4} 1 A b

Ulbkl

SENSITIVITY

BOOST

=

OFF 0309101

.

sensitivity boost (DIP switch position 1 = OFF), the sensitivity remains at the level selected by the user and detection may be lost on high bed vehicles (between the tractor and the rear axles), which would allow the gate or door to close prematurely on the vehicle and cause damage,

Without

r

DETECT- ---(SENS 4 = 7) NO DETECT (SENS 4 =

4)

.

D: TECTOR

1 bA

OUTPUT

kwl

--”.

.“-

. With sens!twity boost turned on (DIP switch position 1 = ON), the sensitivity is automatically raised two levels (the maximum increase can never exceed level 9) above rhe level selected by the user. This allows the user to select the minimum sensitivity necessary to initially detect the desired vehicles, while eliminating nuisance detection of small vehicles, such as bicycles, hand trucks, etc. The sensitivity returns to its preset level when the vehicle leaves the loop. iEK Detector

Systems

Page 7

. CROSSTALK: When two or more similar loops connected to different detectors are installed in close proximity, detection by one detector can cause the adjacent loops to operate erratically. . To avoid crosstalk, set the frequency switches shown below.

of each detector to a different frequency,

using the

> (DIP switch position 8 = ON, Position 9 = ON). Low. > (DIP switch position 8 = OFF, Position 9 = ON), Medium Low. > (DIP switch position 8 = ON, Position 9 = OFF). Medium High. > (DIP switch position 8 = OFF, Position 9 = OFF). High. . To properly obtain the proper frequency, measure the frequent of each detector with the frequency switches set to High, using the IDC DS Part No. 501 2 requency Tester, Then set the frequency switches oneachdetectorto establish at least a 5% frequencvdifference between each other detector.

TROUBLESHOOTING 1

SYMPTOM Indicator is not on.

Indicator flashes in groups of 3 short flashes per second.

I

POSSIBLE CAUSE No input voltage.

1. Faulty or open loop or leadin. 2, Poorly crimped terminals and/or loose connections.

--

1-325, llev. 5- &XL97

CORRECTION 1. Replace defective fuse. 2. Check external fuse or circuit breaker. 3. Check wiring to detector, 1. Check d.c. resistance of I loop (normally 100 megohms). 3. Check that loop is tightly connected to the proper terminals, if used. 4. Check that splices are tightly soldered and sealed , against moisture.

I

—..-—. .

SAW CUT EXIT AT CIJREi OR END OF PAJEL!SP,T —

[~-’)

$ljx~~:’;’”’

1--1

SPLICE

T

AREA

T,

I

~—————— _ I

LGO: (1/2”

I

I

.__--L

t_____________ SEALANT MIN DEPTH)

1

_____

I

I

I

1

I

PAVEMENT

I ~

I I I

13ACKER F/00

I

LOOP

‘

WIRES

L03~

I

BACKfR ROD LoOp WIRES

I ~

I

SEALANT

: ,

I L

I L-

LGOP

SAW C’JT

,,?

LEAD-IN (TYPICAL)

(~pIcAL)

I ———_—

PART

_______

______-J

DSI WIRE NO I AWGI OUTER

SLOT OIA WIDTH

L______

USE

16

.218

1/4’”

0S1–116S

16

.245

1/4”

8R–25!I

.375

RL.?–250

ASPHALT

DSI-120

20

.120

1/3”

BR-125

.250

RL?-125

CONCRETE

0S1-116

[

B9-250

.375

RLR–250

__l

_______

TABLE 1 BACKER RoD ROLLER OISC FART NO. [ cm I PART NO AS? HALT,

,I

SAW CUT

IN

1

CONCRETE (U NSTA3LE

PAvEMENT)

(MONOLITHIC

SLAB)

TABLE 2 t+JMEZR OF TURNS BY PERIMETER PERIMETER fFT) NO OF TURNS 10 14 20 34 6a

– -

13 19 32 66 UP

6 5 4 3 2 ?,409401

TYPICAL

SAW CUT LOOP

INSTALLATION

Two types of loop installations may be used. For existing pavements, saw cut loops (illustrated above) are required. Preformed loops encased in PVC pipe orXLPE tubing, of which IDC Detector Systems offers a wide assortment, may be used in new installations, The geometry (size and shape) of the loop defines the detection zone characteristics. Loop size may vary and will depend on lane width, traffic patterns, and types of vehicles to be detected. The loop installation area must be chosen to avoid locating the loop wires directly on reinforcing steel, electrical cables, conduits, or water pipes. Loop wires should be installed a minimum of 2 inches above, NEVER BELOW, reinforcing bars or other metallic objects, Bars and other metallic objects running at right angles to the loop wires have less effect than when running parallel. Electrical cables near the loop can possibly cause false impulses to the magnetic field generated by the loop, causing erratic operation of the detector. For more complete instructions and information, refer to IDC Detector Systems publication Openers.

SAW CUT LOOP INSTALLATIONS The saw slots must be the proper depth (1 k to 3 inches) and clean, wi?h no sharp corner which could damage the wire insulation during installation. The greater depth should be used in softer pavement materials to protect the loop installation for a longer period of time against damage from surface erosion and wear. . The ~Jire must be held tightl in the bottom of the slot by means Of a plas!lc foanl type material called “backer rod. ” When t L is approach is used to completely cover the vjire, it forms a barrier between the wire and the sealant, which allows the wire to shift with any pavement shift, thereby increasing the life expectancy of the loop. However, if the backer rod is not pressed tightly in the slot, the loop wires will be loose in the slot. Loose wires in the slot can cause false calls from vibration or sudden movement. If the wire is completely covered, it is ESSENTIAL that no voids exist which would allow water to collect. The water will expand during freezing conditions. Freeze/thaw cycling will push the wire up and out of the slot, causing a loop failure.

.

The wire used in the loop should have an insulation rated fordirect burial. Since moisture can cause significant changes in the dielectric constant of the insulation, which results in excessive loop (frequency) drift, choose an insulation which is most impervious to moisture. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation (TFFN, THHN, and THHN-THWN) should be avoided, since it tends to absorb moisture and cracks easily. Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) or polyester insulated wire is very resistant to moisture absorption and provides good abrasion resistance. Three IDC IDC Detector Systems DSI-116 loop Detector Systems products meet these requirements. wire is 16 AWG stranded wire with 0.080” XLPE insulation for use in 1A” wide saw cuts in both concrete and asphalt. DSI-1 16S loop wire, a 16 AWG wire with polyester insulation and an added polyester sleeve to absorb the stresses created by long term pavement shift, is excellent for use in 1,4” wide saw cuts in asphalt. DSI-120 loop wire, a 20 AWG wire with polyester insulation, may be used in I,a” wide saw cuts in concrete.

.

.

Choose a sealant carefully to match the application and the pavement. Hard setting epoxies should not be used with asphalt. Caution should be observed when using hot sealants, as high temperatures can damage or destroy the wire insulation. IDC Detector Systems loop wire types, described above, are designed for use with hot sealants.

.

The end wires of the loop shall be held tightly with backer rod in the bottom of the saw cut slot between the perimeter of the loop and the splice points. Where they leave the saw cut (in the hand hole at the curb or edge of the pavement), they shall be twisted with a minimum of five twists per foot.

.

The feeder cable (to extend the lead-in) shall be a shielded twisted pair with a high density polyethylene insulation. The shield shall be floated (left unconnected and insulated) at the splice point between the loop and the feeder cable and shall be grounded to earth ground at the cabinet end only. Any other grounding arrangement can lead to ground loops and cause erratic system operation.

.

Alls Iices shall be soldered, even when initiall done with crimp type splices. Each splice point shal 1’be protected with a moisture proof seal. z ailure to observe these two precautions are two of the most common causes of problems in this system. CAUTION: when soldering, use only enough localized heat to adequately flow the solder through the connection without burning the surrounding insulation.

.

Another common problem is caused by loose connections at the terminal strip in the cabinet. Crimp type terminals should be soldered in the crimp sleeve and the screws on the terminal Adding Iockwashers is a further deterrent to the screws strip securely tightened down. loosening up \A~ithtime and vibration.

.

It is also strongly advisable to perform a loop inductance and leakage test. This can be accomdished usm~ the IDC Detector Systems Digital Loop Testing System (comprised of IDC DS P/N 501 Frequ&cy Tester Module, jDC DS P~N 503 Loop Excitation Module, and IDC DS Loop inductance measurement shall be P/N 507 Loop Insulation Tester (or equivalent). between 20 and 2,500 microhenries. Leakage resistance shall be equal to or greater than 100 megohms.

1-326, Rev. 5- 8125/97

Page 10

IDC Detector

Systams

NORGREN

Installation

General Purpose Compressed For compkle w orher tednid

re~ir

parls

assislan~,

SPECIFICATIONS IAaximum

In}el

Pre9wre:

Bowl:

Transparent

150 psig (103

bar)

Mlal Bowl: 2SI psig (17,2 bar) Temperature Range: ● Transparent Melal BwI:

Bowl: O lo 125°F (-18 to 52aC) O to 175°F (.18 tO 79%]

“ E@fow 35°F (2”C), me dewpoinl mu3: ‘ba less Ihan air Wnperalure,

01 the supply

air

INSTALLATION

NOTE Thtsa Ilquld

filter/rwgulator3

●nd

solld

ccrnpmssed

W//l ~SS condenss ●

s

●ir

dryer

air.

fhrough info

ttmporafum If watu

wfll

particles W*IW (hose

Ilqv)d

vJpor,

condonsaflmr

d~rlrnontal●fleci on tht

most

fho however,

t.Ml/fS and could

form drops.

mmovo from

dowmstmam Insfsll

could

●

n alr havo

your

repair ins~~tionso NO RGREN dtswbwor.

nearest

ADJUSTME~ 1. Before turning on system pressure, nxn filler/re$julalor adjustment counmrdtiw~sa unfit all load is removed from the r~ulating spring. 2. Turn on syslem pressure. adjusment cfotiwise until the 3. Turn fillerhgulamr desired ouI1et pre~ure is reached. aher making a change 4. To avoid minor adjustment in pressure setting, ahvays approach the desired pressure frolm a bwer pressure. When reduang from a higher IO a bwar satting, first reduce 10 some pressure less than that desired, then bring up 10 lhe desird pressure. tQhlen jam 5. On models wi[h a T-Handle adjustment, nu[ to lock pressure setting. 6. On models wi~ an adjusting knob, push Ihe Iockring on Ihe adjusting knob IN to”b~ and OUl to unlock the pessure sernng, Some fillerhqulator!i are not equipped with the bckring. “ On these models, simply push be adjusting knob IN to lock and OUT to unlock thra pressure seining.

●

appikallon

pipingshould be same size as fillar/reguIator ports. vertically (drain al bonom) in 2. Install filKrr/regulalor air line. Locale upslream of lubricators and as near as possible 10 the application pcinl. In systems witi a cydk demand, ins[a!l filler/regula!of ups!ream 01 frequen?y cyc!!ng directional control valves. 01 arrow on the filter/ 3. Air flow musl be in directiin regulator. In soma cases, he word IN is stamped next to the inlet pofl. Connect piping 10 proper pcfls using pipe threed sealant cm male threads onfy. 00 not alkmv sealant 10 enter interiof of Kl[erlregula!or. mnnecl an outiel Dressure oauoe 10 4. II desired -. one of the gauge porls. Gauge Pns can also be used as additional oudets. Plug unu%d gauge porls. 5. On filler/regulators with en automatic drain, a drain line may be ccmnecled 10 he drain fining. Avoid restrictions in the drain line. 6, Before applying air pressure, b sure bowl is hand tight. 1.Air line

Air Filter/Regulators

inlo{mallon.

f=nlacl

NPAK4m June IWO

Instructions

SERVICING 1. Filter/regulators with manual drain must be drained as frequendy as necessary 10 keep liquid level below batffe. II liquid level rises above baffle, liquid will be carried dcwmsueam. 2. Clean or replace filter elemenl when it becomes p:iJfiglSd 0{ diiif.

@

NORGREN @19%) NORGREN

@ -.

.- . . ... .—- -.

“.—

..-.

-..

.

——---

—

.

MINIATURE FOR INDUSTRIAL

NIP-206 Oclober 1987 SuD~rsedes Mav 1984

REGULATOR

COMPRESSED

AIR

OR WATER

SERVICE

TYPE

R04 R06 11.111

OPERATION

RETWY:l —1 !.

4,:

if

‘%

& ,..w1B!o, ,S .-d ,. . .o.n~,.,ud mr or .vater %vt!wn to mamEmJY Com!ars, wd a,< R&i COmDIsu#d a,. MAIN PoRTS; 1!8’” or 1/4 PTF GAUGE PORTS; Two 1/8., PTF TYPE R06 0,. cIhr Wm, r.l, e., ng or non, mlawong RCA P,,!on. t. I,m\ng or n.a. t.l+. wng OUT LET PRESSURE AO.KISTMENT RANGES. ST Ati OAFIO 3!0 IOODI,9 I 21064 b~rl OPT IC)NAL Z (U ~~pt+l [ : tO 3 4 b,,l OpTIONAL 10 7 bwt 1 !0 loosq(l

EO..,

CONDITIONS

h,) ma-. Tcmm,a:,re RI.Y N,!er $W.,CS 35°to 150°F (2”10 E6%) Co-xctIti A,r S*rv, c* D.o..,yn TVD* 0°10 !500F [-10° !0s6%)” pt:m TyDe. 35°fo 15G°F (2°10 6+5TI

I.IBI

THESE REGULATORS ARE INTENDED FOR USE IN INDUS TRIAL CDMPRESSEO AIR OR wATER SYSTEfAS ONLY. 00 NOT uSE THESE tTEGULATOFW WHERE PRESSURE OR TEMPERA. TuRE CAN EXCEED RATE OOPERATIP4G CONDITIONS. IN ExCESS OP WE REGULATOR IF OUTLET PRESUFSE PRESSURE SE TTINCI COULO CAUsE DOWNSTREAM EOUIPMENT TO RUPTURE OR MALFUNCTION. INSTALL A PRESSURE RE. LIEF DEVICE 0(x4 NSTti EiM”OF Tti E REGULATOR, THE RELIEF PRESSURE ANO FLOW CA PAC!~ OF THE RELIEF OEVICE MuST SATISFY SYSTEM REOUIREMENm. THE ACCURACY OF THE INDICATION OF PRESJRE GAUOES CAN CHANGE, BOTH WRING E+EIPMENT IOESPITE CARE IN PACKAGING) ANO OURINO THE SERVICE LIFE. IF A PRESSURE GAUa E IS TO EE uSEO WITH TNESE PRODUCTS ANO IF INACCURATE INDICATIONS MAY BE HAZARDOUS TO PERSONNEL OR PROPERTY. THE OAUGE S14C4JL0 BE CALI. EiRATE12 EEFORE INITIAL INSTALLATION ANO AT REGULAR lNTEfl-VA~S OURINO uSE. FOR GAUGE ST AN OAROS REFER TO ANSI 6A0.1.1974. BEFORE USING WITH FLUIDS OTNER THAN AS SPECIFIED, FOR P40P41NDuSTJEIAL APPLICATIONS, OR FOR LIFE SUWORT SYSTEMS CONSULT C. A NO RGREN CO,

Mod81\ Only}

Ac. !,!

R,,,n

O, br,,,

AI LJm,n.m

O, b,,,, B,IN

. .

Ac. f.l R.,,. . ., Buru N . . Ac,

t,l

R,,,.

@ @

NORGREN G

19s7. K)RGREN

INSTALLATION

‘—----T----J 5

6

outlet Pre:surO gaup ,0 one of ma ~flup Penn (l/~. ~wm at ~“ 10 Inl Bl PCYt on side of bmy). Gauge portn C6n also k9 uwd ai addi nonal 10* flow ourlets. Plug unused ports,

TO Ob:.wn mnximum F071 up!rream N~rgran

reljatili W and sewice of che regulator.

life,

in!tall

a Ihlter

%5

PISTON TYPE , _

Ia

Sclc.:

5

4-;

Iy t,.unt,l all ● ir prescuta, adlul:man’c

rel.am,

pull

Iockring

~_6 .

o

2.

3.

Shut

inlnt

off

prmsura

*—9

I

—!0

Ifiii$ ‘t)d ‘“

upward,

● “d

roa”c~

praaaurt

in tnlet

mnd outletli”aq

to zero. Turn adjuatmant counlarclcckwnse until -II load it removad from l,3ring [5). Regulator can b+ dit~samb led without rarnoval from air line Unlcr@w tho bonnet (2 or 3), then ,emovc $pringre$t (4 - b~ml bonnet only), ragula:lng tpring [5). dipring and di-phragm [6 & 71 or pi~ton and packing 16A & 7A). Un:crew the VEl W Sa#I and g~tkat #stembly (8) uning a 3/8” socket, then remove vmlve {9) and vElve Ipring (10).

Dimensions All a,m,,on,

,“ ,.ulor ~uiv~lent) !o~cking [7A). Tome vslve su,t (8) to 4.to-G to SO IMO inch-pounds,

REPAIR

inch.

KITS (Standard Modali

Disghrsam Type – Nonrelioving (icemt6thru Rolte.ing (itamt6\hr” P),ton Type Nonreliewing (itemt Relieving litemt6A,

poundi.

bonnet

10 I

MAX.

PNL T*K

.2516)

$,

T

I

l.la 135)

w. PAMEL MOUNTI!D PLASTIC EONPACT . . .

10) . .

U!!!!!L

(2 or 3)

Only)

10)

6A, 7A,8,9. 7A,8,9,10)

Torqua

HCILE

1.1 B1301 O,A

. .

,

.

. .

. .

, . . . .

3407~1 3407.02

. . . .

2961.01 296142

MOUNTINO BRACKE1 PLASTIC BONNET yaIIOV+) . . . . , Ditphrtg-m type ICOICM coja PiItOn tylJa (Color cd, ~eIIow) . , , . , . . , , . Disohrsom AXamblias [it~m ?I _ Nonr-elieving . 1 ~-. “.’; , . . Relieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . n::::::::::::: Vclve A!$embly[ilem9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vslve Sa#t #nd Gttket ~tembly {i\em 8} , . . . . .

2960.04 396043

GRAPHIC

341055 341 0.% 2959.52 3402.51

PLASTIC Mounting Bracket [Includas P“I mtQ””t) . Panel Mounting Nut , . . . . . . . . Tampe ~ltMtN> ILA5

Drehstrommotoren Three-Phase Motors Moteurs triphas~s Motores trif~sicos Motori trifasi Trefasmotorer Betriebsanleitu

1~~~

Formes Formas

IMB3

Forme costruttive Utforingsformer

constructivas

’53

““r’G“& 6 IMB6

IMB7

u dung

oaer or our 0 oppure eller

B

IM s14

IM B 35 IM B 34

IM V 19

IMB8

DEUTSCH

~

PP5 1 PP9

1

56. ..9OL

1LA5

Bauformen Types of construction

LP5 1 LP9

1

EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order No.: 610.42057/21f

rig/instructions

Baugrof3en (BG) Frame sizes (BG) D6s. carcasse (BG) Tamatios constructivos (BG) Grandezze (BG) Utforingsstorlekar (BG)

,;

LC5 1 LA9 lMFfj

1

ENGLISH

WARNUNG von Gefahren

Die Angaben und Anweisungen in allen gelieferten Betriebsund sonstigen Anleitungen mussen zur Vermeiund Schaden stets beachtet werden.

A

!

must tions

The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions supplied, and in all other related instructions, always be observed in order to avoid hazardous situaand the risk of possible injury or damage. WARNING

Dieser Betriebsanleitung ist eine zusatzliche Sicherheitsinformation (gelb) beigegeben, die erganzende Angaben zur Sicherheit fur elektrische Maschinen und Gerate enthalt. Lefztere ist daher such eine Erganzung fur alle weiteren noch gelieferten Betriebsund sonstigen Anleitungen (z. B. fur Bremsen, USW.).

These instructions are augmented by supplementary instructions (yellow), which contain additional information on the safety measures for electrical machines and devices. The latter instructions thus augment all previously submitted instructions and all other related instructions (e. g. for brakes, etc.).

Fur die Ausfiihrung von SO fldeNarlanten der Maschinen Gerate gelten zusatzlich die Angaben in den Katalogen Angeboten.

For data solely to the relevant

und und

applicable catalogs

to custom-built and quotations.

motors,

please

refer

Beschreibung

Description

Anwendungsbereich

Application

Dle Motoren konnen in staublger oderfeuchter Umgebung aufgestellt werden. Die Isolierung ist tropenfest. Bei sachgema13er Lagerung oder Aufstellung im Freien sind normalerweise gegen Wltterungseinfl usse keine besonderen SchutzmaBnahmen an den Motoren notwendlg.

The motors are suitable for operation in dusty and damp environments. The motors have tropicallzed insulation. If the motors are properly stored or installed outdoors, special weatherproofing measures are not usually required.

Aufbau

Construction

und

Arbeitsweise

and

mode

of operation

und lLA9-Motoren (auf3er Baugro13e 56), lLC5-und -Motoren sind eigengekuhlt (mit Luftern). 1PP5 und lPP9Motoren sind eigengekuhlt entweder - z. B. beim Einsatz als Luftermotoren - durch auf den Laufern anzuordnende SonderIufter, oder durch Fremdlufter. 1LA5- und lLA9-Motoren der -Motoren sind selbstgeBaugro13e 56, 1LP5-, 1LP9- und kuhlt (ohne Lufter)

1LA5 and 1LA9 motors (except frame size 56), 1LC5 and motors are self-ventilated (with fans). 1PP5 and 1PP9 motors are self-ventilated either by separate fans arranged on the rotors, e.g. to serve as fan motors, or by external fans. 1LA5 and 1LA9 motors are nonmotors of frame size 56, 1LP5, 1LP9 and ‘“.’! ventilated (without fans).

Bei Fui3motoren

The feet of foot-mounted frame.

1LA5

Eel lLC5-Motoren mit zu beachten

sind die Fu(3e am Gehause ist zusatzllch

angegossen.

dle Bremsenbetriebsanleitung

motors

Where 1LC5 motors are concerned, brake operating instructions.

are cast please

Integrally

with the

also observe

the 1

C Siemens AG 1985 Ausgabe/Edition 05.91

Operation

Betrieb

A I .

Alle Arbeiten am Motor nur durchfuhren, wenn elektrische Spannungslosigkeit sichergestellt ist.

WARNUNG

A I .

Before starting any work on the machine, be sure to isolate it from the power suppfy.

WARNING

Aufstellung

Installation

Betragt die Zeitvon der Lieferung biszurlnbetriebnahme der Motoren bet gunstigen Bedingungen (Auf bewahrung introckenen, staubUnd erschutterungsf reien Raumen) mehr als 4 Jahre oder bei ungunstigen Bedingungen mehr als 2 Jahre, so sollten die Lager erneuert werden.

If the motors have been stored for more than 4 years under favorable conditions (storage in a dry place free from dust and vibration) or for more than 2 years under adverse conditions prior to commissioning, the motor bearings must be replaced.

Fur die Baugrof3en 90 S und 90 L gilt: Motoren mlt oben angeordnetem Klemmenkasten haben zur Elnhaltung der genormten Fuf3abmessungen bet der Bauform IM B 3 an den hinteren Fuf3en Doppellocher. Bei Motoren mit seitllch angeordnetem Klemmenkasten (Sonderausftihru ngen) haben bet Bauform IM B 3 allevier Ftif3e Doppellocher. Dadurch konnen such bel links angeordnetem Klemmenkasten die genormten Lochabstande eingehalten werden (siehe Fig.6).

The following applies to frame sizes 90 S and 90 L: The rear feet of motors of type of construction IM B 3 with topmounted terminal box have double holes in order to ensure that these machines adhere to the standard foot dimensions. On the other hand, all four feet of motors of type of construction IM B 3 with side-mounted terminal box (special designs) have double holes. This enables the standard hole clearances to be maintained even when the terminal box is arranged on the left-hand side (see Fig. 6).

Bei Maschtnen mlt Wellenende nach oben und unten, mu13 gewahrlelstet sein, daB keln Wasser in das obere Lager eindringen kann

Whenever machines are installed with the shaft extension pointing upwards or downwards, provision must be made to prevent water from entering the upper bearing.

Das Klemmenkastenoberteil kann bel ILA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5- und lPP9-Motoren urn 180 Grad, ,,.+

In the case of 1LA5, ILA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 and 1PP9 motors, the top part of the terminal box can be turned through .“, . 180 degrees. ‘. -, ,, ,,,

1LC5-,

The terminal box housing is made of electrically non-conductive plastic materiaf. Therefore, aff gfands and pfugs for the cable entries on 1LA5, 1LA9,1LP5, 1LP9,1PP5 and 1PP9 motors must likewise be made of efectricaffy nonconductive material.

Wegen des elektrisch nichtleitenden Kunststoffgehauses des Klemmenkastens durfen fiir die Leitungseinfuhrungsbohrungen bei 1LA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5-, und lPP9-Motoren nur Verschraubungen und Verschluf3schrauben aus elektrisch nichtleitendem Material verwendet werden.

A

Auswuchten elementen

Bafancing

L& I

.

VORSICHT

von

Laufer

und

damit

verbundenen

Antriebs-

!

CAUTION

of rotors

and connected

transmission

elements

Die Laufer slnd mlt elner In das Wellenende elngesetztenvollen oder halben PaBfeder dynamisch ausgewuchtet und zwar ist: — bei Maschlnen ab Fertigung 1991 die Art der Auswuchtung am AS-We llenende (Well enstirnseite) oder auf dem Lei stung sschlld markiert. (Markierung (,’ bzw .H) auf dem Lei stungsschild bei Motoren b[s einschlief31ich BaugroBe 80 mm). (F = Auswuchtung mit voller Paf3feder) (H = Auswuchtung mit halber Paf3feder) — bel Maschlnen mit Fertigung bis Ende1990 der LaufermltvolIer Pa flfeder ausgewuchtet (keine Marklerung).

The rotors are dynamically balanced with either a full or half featherkey fitted in the shaft end, namely — For machines manufactured from 1991 onwards, the type of balancing is indicated at the drive end of the shaft (on shaft end face) or on the rating plate. (Markings f~ or @j on the rating plate of motors up to frame size 80 mm.)

Auf rlchtlge Auswuchtart des Abtrlebelementes entsprechend der Auswuchtart des Laufers (F-oder H-Auswuchtung) achten!

Make sure the transmwsion elements are balanced according to the type of balancing of the rotor (F or H balancing)!

Bei Auswuchtung

Balanced with half featherkey Unbalance may occur in the case of transmission elements (e.g. couplings, belt pulleys, .) with a hub-to-shaft end length ratio 1500 rev/rein. In such instances, it may be necessary y to rebalance the machine, e.g. to machine off that part of the featherkey protruding from the transmission element and beyond the shaft contour.

mit halber

Paf3feder

Bei Abtnebselementen (z. B. Kupplungen, Riemenscheiben, ...) mlt elnem Lange nverhaltnis von Nabenlange zur Lange des Wellenendes 0.8 und Drehzahl>1500/min konnen Laufruhestorungen au ftreten In diesen Fallen ist gegebenenfalls eine Nachwuchtung vorzunehmen, z. B. Istderausdem Antrlebselement und uber der Wellenkontur herausragende Teil der Paf3feder abzuarbelten Das Auf- und Abzlehen von Antriebselementen (Kupplungen. Rlemenschelben, Zahnrad, .) wt grundsatzlich mit einer geelgneten Vorrlchtung auszufuhren (Fig. 7j. Elektrischer

Anschluf3

(F = balanced (H = balanced

with full featherkey) with half featherkey)

– For machines manufactured up to the end of 1990, the rotors are all balanced with full featherkeys (No markings).

Use only suitable pusher remove the transmission gears, .). Electrical

and puller tools (Fig. 7) to fit and elements (couplings, belt pulleys,

connection

Netzspannung und Netzfrequenz mussen mlt den Daten auf dem Leistungsschild ubereinstimmen. + 5°/0 Spannungsoder Frequenzabweichung ~~, “’”I ‘.:! . : ~~ ,.: f . ?:’., sind ohne Leistungsherabsetzung zulassig. Anschlu13 und Anordnung der Schaltbugel nach dem Im Klemmenkasten beflndllchen Schaltblld vornehmen. Schutzleiter an diese Klemme 4 anschlle13en.

Check to see that system voltage and frequency agree with the ratinq-~late data. Voltage or frequency deviations of + 5 o/o ‘h!i:~ u:-:, from the rated -re\]lJ.. r’. } (I+JL .!! ’LI-1} ! ! values are permitted without the necessity of derating the output. Connection and arrangement of the terminal links must agree with the diagram provided in the terminal box. Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal with the + marking.

Bei Anschluf3klemmen mit Klemmbugeln (z. B. nach DIN 46282) sind die Leiter so zu verteifen, dafi auf beiden Stegseiten etwa gleiche Kfemmhohen entstehen. Diese Anschfuf3arf erfordert daher, daf3 ein einzelner Leiter U-formig gebogen werden muf3. Dies gift such fur den Schutzfeiteranschf uf3, grtingefb (siehe Fig. 3). Samtliche Leiter unter auf3eren Erdungswinkefn sind grundsatzfich U-formig zu biegen (siehe Fig. 4).

Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282), arrange the conductors so the clips are virtuafly fevef, j.e. not tilted when tightened. This method of connection means that the ends of single conductors must be bent in the shape of a U. This afso appfies to the yelfow-green PE conductor (see Fig. 3). Alf conductors connected under earthing angfes must always be U-shaped (see Fig. 4).

2

Anziehdrehmomente fur Schrauben schluf3klemmen (auf3er Klemmenleislen)

und

Muttern

der

An-

Tightening nal strips)

mM ‘@ 1

A

for terminal

bolts and nuts (except

1

,

1

1

fortermi

I

-

!

I

Maintenance

Instandhaltung ! .

torques

Alle Arbeiten nungslosen durchfiihren.

WARNUNG

nur im elektrisch Zustand der

Before starting any work on machine be sure to isolate it from power s&ply.

spanAnlage

A

!

‘ARN’NG

the the

Schmierung

Lubrication

Dle Motoren haben Rillenkugellager mit zwei Deckscheiben (2ZC3 Ausfuhrung) und Dauerschmierung. Derfreie Raum zwischen den Deckscheiben ist zu 31)0/o bis 400/o mit Schmierfett gefullt. Schmierfettsorten siehe Fig. 2. Das Auf- und Abziehen von Walzlagern ist mit einer geeigneten Vorrichtung auszufuhren (Fig. 7).

The motors feature deep-groove ball bearings which are provided with two cover plates (2ZC3) and permanent lubrication. Between 30 o/o and 40 o/o of the space between the cover plates is filled with grease. See Fig. 2 for the recommended types of grease. Use onlv suitable Dusher and Duller tools (Ficr. 7) to flt and remove ~he rolling -”contact bearings.

Motor in lsollerstoff klasse nach VDE 0530

Motorkbhlmittel temperature “c

Motor in insulation class to VDE 0530

Fettsorte fur Lagerschmierung

zum Beispiel

B

–20

.. +60

Schmierfett DIN 51825K3N Schmierfett DIN 51502KH3R

oder F oder H

tiefer

H

hoher

Fig. 2 Schmierfett

als

– 20

.

–20to

+60

Lubricant to DIN 51825K3N Lubricant to DIN 51502K}< 3 R

H

below

– 20

H

above

+ 60

see data on rating arid/or lubricant ~late

or F or

siehe Leistungsschild und/oder Schmierschildangaben

als + 60

For

I examr)le

B

UNIREXN3’ (Fa. Esso)

Recommended bearing grease

Motor coolant temperature in° C

Laut Herstellerana abe Lauf Druluna 51806 be der Prufiem?eratur’ + 160;

B nach DIN C bestanden

Fig. 2 Lubricant

.

Manufacturer’s 51606 passed +160’IC

Spec$flcahon successfully

I Esso UNIREX N3’

plate

Runmng tesl B to DIN at a test Temperature ot

Die Fettfullung der Lager reicht unter normalen Betriebsbedin gungen mehrere Jahre. Wenn es die Betriebsverhaltn isse ermoglichen, sollten bei Motoren mit Drehzahlen bis 3600/min nach 20000 Betriebsstunden oder spatestens nach 3 Jahren die Lagerstellen gerelnigt und die Lager erneuert werden. Eine Neufettung ist nicht moglich. Das Fettder neuen Lager muf3den in Fig 2 genannten Qualitaten nach DIN 51825 und DIN 51502 genugen und sonstige in Fig, 2 angegebene Eigenschaften besitzen. Sonderfette fur besondere Betnebsbedingungen sind auf oder neben dem Leistungsschild angegeben bzw anzugeben,

Under normal operating conditions grease packings for bearings should last several years. When condition sallow, the journals in motors rated for speeds up to 3600 rev/rein should be cleaned and the bearings replaced after 20000 service hours or 3 years at the latest. The bearings cannot be regressed. Grease used in the replacement bearings must conform to the qualities specified in DIN 51825 and DIN 51502 as per Fig. 2and have all other properties stipulated in Fig. 2. Special greases used for particular operating conditions must be indicated on or next to the rating plate.

Sofern benachbarte Fettvorratsraume eine Fettfullung erhalten (z B. im Lagerschild zwecks Abdichtung der Wellenbohrung im allgemeinen 2/3 gefullt), istdafur diegleiche Fettsortewieim Lager vorzusehen. Das Mischen verschiedener Fetfsorten ist zu vermeiden.

If adjacent grease chambers need a fresh packing of grease, e. g. in the end plate to seal the shaft bore (usuafly 2/3 full), be sure the grease is the same as that used In the bearing. Avoid mixing different types of grease.

Es wird empfohlen, beim Austauschen der Lager eventuell vorhandene und dem Verschlei B unterworfene Dichtelemente (z. B. Radial-Wellendichtring) ebenfalls zu erneuern. Sind Radial -Wellendichtringe ohne Feder eingebaut, so muf3 such das Ersatzteil ohne Feder eingesetzt werden.

When replacing bearings, it is recommendable to also replace any seallng elements subject to wear, e. g. radial shaft sealing rings. If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement sealing rings must also be of the springless type.

Beschadigte

All damaged

Teile sind durch

neue zu ersetzen.

-V’:’’i.l:?, W.Ati IMk-i ., . , ,n,,,,-; T., :, u: ’ ...,-.-,, Y.(:i

.,,

:,,,

.

,,-

p:~.

. .,

.,..

..!.,,

.?!. .~

-,f~

,d:,.

l.;

p

,

found

must

be replaced,

-,

- t$? ...

parts

y,

.,.

+

-*L

,$

;,

..*;”-7

:j;,.,;?.t!

&,’

,

,,,.:p

$q,

fer

.

,p~

.&.

,,

,’

,-

,::.

1,

,’

3

gas that IS l)kei~ to occur Eaclk motor MUSI ~e provide[l if:,t~ ~ clrc[l;!-breaker ‘which ‘S set to [he rated c(i,”rent 0[ thdr irlo!(jr and which. under Iocked-lolor conditions !rips withlr! tile ilrne s!aied on the motor- rating plate (corn pa?e vwth !h,~ trlpolrlg F’(.,lt: wIt F the c,rcu[t-!]reaker} ch,ar.dcterlshc supphed changing motors require a separate circuit-breaker fcr {m, II spesd If, however, oucrload prolectmn IL 10 be provided only In tl’c form of direct temperature monitoring based on tenlperalur(: sensors (see DIN El\J 50019 /V DE O170/0171 Part6, Appen[jxA Al b) thIc motor des:gn must be specially t!:s;eci ant! cert!f,e[; fOF this See DIN 57165/VDE 0165. Rcpalrs must be carried OUI ,n Slernens spc~c[c~d by an offic.lally ;ippro’ved Speclalisi

.vo~ksho(js Continued

on page

8

ESPANOL

FRANCAIS afin d’assurer la protection des personnes et d’&riter tout endommagement de la machine, il est imp~ratif-de respecter Ies indications contenues clans Ies prt%entes instructions de service et clans I’ensemble de la documentation du produit. A Z.J-.J

(I: IrI

AITENTION

A

!

Para evitar peligros y datios, es preciso cibservar siempre Ios dates y Ias indicaciones que figuran en todas Ias de servicio y en Ias dem~s suministradas.

ATENCl~N

instrucciones

Les instructions de service ltMtN> Sicherheitsinformationen

fur elektrische

Betriebsmittel

zum Einsatz

in Starkstromanlagen

Safety information for electrical equipment for use in heavy current installations lnfOrmatiOnS relatiVeS ~ la Sf$CUrit6 de materiels dectriques destinW a Wre utils6s clans des installations a courant

fort

Informaciones de seguridad para IOS equipos ei~ctricos que se utilicen en instalaciones de energia !nfOrmaZiOni per la SiCUreZZa nell’ impiego di dispositivi elettrici in impianti ad alta tensione Sakerhetsinformation for elektrisk utrustning som anvands i starkstromsanllaggningar Betriebsanleitung

EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order No.: 610.42356/21

/ Instructions

DEUTSCH

ENGLISH

Dieses Informationsblatt mit den Warnhinweisen gilt als Zusatz zur produktspezifischen Betriebsanleitung und mu13 aus Sicherheitsgrunden besonders beachtet werden.

This information sheet with its warning is in addition to the operating instructions for the individual DrOdUCtS and for safetv reasons its contents must be adhered to. -

A

GEFAHR

Diese elektrischen Maschinen bzw. Ger.?ite sind Betriebsmittel zum Einsatz in industriellen Starkstromanlagen. Wahrend des Betriebes haben diese Betriebsmit● tel gefahrliche, spannungsfiihrende blanke Teile, ggf. such bewegte bzw. rotierende Teile. Sie konnten deshalb, z. B. bei unzuIassigem Entfernen der erforderlichen Abdackungen, bei unsachgemaBem Einsatz, falscher Bedienung oder unzureichender Wartung, schwerste gesundheitliche oder materielle Schaden verursachen. Die fiir die Sicherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen miissen deshalb gewahrleisten, dat3 - nur qualifizierte Personen mit Arbeiten an den Maschinen bzw. Geraten beau ftragt werden, - diese Personen u. a. die mitgelieferten Betriebsanleitungen und iibrigen Lfnterlagen der Produktdokumentation bei allen entsprechenden Arbeiten stets vetiiigbar haben und verpflichtet werden, diese Lfnterlagen consequent zu beachten, - Arbeiten an den Maschinen bzw. Geraten oder in deren Nahe fiir nichtqualifizierte Personen untersagt werden.

I

A I

e

t

CWa/ifiziertes Personal sind Personen, die, auf Grund ihrer Ausbildung, Erfahrung und Unterweisung sowie ihrer Kenntmsse uber elnschlaglge Normen, Beshmmungen, Unfallverhu tungsvorschriften und Betriebsverhaltmsse, von dem fur dle SI cherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen berechhgt worden slnd, die ]ewells erforderllchen Tatigkeiten auszufuhren und dabel mogllche Gefahren erkennen und vermelden konnen (Deflnl tlonen fur Fachkrafte siehe such DIN VDE 0105 oder IEC 364) Unter anderem slnd such Kenntmsse uber Erste-Hilfe-Ma Bnahmen und dle ortlichen Rettungsei nrlchtungen erforderllch. Fur Arbeiten an Starkstromanlagen Ist das Verbot des Einsatzes nlchtquallflzlerter Personen z B In DIN VDE 0105 oder IEC 364 geregelt

! /!!3

Es wird vorausgesetzt, dalJ die grundsatzlichen Planungsarbeiten der An/age sowie alle Arbeiten zu Transpoti, Montage, Installation, Inbetriebsetzung, Wartung und Reparaturen von qualifiziertem Personal ausgefiihrt bzw. durch verantwortliche Fachkrafte kontrollieti werden. Hierbei sind insbesondere zu beachten: - die technischen Daten und Angaben iiber die zu/assige Verwendung (Montage-, AnschluB-, UmgebungsWARNUNG

Slemens

AG 1990

DANGER The electric machines and equipment are for use in industrial heavy current installations. During operating this equipment has bare parts which are live and dangerous and may also have moving or rotating parts. For this reason, unauthorized removal of the necessary covers, improper use, incorrect operation or insufficient maintenance could lead to severe personal injury or property damage.

f Those responsible for the safety of the installation must therefore ensure that - only qualified personnel are entrusted to work on the machines or equipment, - these persons always have at their disposal the operating instructions and other product documentation supplied when they do such work and that they undertake to follow consistently any such ins tructions, - non-qualified personnel are not permitted to work on or near the machines or equipment.

Qualified personnel are persons who, on account of their training, experience and Instruction and their knowledge of relevant standards, specifications, accident prevention regula hons and operating conditions, have been authorized by those responsible for the safety of the plant to carry out the necessary work and who can recogrwze and avoid possible dangers (see also IEC 364 for definlhons of specialist personnel)

A knowledge of first ald IS also required as is information about local rescue facilities. The Sllpulation that only qualifled personnel mayworkon heavy current Installations IS Included for exam~le In IEC 364

A!

It is assumed that basic planning work for the installation and all work concerning transpoti, assembly, commissioning, maintenance and repair is done by qualified personnel or checked by responsible skilled personnel. WARNING

Particular note must be taken of the foilwing: - The technical data and information on permissible use (assembly conditions, connection conditions,

1

-

und Betriebsbedingungen), die u.a. im Katalog, den der Betriebsanleitung, den Au ftragsunterlagen, Schildangaben und der iibrigen Erzeugnisdokumentation enthalten sind, die allgemeinen Errichtungsund Sicherheitsvorschriften, die ortlichen, anlagespezifischen Bestimmungen und Erfordernisse, der fachgerechte Einsatz von Werkzeugen, Hebe- und Transporteinrichtungen, die Benutzung personlicher Schutzausstattungen, Montagebedingungen fiir Gerate, die ggf. entsprechend IPOO (ohne Abdeckungen) ausgeliefert werden: Im Betrieb mutl der erforcferliche Beri.ihrungsschutz vorhanden bzw. eine gefahrliche Annaherung verhindert sein.

ambient and ned in the instructions, tation, - The general

operating conditions), which are contaicatalog, order documents, operating rating plate and other product documenerection

and safety regulations,

- The local, plant-specific specifications and requirements, - The proper use of tools, Iifiing gear and transpott devices, - The use of personal protective gear. - Installation instructions for equipment which may be supplied to IPOO (without covers). In operation, this equipment must have the necessary shock protection fitted or access must be prevented which could result in danger.

Die Betriebsanleitungen konnen aus Griinden der Ubersichtlichkeit nicht alle Detailinformationen zu moglichen Bauvarianten enthalten und konnen insbesondere nicht jeden denkbaren Fall der Au fstellung, des Betriebes oderder Wartung beriicksichtigen. Demgemat3 sind in den Betriebsanleitungen im wesentiichen nur solche Hinweise enthalten, die bei bestimmungsgemai3er Verwendung der Maschinen oder Gerate in industriellen Einsatzbereichen fiir qualifiziertes Personal (siehe obenj erforderiich sind.

These instructions cannot claim to cover all details of possible equipment variations, nor in particular can they provide for every possible example of installation, operation or maintenance. This means that the instructions for machines or equipment for industrial applications normally include only the directions to be folio wed by qualified personai (see above) where the equipment is used for its defined purpose.

Falls im Sonderfali bei beabsichtigtem Einsatz der Maschinen oder Gerate in nicht industriellen Bereichen eventuell erhohte A nforderungen gestellt werden {z. B. Beriihrungsschutz gegen Kindetiinger o. a.), miissen diese Bedingungen bei der Montage durch zusatzliche Schutzmai3nahmen anlagenseitig gewahrieistet werden.

if in speciai cases it is intended to use the machines or equipment in non-industrial areas and therefore requirements may be more stringent, e.g. protection against contact by chiidren fingers, ect., compliance with such requirements must be assured during installation by providing additional protective measures on site.

Bei diesbeziiglichen Unklarheiten, insbesondere bei fehlenden produktspezifischen Detail-lnformationen, mussen die erforderiichen Klarungen iiber die zustandige SIEMENS-Vertriebsstelle herbeigefiihrt werden. Bifte hierzu grundsatzlich Maschinenbzw. GerateTypbezeichnung und Fertigungsnummer angeben.

if there are any uncertainties in this respect, particularly in the event of missing product-reiated information, clarification must be obtained via the appropriate SIEMENS saies office. Piease always indicate the machine or equipment type and seriai number.

ES WIRD EMP[ OHLEN, FUR PLANUNGS-, MONTAGElNBE TRIEBSET7UNGSUND SERVICE-AUFGABEN DIE UNTERSTUT.?UNG UND DIENSTLEISTUNGEN DER ZUSTANDIGEN SIEMENS-SERVICEZENTREN IN ANSPRUCH ZU NEHMEN.

WE WOULD RECOMMEND AND SERVICES OF THE CENTRES FOR PLANNING, AND SERVICING TASKS

HINWEIS: Furallgemelne Arbelten, z B zum Prufen elngehen [Icr l-l[,ferunger~ f,Transportschaden), zum Iangfrlstigen Elnla geln Und Konservleren von Maschlnen, zur Fundamentpru fung zurr Au fzlehen von Kupplungen, Aufstelfen und Ausrich [cn vcr17 Maschfnen. Install atlonsma Bnahmen U.V a slnd wel tcre Dclall-lnformatlo nen In den SIEMENS-Montagesc hriften odcr Arbclfsrlchllmen enthalten, dle erforderlrc henfalls uber dle Vertnebsstcllen bezogen werden konnen

NOTE: For general work such as checking of incommlng deliveries (damage In transit), storing and preserving for prolonged periods of time, foundation testing, fitting of couplings, installation and allgnment of machines, etc , further detailed information is gwen In the SIEMENS Installation instructions which can be obtained from the sales offices.

,“i:,

WARNUNG

A!

WARNING

- !\

IM ZWEIFELSFALL DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN TRIEBSMITTEL SOFORT ABSCHALTEN!

A!

iF iN DOUBT, S WiTCH OFF THE EQUiPMENTIMMEDiATEL Y.

Urn Storungen vorzubeugen, ist es erforderlich, die vorgeschriebenen Wartungs-, Inspectionsund Revisionsmai3nahmen regelmaBig von routinietiem Service-Peronal durchftihren zu Iassen (siehe oben). Veranderungen gegeniiber dem Normaibetrieb (hohere Leistungsaufnahme, Temperature oder Schwingungen, ungewohnliche Gerausche oder Geriiche, Ansprechen der Liberwachungseinrichtungen USWJ Iassen erkennen, dafl die Funktion beeintrachtigt ist. Zur Vermeidung von Storungen, die ihrerseits mittelbar oder unmittelbar schwere Personen- oder Sachschaden bewirken konnten, mu13 das zustandige Wartungspersonal dann umgehend verstandigt werdem ,

BE.

HINWEIS: Es wlrd darauf hlngewlesen, daf3 der Inhal! der Be[rlebsanleltungen und Produktdokumentatio nen nlcht Teil el r~cr fruheren oder bestehenden Verelnbaru ng, Zusageoderel rles Rechtsverh: dfnlsses ISI oder dieses abandern SOII Samtll che Verpfllchtu ngenvon Slemens ergeben slchausdem jewelhger Kautvertrag, der such dle vollstandlge und allein gulhge Gew,?hrlelstu ngsregelung enfhalf Dlese vertragllchen Getv?,hrlclslullg sl]estlm[nungen werden durch dle Ausfuhrungen deser Anlelfungen und Dokumentatlonen weder erwelfert [noch beschrankt

2

ASKING FOR THE ASSISTANCE COMPETENT SIEMENS SERVICE INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING

The specified maintenance, inspection and overhaui measures must be carried out reguiariy by trained service personnei in order to avoid any interruptions or breakdowns (see above). Deviations from the normai performance (higher power input, higher temperatures or vibrations, unusuai noises or odours, reactions by monitoring equipment, ect.) indicate that proper function of the unit is impaired. In order to avoid fauits, which might directiy or indirectly cause serious damage to property or injury to persons, the responsible maintenance personnei must be notified immediately

NOTE: The contents of the operating instructions and product documentation shall not become part of or modify any prior or exlshng agreement, commitment or relationship The Sales Contract contains the entire obhgatlons of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Slemens Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty

ITALIANO

SVENSKA

presente foglio allarme vale come istuzioni specifiche tura e, per motivi di mente rispettato.

II

informative con gli awisi di supplement aggiuntivo alle per I’uso di ogni apparecchiasicurezza, deve venire attenta-

PERICOLO I macchinari e fe apparecchiature elettriche sono strumenti impiegati in impianti industriali sottoposti ad alta tensione. Durante il tali dispositivi funzionamento possiedono parti pericolose, sia perche poste sotto tensione e non isolate, sia perche’ in moto, Iineare o rotatorio. Esse quindi sono in grado di causare gravissimi danni a persone o cose, se, ad esempio, /e protezioni necessaries vengono rimosse, in caso di utilizzo non adeguato, di servizio non corretto o di non sufficient manutenzione. Per questo motivo i iesponsabili per la sicurezza dell’impianto devono garantire the: - ai macchinari od alle apparechiature efettriche vengano assegnate solo persone qualificate - tali persone possano non solo sempre disporre presso tutte Ie relative postazioni di Iavoro delle istruzioni per I’uso originali e di ulteriore documentazione SUI proddlto, ma anche che ne osservino consequentemente i contenuti - Ie lavorazioni ai macchinari e/o apparecchi o nelle vicinanze di essi vengano interdetti a personale non qualificato. ———

Perpersona/e qualificato SI intendono quelle persone the, per ja Ioro tormazlone, esperienza e ;struzlone, nonch~ Ie conoscenze delle relahve norme, prescnzlonl, provvedlmenti per la prevenzlone degll lncldentl e sulle condizloni di servlzio, sono stall autonzzah dal responsabile dells slcurezza dell’ im planto ad esegulre quals[asl necessarla attivit~ ed in questa essere In grado di riconoscere ed evltare ognl possvblle perl CIIIC (Deflnlzloneperll persona letecnico, vedianche VDE 0105 0 ]Ec 364) Fra I’altro SI nch[edono anche nozlonl di pronto soccorso e solle mlsure d! salvatagglo In loco Per Iavorazlonl in !mplanti ad alta tenslone, II dlvieto di Implego d! persormle non qualiflcato e’regolamentato, ad esemplo, nelle norme DIN VDE 0105 0 IEC 364

J> ~~~~*,~~~ Viene .

richiesto the, i fondamentali Iavori di disposizione dell’impianto, come pure trasporto, montaggio, instalIazione, messa in servizio, manutenzione e riparazioni vengano eseguiti da personale qualificato e controllati dal personale tecnico responsabile. A questo riguardo occorre in particular modo osservare: - ciati tecnici e specifiche sull’utilizzo consentito \condizioni di montaggio, collegamento, ambientali e di servizioj, che sono fra I’altro contenute nel catafogo, nei dati di progetto, nel manuale di servizio, nei dati di targa ed in ulteriori documentazioni sul prodotto - generali prescrizioni di costruzione e sicurezza - prowedimenti e richieste Iocali, specifiche dell’impianto - idonee modalita’ di impiego di utensili, sollevatori e trasportatori - I’impiego delle personali dotazioni protective - modalita di montaggio di apparecchiature, che vengono consegnate in conformity’ con IPOO (senza coperture): durante ii servizio deve essere disponibiie la necessaria protezione da contatto e deve essere interdetto un accostamento pericoJoso,

5

Detta informationsblad med varningsanvisningar galler som tillagg till den produktspecifika driftsinstruktionen

samhet

och

maste

av sakerhetsskal.

A I

●

f

ges

-

speciell

uppmark-

-

FARA De elektriska maskinerna och apparaterna ar utrustning for anvandning i industriella starkstromsanlaggnin gar. Under driften har dessa utrustningenheter farliga, spanningsforande blanka detaijer, i vissa fall Sven roriiga eller roterade delar. De kan ddrfor fororsaka ailvarliga personeller materialskador, t.ex. om erforderIiga beroringsskydd avlZigsnas i strid mot gallande bestamme/ser, vid osakkunnig anvandning, felaktig manovrering elfer otilf rackligt underhdll.

De som ansvarar for anlaggningen mdste darfor s~kemt~lla att: - enbart kvalificerad personal tilldts arbeta med maskinerna och utrustningsenheterna. - dessa personer standigt har tillg~ng till medfofjande driftinstruktioner, och ovrig produktdokumentation vid alit arbete PA utrustningen och Alaggs att i varje detalj fofja anvisningarna i denna documentation. - okvalificeradpersonal ej tilkits arbeta med maskinerna och apparaterna, eller i deras narhet.

Kvalificerad personal ar personer som pa grundval av utbildnlng, erfarenhet ellerlnstru ktlonersamtkunskap rOrande tillampliga normer, bestammelser, olycksfallsforeskrif ter och driftsforhallanden har bemyndlgats av sakerhetsansvarlg chef att utfora erforderllga arbetsuppgifter och darvid kan uppfatta och undvika mo]liga risker (deflnltlon av fackpersonal se aven DIN VDE 0105 elleer IEC 364).

Bland annat erfordras aven kannedom rorande fcrsta hjalpen och om Iokala raddningsanordn lngar. For arbetet pa starkstromsanlagg ningar regleras forbudet rorande anvandning av okvalificerad personal t.ex I DIN VDE 0105 eller IEC 364

A!

Det foruts~tts att principiellt planeringsrbete rorande systemet saint alla arbeten med transport, installation, idrifttagning, underhdll och reparation utfors av kva~ificerad personal eller kontrolleras av ansvarig fackpersonal. D5rvid

VARNING

maste man framfor

ant ge akt PA:

- tekniska data och uppgifter rorande till?iten anvandning (monterings-, anslutnings-, miljo- och drifts villkor), som bl.a. firms i katalogen, orderhandlingarna, driftsinstruktionen, p& skyltar och ovrig produktdokumentation; - de allmanna installationsoch sakerhetsforeskrifterna; - Iokala, anla ggningsspecifika bestammelser och krav; - fackmannamassig anvandning av verktyg, Iyft- och transportdon; - anvandning av personlig skyddsutrustning; - monteringvillkor for apparater som i vissa fall levereras enl. IPOO (i oppet tillst~nd): vid dritten m~ste det finnas erforderliga beroringsskydd eller anordningar som forhindrarpersoner fr~n att komma i narheten av utrustningen.

- conditions demontage pourdes appareilsquiseront eventuellement mis a /’expedition en degre de protection IPOO (saris recouvrements): en service, la protection requise contre /es contacts directs doit ~tre assuree et une approche dangereuse doit &tre evitee.

- Condiciones de montaje para ios aparatos que pudieran haberse suministrado con el grado de proteccibn IPOO (sin envolventes): Durante el servicio tiene que existir la protection necesaria contra contactos casuaies o impedirse la aproximacion peligrosa.

Pour des raisons de clarte, la documentation ne contient pas toutes /es information de detail relatives aux variantes de configuration possibles ; elle ne peut pas non plus aborder toutes Ies situations susceptible de se presenter Iors de I’installation, de I’exploitation et de la maintenance. D’une fa~on generale, la documentation ne contient done que des information necessaires au personnel qualifie (voir ci-dessus), Iorsque /es machines et appareils sent utilises clans des applications industrielles, con formement a I’usage auaue/ i\ ont destines.

Para mayor claridad, /as instrucciones de servicio no incluyen todas /as in formaciones detalledas de Ias variantes constructivas posibles y, especialmente, no pueden considerar todos Ios cases imaginable de colocacion, de servicio o de mantenimiento. Por este motivo, Ias instrucciones de servicio incluyen en esencia solo aquellas indicaciones que el personal calificado (vease m~s arriba) necesita si /as m~quinas o aparatos se utilizan Dara el fin industrial a true est~n destinados.

Si, clans un cas special, il serait envisage d’utiliser Ies machines ou appareils clans des application non industrielles ou ils feraient eventuellement /’objet d’exigences plus severes (par exemple, protection contre Ies contacts des doigts d’enfant a vec Ies pieces sous tension ou Ies pieces en mouvement interieures a I’enveloppe ou autres), ces conditions doivent etre garanties sur I’installation, lore du montage, par des dispositions de securite additionnelIes.

Si, en cases especiales se pretende utilizar /as mdquinas o aparatos fuera del ~mbito industrial y hubiera que cumplir condiciones m~s severas (per ejemplo, protection contra contactos con Ios dedos de Ios nifios o similares) estas condiciones tendrAn que quedar garantizadas por parte del cliente, adicionando medidas de protection durante el montaje.

Au cas ou ces points ne seraient pas suffisamment clairs, notamment en cas d’absence d~informations detainees specifiques au produit, il est indispensable de contacter I’agence SIEMENS la plus proche pour obtenir /es renseignements correspondents. D’une maniere generale, il est necessaire de preciser a cet effet la designation du type de la machine ou de 19appareil et Ie numero de fabrication.

Si hubiese dudas al respecto, especialmente si faltasen detalles in formativos especificos del producto, habria que establecer Ias aclaraciones necesarias a traves de la oficina de SIEMENS competence. Se ruega fundamentalmente que, se indiquen la denomination del tipo de /as m~quinas o aparatos, asi como su numero de fabrication.

EN CE(JUICONCERNE LESTRAVAUX D’INGENIERIE, DEMONTAGE DE MISE EN SERVICE ET DE MAINTENANCE, NOUS RECOMMANDONS DE RECOURIR A L’ASSISTANCE ET AUX PRESTATIONS DE SERVICE DES CENTRES SAV SIEMENS CC) MPETENTS

AL EFECTUAR LABORES DE PLANIFICACION, MONTAJE, PUESTA EN MARCHA Y SERVICIO SE RECOMIENDA HACER USO DE LA ASISTENCIA Y COLABORACION DE LOS CENTROS DE SERVICIO COMPETENTES DE SIEMENS.

NOTA: En ce qul concerne Ies travaux generaux, par exemple Ie cor]trOle des Ilvralsons (constalahon des dommages occa slonnes en tours de transport), Ie stockage et la conservation ~ Ionq tcrme de machines Ie contrble ctes fondahons, Ie montage d“acf:ouplements, la mlse en place et I’allgnement de machi IICS, Ics travaux d’lnstallahon, elc Ieslnstructlons de montage SIFMENS, qui sent dlsporwbles clans Ies agences SIEMENS, fo~lrmrorls de ulos amples renselgnements

INDICATION: Los impresos SIEMENS de monta]e, que en caso necesario pueden adqulrirse en Ias delegaciones correspondientes, contienen otras informaciones detalladas para Ios trabajos generales, por ejemplo, comprobaci6n de Ios sumin]stros recibidos (danos detransporte), almacenamiento prolon gado yconservacir3n de m~quinas, comprobacidn de cimentaclones, calado de acoplamientos, emplazamiento y alineac16n de m~qulnas, operaciones de instalaci6n y otras tareas diversas.

AITENTION

Afin de prevenir des incidents, il est necessaire de confier a du personnel d’entretien experiment Ie soin d’executer regulierement /es travaux de maintenance, dYinspection et de revision prescrits (voir plus haut). Les anomalies par rapport au fonctionnement normal (puissances absorbees, temperatures ou vibrations plus elevees, bruits ou odeurs inhabituels, entree en action des equipments de surveillance, etc.) Iaissent supposer que Ie fonctionnement est compromis. Afin d’eviter des incidents susceptibies d’occasionner directement ou indirectement des lesions corporelles ou des dommages materiels, /e personnel competent pourla maintenance doit etre averti immediatement.

A!

EN CAS DE DOUTE, PROCEDER IMMEDIATEMENT A LA MISE A L ‘ARRET DES MATERIELS CORRESPONDANTS!

A

, “!\

1

AITENTION: Nous attlrons I atientlon sur Ie fait que Ie contenu de de la documentation du produlf ne fait pas partie d’un ,~ccord d’unepromesse oud’un rapport lurldlque inter leursou ~>rlwqucur, elfe n a ~as non plus pour objet d’yporteramende ,ment Toutes Ies obligations de SIEMENS d~coulent du marchr2 conclu quI stlpule aussl Ies clauses de garantle completes et v,]lal~les a htre exclustf Les pr~sentes Instruct Ions et docu nl reslrelndre Ies clauses de [merit, )tlons Ine sauroni nl ~lendre g Contra ctuelles

PRIXAUCION Para Prevenir Perfurbaciones es necesario que el personal de servicio experimentado (vease m4s arriba) efechie regu/armente /as operaciones prescritas de manteniy revision. Las alteraciones mien to, inspection respecto al servicio normal (mayor consumo, increment de temperatures o de vibraciones, ruidos u o1ores no habituates, actuacion de Ios equipos de vigilancia, etc.), dan a conocer que el funcionamiento est~ dificultado. Para evitar perturbaciones que, a su vez, pueden motivar directs o indirectamente graves daiios personages o materials, hay que avisar inmediatamente al personal de mantenimiento competence.

!

EN CASOS DE DUDAJ DESCONECTAR lNMEDlATAMENTE LOS cOWpONENTES AFECTADOS.

lNDICACtON: Se hate notar queel contenido de Ias lnstrucclones de serwcio y de Ias documentaciones de Ios productos no son parte component de convenios, conceslones o relaclones Iegales pasadas o existences, ni pretenden modif!carlas. Todos Ios compromises adquiridos por Siemens resultan del correspond iente contrato de compraventa el cual contiene la regulac!dn completa y unica vzllida del compromlso de garantla. Las determlnaclones contractuales sobre la garant!a no quedan ampliadas nl Iimitadas por el contenldo de estas Instrucclones y documentaclones.

4

FRANQAIS

ESPANOL

La prtxsente fiche d’information, qui comporte Ies marques d’avertissement, s’inscrit en compl& ment ~ la documentation du produit et doit &re resr.mctde clans tous ses points Dour des raisons

Esta hoja informative con indicaciones de peligro, es complementaria a Ias instrucciones de setvicio especificas del producto y su contenido debe observarse especialmente por razones de seguriad.

e &curite.

DANGER l.es machines et appareils electriques sent des materiels destines a 6tre utilises clans des installations industrielles a courant fort. Ces materiels comportment des pariies actives nues et eventuelIement des pieces en mouvement ou en rotation susceptible de constituer un danger en tours de fonctionnement. 11s pourraient par consequent occasionner des lesions corporelles tres graves ou des dommages materiels important, par exemple en cas d’enlevement intempestif des recouvrements necessaires, en cas d’utifisation non appropriee, en cas de manoeuvre incorrect ou en cas de carence au niveau de l’entretien. II incombe par consequent aux responsables de la securite de I’installation de faire en sorte - que seules des personnes qualifiers soient chargees de I’execution de travaux sur Ies machines ou sur /es appareils, - que pour I’execution de tous /es travaux correspondents, ces personnes disposent en permanence de la notice demise en oeuvre /ivree avec Ie produit et des autres elements de la documentation du produit et qu’elles soient tenues de se conformer strictement a cette documentation, et - qu’il soit interdit aux personnes non qualifiers d’executer des travaux sur les machines ou appareils ou a Ieur voisinage.

Par PERSONNEL OUAL/F/E II faut entendre Ies Dersonne au vu de Ieurformation, de Ieurexp@rience et de Ieur information alnsi que de Ieurs connaissances des normes et r~glements applicable, des prescriptions de prevention d’acci dents et des conditions d’exploitation, ont W ha billt~es par Ie responsible de la s~curlt~ de I’installation ~ executer Ies Mches n~cessalres, etqui solenten mesurede reconnaitredes dangers Wentuels et de Ies Wlter (pour Ies d6flnltions relatives ~ la competence des personnes, voir aussi DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364) Elles dolvent aussl avolr des connalssances de secourisme alnsl que de connalssances des @qulpements de sauvetage se trouvant sur place L’lnterdlcbon deconfler destravaux surdeslnstallations acou rant fort ~ des personnes non [email protected] est r~glement~e, par exemple clans DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364 Q(II,

A!

Les travaux d’etudes et d’ingenierie de i’installation ainsi que tous Ies travaux de transpoti, de manutention, de montage, d’installation, de mise en sewice, de maintenance et de reparation sent supposes etre executes par des personnes qualifiers ou sous /e contrdle de personnes competentes responsabies. Dans ce contexte, il a lieu de: - tenir compte des caracteristiques techniques et des conditions d’utilisation (conditions de montage, de raccordement, d’environnement et de service) qui figurent entre autres au catalogue, clans la notice de mise en oeuvre, sur Ies plaquettes signaletiques et clans Ies autres elements de la documentation duproduit - se conformer aux regles generales d’etablissements et de securite, - respecter /es prescriptions et contraintes locales specifiques a Pins talla tion, - veiller a I’utilisation adequate des outils ainsi que des equipments de Ievage et de manutention, - veilier a I’utilisation des equipments de protection des personnes, A~ENTloN

PELIGRO Las m~quinas y aparatos electricos forman parte de instalaciones industrials de energia electrica. Durante su servicio tienen descubiertas algunas partes sometidas a tensiones peligrosas, pudiendo haber otras sujetas a movimiento o rotation. Por este motivo, dar origen pueden siempre a graves danos personages o materials si, por ejemplo, se eliminan indebidamente /as cubierias necesarias, se hate uso indebido de /as mismas, se manejan erroneamente o no se practican en ellas /as suficientes operaciones de mantenimiento.

Los responsables de la seguridad de la instalacion tienen que garantizar que: - solo se encarguen Ios trabajos a realizar en Ias maquinas y aparatos a personas calificadas - que dichas personas al realizar Ios correspondientes trabajos tengan siempre a su disposition y se comprometan a observar consecuentemente Ias instrucciones de servicio suministradas y la dem~s documentation especifica de IOS productos. - Se prohiba trabajar en /as maquinas y aparatos o en sus proximidades a personas no calificadas.

PERSONAL CALIFICADO son aauellas ~ersonas aue Dor SI formacibn, experiencia e lnstrucc16n asi como porstis conocl mlentos sobre Ias normas, determlnaciones, prescrlpciones sobre prevention de accidents y sobre Ias condiciones del servicio correspond ientes, est~n autorizadas por el responsible de la segurldad de la instalac16n a ejecutar Ias activlda des necesarias, reconociendo y evitando Ios posibles peltgros (sobre Ias definiciones de personal especializado consultese DIN VDE 01050 CEI 364) Entre otros, hay que tener conocimlento sobre Ios ~rlmeros auxllios a prestar y sobre Ios equipos de salvamento locales. En Ias normas DIN VDE 01050 en CEI 364 se regula la prohlbl cibn de emplear personas no califlcadas para trabajos en Instalaclones de energia el~ctrica

! L!!J

PRECAUC]ON

se

da Por suPuesto que Ios trabajos fundamentals de planificacion de la instaiacion asi como todas ias operaciones de transport, montaje, instalacion, puesta en servicio, mantenimiento y reparation corren a cargo de personal calificado y se realizan bajo el control del personal especializado responsible. Hay que observar especialmente: - Los dates tecnicos e indicaciones sobre el empleo admisible (condiciones de montaje, de conexion, del ambiente y dei servicio), contenidas, entre otros, en el cat~logo, en la documentation del pedido, en las instrucciones de servicio, en rbtulos y en la dem~s documentation del producto. - Las prescripciones generales de instalacion y seguridad. - Las determinaciones y condiciones exigidas especificas de la instalacion y locales. - El empleo convenience de herramientas y equipos de elevation y transport. - El uso de Ios equipos de protection personal.

3

Le istruzioni SIJI funzionamento cfelle apparecchiature non possono, pena una mancata globalitai, contenere nel dettaglio tutte Ie in formazioni sulle possibili varianti costruttive, ne’ tanto meno ogni pensabile caso nel montaggio, nel servizio o nella manutenzione. Nei manuate solamente Ie istruzioni necessaries al personale qualificato per un adeguato utilizzo di macchinari o di apparecchiature in aree di Iavoro industrial.

For overskddlighetens skull &an driftsinstruktionerna inte alltid innehWa all detaljinformation rorande mojIiga konstruktionsvarianter, och kan framfor alit inte ta hansyn till alla tankbara slag av installation, drift och underhdl. Si#lunda innehdller driftsinstruktionerna i allmanhet bara sihiena anvisningar som kravs for kvalificerad personal (se ovan) i samband med korrekt anvandning a v rmaskiner eller apparater i industriella sammanhang.

Se in casi speciali di instailazioni di macchinari od apparecchia-ture non in aree industria!i, vengano eventualmente poste ulteriori condizioni (es.: protezione da contatto per Ie dita di bambini, etc), tali condizioni devono venire garantite dally impianto in fase di montaggio attraverso misure di protezione aggiuntive.

Om av maskiner elier apparater enstaka fall anvands utanfor industriomrhden och detta medfor skarpta krav (t.ex. beroringsskydd for barn), s& m~ste dessa villkor sakerstallas genom montering av extra skyddsanordningar.

in mancanza di chiarezza, specialmente con mancanti in formazioni dettagliate SUI particolare prodotto, occorre prowedere al chiarimento necessario attraverso Ie strutture commercial SIEMENS competent. Si prega di indicare chiaramente il codice del macchinario o dells apparecchiatura ed if relativo numero di produzione.

Ta kontakt med narmaste SIEMENS-kontor vid okfarheter i detta avseende, framfor ant avsaknad av produktspacifik detaijinformation. Ange darvid typbeteckning och tillverkningsnummer for berorda maskiner eller apparater.

PER IL PROGETTO, IL MONTAGGIO, LA MESSAIN SERVIZIO ED IL SERVICE, S1 CON SIGLIA DI RICH IEDERE IL SUPPORTO E L’ASSISTENZA DEI CENTRI SIEMENS COMPETENTI.

VID PLANERING, MONTERING, IDRIFTTAGNING OCH SERVlCEARBETE AR DET LAMPLIGTATT UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER SOM UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER SOM KAN ERH~LLAS FRAN SIEMENS SERVICECENTRA.

NOTA: Per attlvlf~ generall, come, ad esemplo, I’accurato test del matenale consegnato (dannl da trasporto), l’immagazzi nagglo a Iungo termlne e la conservazione d) macchinari, Ie prove dl base, la stesura del collegamenti, la messa in opera e la messa a punto dei macchlnarl, Ie norme dl installazione e moltl altn, sono disponlbtll ultenori in formazioni, contenute nelle pub blicazlonl SIEMENS per II montagglo e reperlbill su rlchlesta presso Ie rispettwe agenzle

OBS: For allmanna arbeten, t.ex. kontroll av mottagna leveranser (transportskador), l~ngtldslagring och konservering av maskiner, kontroll av fundament, padragning av kopplingar, uppstallning och nktning av Inaskiner, lnstallahons~tgarder etc galler ytterligare detaljlnformation, som flnns i SIEMENS monteringsanvisningar, som kan erhallas fran forsaljningskon toret

A!

A!

Al fine di evitare guasti, a necessario fare eseguire regolarmente dal personale di servizio addestrato Ie prescritte operazioni di manutenzione, ispezione e revisione (vedi sopra). Variazioni rispetto al normale funzionamento (assorbimento di potenza maggiorato, temperature, vibrazioni, rumori, etc. o segnalazioni da parte dell’impianto di sicurezza) fanno prevedere che il funzionamento sia non corretto. Per impedire guasti, che possono recare direttamente od indirettamente gravi danni a persone o cose, il personale addetto alla manutenzione deve venire tempestivamente informato. ,, I \

L’—L

A~ENZlONE

IN CASO D! DLIBBIO D\SATllVARE MENTE GLI UTENSILI SOSPETTI

lMMEDlATA-

NOTA: SI fa Inoltre presente, che II contenuto del manuale e delle documentazlonl relative al prodotto non fa parte dl accordl, Impegnl o rapportl gtundlcl, n~ precedent n~ attuali e che tale sltuazlone non PUO cam blare. Tall impegn[ da parte dl SIEMENS risultano nel contratto dl vendlta corrwpondente, contenente anche certiflcatl d! garanzla completl ed autono mamente val}dl Tall certificate] dl garanzla regolatl da contratto non vengono n@ ampllatl ne Iimltatl dalla stesura del presente fmanu ale

Herausgegeben Berelch

vom

Antriebs-,

Elektromotorenwerk Anderungen

/ Issued

SchaltBad

und

vorbehalten

siemens

Aktiengesellschaft

A!

KOPPLA OMEDELBART WD VARJE MISSTANKE.

lFR~N

UTRUSTN~NGEN

OBS: Innehallet i dr!ftsinstruktioner och annan produktdokumentation skall Inteanses Inga som en del av tidlgare eller galIande overenskommelse, utfastelse eller rattsforhallande och e] hellerandrar detta. Alla forpliktelserfran Siemens sida grundas pa det berorda kopeavtalet, som ocksa innehaller fullstan dtga och olnskrankta uppglfter rorande garantiataganden Dessa avtalsenllga bestammelser rorande garantiataganden varken kompletteras eller inskranks av framstallnlngarna I driftslnstru ktioner och annan documentation,

by Installationstech

Neustadt

Sous reserve de modtflcatlons Con rlserva df eventuall rnodhche

For aft forebygga storningar m~ste f6reskm”vna underhdlls-, inspections- och revisionsAtgarder regelbundet utforas av erfaren servicepersonal. Vid iakttagelser som ej stammer overens med normal drift (t.ex. hogre effektforbrukning, forhojd temperature, vibrationer, ovaniiga ljud etc., eller nar skyddsfunktioner loser ut) firms det aniedning aft misstanka aft dven funktionen pdverkats. For att undvika storningar, som i sin tur man medfora allvartigaperson-eller materialskador, m~ste dd ansvarig servicepersonal kallas in utan drojsmdl. VARN[NG

a. d. Saale

nik / Drives

and

Standard

Products

Group

(EWN) Subject to change without Sujeto a modiflcaclones Forbehall andringar

prior

EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order Eies\ell. Ort EWN Prlnled In the Federal AG 07902000

MA 6

notice

No.

610.42356/21

R.?publc

of Germany

De-En -Fr-SD-lt Sv

ITALIANO

A

!

venir

SVENSKA

PERICOLO osservate

Le indicazioni e Ie awertenze conte. nute. Nel manuale operativo e nelle ulteriori istruzioni fornite, devono sempre onde evitare pericoli e danni.

A

!

ovriga

For undvikande av risker och skador maste de uppgifter och anvisningar som ges i denna driftsinstruktion saint driftsinstruktioner standigt beaktas.

VARNING tillhorande

A queste istruzioni operative sono allegate informazioni supplementari per la sicurezza (in giallo) che contengono indicazioni integrative relative alla sicurezza per macchine ed apparecchi elettrici. Queste costituiscono pertanto anche un’integrazione di tutte Ie altre istruzioni operative fornite e di tutte Ie altre a riguardo (ad es quelle concernenti i freni, ecc. . .).

Med denna driftsinstruktion medfoljer aven en annan, som inneh~ller kompletterande sakerhetsuppgifter (gul) for elektriska maskiner och apparater. Denna galler allts~ som komplettering av alla ovriga levererade driftsoch andra instruktioner (t.ex. for bromsar, etc.).

Per l’esecuzione di varianti speciali di macchine recchi sono inoltre valide Ie indicazioni contenute Ioghi e nelle offerte.

For spacialvarianter av maskinerna terna i kataloger och offerter.

ed appanei cata-

galler

uteslutande

uppgif-

Descrizione

Beskrivning

Campo d’impiego

Anvandningsomr3de

I motori possono essere installati in am bienti polverosi o umidi. L’isolamento ~ in versione tropicale. Se il deposito o l’installazione all’aperto sono eseguiti regolarmente, in Iinea di massima non ~ necessario alcun particolare accorgimento per proteggere i motori dalle intemperie.

Motorerna kan installers i dammig eller fuktig omgivning. lsoIeringen i tropikutforande. Vid andam~lsenlig Iagring eller uppstallning utomhus ar normalt inga speciella skydds~tgarder mot vaderpaverkan pa motorerna nodvandiga.

Costruzione

Funktionssatt

e modo

di funzionamento

och konstruktion

I motori 1LA5 e 1LA9 (ad eccezione dei tipi di grandezza 56), 1LC5 e 1MA5 sono ventilati per mezzo di una ventola. I motori 1PP5 e 1PP9 vengono raffreddati da ventola montata SUI rotore (se fungono da motori perventilatori) opp. per mezzo di ventilator separate. I motori 1LA5 e 1LA9 del tipo di grandezza 56 e i motori 1LP5, ILP9 e 1MF5 sono a ventilazione naturale (Senza ventilator). Nei motori a piedini, questi fan no corpo con la carcassa perfusion. Per i motori ILC5 bisogna rispettareanche Ie istruzioni di servizio del freno.

Motorerna 1LA5, 1LA9 (utom utforingsstorlek 56), 1LC5 och 1MA5 har egen flaktkylning. Motorerna IPP5 och 1PP9 kyls antingen - t.ex. nlir de anvands som flaktmotorer – av specialflaktar monterade pa rotorerna eller av externa flaktar. Motorernal LA5, ILA9 i utforingsstorle k56, 1LP5, lLP90ch IM.~5 har egen kylning utan flakt.

Uso

Drift

A

[ .

PERICOLO

Si faccia attenzione che qualunque operazione sulla macchina venga effettuata solamente in assenza di tensione.

Motorer

med ft)tter

For motorerna bromsen.

A

!

har dessa

1LC5

VARNING

galler

pagjutna dessutom

pa motorhuset. driftsinstruktionen

for

Alla arbeten pa maskinen f& endast utforas i spanningslost tillstand,

Installazione

Installation

Se fra la fornitura e la messa in servizio dei motori ~ trascorso un periodo superiore a 4 anni in condizioni favorevoli (magazzi naggio in ambienti asciutti, privi di polvere e vi brazioni) oppure a 2 anni, in condizioni poco favorevoli e’ consigliabile sostituire I cuscinetti.

Om motorn efter Ieveransen maste forvaras under gynnsamma forhallanden (i torrt, damm- och vibrationsfritt utrymme) i mera an 4 ~r innan den tas i drift, eller i ogynnsamma forhallanden i mera an 2 ar, sa m~ste Iagren bytas ut.

Per Ie grandezze 90 S e 90 L si tenga pfesente quanto segue: tra i motori con cassetta morsetti SUI dorso, in quelli di forma costruttiva IM B 3, i piedini posteriori hanno fori doppi per peter rispettare Ie distanze normal izzate tra i piedini. Tra i motori che hanno la cassetta morsetti disposta Iateralmente (esecuzioni speciali), in quelli di forma IM B 3, tutti e quattro i piedini presentano fori doppi. Pertanto anche se la morsettiera ~ disposta a sinistra ~ possibile rispettare Ie distanze tra i fori, stabilite dalle norme (v. Fig, 6).

Observera! For typerna 90 S och 90 L galler: For att motsvara de normerade fotmatten har motorer i utforingsform IM B 3 med ovanp~ monterad anslutningsl~da dubbla borrhal i de bakre fotterna. Pa motorer med pa sidan monterad anslutningslada (specialutforande) och i utforingsform IM B 3 ar alla fetter forsedda med dubbla borrhal. Darigenom kan de normerade halavstanden tillampas aven nar anslutningsladan ar monterad PA vanster sida (se Fig. 6).

Nelle macchine con estremit~ d’albero verso I’alto e verso il basso si deve fare attenzione che in nessun caso possa penetrare acqua nel cuscinetto superiore.

Pa maskiner med uppat- och nedatriktad axelande se till att vatten ej kan tr~nga in i det ovre Iagrer.

La parte superiore dells carcassa morsetti pub essere ruotata di 180 aeon i motori 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9 e 1PP5 elPP9, ~;nt;( ow ,notorl IMA5 e IMF5 con morsettl era a 6 morsetti e o! 4 x90 .’ .~a!h:l~ .. ,1 rotazione

Overdelen av kontaktladan kan vridas 1800 pa motorerna 1LA5, 1LA9,1LC5, lLP5,1LP9,1PP50 chl PP9. ?:: nn+]~f,rw: ;k~~:’. ‘ ~ lbf F5 med k.ontaktpl:nt med 6 klarmmr,r k~o ,Ju(,r j.’,,, ; 4x90f

Poich4 sui motori 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LP5, ILP9, IPPS e 1PP9 la cassetta dei morsetti @ di plastica, ciob di materiale non conduttore, per questi tipi si dovranno usare bocchettoni pressacavo e tappi filettati di materiale non conduttore.

DA anslutningsk%dans kapa bestar av ej Iedande plastmaterial, far for borrningarna for Iedningsinforning pa 1LA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5- och lPP9-motorer endast forskruvningar och tatningsskruvar i elektriskt ej Iedande material insattas.

A

Equilibratura

Balansering

A !

AVVERTENZA

dei rotori

e degli

elementi

condotti

I rotori sono equilibrate dinamicamente con chiavetta con mezza chlavetta, inserita nell’estremit~ dell’albero. the: Conhnuato

7

pieno o Si noti

a pag!na

8, 11

!

maste man

OBSERVERA

av rotorer

Rotorerna ardynamiskt sitter i axelanden.

och anslutna balanserade

drivelement. med hel ellerhalv

Forlsattnlng

k[l, som

se wdan

8, 11

Classe d’isolatior du moteur selon VDE 0530 B

Temp&ature du fluide rr$frig6rant du moteur ‘c

Graissaqe paliers -

–20a

Graisse DIN 51825K3N Graisse DIN 51502KH3R

exemple

+60

Ou F Ou

t%.

Dour

I

UNIREX N3* (Esso)

Tipo de grasa para Ios rodamientos

Temperature del medio refrigerant del motor

Clase de material aislante del motor segun VDE 0530

‘c –20,

B

Por ejemplo Grasa DIN 51825K3N Grasa DIN 51502KH3R

Dates en placa de caracteristicas YIO en la de engrase

F 6

H

<

–20

H

menor

aue – 20

H

>

+60

H

mayor

que + 60

2 Graisse

de Iubrification

-

Indlcatlons du fabrlcant : satisf ait a I’essai en marche B selon DIN 51806 a la temperature d’essa! de + 160 ‘C

UNIREX N3* (Fa. Esso)

,. +60

6

“ Segun

Fig. 2 Grasa

indicaclfM del fabricate; se ha superado la prueba de marcha B segun DfN 51806 a la temperaIura de prueba de + 160° C

Dans des conditions de service normale, Ie remplissage en graisse des rouiements suffit pour plusieurs ann~es, Sur Ies moteurs de vitesses de rotation jusqu’a 3600 tr/min, Ies paliers devraient etre nettoy~s et Ies roulements remplac~s apr~s 20000 heures de service, OU, au plus tard, apr~s 3 ans, Iorsque Ies conditions de service Ie permettent. II n’est pas possible de proc~der a un regraissage. La graisse des nouveaux roulements doit r~pondre aux qualit~s DIN 51825 et DIN 51502 mentionn~es a la Fig. 2. Elle doit ~galement poss~dertoutes Ies autres caracteristiques indiqu~es a la Fig. 2. Les graisses spl$ciales pour conditions de service particuli&es figurent sur la plaque signal&ique ou a cOt~ de celle-ci (si elles n’y figurent pas encore, pri&e de Ies y marquer).

Bajo condiciones normales de servicio la carga de grasa de Ios rodamientos duravarios aflos, Si Ias condiciones de servicio 10 permiten deben Iimpiarse Ios puntos de apoyo y renovarse Ios rodamientos de Ios motores con velocidades maximas de 3600/min, transcurridas 20.000 horas de servicio o a mas tardar despues de 3 ahos. La renovaci6n de la grasa no es admisible. La grasa de Ios nuevos rodamientos debe satisfacer la calidad segtin DIN 51825 y DIN 51502 Y ofrecer Ias demas propiedades relacionadas en la figura 2. Las grasas especiales para condiciones particulars de servicio figurar~n en la placa de caracteristicas o junto a ells.

Dans la mesure ou il ya des chambres a graissea proximit~ des roulements (par exemple au niveau du flasque palier, pour l’& tanchement du filetage de bout d’arbre – normalement rempli au 2/3), elles recevront Ie meme type de graisse que Ie roulement, Eviter de m~langer diff~rentes sortes de graisses,

Si hubiera que introducer grasa en recintos adyacentes (p. ej. en el escudo portacojinetes para cerrar el paso del eje, que en general se Ilena en sus 2/3 partes), habr~ que utilizar el mismo tipo de grasa que hay en el rodamiento. Evitar la mezcla degrasas.

Lors du replacement des roulements, il est conseill~ de remplacer ~galement tous Ies ~l~ments d’~tanch~it~ (si presents) soumis a usure (par exemple bague d’~tancht?it~ a frottement radial). Les bagues d’~tanch~it~ a frottement radial saris ressort seront remplac~es par des bagues de m~me type (saris ressort).

Se recomienda que, al cambiar Ios rodamientos, se renueven Ios posibles elementos de juntas expuestos al desgaste (p. ej. Ios anillos de cierre radial del eje). Si Ios anillos de cierre radial del eje no tuvieran muelles, tampoco se pondran muelles en Ios nuevos.

Tout W?ment

Las piezas

Moteurs

endommagr2

sera remplac~.

EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5 selon

DIN EN 50014/VDE DIN EN 50019/VDE

0170/0171 0170/0171

fascicule fascicule

Motores 1 et 6

deterioradas

se sustituir~n

por otr~s

nuevas.

EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5 segun

DIN EN 50 014/VDE DIN EN 50 019/VDE

0170/0171 0170/0171

parte 1 Y patie 6

En ce qui concerne Ies moteurs EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5, Ies parties de texte en rouge constituent un compl~ment au texte imprim~ en noir.

Adem~s de Ias informaciones impresas en negro en estas Instrucciones de servicio, para estos motores rigen Ias que figuran en rojo, de forma complementaria o especial.

Les moteurs 1MA5 dent Ie bout d’arbre est orient~ vers Ie haut (par ex. formes IM V 3, IM V 6, IMV19) doivent ~tre~quip~sd’un recouvrement empechant Ies corps ~trangers de tomber clans Ie capot du ventilateur (cf. DIN EN 50014/VDE 01 70/0171, fascicule 1, $ Ill, 16.1). Ce recouvrement ne doit pas empecher Ie refroidissement du moteur par son ventilateur,

En caso de motores 1MA5 en Ios que el extremo del eje queda hacia arriba, por ejemplo, en Iasformas constructivas IM V 3, IM V 6, IM V 19, habra que disponer una cubierta para evitar que puedan penetrar cuerpos extrar70s por la tapa del ventilator (Wase DIN EN 50014/VDE 0170/0171, parte 1, apartado Ill, 16.1). Esta cubierta no debe impedir la refrigeracidn del motor porel ventilator.

La classe de temperature figurant sur la plaque signal~tique du moteur doit coincider avec celle du gaz combustible susceptible de se prfxenter. Chaque moteur doit comporter .un disjoncteur serie moteurs branch~ en amont, que I’on r~glera sur Ie courant nominal du moteur et qui d~clenchera, si Ie rotor est tale, en l’espace detempst~figurant surla plaque signal~tique du moteur (essai sur Ie vu de la caract&istique de d~clenchement jointe au disjoncteur s&ie moteurs). Les moteurs a polarites multiples comporteront un disjoncteur pour chaque nombre de pOles.

La clase detemperatura indicada en la placa decaracteristicas del motor ha de coincidir con lade Ios gases combustibles que pudieran desprenderse. Cada motor ha de tener un guardamotor ajustado a la intensidad nominal de la maquina, que dispare en el tiempo t~ indicado en la placa del motor, cuando este bloqueado el rotor (prueba a la vista de la caracteristica de disparo que acomparla al guardamotor). Los motores de POIOS conmutables necesitan un guardamotor propio para cada numero de pares de polos.

Mais si I’on veut assurer la protection contre Ies surcharges exclusivement par un I$quipement de surveillance directe de la temperature a I’aide de sondes thermom~triques (voir DIN EN 50019/VDE 0170/0171 fascicule 6, annexe A-Al, b), ilfaut quela version du moteur soit sp~cialement contrblee et agree a cet effet.

Si la proteccidn contra sobrecargas mente mediante un dispositivo de con sensores tt?rmicos (vease DIN parte 6, anexo A-Al b), habra que cialmente para este fin y extender

Se reporter

@galement

h la norme

Les reparations seront confi~es tees par un expert agrtx?.

DIN 57165/VDE

a un atelier

Siemens

Su,te

0165. ou attes-

a la Page E

Hacemos

referencia

se estableciese exclusivavigilancia de temperature EN 50019/VDE 0170/0171, comprobar el motor espeel oportuno certificado.

a DIN 57165/VDE

0165.

Las reparaciones han de efectuarse en Ios talleres de Siemens o someterlas a la comprobaci6n de un perito oficialmente reconocido. Continua

en la pagina

8

6

La parte superior de la caja de bornes de Ios motores 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 Y1PP9 se puede giraren 180gradosyenlosmotores !“~i;.~ . “fi! ,. ~ . .. ..)i)i be:-,..,.:,” ,J,.. ,--:; ]( ’;,! .:, .!:

Dado que la caja material pl~stico conductor, en Ios paso de lineas de Ios motores 1LA5, 1LA9, 1PP9 solo se utilizar~n atornilladuras y material no conductor.

&ant donn~ que la boite h bornes est en matikwe plastique L_2.J non conductrice du courant, utiliser exclusivement des presses ~toupes@desboucflorrsfile. t& en mat~riaux non-conducteurs du courant pour Ies trous des entrees de cables des moteurs 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 et 1PP9.

A

Equilibrate sur I’arbre

Equilibrado namiento

A

AVERTISSEMENT

du rotor

et des organes

de transmission

mont~s

Les rotors sent ~quilibr~s dynamiquement avec clavette ti~re ou demi-clavette en place clans Ie bout d’arbre:

en-

I .

ATENCldN

din~mico

de rotores

de bornes es de el~ctricamente no agujeros para el 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 y tornillos tapbn de

y de sus elementos

Los rotores est~n din~micamente equilibrados cada en el extremo del eje la chaveta entera

de accio-

teniendo o media.

colo -

– pour Ies machines fabriqu~es~ partirde 1991, letyped’~quiIibrage est marqu~ sur l’extr~mit~ de I’arbre cot~ D (bout d’arbre) ou surla plaque signal~tique (C30U L surlar plaque signal~tique des moteurs de designations de carcasse 80 mm et inf&ieures) (-F, = @quilibrage avec clavette enti&e) (H,, = @quilibrage avec demi-clavette).

– Las m~quinas fabricadas a partir de 1991 Ilevan una marca del tipodeequilibradoen elextremo LAdel eje (frentedel eje) o en la placa de caracteristicas. (Marcas (,:1o (:’I en la placa de caracteristicas en motores de hasta el tamanno de 80 mm). (F = Equilibrado con la chaveta entera) (H = Equilibrado con media chaveta).

- pour Ies machines fabriquees jusqu’a fin 1990, Ie rotor a ete ~quilibr~ avec clavette enti~re (pas de marquage).

—Las m~quinas

Velller $i ce que l’~quilibrage desorganes responde ~ celui du rotor (F ou H).

Observar el tipo correcto del equilibrado din~mico del 6rgano de accionamiento en concordancia con el tipo de equilibrado del rotor (F o H).

retransmission

cor-

Equilibrate avec demi-clavette Lorsque Ie rapport entre la Iongueurdes organes de transmission (accouplements, poulies ~ courroies .) et la Iongueurdu bout d’arbre est 1500 tr/min, des vibrations risquent d’appariitre. Dans ce cas, il peut s’av~rer n~cessairede proc~der~ un nouvel~qui librage supprimer, par exemple, la partie de la clavette qui d~passe de I’organe de transmission et ~merge de I’arbre.

fabricadas hasta finales de 1990 estan euqllicon la chaveta entera (no Ilevan marca).

brados

Equilibrado

con media

chaveta

L’emmanchement et I’extraction des organes de transmission (accouplements, poulies~ courroies rouesdent~es,... ) nedoivent se faire qu’avec un dispositif appropri~ (Fig. 7).

Los Organos de accionamiento (p. ej., acoplamientos, poleas, etc. ) en Ios que la relaciOn de longitudes del cubo respecto al extremo del eje sea inferior a 0,8 y velocidades superiors a 1.500 /rein, pueden perturbar la regularidad de la marcha. En estos cases hay que equilibrar, p.ej. reparar la parte de Ias chavetas que so bresale del elemento de acoplamiento o del eje. Los Organos de accionamiento (acoplamientos, poleas, ruedas dentadas, etc.) se extraer~n y calar~n utilizando el dispositivo adecuado (Fig. 7).

Raccordement

Conexif5n

Comparer la tension et la fr~quence du r~seau aux indications de la plaque signal~tique. Une variation de + 5°/0 de la tension ou delafr~quence ;{)c( !,~j~c~~?~:~;ot: T ? w ,;[fIefILie:.,{c; est admissible saris abaissement de la puissance. Realiser Ie branchement et disposer Ies barrettes de couplage conform~mentau sch~masitu~dans la boite~ bornes. Raccorderle conducteur de protection a la borne +

La tensidn y frecuencla de la red tienen que ser Ias indicadas en la placa de caracteristicas. Son admisibles desviaciones de tensi6n o de frecuencia de f So/o como m~ximo , ‘ A’ tM~5, Cesvlat,l[jnc ; rr~x,l,n:, d f;,f;,jt.,, ,,, j, ; , sin que por ello disminuya la potencia. Llevar a cabo el empalme y la colocaci~n de Ios estribos de maniobra segun el esquema que se encuentra en la caja de bornes. Empalmar el conductor de protection al borne marcado con ‘+

Les conducteurs raccordt% ~ des bornes A &rier doivent @tre dispos6s de telle sorte que l’&rier repose ~ la m@me hauteur de part et d’autre de la vis. Lorsqu’un seul conducteur est raccord6, il doit @tre plit$en U autourde la vis. II en est dem~medu conducteur de protection vertjaune (voir Fig. 3). Tous Ies conducteurs raccord6s ~ des ~querres de mise ~ la terre ext4rieures doivent 6tre plit% en U (voir Fig. 4).

En Ios bornes con estribo de conexidn (p. ej. segun DIN 46282) Ios conductors se distribuir~n de tal manera que resulte la misma altura de conexi6n en ambos Iados. Este tipo de conexi6n requiere doblar en U uno de Ios conductors, 10 que rige igualmente para la conexi6n del conductor de protecci6n, de color amarillo y verde (v&ase la fig. 3). Fundamentalmente, todos Ios conductors situados por debajo del angular de puesta a tierra se curvar~n en U (v@ase la fig. 4).

Couples de serrage pas Ies borniers)

Pares de apriete de Ios tornillos y tuercas (excepto en Ias regletas de bornes)

desvis

et ~crous

des bornes

(neconcerne

en Ios

bornes

,

1

N.m-

Mantenimiento

Maintenance I

AITENTION

A .

pour l’ex6cution de qu’en soit la nature, sable quel’installation tension.

travaux, qu’elle il est indispensoit~ l’&at hors

A I

ATENCldN

●

Todos cuando tensi6n.

Ios trabajos la instalaci6n

se efectuar~n se encuentre sin

Graissage

Lubrificaci6n

Les moteurs sent ~quip~s de roulements ~ billes ~ 2 d~flecteurs (version 2ZC3) graiss~s ~ vie. L’interstice entre Ies d~flecteurs est rempli ~ 30 O/O- 40 O/Ode graisse. Types de gralsse, voir Fig. 2.

Los motores henen rodamientos de bolas con dos discos de cierre (ejecuci6n 2ZC3) y Iubrificacidn permanente. El espacio Iibre entre Ios discos decierre se llenar~ de grasa en un 30 0/o a 40 0/o. Sobre Ios tipos de grasa v6ase la figura 2.

L’emmanchement et I’extraction des roulements faire qu’avec un dispositif approprie (Fig. 7),

Para extraer ycalarlos rodamientoshayque tivo adecuado (Fig. 7).

ne doivent

se

utilizarun

disposl -

5

Ersatzteile,

vom

(see

Se!!e

1.00

Lagerung AS Laqer~ch!ld II 61 n?[fbestellen soen 1 61 SI extslel Arar?deld de comuensac, on 56 Ar IIlde l:, t>laSlll.j ‘.8 Co IIr~I?!I? de rodal menlo ho Clrlld el,>~tlca vara el cubo del escudo 61 [Ao,t:,cojtnetcs [n86

3607

17,9

175,4

18000

5,00

16,5

161,7

18500

5,14

14,9

146,0

19000

5,28

4050

13,3

130,3

19500

5,42

4125

12,1

118,6

20000

5,55

4312

10,1

99,0

20500

5,69

8,4

82,3

21000

I I I

ASAO-45

I

~

~

+

3785 3892

~

I

ASAO-60

I

+

583

—

10

A

6.2

60,7

21500

5,97

4821

4,4

43,1

22000

6,11

5035

2,4

23,5

22500

6,25

5250

0,0

0,0

23000

6,39

5464

I i

— .—. —— ———. Instrucciones

de instalacion

Generaiidades Los accndic]onauores mcdelo ASAO/1,se sumlnls:ran ae es[anaar. sormo unldades separadas. Cuando se sumlnlslran como umdades compactas se aenomlnan ASA. “STAR conceolcios oara ser instalados con conductos, en

/ .A

forma

[errazas. Ie]ados. mhardillas o sotanos. CuanoG sea recesarlo y en el memento de su instalaclon. estas dcs lJnlaadeS pueden umrse facilmente. con 10 cual queaaran ~ransformadas en un equlpo compacto. Los rmcae!cs ASA- i 5 se sumlnlstrancomo umdad compacta. El ccfi:r~i de la cuesta en marcha. paro y regulaclon de la temoeratura se eiectua ccn el termostato especial a24 V que se s~rmnislra con cada ASAO. unldad exterior,

Protecci5n

del medio ambiente

I@

/

;

:-~~~

,-, ,_ Embalaje El em~ala]e es;a compuesto de material recyclable. Su ellmlnaclcn ~ebe efectuarse de acuerdo con Ias normas de recoglda selectwa de res!duos que el munlclpio tenga estableclaas.

A\\\

I

I

Elimination del aparato AI ~rcceder a desmonta!e despues de una Iarga viola de nc]onam]ento. debe efecwarse la recuperation ecologica de sus components. El clrculto frigorlfico esta Ileno de

Atencion: tes,

refr~gerame t-iCFC-22. que debe recuperarse y final mente entregar al fabrlcante dei gas. para proceder a su reclclaje. En el compresor nermetico quedara acelte, porello, aquel se entregara con el clrcuito sellado. El acond]clonaaor se deposltara en el Iugar donde tengan establecldo Ias autoridades munlcipales, para proceder a su recuperation selechva.

Simbolos

de aviso

Los slmbolos slguientes Ie avisan nes poreclalmente pellgrosas para de ser~lclo. Siempre aue !0s ~ncuentre en el cuenta ;as aaverrenclas que cada

de que existen condicio10s ususarios o personal proplo aparato tenga en uno de ellos indica.

r\ / ? .4!!!!!$

(’

Atenclon: La umdad tlene control remoto y pueae ponerse en marcha. Dos minutes antes de acceaer al mterlor debe desconectarse la tension de allmentaclon, para evltarcualquier contacto conlaturbinadel ventdador en movlmlento.

Este simbolo Indlca un rlesgo o pellgro de hpo e!ec:r}co.

‘%-

I

(

callen-

A --% A 0

I

No tocar Ias superflcles

Atencion:

Transmlslon

por polea y correa.

Atenclon: Poslble escape de gases por una manipuiaclon inadecuada.

I

o

Atenclon: Esobllgatorlo leerlasmtrucclones ames de cualquler mampulaclon.

Transport Las unidades exteriors deben trasladarse siempre en position vertical, con objeto de que el aceite no salga del compresor. Si por alguna razon precisa cambiarse esporadicamente esta poslcion, permanecera en ells solo el tiempo estrictamente necesario. 11

Emplazamiento El em~lazamlentc. de~e elegirse preveyendo un acceso permaneme ~ara el serwclo ae mantenimlento. blen sea a traves ce IOS paneies Iaterales o panel posterior. La urwcaa exter!or. puede instalarse directamente en exlerlores, SI se Ins:ala en lnteriores. sotanos, buhardillas. etc., deben conectarse IOS conductos de toma de sire del exterior y extracclon.

Espacios

del slfon (ver figural. Esto es con ob!eto de evitar que la de~reslon proauclda por el ventilator pueda dlficultar el vaclaao de la bandeja. Debe preverse un acceso para que al inlcio ae cada temparada, pueda Ilenarse el sifon con agua. La Iinea de drenaje debe tener una Inclinaclon minima c 2 cm Dor cada metro de Iongitud, Las conexiones del a~arato son de tubo de acero con rosca Interior 3;4” G.

Iibres

Debe aejarse en la Instalacion de cada aparato espacio Ilbre para: a) Admlsi6n v descarga de sire de la unldad exterior. b) Conexlon oe ICS tubes de desague y electrlcos, c)

CGr7cuctcs

d)

Serwc:o

e)

Ac~~e[ida

electrica.

f)

Limpleza

de ios filtros

l=?

ae alre,

I

de rnanientrniento

de ~ire.

‘~lSTO F9R PARTE SUPERIOR

orientation aire

de la aspiration

y descarga

Las orientaclones estandarde Ias aspiraciones del aire son Ias que se indican en la figura.

f A )

del

y descargas

L)ESCARGA (OPCIONALI

I

LJ

ASPIRATION

Conductos

de aire

Q

1 - Conectar Ios conductos, aislandolos del aparato mediante una manga flexible, preferentemente de material no combustible, con objeto de evitarque se puedatransmitir la wbracion propia del aparato. Si Ios conductos estan construidos con materials flexibles, ya no transmiten la vi braclon. 2- Es aconsejable situar un registro en cada derivation del conducto de descarga para poder efectuar un correcto balance del sistema. 3- Prever un facil accesopara la Iimpieza ysustitucion de Ios filtros de aire. 4- En Ias unidades ASAO-45 deben instalarse, dos conductos independientes, uno para cada ventilator hasta la descarga, para evitar la reclrculacion de aire.

Conexiones

de drenaje

Instalar Ias tuberias de drenaje de cada bandeja a traves de un sifon. Dejar una diferencia minima de niveles de 75 mm entre la altura de la conexibn del aparato y la Iinea despues 12 .- ———

–=.

-

..___—

IDc0 II 1,

0

m

DESCARGA

m

DESCARGA

a

ASPIRATION

7 II ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 1’

Variantes a efectuar en obra Si Ias condiciones de la instalacion 10requieren, la descar~ti del ventilator interior (unidad superior) puede variarse facil‘ J mente en obra, para descarga en sentido vertical.

Proceso de transformation zontal en vertical

de descarga

hori-

(Unidades ASAI-25. 30,45 y unidad superior del ASA-15) 1 - Guitar tornlllos ae fi]aclon de Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2 de !a unldad superior. 2- Sacar Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2. 3- Aflo/ar ios tomillos que tijan el motor de acclonamlento del ventllador a su base. y quitar la correa de transmlslon. 4- A traves de ios accesos Iaterales desatornlllar Ios paneics

Orientation

Ies 3 y 4, segun se indica en la figura de orientation estandar, Desatornlllar la fijacibn del Ventliador al soporte 5. ~ ~ Colocar el panel 3 en la antigua Doslclon del panel 4, y colocar el panel 4 en la antigua poslclon ael panel 3. 7- PJornlllar nuevamente Ios paneles y el ventilator al soporte 5. 8- Colocar nuevamente la correa de transmission y fijar el motor a su base. 9- Atornillar Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2.

Orientation variante en obra

estandar

‘3

@

TORNILLOS FIJACION ,)

[

=7-*

DE

I

-IN

) 4

—’.,,

0-

5

I

\ ‘! 1

13

—-—

Unidad

ASAI-60

El As,41-f30

~reclsa

un

kit de

transformation

que

Incluve:

oanel Doslerlor y supermr, correas. poleas motor y ventila~or, 1 - Desmontar Ios paneles superior, posterior y Iaterales es~anaar asl como Ios vermladores y onentarlos tal como indica e! dibu]o. fljandolos al panel superlorad]unto con el kit de transformaclon.

14

2- Una vez mantaaos Ios ventlladores fijar el panel superior ref. 1 a la unlaad. 3- Fijarlos angulos Iados Izauierdoylado derechoventilador ref. 3 a la unldad. 4- Sustttu[r Doleas motor, ventilator y correas ref. 2 por Ias adjuntas en el kit. 5- Montar el panel posterior ref. 4, 6- Por tiltimo, montar Ios paneles Iaterales estandar.

I

I

\ ‘\

‘\

A“

Instalacion

compacta

de Ias unidades

Las unldades se summistran preparadas para ser conectadas ir]gorlfica y electncamente. Para lnstalar Ias unidades, como un sistema compacto, deberan unlrse Ias unldades exterior ASAO e lnterlor ASAl, a traves de Ios agu]eros previstos en ambas unldades, Jtilizando para ello 10s torntllos que se suminlstran en una bolsa sltuada en el interior. del cuadro elecirlco en el ASAO60 y en la unidad interior en Ios ASAI-25, 30 y 45.

--

T2RNILLQ DE = .ACICN PANEL ,<

,,,

,-’-

TORN ILLOS FiJACION UNIDADES SUPERIOR E INFERIOR (DOS A CADA LADO)

.~

+~%q

~

UNIDAD SUPERIOR (INTERIOR)

E~ “...,jjm> i!

I‘

UNIDAD INFERIOR

~i ‘ExTERIOR) Ii

I Detalle valvulas

Vaivulas y carga de refrigerant La unidad interior y exterior se sumlnistran con Ias conexioInes de Ios clrcu]tos frlgorlficos prewslas para soldar y ser urudas entre si por el exterior del mueble. Las unidades ASA-15 y ASAO/1-25 ctisponen de un solo clrcuito y se suministran con dos valvulas. La unidad ASAO/1-45 dispone de dos circuitos y se suministra con cuatro valvulas. De fabrica estas valvulas se sumimstran cerradas y con la totalidad del refrigerant en la unidad exterior (Pump down). Antes de la puesta en marcha asegurarse que Ias vaivulas esten completamente abiertas. La unidad ASAO/1-30 dispone de un circulto, la unidad ASAO/1-60 dispone de dos cicuitos. Estas unidades se summistran sinvalvulas, Iacargade refrigerant debe hacerse totaimente en obra. Vaciado y deshidratado El aire no acttiacomo refrigerant debido a que no puede ser licuado por el compresor. El aire y la humedad que permanezcan en el slstema de refrigeration tienen efectos indeseables, tal como se indica en la Iista inferior. Consecuentamente, deben ser eliminados completamente. Aumenta la presion de alta. Aumenta la corriente consumida. Desclende el rendimiento del equipo. El agua contenida en el aire puede congelarse y bloquear 10s capilares. El agua puede provocar la corrosion de algunas partes del circuito y el deterioro del compresor. k! vaciado y deshidratado debe hacerse mediante una bombs de vacio. El vacio necesano es de 200 micrones (0,2 mm Hg). La conexion de la bombs de vacio al circuito frigorifico, debe

ASA-15

~

CONEXION PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO

CONEXIONES PREVISTAS PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO I

VALVULA ROTALOCK UNIDAD INTERIOR

CONEXION PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO

VA LVULA ROTALOCK UNIOAD EXTERIOR

VASTAGO HACIA ABAJO POSICION ABIE17TA

!

I

!!!!

ENLACE SUPERIOR ROSCADO LINEA DE GAS UNIDAD EXTERIOR

Notas: (I)

Las flecnas mdman la poslclon de abierlo. La poslclon de apertura maxima es con el vastago mas bajo.

15

..

.—._. —..

hacerse en Ias conexlones de 1/4” SAE previstas a tal efecto. y con Ias valvulas cerraaas. Ello permltlra el vaclado y deshidratado de Ios tubes de Interconexion y de la unldad evaporadora. La unldad ASA-15 y Ias umdades exteriors ASAO-25 y ASAO-45, se sumlmstran cargadas con el refrigerant (R-22) y no necesitan vaclado, Deteccion de fugas La deteccion de fugas en el circuito unidades se hara utllizando refrigerate ~n detector.

tenor que podrian provocar contamlnaclon y obstrucclones. 7- Paralasunlones cobre-cobre nodebeuuilzarse cecapante, Diametro

de Ias tuberias

de interconexion Glametro Ihnea de gas (tubena anct?a)

D,ametro l,nea Ilquldo (Iubena eslrecha)

7/8” (22,2 mm)

3/6” (9,52 mm)

I

de union de Ias dos R-22 ycon auxilio de

~ASA-15 I

~ ASAOII-25

y 45

1.2” (12,7 m,m) 1

1“’j” (28.5 mm)

Instalacion

con

unidades

!

‘L

separadas

AsAO/1-30

Separation entre unidades La Iong!tud de Ios tubes de mterconexlon debe ser la minima ooslble. Las distanclas maxlmas admisibles con el circuito y diame:ros de tubes estandar son: Long.total de Ias [uberlas m

Desnlvelmaxlmo entre unidades m

20

10

Para longitudes supenores debe hacerse la instalacibn con un proyecto prevlo que debe ser aprobado por nuestro serviclo tecnico. Este proyecto puede precisar alguna de Ias siguientes modiflcaciones: - Dimenslones de Ias tuberias. - Carga de refrlgerante. - Sifones de succion, - Acumulador de succion. - Valvula solenolde de Iiquido. En estos cases Ias longitudes maximas que pueden recomendarse son:

y 60

I

5’8’’(1587

mm)

~

Carga de refrigerant La carga nominal indicada en la slgulente tabla esta prevlsta para funclonar como una urudad compacta. Cuando se instale como sistema partido, debera incrementarse, en cada clrculto, la carga de refrigerant en funclon de la longltud de] tubo de Iiquido. Numero de clrcu’tos

Dlametro linea Iiqu}do

Modelo

Carga nominal R-22 kg

ASA-15

4,45

1

3’8’’(9,52mm)

“

‘

“’2’’(’2’7mm’ 5/8’’ (l5,87mm)

-

Carga , ad]clonal [Dor metro) ~ I 56 grs.

= 170 grs.

w’” c AsAo/1-60

“’6X2

2

“2’’(’2”7mm)

7x2

2

5/8’’(l5,87mm)

q

‘04gr” 170 grs.

Vaciado y deshidratado El aire no actuacomo refrigerant debido a que no puede ser TIpo de mstalaclon j Iicuado por el compresor. El aire y la humedad que permanezcan en el sistema de refrigeraclon tienen efectos indem 50 Umdades al mlsmo nlvet Iongltud maxima ~ seables, tal como se tndica en la Iista inferior, Consecuenramente, deben ser eliminados completamente. Urudad exterior. mstalada a un nivel mas alto que m 50 \ - Aumenta la presion de alta. ~ la unload interior. Longltud y desmvel maxtmo - Aumenta la corriente consumida. Umdad exterior, Instalada a mas bajo revel que - Desciende el rendimiento del equipo. m 15 la unldad Intenor. LongNud y desnlvel maximo + - El agua contenida en el aire puede congelarse y bloquear 10s capilares. Interconexiones frigorificas - El agua puede provocar la corrosion de algunas partes del Para la realizaclon de Ias tuberias que unen Ias dos unidacircuito y el deterioro del compresor. des, debe tenerse especial cuidado en que Ios tubes a utilizar El vaciado y deshidratado debe hacerse mediante una bomse mantengan Iimpios y secos ya antes de su instalacion. Las bs de vacio. recomendaciones siguientes dan unas orientaciones que El vacio necesario es de 200 micrones (0,2 mm Hg). aconse]amos tener en cuenta: La conexion de la bombs de vacio al circuito frigorifico, debe 1 - Utilizar solo tubo de cobre de calidad frigorifica. hacerse en Ias conexiones de 1/4” SAE previstas y con Ias 2- No efectuar trabajos en el exterior si esta Iloviendo. valvulas cerradas. 3- Los extremes de Ios tubes deben permanecer cerrados Ello permitira el vaciado y deshidratado de Ios tubes de mientras dure la instalacion. interconexion y de la unidad evaporadora. 4- No dejar abiertos al ambiente Ios filtros secadores ni el La unidad condensadora, se suministra cargada con el compresor mas de uno o dos minutes. refrigerant y no neceslta vaclado. 5- Para soldar, utilizar varillas de bajo punto de fusion que Deteccion de fugas contengan un minimo de 5°/0 de plata. La deteccion de fugas en el circuito de union de Ias dos 6- Durante la soldadura, y mientras que el tubo permanezca unidades se hara utilizando refrigerant R-22 y con auxilio de caliente, debe mantenerse una corriente de nitrogeno sed un detector. co para evitar la formation de oxidos y cascarilla en el in16

.. ...

.—. ——. .

.

-.—. —

Unidades (proceso .1-

sin vaivulas, con conexiones para soldar de carga para ASAO/1-30 y ASAO&60) ~@3resurlzar ias uniaades.

234567.

‘+’aciar

Instalacion

electrica

Cada aconulc!onador se sumlnistra con una caja de control, se Ie conectara la Ienslon a traves de un interruptor generai con fuslbies o Interrupter autom~tico. La reslstencla electrlca. SI la hubiera, debe Instalarse con Ifnea de rea e InterruptOres inaepenciientes de Ios de alimentaclon del acondiclonador. Deben segulrse en tcdo caso Ias reglamentaciones Nacionales establecidas.

a la que

ei ‘e!ricjerante.

racer un oarrldo con n:trogeno seco. soldar Ias tuberias con ambiente ae nltrogeno seco en ei Imerlor de Ios tubes. Para solazr, utlitzarvarlllas de bajo punto ae fusion que con[er?gan un mlnlmo del 5°: de plata. Llenarcon 2 kg de refrigerant R-22 para detectarfugas. Vac:ar e! refrigerant.

un barndo con nl!rogeno seco. 8- Hater 9- Hater el vacio. t?asla 200 mlcrones. 10- Carqar el retngerante. utllizando bascula o cllindro call~rado. La r)reclslon ae la carga Uebe serde 30 gramos. La Lmda~ exterior tene prevls[as. en Ias salidas de Ias conexlones. :omasae r3reslon ytemperatura para iaverltlcac:on de soDrecaientamiento [Superheat) sub-e nfrlamlento (Sub-coollng) Comprobar que estos valores scan del orden de 5 C.

Aislamiento tubes y valvulas Las tu~erlas de la Interconexlon de refrigerant deben alsIarse. El alslante aebe poseer unas caracteristicas determlnadas: serfacll de lnstalar. reslstente al envejecimlento, hidrofugoe Ignifugo y tener un esoesor minlmo de 12 mm. Para evdarque el sol detenore el alslante. conwene pintarlo con esmalte ai agua. Para el alsiamiento de Ias valvulas en la unldad ASA-15, se suministra una clnta de espuma autoadheswa que debe apllcarse en otra una vez terminada la instalacion.

Los cables sue!tos pueclen produclr un sobrecalentamlento de Ios terminates o un funclonamlento Incorreclo de la unldad. Tambien puede exls!lr et Dellgro ae :ncenalo, Por 10 tanto asegurese de que Ioaos Ios caoles eslen fuertemente coneclados

)

I 1

,/ ,$!!!!!$ ~i

! ●

No summlstre a]lmen[aclon a la unldad nl la haga funclonar hasta que se hayan [erm\nado de conectar Ios rubos y Ias conexlanes electncas. Aseaurese aue conecta correctamente la alimen!aclon electnca en Ias unldades [al como puede verse en Ios diagramas electncos.

1

Desoues ae haber aislado c1 tube. no Iratar nunca de doblarlo exceslvamen~e oorque este podrla agne!arse o romperse.

~

Caracten’sticas

electrical 1

Alimentac)on

Consumo

V.ph. Hz. Ventllador

Modelo

Ventllador ]ntenor

Compresor

Compresor Int

Arran.

220/240.3.50

110

Ext I

220/240.3

50

Nommal 13,3

A Secclon Interrupter cables de automaailment. !Ico

Ventllador exterior

Maximo

Arran.

Nommal

17,5

9

2.6

Arran. 14

Nommal 5,2

mm’

A

6

ASA-15

40 A

380/41 5.350

380i41 5.3.50

52

7,7

10,1

5

15

14

5,2

4

220!240.3.50

220/’240.3 50

183

22.8

34.5

14

5.2

23

5,2

10

380/4 15.350

380/415.3.50

!30

13,2

20

7

2

10

3

6

32 ---

50

ASAOII-25 3 2201240.3.50

220/240.3.50

170

28.5

33

23

4,7

31

6,6

16

~ ASAOII-30 380/41 53.50

380/4 153.50

100

AsAo/i-45

380/41 53.50

380~415.3.50

2x91

ASAOII-60

380/415.3.50

380/415.3.50

2x 100

165

19

10

27

2x 12.5

2x 14.5

10 25

2 x16.5

2x19

25

3.8

10

3.5

2x13

2x3

16

7,1

80

13

25

32 80

--J

--j

63 100

; 17

~mites de utilization

I_

Nom.

Temperature entmda evaporator C

nvres ae ~Joltale

22 C’243

V

Nam.

380!415

Temperature

V

Tti

alre

TemDeraIura entraaa conaensaaor C

Tempera!

lura 7S

Temperature

alre

TS I

‘J3x)mo

‘,l]nmc

1Q8

Td

7:rmc~e[ro

rumeao

TS

A 4

Maxima

-4

436

rites de dar por finaiizada

A

~~jnlmo

tdax]mc

31335 mm JZ-L as per table Number of Actuator “ype of Actuator Actuators Code -.—.

~lectric spring return actuator torque approx. 11 Nm) e.g. Z 08

I

1-3

Rota electric actuator, reversible open7’closed or modulating (torque approx. 15 Nm), e.g. Z 20

II

1

/

\

–

\

“

\

/

Nm

/

45

“ 4 Iv

3 Iv >

30 /

15, /

-

0“

10”

II

I

I

I

~

,

2W

30”

..J

— ———

-

q

40”

50”

613”

-

80”

7~

2 Iv

Damper Damper

~llv

9V

., e.;;

Closed

a -~

Open

1-4

\’lv”-

\

-

~-

1

Ill

Rota electric actuator, reversible open7closed or modulating (torque approx. 30 Nm), e.g. Z 21 pneumatic actuator (torraue dependan - ‘e angle o as shown in the on grk, egP22 ___

/ /-

60

opening closing (by means of return spring)

Type JZ-L H In mm

Bin mm 345 to c nfi

510 to

675

840

1005

to

to

to

1170 to

1335 to

1500 to

1665 to

1830 to

1995 to

C7A

n?a

I nnd

1 it=m

1334

1499

1664

1829

1994

2000

E 357

11

to

400

II 1 Iv

401

11

1 8 Nn

to

634

1 Iv

635 to 800

11

801 to

1003

1004 to

I ‘

31 Ill !2 Iv

11 II

11 II

1416

1 Iv

1417 10

11

1600

1 Iv

1601 to

11

II

II 1 Iv

toraue M, required on factory check 10 achieve closed leakage resul’ts In accordance with DIN 1946 (API = 100 Pa), wllhoul taking account of aerodynamic influences

Mlnlmum

~

11 II 1 Iv

1263

Ill

31V

1 Iv

1 Iv

2000

31 +

II

1262

to

Ill 3 Iv

II

blade

I

31V

25Nrn — 31 31 Ill Ill !3 Iv 3 Iv

..

Technical Data f “Ap,

Nomenclature ,——

—

~

-–—----

~m

a

Blade angle,

k = h. + K in dB/ocl’

Octave band sound on A (re10”12 W)

i

Lo

“,

..J

drop (installation

1

,

I

in Pa: Total pressure

kA

As above,

In dEt/Ocl: =

kJ

+

K

LWAO

a = O 0 blades fully open

but based on A = 1.0

Width

in mm:

Height

in mz:

Cross sectional

in IIs:

Leakage a=goo

volume

flow with blades closed,

m3/h

Leakage (1=90°

volume

flow with blades closed

m

in m/s

Face

Sound 1

Types ..

based

velocity

power

area (B x H)

in dB(A):

As above, but based on A = 1.0 m2

level and Pressure

JZ-A”

JZD-A”

JNE-A a -80”

2000

power level

Lvwo

As above, but based

K

Correction factor to octave levels dB(A) or NC ratings for variation in cross sectional area from a reference value of 1.0 mz (see tables 12 and 13)

f

m

Hz

..<

on A

mz

A-weighted sound power level (in the duct) based on A

NC rating of sound based on A in mm:

power level based

in dWW

.- —-——

I ii

type A)

Octave

on A -1.0

mz

band centre frequency

Pressure

loss coefficient

drop for a = 10 –800 2 7W

61Y

Types JZ-B oJZD-B.

50”

1500

1500

1000

1000

JNE-B

●

S-JZ-B

60”

7V

a -80” 2000

I

1

Y

so”

/

40”

v

A A

30”

500 300 200 20”

Pa 100

50 10“

30

10

Av

c -0.5

3

1

mla

Types JZ-L”

10

345

2

15

20

-0.5

4

S-JZ-L 70”

a = 80”

60”

50”

2000

1500

1500 30”

1

r

I

xl\u

mla

2

345

Type JZ-G a = 80”

40”

2000

1000

/!

w

7V

1000

Y

i 15

50”

60” I

I 10

/

I 20

4W

A

/

/“

30”

/

500

500 300

2rY

300

200 Pa 100 lIY ! ~ xl

so

30 20

10

K “o 5

1

mls

2

3

45

10

15

20

05

1

mls

2

3

45

10

15

20

I

I

Technical Data Nm:

M,

in

M,

in Nm in cm:

a n

Maximum

required

Types

torque

Minimum torque Torque coefficient (diagram 10) Number of blades (see Page 8)

Ml

JZD-A”

JZD-B

a“Apl”

=

A

100 M2 = (n” 0.9)

When air flows through the damper there occurs, due to aerodynamic forces — independent of airflow direction — a torque acting in the closing direction. When opening the

JZ-L” S-JZ-L

Types

damper, this must be overcome by the actuator. The blade angle a at which the greatest torque is required is dependant on the fan or system characteristics.

a. Apl” A

Ml =

+ (n. 1.2)

100

M2 ==8 to 30 Nm (see table on page 14)

Types JZ-A - JNE-A”

JZ-B

oJNE-B

. S-JZ-B

“ JZ-G

* The pressure loss coefficients

~1=

=

(I7

0

to diagram 9 and the

1 to 4 are based on installation type A (with fully ducted entry and discharge) With other types of installation, the < and A p, values should be multiplied by the correction factors F shown in table 9 I

100 WI)

according

total pressure drop dp, shown in diagrams

a“Apl-A ---- – 6)

Sound —-. — -, Dower

5

level and Leakage

volume

, .,’ @

flow for a =900

Types JZ-A” JZ-B” S-JZ-B

15J’”XFR

LL 1ooo1-

300t1- AX

L

soot

k “i\l

200L

~’/h 4

Y ‘

600

150

1/s

.!>

400

H

I 300)

>

100

k\l\h

80L

Ll-

P

‘oF A\\

,oo1tt

LL ~m

in dB(A)

6570 ~ 65

LWNCO

API in Pa 150

40

100 El

30

L

400

600

JZ-L

8

o S-JZ-L 400

200

100

, LWNCO

e~

90

70

Types

T

90

80

600

8001

1000 I 1

I

1500

I

.-S+

/

70

B~

go

1500

500

rr

I

60

TvDe . . JZ-G

Ap, in Pa 100200

1

II

80 –

3001-

1 7

I

-

65

1

‘

60 – 200

I

1/s-

150

v #/h

40 –

I

100

30 –

80

.>

2 o–

60

t

40

10-

,1

I 11”l-m

I

.,-, in

~,..

LWAOm dB(A)

LwNCO ‘ —

(J [

‘

,—.. . 50

io

-

70

dB(A) LwNCO

5k 60

7~

,--, --r— r

55613

70

813 71

80

200 mm 300

4UU 3UJ e~

I Technical Data k’ Calculation Example 1:

Examples

Example 3:

Type JZ-B. B x H -

Type JZ-B,

Required:

Ap,~and ~~ for installation

B x H = 600 x 1005 mm

1000 x 1005 mm type B, n = 40°,

v = 4 mls,

Required

and ~W m/s

~p,,

Result.

for installahon

LA

v=4

dp, = 108 Pa (from diagram 2) ~A = 66 dB(A) – 2-64

type A, {~ = 40° and

Ap, = 108 Pa (from diagram 2) and F = 1.5 (from table 9.1) Result:

dB(A)

Example 4:

fmm diagram 2, K from table 14)

(hA

=61—2-59 (f-WNCfrom diagram

Example 2:

Type JZ-B, ~.,

Result:

~.=

~~c

a 90° and Ap, =

9

Characteristics

40000

r 1

10000 5000

1 hsralhfbn w

~

[-~ v?

/ /

/

I

/

100 I

A

u

–-

-–-

: (.

/1

B

‘

!

Y

I 1

c

1 1 lrY

20”

3rY

40”

Open

10

1000

16

3

21

5W

60”

70”

8W

90”

D

Closed

a~

Torque

106

1.3 92 .—

0.25 ] 25

= 21 Nm

EEIC

Type of install.

w

/

//

1

Y

.–– /

2

0.1 0“

700

Types of Installation

EIla I

/. 1

/ / ‘

f

50

,

90°

350

\v

I

/

lorque

60”

130

1

/

0.5

M, in Nm (according to formula) Requwed

40°

I

500

10 ––-

ZOO,

a

a in cm (fromdiagram10)

14)

9.1

kglm]

Q -1,2

a =

20°

EEIA Q12

—

A

type A and A p, = 130 Pa,

A p, in Pa(estimated)

Diagram

1

. L

1000

I

16.5

Result:

1000Pa

87 dB(A) – 2 ==85 dB(A) (L. from diagram 5, K from table 14) ~NC=85–2=83 from diagram 5, K from lable V = 280 1/s = 1000 mu/h (from d!agram 5)

1.5=

a = 16 cm; Apt350 Pa, a-4&, a-3cm; Apt - 700 Pa, a- 60°, a- 1.3 cm; Ap, -1000 Pa, a -90°, a -0.25 cm;

B x H = 600 x 1005 mm

(hNC

X

Ml with installation

2, K from table 14)

and ~ where

11

Type JZ-B, B x H -= 1000 x 1005 mm

Required:

bNC

Required:

Ap,B= 108 Pa x 1.5 = 162 Pa ~,=

Coefficient

D

,+’ .

Correctionfactor F where blade angle aI3OI4OI5OI6OI7OI8O

0110120

opposed

6

5.5

3

2

1.5

1.3

1.2

1,1

1.0

Parallel

11

9.5

3.5

2

1.5

1.3

1.2

1,1

1.0

Opposed

4

3.5

2.3

1.7

1.4

1.3

1.2

1.1

1.0

Parallel

7

5.5

2.2

1.6

1.5

1.3

1.2

1.1

1.0

Opposed

9

8

4.5

2.7

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.2

1.0

Parallel

17

15

5

2.4

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.2

1.0

Maximum

11

100

Tyw of operation

O ‘+,

allowed

pressure

when a = 900

3500

50

3000

\ . \ \

20

—-

2500

. I 1

10

Pa \

I

mM Md+ opmbl

\

I I

5 cm

\

2000 1eoo

\

I

1600 \

I

2

Reinforced construction wnh brass bearings

-

\

! E v

,’ w M& C$erarbm

1 1

-----

+-----

—–

--+ 02,

, 0Open

\

1200

I 05-

Conslruclion wllh brass bearings

\ 14r3r3

–—

1000

--- .

––

—----

Sfandard construchon wllh Pecan bearings

-- —-. —.

.1

1

J-

10’

21Y

--L-.-L 30”

L..l.lll 40”

a.e

50°

aoo 6(J-

70-

80 closed

9“V

L–- .—. --l_____—. 1 800

1000

1200 mm

-J- --1. 1400

1600

..L.J 1800

2000

~

., .,,

,,,

,.,

-

. —,.

:-r.

.,, ,.,

.,

.

,,

“

-,.

.,.,

,.

1

)..,.

Technical Data

a!!’

f

12 Sound

power

level spectra

at various

blade

angles

8 61 59 57 57 56 50 44 37 61 60 58 56 56 53 47 40160 61 59 53 52 54 50 44 63 61 58 56 53 51 45 38 10 67 64 62 59 62 57 51 44 64 65 64 62 61 59 54 46 [67 67 66 61 58 59 58 53 68 66 63 61 58 56 51 44 69 66 64 58 fi~77h5!73171 ]71 ]70!64!59172174 173172170170166 160179179179177 170169172169177 l76l74l7l

10

I

20181 182]79177176 177172166176 176179178176 [75\73168184]85 I

I 20

185]84]79]76

[77176180[82 l8O[77[75l72l7Ol65

6 5856

54 55 51 453932595756

55/54

51 44 38 58 58 55 49 49 51 47 40 61 59 56 54 51 49 43 36

8 6562

60 606054

6~’61

59 55 48 65 66 63 58 57 58 56 50 68 66 64 61 59 56 52 45

FIEmH/-““--“---‘“” 10

48 41 64 64I63

65 64 60 53 72 72 71 66 63 63 64 58 73 72 70 67 65 62 58 52

71 68 66 65 66 61 55 48 68 69’6866

15

—

t

40

78 78 75 74 73T71 166,59 74 77]77175 73 ] 73 71 67 81 82 82 80 75 73 74 72 80 80 78 76 73 71 68 64 1 , 20184 85]82 80 79\ 80 75 69 7918= 83 82 80 79 78 74 ]89 ]90 90]89]84]81 ]81 182]85]86185183180176175 [71

TFFFH++H-11 6 6967-6566686455477273172

70171 ]72169160176176

]73/69]68171

8 77747271

77176178177169183185

]83178176]78[79175

74726557767978

170163 75175 !69!68!70171

180]82]77]73

166]59]

!75177174]681

60

10.5141b0 142141134126118 l15[55i59!62160

163167166!64!54 ]55157159164164 160152!62!66!66

l64!66!66!(

0.8 53 51 50 53 51 43 35 27 62 65 69 70 69 73 76 74 64 67 68 71 72 77 76 73 69 72 76 76 74 76 76 72

80

1.0 59 56 55 57 56 49 41 33 66 69 73 76 74 77 81 80 69 73 73 75 77 83 82 79 73 76 80 80 78 80 80 76 1.2 63 61 59 60 62 57 49 41 68 72 75 79 78 78 84 84 74 76 76 80 83 86 87 87 74 78 83 84 82 84 84 81

13 Sound

power

level spectra

with blades

closed

(a = 90°)

63 ,.$

h.

.,

14 Sound A

in mz

K

All Iechnical

power

level correction

0.10

0.12

0.25

- 10

-9

-6

data relates 10 standard

factors 0.30 -5

dimensions

0.40 -4

0.50 -3

0.60 -2

0.75 -1

1.00

1.25

1,60

0

+1

+2

2.00

3.00

4.00

+3

+5

+6

., G

),

y“

Order

Code

These codes do not need to be completed

for standard products

I I

I JZ-A-G-RJ

TT

TYpe designation (see page 9)

-

Construction variants (see page 9)

Drive side Right “R” Left “L”

‘7

/ I 1000

‘“-w

I

~

A~~essories zoltoz37 (see pages 9 to 11)

--l

L

I

Y:%d:ss

1

B1x Hlnmm BxH1lnmm (see page 8)

Masonry subframe oMatching flange (see page 11) 0- without masonry subframe matching flange

(If this is not .speciiied, then “R” la supplied)

w

x

Specification

Text

Order

for volume flow and pressure control or to isolate sections of ducting in ventilation systems, basically consisting of a channel shaped casing, aerofoil blades, connected by external linkage or Internal gears (type JZ-G). Dampers

designed

Materials: See pages 3 to 5 for details

L,.,

Masonry subframe, Matching See pages 9 to 11 for details

Flange,

Make: TROX Types and construction See page 9 for details

variants:

Accessories:

Make: Type: Qty:

+e ~

Example TROX JZ-A-G-R 6

f 1000x lo05/22/ZOl

$ 0 ~ % s

Aire acondicionado

Válvula cortafuego TROX

23.01.98

4.6.6

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

Fire Dampers Types

FK

- K90 .’ FKS - K90

FKN - K90 with

test

●

●

FKW - K90

FKI -K90

certificates

1

! PA-X208

I

I PA-X209

I

..,. i..-:..-, ‘v V,

}

,

.

..

~

‘,,

. .

“

p

TRO14YTEcHfWK Gebruder Trox GmbH Heinrich-Trox- plat2

Telefon 02845/2 Telex 8121231

D-47504

Telefax 028 45/202265

Neukirchen-Vluyn

02-0

‘

~

-..-’.

‘“ ,

.,-~:.~~..,

mixl . ..... ,.. ‘.,..:;,.,::”

“’ ?$?-> .,.

Contents

Description

●

Description Construction Standard Sizes “ Flange

Drilling

Details

Product Range Functional Description

5

Wiring

- Circuit

Diagrams

Diagrams

Technical Data Order Details

18 28 30 32 34

16

. FKW-K90

,—.—

2 3 6 15

Installation Details Suspension from a Slab Duct Connections

FK- K90

“e

. FKS-K90

. FKN - K90

FKI - K90

I

\

Fire dampers provide an automatic means of Iocalising areas of fire in ventilation systems. They have a fire resistance class K90 or K90/90 (super damper) and are suitable for installation in walls and ceiling slabs made from

concrete or brickwork, in lightweight partition walls and directly on to walls and ceilings. The damper installation is independent of air flow direction.

Materials: Casing and attachments of galvanised sheet steel. Damper blade of special insulation material. Blade seals of polyurethane, bearings of stainless steel or brass. Alternatively: – Casing and attachments in stainless steel

Combustible building materials may come into contact with the outer surfaces of the fire damper casing, provided this does not impair operation.

– Casing with polyurethane paint finish — Damper blade lined with aluminium foil

The fusible the outside

Important! It is compulsory for fire dampers to have a test certificate. Therefore, the “General and Specific

link release mechanisms can be removed from and inspected easily. All dampers also have two

inspection panels. The quality control required by legislation is carried out by FMPA, Baden-Wurttemberg.

other

Requirements” during use.

of the test reports must be complied

witl

.. . .. .$

.,.

( Types

- K90

-I

FKW - K90

-l

FKI

[~{

FK

- K90

Application – Concrete walls and ceiling slabs, minimum thickness 10 cm – Aerated concrete walls (types FK-K90 and FKW-K90), minimum thickness 10 cm – Masonry walls, minimum thickness

Resistance class K90 when connected both sides to non combustibk ventilation ducts, otherwise K30 Release temperature – FK - K9072°C –FKW-K9095°C – FKI -K9072°C

0 Casing 0 Blade Manual leV9r @ Release mechanism (side inspection panel)

@

&I Locking device 0 Inspection access (top or bottom inspection panels) o Fusible link ubframe for push fit damper

Type FK - K90

11.5 cm

Standard sizes Width/height

from 200/200 to 1500/800

“ FKW - K90

@---le=l--l @-@-

d

90

Type FKI - K90

‘r —

*J

0

1110

L--

= 260

—

Right hand controls

B

135r

11111 I IEZ

L

L-

150 or 280

J

“R” shown when viewed

I

._&

in direction

of arrow

80

4-

I

/

- K90 FKW- K90 FKS - K90 FKN . K90

pes FK

—. B

Type

FKI - K90

.:,.,.,. .....:.,:. ....::.

+– ~ 1

i-

%

‘4

II k-=

Standard _. —... . Nominal

Nominal

B in mm

Size

200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 900 1000

201 252 318 357 400 449 503 565 634 711 797 894 1003

1120 1250

1125 1262

1400

1416 1500

Drilling

201 252 318 357 400 449 503 565 634 711 797

K90 K90 K90 K90 K90

B dimensions 201 mm and 252 mm can only have H dimensions of 201 mm 10400 mm

Even number

of holes

of holes

‘7r

J_

~

~’o’o

r

0

0 t -’300 ‘

t -300

A

0

—.

-———

“~

_B

p’~

m

0

*

10

10

*

07

I-———

–

-1-

0

t-

m

-

Details

Odd number

I-

FK FKW FKS FKN FKI

H in mm

Size

200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800

375 + 500 375 + 500 500 375 + 500 150 + 280

size 10 DIN

Flange

r

L in mm

Type

Height

1500

J_

m

Sizes . Width

Nominal

+fLk-

2804

0

1

1

.

J-

?

-J?

35

Ann

;:: . . .

503 70 mm to “a” S 100 mm the spacing must be mortar filled using an injection process. With “a” >100 mm, the spacing maybe filled by hand mortaring or concrete filling. Where mortaring in the wall or ceiling area is not possible due to insufficient clearances, e gap “s” may be filled with mineral fibre boards as shown m Fig. 1.5 (except for type FKI - K90). space

“a” are to be filled

Fig. 1.1

.4

-7;r,/ .,

lE21 ‘(7

!?wblrame

:~

‘“s’

–7

d

W2100

— —. El$-p ,.

_ --

J,L.,

subframe

fittings

-lar

(if required]

the Walllceiling

Wall Installation Fig. 1.1 Installation opening, minimum clearances Fig. 1.2 Wall thickness W - 100– 240 mm (types FK - K90 . FKW - K90 “ FKS - K90 - FKN- K90) Fig. 1.3 Wall thickness W >240 mm (types FK - K90 . FKW-K90 “ FKS -K90 - FKN - K90) Fig. 1.4 Wall thickness W Z 100 mm (tvoe FKI - K90) tiih partial mortaring only ‘ig” 1“5 (types FK - K90 . FKW - K90 m FKS-K90 - FKN- K90) In this case, ducts may only be connected using flexible

Fig.

Lintel

of the fire damper,

or subframe for push fit damper must not be deformed. The damper blade must easily rotate after installation.

for

Z’

“’damper

J

L -150

Installation

2

L L -

or 280 mm (s!andard

sizes)

details Fire damper

1 FK-K90

FKW-K90 FKS - K90 FKN - K90 FKI - K90

a ~ 70 mm

Hexagonal boll M 8 x 35 wilh washer _ (on 0 dimension only)

a Z 150mm

q,w~-

Fig. 1.2

Subframe

%

for push

fit damper

I Seal

For square dampers, note required mstallalion orientation

Fig. 1.5 11

w=

100

l15mm

W=l15-240mm

,Vz ,,, ,

El!i $ ,“

.——.

.-

—

.,,

I 260 ‘“ ~ -:+

II

L, -500

~L-375J

} ~:,___ D--

:;,::

J

.JxL -

.J, L.. ‘ -Js L-

.J,

L.’

N Fig. 1.3

-

w

-

3

wr

,+ >\. ... s

‘-L-

500

-

-4

-,“m%w#kAru!A .

,.. .,.*.

L-

500-

+.y.+~

m!

by oihers)

.,.

.

. .-

Mirmral (IMO hoard. Nommal denslly 80-100 kgtm] Non-flammable, melfing Poml IOoO°C Material thickness - x + min. 10 mm

i

t

-

Mineral

)“—1

hbre

board

(insert

before

in SlallatlOn)

Aire acondicionado

Rejilla resistente a la intemperie con válvula de seguridad TROX

23.01.98

4.6.7

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

3/4/EN/l

.\

Combination of Weather Resistant Louvres and Multileaf Damper Sections

TROX%EcH~,~ Gebrtider

Trox GmbH

Heinrich-Trox-platz D-47504

Neukirchen-Vluyn

Telefon 028 45/2 02-0 Telefax 028 45/2 02-265

,,.

3

Contents

●

Description

,, 4? ..’

.’/

Description ___ Construction __ Standard Sizes . Installation Order Details --- ___

WG-JZ-B

2 3 4 5

WG -KU L-1

G,. 1

The combination of weather resistant Iouvres and multileaf or pressure relief dampers perform a dual role in intake and discharge openings in air conditioning systems. Firstly they give good protection against the direct ingress of rain, leaves and birds, and secondly they allow adjustment of flow rate through the opening or provide a means of shut off

when the ventilation system is shut down.

2.

I

Construction

., .

Type

WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A

– Comprising with

o WG-JZ-B “ “ AWG-JZ-B

a weather

a masonary

resistent

sub-frame,

Iouvre type WG or AWG,

and a multileaf

damper

type

JZ-A or JZ-B – Weather resistant Iouvre and multileaf

damper are firmly connected – Materials: Weather resistant Iouvres type WG and multileaf dampers type JZ-A or JZ-B are of galvanised sheet steel, weather resistant Iouvres type AWG are of extruded aluminium sections. Masonary sub-frames are of galvanised steel,

Type WG-KUL-1 . WG-KUL-2. AWG-KUL-1 “ AWG-KUL-2 – Comprising a weather resistant Iouvre type WG or AWG, with a masonary

sub-frame,

and a pressure-relief

damper

type KUL – Weather resistant Iouvre and pressure-relief damper are firmly connected – Materials: Weather resistant Iouvres type WG and pressure-relief dampers type KUL are of galvanised sheet steel, weather resistant Iouvres type AWG are of extruded aluminium sections. Masonary

sub-frames

are of galvanised

steel.

For construction of individual components, see leaflets nos.: 3/1/EN/.. Multileaf Dampers 3/2/EN/.. Weather Resistant Louvres 3/3/EN/.. Pressure-Relief Dampers

Tvc)e . . WG-JZ-A.

AWG-JZ-A

WG-JZ-B o “ AWG-JZ-B

WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A

WG-JZ-B AWG-JZ-B

I L

r-

k.

Type WG-KUL-1 AWG-KUL-l

—

oWG-KUL-2 o oAWG-KUL-2

WG-KUL-1 AWG - KUL- 1

WG-KUL-2 AWG-KUL-2

—

Shown with drive on right hand side, viewed in direction

of arrow

3

Standard Sizes

●

Installation Details

— tandard Sizes jpe WG-JZ-A oWG-JZ-B . AWG-JZ-A . AWG-JZ-B H in mm

B in mm

<

345 510 675 840 1005 1170 1335 1500 1665 1830 1995

400 600 800 1000 1200

1400 1600 1800 2000

+ny combination an upplled.

Installation

Type WG-KUL-1 . WG-KUL-2. AWG-KUL-l “ AWG-KUL-2

of dimensions

B in mm

H in mm

400 600 800

345 510 675 840 1005 1170 1335 1500 1665

1000 1200 1400 1600

Any combination of dimensions listed above can be supplied.

listed above

Dimensions Type WG-JZ-A” AWG-JZ-A

WG-JZ-B” “ AWG-JZ-B

Type WG-KUL-1 AWG-KUL-1

●

WG-KUL-2 o AWG-KUL-2 ●

T i 0

m + ❑

~ m + I

I

I L,,,

I-NJ

J

Type WG-KUL-1

Type WG-JZ-A shown, drive on right hand side

Type WG-JZ-A” AWG-JZ-A

shown

I

WG-JZ-B. . AWG-JZ-B

with accessories A

View

A

r

t

0

m + m

& m

+

I

0 Accessories:

L Type WG-JZ-A return actuator,

265

J

shown, with electric spring drive on right hand side

@ Cover

see leaflet no 3/1 /EN/.. (Multileaf Dampers) e.g. electric spring return actuator, pneumatic actuator

c’ ,:

Order Details ..’

,

I

Order

Code

These codes do not need to be completed

AWG-JZ-A-R

] / I 600

X

510

l/

for standard

Q

E6-C-31

fiGTl/1+1/

J-

Y——’

‘1

Type WG WG 1

d

AWG AWG 1 AWG2 AWG3

Colour for Weather-resistant RAL... orE6-C-... (see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. )

Drive side right “R” left “L”

(only for JZ-A and JZ-& “R supplied if handing not specified)

Finish for weather-resistant S1 =

Euras-Standard E6-C-Oto C-35 (see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. )

JZ-A JZ-B KUL-1 KUL-2

—

—

Text

Combined weather-resistant Iouvre and multileaf or pressure-relief damper for protection against direct ingress of rain, leaves and birds into the intake or discharge openings of air conditioning systems, and for flow rate control or shut off of openings when ventilation system is shut down. and materials:

Masonary sub-frame: see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. Accessories: see leaflet no. 3/1 /EN/. , Make: TROX Type: see order code

Accessorv Z.. for multileaf damper (see leafl~ no. 3/1/EN/.. ) 0 = without

Sizes available WxHinmm (see page 4)

Construction see page 3

painted to RAL

[ S2 = anodised to

Type

Specification

products

—

accessories

not used

Order

Example

Make: Type: Qty.:

TROX AWG-JZ-A-R 5

/600x

510/O/ZOl

lS2/E6-C-31

Iouvre

Iouvre

Aire acondicionado

Rejas TROX

23.01.98

4.6.8

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

l/1/EN/4

\

Grilles Linear Grilles

TROKTECHNIK Gebruder

Trox GmbH

Helnrich-Trox-Platz D-47504

Neuklrchen-Vluyn

Telefon

02845/2

02-0

Telefax

02845/2

02-265

I

Contents

●

Description

Description Aluminlum grilles Alumlnlum grilles and grille cores Alummlum grilles Steel grilles Stainless steel grilles Flow rate control dampers Plastic grilles Special filter frame .__. . . Grilles and grille cores (dimensions) _ Aluminium and steel linear grilles —

2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9

10 -11

..

Grilles and linear grilles are suitable for duct, wall and floor installation. They may be fitted straight into the duct section, or alternatively, an installation subframe may be used, e.g. for installation

into builders

work.

To optimise air distribution, it is possible to choose from different types of rear assemblies, see pages 14 and 15.

SelectIon tables for Ilnear grille lengths Rear assemblies Installation subframes Assembly Details “ Fixing Details Nomenclature Acoustic Data Acoustic Data for supply air Acoustic Data for return air --Aerodynamic Data ____ ___ Aerodynamic Data for return air _._._.. Order Details _ . . .–

12 14 16 18 19 19 -20 22 -24 31 ..—

32

I

,1

Aluminium Grilles Construction

oDimensions”

Materials

— Construction Type KUSupply

or return

diffuser-type front wllh

blades spring

alr gr!lle,

section, and

The

with

a concealed

front

individually fixing.

border

has a

adjustable Available

horizontal on request

clip fixing.

Type AT Supply or return air grille with individually adjustable horizontal aerofoil blades. Front border either 27 or 23 mm wide, concealed fixing. Available on request with spring clip fixing or visible screw fixing.

Type

Type VAT Supply or return alr grille with indwidually adjustable vertical aerofoil blades. Front border either 27 or 23 mm wide concealed fixing. Available on request with spring clIp flxlng or — only for front border 27 mm – visible screw flxlng (border counter punched).

Materials The grilles are made from extruded a natural anodised finish E6-C-O.

aluminium

sections,

with

ASL

r

17-

i “7

‘ for ( ) dimensions

A1l

L-

9

Type VAT

3

I

i4

Aluminium Grilles and Grille Cores Construction

“ Dimensions

Type AH Supply or return air grille with fixed horizontal prof!led blades. Front border either 28 or 20 mm wide, concealed flxlng, blades with either 0° or 15° deflection types AH-Oand AH-15-. respectwely. Available on request with sprlrrg clIp fixing or wslble screw flxlng (border counter punched) Type AF Supply or return air grille for floor or wall mounting with fixed horizontal profiled blades, blades with either 0° or 15° deflection, types AF-O-. . . and AF-15-. ., respectively. The grille core can be removed by releasing the W clips. The grille can be fitted in masonry by means of builders work cleats.

Types

EH

- EF

. EHG

“ EFG

Grille cores for supPly or return air for wall with fixed horizontal profiled blades. blade

125 mm – types EH-0, EH-15, EF-0, and EF-15. or 16.7 mm [y Des EHG-0, EHG-15, EFG-0, and EFG-15 Blades with either 0° or 15° deflection, types 0 and . ..15. The construction and dimensions are the same as for the cores of types AH and AF.

Type AH

‘ for ( ) dimensions A

47.

AH-O

AH-15

Type AF

1

–-1

AF-O

1‘-:’s-l II I AF-15 Types EH “ EF . EHG

I

or CIII mounhng pitch either

. EFG

II

.-15-

5.5 r

Aluminium Grilles Construction

— Type AWT Grille for Inslallatlon In gymnasia and sports halls has a ball mpact resistance according to DIN 18032 Part 3. ~~ero blade dwerqence)

1000 fWJEnCY

2000

4000

In Hz

v

[{000

Acoustic Data for Return Air Grilles

IS

Sound power level and Pressure and miss damDer .-AS

15

drop with hit

Octave band sound power levels with hll and miss damper .-AS

,.

namoer sewno

50’10

. 50

NC 45 40 40

.35

3

25 H

1

15

3

2

14

4567

63

-

Ven m mls

125 Octave

16

Octave band sound power levels with hit and miss damper .-AS

250 band

500

1000

2000

centre

frequency

m Hz

4000

8000

--~

Octave band sound power levels with hit and miss damper .-AS

Damoer s?ltlno 100 ‘/o

DamDer sellma 25’10

I

50

K 45 40 40

35 30 20

25

?~o

m b3

12>

250

500

CICMW I)and cenlIc

1000” lrcqucncy

?000 lr Hz

4000 _

8000

63

125 Octave

250

500

band cerllre

1000 Irequency

?orm n H7

4000

8000

_

23

Aerodynamic Data ~-q~~ —

@ Table on page 25:

Example Data given: Type

AT-A,

with

ceiling

effect

Total volume flow

v, = 150 1/s

Maximum

VL = 0.5 m/s

Distance

jet velocity

L=l

from the grille

Temperature differential supply and room air

Diagram

A etl A eff

= 0.041 mz

LxH

‘625

=

0.043

mz

x1250 r325 x225

Om

between dtZ=4K

17:

Aetf v~(f bo 2 i

=

0.041

= =

3.8 mls 1.2m

=

15

=

4x0.13

Correction factors for installation without ceiling effect If the distance to the ceiling is z 0.8 m, the diagram values V~, bo,2,At, / Atz should be multiplied by a factor of 0.71.

mz

,ltl/’ltz=o.l3 =

0.52K

::15m

B

Installation

with ceiling

effect

Installation

without

ceiling

effect

I

1

a = 20 °--

+

‘---

T B? O.15XL I l––

-+

Y

I

24

\

i

‘---

/

1

-4

? —a

=20°

‘–

‘-’

L

Aerodynamic Data Grilles with ceiling effect

Effective

outlet

area A,ti in mz L in mm

‘H Type

In mm AH

75

AF TRS

AT.

VAT.

Al-1

AF

ASL.

SL.

TR.

TRSTRE

225

t

AT,

VAT.

AH

AF

ASL.

0014

1-

0022

,.-

]

I

AH

.

.,

.

.

.

.

.ln.lna.lnc.na

.

. .

.

.

.

525

I

“625

0014

‘

0017

0022

0021

0029

0036 I

‘]

825

0043

;

.,

0034 –

0025

1

0031

0.040

0086

0.114

0020

t“”--

I

0043

0057

1

0072

0034

0044

:

0055

-

;.

Without

B >

19 difference

ceiling effect

- --L;;$--4-.

x 2.0

I

I

x 2.0 L X 0.3

L

X

0.25

L x 0.3

With ceiling effect Maximum temperature difference Atzin cooling mode

/r&Pinm’

_

On diagram 19: To prevent the airstream dropping into the occupied zone reference should be made to the graph above. This shows the maximum cooling differential which may be used related to the effective outlet area and effective outlet velocity.

I

/

/

/

4

,’ /

Veff

.

A,lf

/

Heallng

/“ -,=

Atz .— -

,

---

y=atzx y/atz 4 i Coohng

1<

L

., -, ‘w

27

1

I

Aerodynamic Data

-lr-w —

Grilles

c.

Correction factors for installation without ceiling effect If the distance to the ceiling is >0.8 m, the diagram values VL, b~~, AtL /AtZ should be multiplied by a factor of 0.71.

Installation

with ceiling

effect

Installation

of Linear

Grilles

I

Installation

without

ceiling

effect

Linear grille L, /H1 >14 or single grilles installed In a conhnuous Ime wall to wall

28

Multiple spacing

grille installation of B “

0150

0225

456781O

29

I

Aerodynamic Data Grilles

Linear

o~ Determination of Volume Flow The volume flow can be determined by measuring the air velocity with zero blade divergence using either a pitot tube or a rotating vane anemometer.

Volume Figure

Flow Measurement

1

,

Pitot tube (Figure 1): Measurement of air velocity should be made between the blades at a number of positions to determine an arithmetic The volume flow is then calculated as mean value — v “ follows: e “mean” v [1/s] = ‘efl.rnean[m/s] x h~ff [m] x LI [m] x 1000 V [m3/h] = v.fl,~e,” [m/s] x h.” [m] x L, [m] x 3600

i

Rotating Vane Anemometer (Figure 2): The measurement instrument should be evenly traversed across the entire grille face to determine a value of v~,,”. The volume flow is then: .= Vmean ‘s] [m/s] x h.,, Im] x L, [ml x 1.33x 1000 h ~m3/h] = v~,,n [m/s] x h,,, Im] x L, [m] x 1.33x 3600

21

!

Without ceiling effect airstream drop or rise y due to temperature difference 0.50 0.33 020

E

0.10

.s % L

0.05

On diagram 22: To prevent the airstream dropping into the occupied zone reference should be made to diagram 20. This shows the maximum cooling differential which may be used related to the effective outlet height and effective outlet velocity.

0.03

1.00 0.50

y =Atz

0.30

x y/Atz

0.20

0,10 0,05 0,03 0.02 0.01

22

Correction

With ceiling effect Maximum

temperature

difference

Factors

(where

L = const.)

Atz in cooling mode

With ceiling effect

.F g .-c

Correction for diagrams 21 and 22 (for setting of blade divergence)

AH, AF SL

—— 0 ;75

-–— 0.150

0.225

~

30

Without ceiling effect

Aerodynamic Data for Return Air Grilles

Volume

Effective

Flow Measurement

outlet

4

LxH in mm

Rotating Vane Anemometer: The measurement instrument should be evently traversed across the entire grille face to determine a value of v~~an. The volume flow is then: v [1/s] = Vmea”[m/s] V [m3/h] = v~,,n [m/s]

x A,fl [m’] x A~H [m’]

x f x 1000 x f x 3600

0.004 0.006 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.021 0.026

0.003 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.011 0.015 0.018 0.023

0.006 0.009 0.011 0.014 0.016 0.022 0.028 0.033

225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225

X

125

0.009 0.013 0.017 0,021 0.026 0.033 0.041 0.049

0.008 0.011 0.015 0.018 0.023 0.029 0.036 0.043

0.011 0.016 0.022 0.028 0.033 0.044 0.055 0.066

0.013 0.019 0.026 0.033 0.040 0.053 0.066 0.080

325

X

0,026

0.033 0.044 0.055 0.066 0.090 0.110 0.134

0.040 0.053 0.066 0.080 0.105 0.133 0.160

0.066 0.083 0.100 0.134 0.170 0.200

0.080

0.134 0.180 0.270

0.160 0.220 0.270 0.320

0.280

0.330

0.340

0.400

525

0.041

625

0.049

825 1025

0.066

1225

0.090

0.023 0.029 0.036 0.043 0.057 0.071 0.078

1225

0.049 0.060 0.072 0.095 0.120 0.140

0.043 0.052 0.063 0.083 0.104 0.122

625 X 425 825 1025 1225

0.095 0.122 0.155 0.185

225

425

0.033

825 1025

1025 X 525 1225

..

,..

.

N3L . SL

75

625

– f –

AWT

X

525

factor

AH. AF

225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225

425 X 325

Correction

area

0.082

0.220

0.100 0.120 0.160 0.200 0.240

—

1

Order Details Specification Text Grilles, grille cores and linear grilles suitable for supply or return air for installation in walls, floors or tills. Borders (except for grille cores) with corner mitres and rear perimeter sealing strip – horizontal or vertical profiled front blades individually adjustable or fixed. Knock down installation subframes for assembly on site by others, installation by visible screw fixing (border counter punched) concealed fixing or spring clip fixing. For optimum air distribution, rear assemblies are fitted to grilles which can be adjusted directly at the grille face without remounting the face.

Order

These codes need not be completed for standard products

Code r E- SL-AG

section Aluminium grilles and grille cores, see pages 3 to 5 Steel grilles, see page 6

Aluminium and steel linear grilles, see pages 11 to 13

~ / I 191OX125

1 / I N1

T7V””T I I

End section E ~ Intermediate M 1)

Stainless steel grilles, see page 7 Plastic grilles, see page 8

—

I

Rear assemblies, see table on page 15

LxH, see page 10

J

ExH MxH

see pages 11 to 13

r?!!r7

L

O Standard finish RAL 9010 S 1 Painted according to RAL... S 7 Galvanised base material (only type TR)

O for standard construction without fixing variant . . . with fixina variant. see table-on paae 33 .-

O

Standard finish dull-pickled S 8 Bright finish

I

❑ Rear Assemblies E-EF spare filter media AF-90” mitrel) ES-AF-O-A ES-AF-15-A-1 ES-AF-15-A-2

1)

Mitre: please order separately with indication of height!

State colour

O Standard finish E6-C-O PO Powder coated (RAL 9010) S 1 Painted according to RAL... S 2 Anodised according to Euro Standard E4-C-31 to C-35

O without installation subframe .,. with installation subframe see table on page 33

1 ) only for finear grilles

Please order separately indicating size

Materials: Aluminium: Grille face made from extruded aluminium sections, natural anodised finish E6-C-O. Steel: Grille face made from formed sheet steel. The surfaces are pre-treated and powder coated white (RAL 9010). Galvanised steel: Grille face made from formed galvanised sheet steel. Stainless steel: Grille face and rear assemblies made from formed, stainless sheet steel, DIN ref. 1.4301, dull pickled surface. Plastic: Grille face and rear assemblies made from plastic extrusions (hard PVC), grey colour (similar to RAL 7037), temperature resistant up to 50”C. Curved blades for volume control in black (similar to RAL 9005).

O

Standard PVC finish similar to RAL 7037

J ta ~~ ,~$ $. 1 OY

c

“

.-v

3

} L

Example: Grille Order Make: TROX Type: AT -AG 1825 x2251A 1

Example: Linear Grille Order Make: TROX x125/El Type: M- SL-AG/2000 E- SL-AG/1910x125/Nl E- SL-AG11850X1251N1 ( ..

,.

Order Details Rear Assemblies for grilles made from aluminium, steel or galvanised steel: Rear assemblies made from formed sheet steel, phosphate treated, stove enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dipcoat process, resistant to saturated environment

for minimum of 100 hours without deterioration (DIN 50017).

Inetaliatlon

Subframe

Front border

wldlh

Flxlng

In mm

23 (20)

23

20

27 (28)

Spring cllp fixing 27 (28)

23

Al

AT

Al

B1

o

Gll

All

Bll

Hll

VAT

Al

B1

o

Gll

All

Bll

Hll

Al

01

0

All

Bll

AF-of

AF-15

EH-O,

EF-O,

EH-15,

EHG-O,

EF-15,

o

Ell

EFG-15

AWT

Al

AGS

Al

o

Ml

o

TR

Al

Cll

o

TRS

Al

Cll

o

TR E

Al

o

KS

Al

o

E- AH- OIAH-15

c1

D1

El

F1

o

Ell

All

Ell

All

E- AF-o/AF-15 E-SL M- AH-

N1 OIAH-15

> i M- AF-OIAF-15 ;M-SL

o o

El

o

20

Bll

EFG-O

EHG-15,

SL

i

27 (28)

In mm

ASL

AH-o/AH-15

—

28120

width

rZunk@nsEd tcfdw

Concealed fixing 27 (28)

varlante

Front bordar

Fll

Aire acondicionado

Manómetro de contacto AIRFLOW

23.01.98

4.6.9

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

1’

I

Inhaltsverzeichnis

List of contents

Arbeitsweise Anwendungsbereich Aufbau Montage Fullen Einstellung Anschlu(l Technische Daten Zubehor ErsatzteiHiste Schaltplan Bohrschablone

Method of working Range of Application Construction /rNa//ation Filling Setting w Connections Technical Data Accessories Spare patis list Circuit diagram Template

Selte/Page 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 7 7 8 9

Arbeitsweise

Method

(Drucktiberwachung)

(Monitoring

Der Druckanstieg kann auf der Skala gegen die Oberkante des Schwimmers jederzelt abgelesen werden. Nach Erreichen des eingestellten Grenzwertes schaltet das EKM aus dem Betriebszuum. Der stand in den Alarmzustand Reedschalter schlie13t den Stromkreis, das Relais aktiviert die internen Melder (Summer und rote Lampe), die Fernanzeige 230 V, 50 Hz, und schliellt den potentialfreien Kontakt.

Increasing pressure can be read from scale against the top edge of the flo the preset switch point is reached EKM switches over from the opera mode to the alarm mode. The reed s closes the circuit, the relay switches internal devices (buzzer and red lamp completes both, the external power c (output 230 K 50 Hz) and the zero vo circuit.

Durch entsprechenden Anschlu13 konnen Druckanstieg oder Druckabfall gernessen und uberwacht werden. An den rechten Stutzen des U-Rohres wird positiver Druck (+), an den Iinken Stutzen negativer Druck (-) angeschlossen. Dies trifft such beim messen und tiberwachen der Druckdifferenz ZU, z. B. beim Uberwachen der ansteigenden Druckdifferenz uber einen Luftfilter wegen seiner zunehmenden Verschmutzung. An dem rechten Stutzen wird der hohere Druckwert (vor dem Filter), auf den linken Stutzen der kleinere Druckwert (hinter dem Filter) angeschlossen. Der M/A Umschalter alm Gerat (8) erlaubt die Wahl zwischen einer automatischen (Schalterstellung A) Ruckschaltung in den Betriebszustand nach Abfall des Druckes unter den Grenzwert oder Anhaltung der Stormeldung bis zur manuellen (Schalterstellung M) Quittierung des Gerates vor Ort nach Wiederherstellung normaler Betriebskonditionen (z. B. Reinigung des Filters).

of working of pressure)

By using different connections the pre re rise or pressure drop can be monito The positive pressure (+) should connected to the right hand conne and the negative pressure (–) shoul connected to the left hand connectoc is also the case if differential pressu being monitored e.g. for monitoring pressure difference over air filters d their clogging. The higher pressure (before the filter) will be connected o right connectoc the 10wer value (b the filter) on the left connecto[

The M/A switch (8) allows the c bet ween automatic (a) reswitch to o ting mode after pressure drop below switch point and manual (M) cancell on the instrument after restoring n conditions (e.g. cleaning the filter).

Anwendungsbereich

Range

of application

Das Gerat Ist uberall einsetzbar, wo Gesamt- und Differenzdruck (positiv oder negativ) innerhalb des Bereiches 0-1000, 1500 bzw. 2250 Pa zu messen und zu uberwachen sind. Es ist fur Dauerbetrieb ausgelegt.

This irl.strument maybe used in air-m systeli LSwhere it is imporlant to m and it Klicate changes in positive, ne or differential pressures. Its range o tion covers O-7000, 1500 or2250 Pa is designed for continuous operatio

I_

2

7 8

3

9 10 4 5

11 12 13 14

nischer Verformung der Kunststoffteile 60”C nicht tiberschreiten. Extreme Temperature sollte ohnehin vermleden werden wegen des Einflusses auf das spezifische Gewicht der Sperrfltissigkeit. Die Skala ist kalibriert ftir 20”C und 1013 mbar. Die Abmessungen des EKM sind auf Seite 9 ersichtlich, diese Skizze client such als Bohrschablone. Das Gehause mittels den mitgelieferten selbstschneidenden Schrauben 3,9x32mm befestigen.

teed 60°C because of possible mech cal distortion of fhe plasfic housing. treme temperature should also be avo because of variations of the specific sity of/he manometer fluid. The scale is calibrated for 20”C and mbar. Page 9 shows the fixing dimen for the EKM which can also be used template. Secure the housing by mea the two self-tapping screws 3.9x32 supplied and replace the front cover.

Fullen

Filling

(siehe Abbildung

2)

Die schwarzen Schutzkappen (zuerst auf der rechten Seite des U-Rohres) vorsichtig abnehmen. In der Regel wird das Gerat gefullt geliefert. Der Fltissigkeitspegel sollte nach der Montage und danach in regelmaBigen Zeitabstanden kontrolliert und gegebenenfalls nachgeftillt werden. Hierbei wird AIRFLOW-Sperrflussigkeit

(see figure 2)

Remove black caps from the right limb by carefully twisting off. The instrum will normally be supplied already filled level of the fluid should be checked installing the unit and thereafter at re intervals. If necessary top up the fluid using A1RF1OW manometer ,,Technical Data” by inserting the sy

6 Abbildung

Figure 1

1

Aufbau

Construction

Das EKM besteht im wesentlichen aus einem U- Rohr-Manometer (7), .einem Reedschalter, integriert in einem verstellbaren Kontakttrager (3), einem Relais (14), zwei Anzeige-Lampen (1O) und einer akustischen Warneinrichtung (1 1). Das Gerat ist such mit einem Haltestromkreis versehen, der mittels Schalter (8) eingestellt werden kann, Das Gehause (1) besteht aus schlagzahem Polystyrol (PS 454 H).

The EKM comprises a U-tube-manometer (7), a reed switch, integrated into a setable switch carrier (3), a relay (14), two signal lamps (10) and an audible warning device (1 1). With the switch (3) the unit can also be set to provide a hold-on function. The case (1) is made from tough Polystyrol (PS 454 H).

Montage

Installation

Das Gerat senkrecht

The unit should be fixed to a flat surface, vertical in two planes, under &nbient conditions of temperature and humidity. Direct exposure to sunshine must be avoided. This area has aLso to be free of vibration and precipated dust and dirt. The environmental temperature must not ex-

da anbringen, wo normale Temperature und Luftfeucntigkeit herrschen und es vor Erschuttewngen und starkem Schmutzanfall ges~hutzt ist. Direkte Sonnenanstrahlung sollte iermieden werden. Die Umgebungs- oder Eigentemperatur darf wegen mogliche[ mecha2

Abbildung

2

FiQu

(s. Technische Daten) unter Verwendung der mitgelieferten Einftillspritze Iangsam in den rechten Schenkel des U-Rohres eingefullt. Oberkante Schwimmkorper (4) muf3 in etwa mit der Nullposition der Skala (2) iibereinstimmen. Bei Luftblasenbildung unterhalb des Schwimmkorpers durch vorsichtiges Klopfen auf den Schwimmkorper die Luft entweichen lassen. Sollte Sperrfltissigkeit versehentlich tiberIaufen, ist sie sorgfaltig abzuwischen und besonders darauf zu achten, da13 keine Reste der Fltissigkeit im Innern des Gehauses verbleiben.

supplied into the righl limb of the U-tube and pouring in the manometer fluid slowly. The top of the float (4) has to be roughly \evel with the zero of the scale (2). In the event of an air bubble forming beneath the float, it can be removed by tapping the float down into the fluid. Should fluid spill onto the housing, it must be carefully wiped off taking special care not to leave any traces inside the unit.

Einstellung

Setting

(siehe Abbildung

3)

Der Nullpunkt der Skala und die Oberkante des Schwimmkorpers mussen ubereinstimmen. Gegebenenfalls nach Losen der Randelmutter die Skala durch vertikale Verschiebung nachjustieren. Anhand des Randelknopfes (6) wird der Zeiger auf den gewunschten Schaltpunkt eingestellt.

Abbildung 4

3

Up

(see figure 3)

The zero mark of the scale should be level with the top of the float. If necessary, 1oosen the fjxing nut and adjust the scale vertically. Set (he scale pointer to the pressure at which the unit is required to switch, using knob (6).

Figure 3

Anschlu B (siehe

Abbildung

Connections

4)

(see figure 4)

ELEKTRISCH: Samtliche elektrischen Anschltisse erfolgen an der Klemmleiste (12). Zur Zugentlastung (13) wird das Kabel jeweils mit einer Schelle im Gehause befestigt. Die Anschlusse erfolgen gema8 Schaltplan, der sich im Gerat befindet. Der Zugang zur Klemmleiste kann verbessert werden durch vorsichtiges Wegschwenken des U-Rohres, siehe Abb. 4. Nach Herstellung der elektrischen Anschl.usse den Gehausedeckel wieder anschrauben und die unbenutzten Kabeldurchfuhrungen mit den mitgelieferten Blindstopfen erschlietien.

ELECTRICAL: All electrical connections the instrument are made at the term block (12). The cables should be firmly cured inside the housing with the c clamp (13). The connections are show the wiring diagram, fixed inside the ins ment. The access to the terminal block be improved by swinging one arm o U-tube out of the housing as show figure 4. After the electrical connection made, the instrument front cover sh be screwed on again and the unused c openings should be closed using the b caps supplied.

DRUCK: Das Gerat unter Verwendung der selbstdichtenden Anschluf3flansche und des PVC-Schlauches an das System anschlief3en.

PRESSURE: The instrument is connec to the pressure system using the self Iing flanges and the PVC-tubing suppli

/

Figure

Technische (!echn,sche

Bitte beachten

Please

Sie

Bei einseitigem DruckanschIu13 ist darauf zu achten, dafl der Met3bereich 1000, 1500 bzw. 2250 Pa nicht iiberschritten wird. Sonst kann es zum Herausdriicken der Sperrflussigkeit kommen. Wird

das

Uberwachung

Gerat

zur

installiert,

Druckdifferenzsollte

der Druck-

anschluf3 nur bei abgeschalteter Anlage erfolgen, da der statische Druck im System durchaus hoher als 2250 Pa sein kann. Die zulassige statische Belastung des EKM ist 1,5 bar, Wenn dieser Druck auf beiden Seiten des U-Rohres anliegt, ist rwr die Differenz der Druckwerte an beiden Anschlussen fur den Me13bereich ausschlaggebend. Eine einseitige UberIastung des Me13bereiches ist dann zu vermeiden.

note

If the instrument is used for monitoring pressure relative to atmosphere the measuring range of 1000, 1500 or 2250 Pa respectively not to be exceeced. Otherwise the manometer fluid could be blown out of the U-tube. For differential pressure use, the air system should only be connected whilst it is not under pressure, A static pressure of up to 1,5 bars is allowed. If applied on both sides of the U-tube the pressure difference is limited to the range only. Do not exceed the measuring range on any sidfl of the U-tube in this case.

CE-Mark

Das EKM erfullt die Anforderungen der Europaischen Niederspannungsrichtlinie ECC 73/23 und der Richtlinien fiir elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit EN 50081/1 (Emission) und EN 50082/1 (Imission) und tragt das CE-Zeichen.

The EKM meets the requirements of the European Low Voltage Regulation ECC for 73J23 as well as the Regulations Electromagnetic Compatibility - Genera tic Immunity Standard EN 50081/1 (Emission) and EN 5008211 (Imission) and is marked with the CE-Mark

6

EKM 1000

EKM 1500

TechnivIDaia

EKM 2250

alten

Artikel-Nr, MeB-/Schaltberelch Skalenteilstnch Wiederholgenm_igkel! Ruckschaltdifferenz Sperrflussigkeil s. G. Uberdrucksicherhelt Netzanschlu13 Auf3endurchmesser der Anschlut31eitungen Ausghnge: 1 Umschalter 1 Umschalter Scha!tleistung Feinsicherung (9) Uberspannungsfestigkeitsklasse 2 Abmessung ca. Gewicht ca.

Zubehor

CE-Zeichen

‘atnI

Anderun

hou! notice

(can be ch.m75

17001 20 Pa

1 Pa 30 Pa 0,784

(im Lieferumfang)

1 Meter PVC-Schlauch 2 selbstdichtende PVC-Anschlu13flansche mit Schrauben 1 Flasche Reservesperrfltissigkeit 1 Einftillspritze 2 Befestigungsschrauben 1 Gebrauchsanleitung

0-1500 Pa 20 Pa 1,5 Pa 45 Pa 1,114 1,5 bar 230 V-,50HZ

Kontakttrager, komplett mit Reedschalter U-Rohr LeiterDlatte, kom~lett 1 PVC-Schlauch bl’au PVC-Schlauch rot PVC Anschlut3flansche Sperrflussigkeit 500 ml S. G. 0,784 (EKM 1000) s. G. 1,114 (EKM 1500) S. G. 1,730 (EKM 2250) Schlauchhalter fur Wandmontage Schlauchanschlu13 stutzen Schwimmer fur EKM 1000 Schwimmer fur EKM 1500 Schwimmer fur EKM 2250 Randelknopf

0-2250 Pa 50 Pa 2,3 Pa 65 Pa 1,730

Adjustable Range

7 Resolution Repeatability Hysteresis Manometer f/u/d Max. permissible press Power supp/y Cable diameter for electrical connections outputs: 1 changeover contac 7 changeover contac Switch current max. Cartridge fuse (9) Excess vohage protecti c/ass 2 Dimension approx. Weight approx.

max. 10 mm 230V -, 50 HZ

Ov 5A M 5A

243x

102x 44mm 400 g

Accessories

(supplied with instrume

1 metre PVC-tubing 2 self-sealing duct connectors with screws 1 bottle spare fluid 1 syringe 2 Fixing screws 7 Operation

I Ersatzteilliste Bezeichnung

Cafa/ogue No.

17011

17010

0-1000 Pa

Instruction

Spare Art.-Nr. Cat.-No. 17580 17503 17585 55005 55006 55032 55020 55024 55132 55045 17583 17582 17584 17585 17586

parts

list

Description

Switch carrier complete with Reed switch U-tube Printed circuit board comple PVC-tubing blue PVC-tubing red PVC-duct-connectors Manometer fluid 500 ml S. g. 0.784 (EKM 1000) s, g. 1.114 (EKM 1500) S. g. 1.730 (EKM 2250) Tubing clambs for wall ins tallation Pressure connectors Float for EKM 1000 F/oat for EKM 1500 Float for EKM 2250 Knurled knob

230 V-,

Scha,.plan Circuit

L

diagram

f ‘ \ L J

~.. _.. —-.,_

N;

f P

I

1

I

““–””–””–””%-”1

‘-------------:-i, 1~’ “cz:::~%::~::;~ I

~7

I...._.. _.._..

c

_.._..

-–..--...

.3

Maximale Kontaktbelastung / switch current max.: 5 A, 230 V -, 50 Hz. Au13endurchmesser der Anschlu131eitungen max. 10 mm Max. cab/e diameter for e/ecfrica/ connections: 10 mm VDE-RICHTLINIEN beachten! Prufspannung Relais-Kontakte: 750 V - eff. Observe VLE or ec@a/ent regulations when wiring! Test vol(age relay -con(acfs

750 V - elf.

Blockschaltbild Block diagram

J 2?50 %

. . . . . . ... . . . . . ..

1 A!JI o

—

E’\cIw ! >C”e(,!ng :

Fvj

R,l],, 6,1)

:. .,

?) !,ln,ll C?-PJI . ...,,....

I

1

I

I

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......

: : .;

Bohrschablone

Template

Zwei Lecher 3mm Durchmesser bohren. Das Gerat mittels zwei selbstschneidenden Schrauben 3,9 x 32 mm (werden mitgeliefert) befestigen.

Drill two holes 3 mm diameter. Secure instrument with two self-tapping screws 3,9 x 32 mm supplied.

14 ~D 7

●

+

: ————-

—

—-4 I

1-

_—.

L------174

—— — —1

Aire acondicionado

Interruptor de presión diferencial para aire DUNGS

23.01.98

4.6.10

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

Klima-Set Differenz-Druckwachter

fur Luft Typ Typ Typ Typ Typ

DIJNGS@

KS 150 C2 KS 300 C2 KS 600 C2 KS 1000 C2 KS 3000 C2

technic

5.13

T

!,

/,’,

...

Technik Zwei getrennte Druckkammern mlt druckseitigem Anschlu13 an Schlauchmppeln. Je Druckkammer ein gestufter Anschlu13 von a 6 auf 04 mm. Sollwert (Druckdifferenz) direkt einstellbar. Sollwert von au~en durch die Klarsichthaube erkennbar. Genaue Funktion durch spezielles, reibungsfrei gelagertes Schallsystem. Kontaktumschaltung erfolgt bei Uber- bzw. Unterschreiten des elngestelllen Sollwerles. KompleLles Montagesel beigepackt.

.

Anwendung Anwendungsgebiet ist die Ltiftungs- und Klimatechnik, DDC. Speziell die Uberwachung von Luftkanalen, Filtern, Antriebsaggregaten und Geblasen.

- Ariwendung

Funktion

DDC

des indiviEci Ubcr- bzw. Untcrschrcitun duell eingestr?lltec Schalipunkles wird vom eingebaulen LJmschalter der Slrom?is geoflnet oder geschlossen - je nach ,,ontaklbelegung - und damil das gewtinschte Signal abgegeben. Der Differenzdruckwachter des KlimaSels arbellet ohne Hilfsenergie.

Die Schallkonlakle

Technische

cier Klima-Sels

sinci

aus Feinsilber galvanisch vergoldet, Itir =( DC) 24V; 0,01.A Beim Einsalz des Klima-Sets in der konvenlionellen Technik bei -(AC) 250 V, ohmsche Last 5A, induktive Last 3A, cos q 0,6 brennt der vergoldete Uberzug an den Schallkontakten ab, Dadurch ist eine spatere DDC - Anwendung nicht mehr moglich.

Daten —..

Max, Betriebsuberdruck

5 kPa

Tempera! urbereich

Umgebungstemperatur Mediumstemperatur

Werkstoffe

Gehause: Membrane: Schaltkontakte:

—

-15°C bis +60°C -15°C bis +80°C Polycarbonat EPDM Basis Feinsilber galvanisch

vergoldet,

fur =( DC) 24V; O,OIA geeignet

bei -(AC) 250 V, ohmsche Last 5A, induktive Last 3A, cos q 0,6

Schaltstrom

–Iektrischer

Achtung sein, da13kein KonEs lmu13sicllergestcllt densal in den Druckwachter gelangen kann. 13eiMinuslemperaluren beslehl die Gefahr der Vereisung, dies kann zu Fehlfunktion oder Ausfall des Gerates ftihrem

Anschluf3

Uber Kabeleinftihrung PG 11, mit Zugentlastung, fur Kabel a 7 bis @12,5 mm

Schutzart

Standard:

Einbaulage

vorzugsweise

Justage

werkseitig bei senkrechter Einbaulage justiert bei fallendem Druck KS 150 C2. Justiert bei steigendem Druck KS 300 C2, KS 600 C2, KS 1000 C2, KS 3000 C2

Lieferumfang

Klima-Set

1. Differenzdruckwac 2, Haltewinkel 3, Anschlu8schlauch

hler

LGW

C2

04x1 ,5x2000

4, 6 Befestigungsschrauben 5.

eine Bohrschablone fur Haltebvinkel und Schlauchanschltisse

1P54 nach DIN 40050,

an Schraubenklemmen

senkrecht,

Ersatz-Druckwachter

siehe Tabelle rechts Bestell-Nr.219 806 Bestell-Nr.125 674 Bestell-Nr.090 209 Bestell-Nr.124 016

Fur Ftir Fur Fur Fur

zwei Schlauchanschlusse Verlangerungsrohr

Bestell-Nr.083 Bestell-Nr.131

428 615

8,

Betriebs-und

Bestell-Nr,212

220

Dlfferenzdwckwac ““ 17 ter mit Haltewinkel

bitte beachten

Zubehor/Ersatzteile

,

Montageanleilung

1P65 auf Anfrage

Befestigungsschrauben

KS KS KS KS KS

150 300 600 1000 3000

C2 C2 C2 C2 C2

Anschlufischlauch

..r-————— . Schlauchanschluf3

Verfangerungsrohr

Bohrschablone

fur Klima-Set Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr.

04xl

217778 217779 217780 217781 217782

,5x2000

Mafle

(mm)

,:J

!,,

,

—,

,-.

I

—–—.

-----

“ –—

in! –---—

I ——, ——. ._ ——- ——-

—

1--——-

--

u

___

u

1.A,I I

I--– Druckanschluf3 Jede Druckkammerbesitzt eirren Druckanschluf3 bolzen a 6/0 4 mm

Anschlu13 Anschluf3

fur den Stufen-

P1 (+) P2 (-)

= hoherer = niederer

Druck Druck

06 04

Prinzipschema Anwendungs-

und Anschluf3beispiele

.F ●

Anschluf3 muB geoff bleiben!

PI

IMl

Anschluf3

P2

net

IP ●

m

Anschlut3

P1

* IMl

Anschlui3

P2

Wl

Uberwachung eines Systemunterdruckes Zur Uberwachung des Druckes in Systemen mit Unterdruck. Das Klima-Set wird uber AnschluB P2 (-) mil delm Luftkanal verbunden. Der Anschlu13 PI (+) wird nicht mit dem Luflkanal verbunden. Die Schlauchanschlu8 tulle von Anschlul? PI (+) darf nicht verschlossen werden, es mu13 eine Verblndung zur Atmosphere bestehen. Achtung: Durch den Anschlu13 PI darf kein Schmutz in das Gerat eindringen!

Filteruberwachung

Geblasetiberwachung

Zur Uberwachung der Verschmutzung eines Filters kann das Klima-Set wie oben gezeigt angeschlossen werden. In Flu13richtung des Volumenstromes wird der Anschluf3Pl (+)vorund der Anschlu8 P2 (-) nach dem Filler mit dem Luflkanal verbunden.

Bei der Geblaseuberwachung wird der Anschlu13 PI (+) druckseitig nach dem Geblase und der Anschlu13 P2 (-)vordem Geblase mit dem Luflkanal verbunden.

Der Anschluf3 des hoheren Uberdruk~erfolgt immeran Anschlu13 PI (+).

Beispiel - Systemi.iberdruck hoherer Uberdruck: z,B. 240 Pa: Anschlull PI (+) niederer Uberdruck: z,B. 180 Pa: AnsclW3 P2 (-)

Beispiel - Systemunterdruck niederer Unterdruck:

Der Anschluf3 des hbheren Unterdruk@ erfolgt immer an Anschlu13 P2 (-).

-130 Pa: Anschlu13 PI (+) z.B. hbherer Unterdruck: -210 Pa: Anschlufl P2 (-) z.B.

Klima-Set Differenz-Druckwachter

fur Luft Typ

TyP Typ TyP Typ

Elektrischer Anschlu13 Der elektrische Anschlu13 erfolgt nach VDE an Schraubklemmen.

-..

DLINGs@

KS 150 C2 KS 300 C2 KS 600 C2 KS 1000 C2 KS 3000 C2

..

technic

. ..

Schaltdifferenz

Schalttunmlonen bei steigendem Differenzdruck: 1 NC off net 2 NO schliell

2 COM m

bei fallendem Differenzdruck: 1 NC schliell 2 NO off net

Druck am tvlsflwe, k

NO

❑

: E,ns!ell-Toleranz oberm Schallckuck

+

— I

Ap

L ~

1

NC

~____ ;——

P

< ~.

~====_’~/

___~>

: _o__— g .

FL

“,;,

—— e,

Schalldruck

Die Schaltdifferenz Ap ist die Druckdifferenz zwischen dem oberen und dem unteren Schaltdruck.

Zubehor

Set Doppeladapter

u

Der Doppeladapter ermoglicht den Anschlul? zusatzlicher Servicegerate, z.B. Schragrohrmanometer. Lieferumfang

❑

Ullr 1, ):

+El

1’

:. :j,,, .:,:,:,::: :;

Set Doppeladapter

2 Doppeladapler 2 Verschlu13kappen BestelI-Nr.

:

.

,:::” . . . .... ::, ~.!.~.~..’,: ,..

221 167

Technische KurzUbersicht lmbar=100Pa=O,lkPa =lOmmWS

1Pa=O,Ol mbar=O,l mmWS

MeBbereich einstellbar [Pa]

Typ

Schalt differenz Ap[pa]

max. Betriebsuberdruck [kPa]

Bestell-Nr.

KS 150 C2

20-

150



—

L —

—

i

K —

06 TCLfMfCANIOUE GUI -N 10,38 1 A

u 3%

I H

@

TYPE POWER TENSION INTENSITY

BROOK HANSEN WUD 10OLA 2,2 kw 400 v/3 5,4 A

L.——l

“$02%S542

II 8N

MARK

~

. 1

29

6

NfXT PAGE 03

g

3%

28

BN

W3

M3

06

5

Ml

12

89

V.3

14

J —

?.

II

54

M —

N

,6

— h-f

o —

F

—

13 W

W

R —

G

L!

L3

GEBAHRT jyoy 200 400 0,55

4

v/3 A

FRANCE AIR HCFT 4 400 320 W 400 v/3 0,75 A

E

ETIREX

34

B

AR

40015

3X1,5 400 6.85

kw v A

D c

B

B I A h112]31415

\617\819110\lll

12\

131141151

16117118119

] 20121122123124

] 251261271281

29130131132133134135

]36]3’ —

CRANCKASE HEATER

MOTOR COMPRESSOR HEATER

HEATER

SOLENOID VALVE

CONDENSOR

COMPRESSOR

EvAPORATOR

‘!8 s]

FROM PACE 02 7 L

64

Y

—

x

T

ROOM THERMOSTAT + ON OFF ON PANEL

v —

1, 1,

\

u

—

py-+----+

T

5

s

\

‘

———

--l 8N

~~

2F

EJN(

17

20

K1 R

Q

03

P

BNb

23

26

—

o

Q3

1+

— N

HEATER

lb-d

35

— M —

eP r I I

L — K

I

‘1 BN

~-— BN I

30

rl

:

lCRANCKA5E , HEATER

I

!7

I I I

I MOTOR cOMPRESSOR , HWTER

(0][

II

BN

~_L;

;

4

BN

20

31

h

112\

5

31415161718

L

)2 25

\ 02

24

9]101111

30

.—T

~——_—

PRESSOSTAT I coNoEN~TION

I

01

02 27

I

HP __

‘W’T.

HP

L––l

22

–1 ~ h:olo

I CONTROL

~

–J

BN( )25

34

2J 28

22 @

g

12 I13I14I15]16

~

g

117118119120121122

]23124]25

126127128

]29130]31]

g

5

5

.5

.5

5

24

Q1 ?

21

~

5

21

321331

3413513613 ...— —.

z — Y —

x — w — v — u —

s

T —

R

— —

P

0 —

—

0 —

h\{z\314151617181_!_1101

11112113114115

c L ,

i i 1

]16117\

181

‘E e

E . T

c

c c

, ; [

I

( 1 1 1 [ (

(

I

19120121122123

]241

25]26\

27128129130131132133

134135

]36]37

I r--

,s)

< mlu

\

SO 3Wd

IOV3690L ‘*N NV_Id : M30M0

UDl,j.N

2 690,!

J~UOISfI~

I

~fj”go”~()31WI ,“-

=:,-

JI

0 0

NOllVINVldWl

k’

t.-

P

●

3 a

00’00’CQ j

I . . . . . . . . . . .

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

L1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

L

. . . . . . . . . . . L

,@ 0

0

D. D I!?__ D 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

0

1

yl~~nil

*

2 a v r.

0 m

al

U3

r.

! — m co — r.

In

rc r. —

Aire acondicionado

4.6.13

lista de piezas para el esquema no. 2504 925 – Lista de piezas sulfuro – Lista de piezas óxido – Esq. no. 2504925 Ventilación y aire acondicionado

23.01.98

– Esq. no. 2504925 Aperturas en muros y detalles

COLLAHUASI

Aire acondicionado

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

LISTA DE PIEZAS PIEZAS SUELTAS

Krupp Fordertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas

Confeccionado:

01.07,1997

Rev. Nr.:

L

Centro costes-KF 84.078484 [ Numero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GrnbH, H.-M .-SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willichhllernania . Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor: I

“’ ‘- –

Pagina:

1/ 8

—

Comis. No.: 809727- Suibhidl Fecha de —— emisi6n: 01.07.1997 ——

Lieta pieza Pos.

Sec.pos LEta pieza pieza No suelta

Piano ntimero

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas

Peso neto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

I

3 1 1 1 2 1 1 — 3 1 3 8 2 — 3

1 ———

Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, ROCA ASA-I 5 Aparato resistencia electrica DewV heater Dewi Aparato HVAC / Air handling unit VK 18 Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, Eureco 6 V)( Supervision de fiftroldifference pessure switch for fitter, EKM 1000 Superv.diferencia presi6n/difference pressure switch for ventilator, KS1 OOOC2 Compuerta antiiicendio/ fire damper, FK-K90, 357x 357mm Compuerta antiincendio/ fire damper, FK-K90, 400x 357mm Compuerta de celoskd mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 357 x 357mm Compuerta de celoski ‘mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 400x 357mm Reja de ventilaci6rd grilles, TR-DG, 625x 225mm Reja de ventilaci6n/ grilles, TR-DG, 425x 125mm Reja protecci6n intempene con compuerta sobrepresi6n/ weather-resistant Iouvres with mufti-leaf damper, WG-KUL 2,600 x 345mm Reja de ventitaci6n/ —. arilles TR-AG

625

Y

225mm

—

I

~Krum Fth’dertechnik .

ILista de i)iezas / Piezas sueltas .

lConfeccionado:

01.07.1997

P@ina:

218

Rev. Nr.:

1“ Centro costee-KF 84.0784 84] Ndmero pedido-KF 3006361 6/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchIeyeStrtr 30,47877 WMch Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor: I

I Comis. No.: 809727- Sutbhidl

—. _. —. —_——

Fecha de emishhr: 01.07.1997 I

Sec.pos LEta pieza pieza No suetta

Lsta pieza Poe.

Piano ntimero

Referencia]Cantid. Poe.pedido de-a

ME

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetes

Pes; neto kg

i

15.

—. 2405925

16.1

2405925

16.2

2405925

3

17.1 17.2 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6

2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925

3 3 12m 3 1 3m 1 1

1 ‘–

‘–3

Unitm eldstice/ flexible duct, 360 x 300mm Uni6n el~stica/ fletible duct, 340x 675mm Urri6n elMica/ flexibte duct, 750x 620mm Canal/air duct, 334 x 667mm Canal/air duct, 741 x613mm Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D1 OOmm Curva/bowe 90°, D1 OOmm Compuerta de eetrangukwh5n/reducing damper, D1 OOmm Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D125mm Curvaibowe 9(Y, D125mm I Protecci6n de manipulaci6n/grab protection, D1 25mm

Fecha de d~onibilidad embalaie

Otros (P .ej. ttem Cliente)

Krupp Fordertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas — sueltas ..

Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] — 30063616/01 8 Ntimero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M .-SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Wiltic~Atemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:

Sec.pos Lista pieza N“ pieza suetta

Lista pieza Pos.

Piano ntimero

Referencia Carrtid. ME pos.pedido de-a

18m 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Confeccionado:

01.07.1997

Pdgina:

318

Rev. Nr.: -

Comis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl Fecha de emisitm: 01.07.1997

—

Denominaci6n SPIE

‘-

Cantidad etiquetas

Brida de canal con esquinas de uni&n/ air duct flanges with corner connection Canal/air duct, D 125/500x 500 Curva de canaUak duct bowe 90°,345 x 315 Canal/air duct, 600/600 7001g Curva de canallair duct bowe 90°, 600/600 Canal/air duct, 600/600 9801g Curva de canaUair duct bowe, 600/600 450/600 CanaUair duct, 450/600 11501g CanaUair duct, 450/600 3001g CanaUair duct, 450/600 15001g CanaUair duct, 450/600 1500ig CanaUair duct, 450/6008801g CanaUair duct, 450/600 400/600 CanaUair duct, 450/400 15001g CanaUair duct, 450/400 1000lg CanaUair duct, 450/400 12001g Pieza-T/T-piece, 450/400 330/400 CanaUair duct, 330/400 15001g CanaUair duct, 330/40012001g CanaUair duct, 330/400 11001g Pieza-T~-piece, 330/400 300/400 Canal/air duct, 300/400 300/360

Peso neto kg

—

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

Krup p Ftkdertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas

Lista pieza Pos.

Sec.pos Lists pieza pieza No auelta

r=

I

30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania—

Comis. No.: 809~27 - Sulbhidl

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

1 1 1 1

I

Canal/air duct, {380/360 atww~o CanaUair duct, :“”,”. CanaUair duct, 360/3[60 ~anc,,_,_ J.... -An,-, au~r aucr .-.., -m !,, ti””,ti”w --,. ,....aUair Id. JOUI*U Can~. _- d ---., . Can#air ? . . . . .Amt . . .. 360/360

1

I I

I 1

I

1

!

~i

I 1

I1: i ++% I

+1

I I

1

1 1 ;

---- .“. “. A -v.,d [Canzdkiir

360/400 ,

I

It’bnallair -u. .=.

“360/400

,I

I,

It

111 I

)

Air+

-cnntm

.JvU1 .JuU

15001g 15001~ 150W9 4nnr , “ilg .1Uq A-.

1~Oo14 9

15001$ CanaUair duct *n)Ann 4+fifilcanaua~ duct, 360/400 150Mg Canf.Wair duct, 200/300 139019 I,--“,,

M“”.,

Cantidad etiquetas

1000ig 1000lg 9401g

11601( CantaUair duct; 360/360 10001! musir A 1 O(’j(jll Carw... -=,1A afmlq) -w,.. Can:’’-’‘--’ “a-’-” iwair auct, JIW660 15001! a~air duct, 360/400 11001~ ,--- .aUair duct, 360/400 11001! lCanal/air duct, 360/400 15001! Canal/air duct, 360/400 150011 Canal/air M, 360/40011001{

I

i 1 I

Denominaci6n SP/E .—

CanaMair duct, 300/360 Canahir duct, 300/360 Canal/air duct, 300/380 Curva de canaU air duct b~e, annncn #vu/u&?v

1 1 1 1 1 —.— 1 1 1

I

418

-—

Fecha —, de emiai6n: 01.07.1997

Piano numero

P~gina:

—

.—

t==

I

01,07.1997

Rev. Nr.:

—. Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] 30&3816/01 8 NLmero pedido-KF Proveedoc BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Lugar de entrega: Wltich Emisor:

Confeccionado:

—-

Peso neto kg

Fecha de dsponibiiidad embalaje

—.—

Otras (p.ej. Item Cliente)

[Krupp Fordertechnik

1?entro costes-KF i“mm -

F=

1,’,marn ~e(jkj04(F

Lista de piezas t Piezas sueltas

Confeccionado:

01.07.1997

Rev. Nr.: 84.078484 3006361

I

PAgina:

5/ 8

—

.—

6/01 8

I

Proveedc 1,,Aar Am

(

Sec.pos LBta pieza pieza No suelta

Lists pieza Pos.

J

Piano numero

Refarencia Cantid, ME pos.pedido de-a

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 _15 1

,

1 1

-

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas

Canal/air duct, 200/300 250/550 Canal/air duct, 300/200 250/550 Curva de canaVair duct bowe, 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300/200 5701g Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300/200 Curva de canal/air duct bowel 300/200 CanaUeir duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 1500tg Canal/air duct, 300/200 7001g Curva de canallair duct bowel 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 130019 Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Collar de protecci6n a la lluvia/ — rain protection 10001g Angulo /angle 50/50 1OOOlg Protecchh a la Iluvia - Brida de canal/ rain protection - air duct flange 10001g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aiaJaci6n/

Peso ❑eto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

I

lKrupP . . Fordertechnik

t

ILista de m~iezas / Piezas sueltas 1

lConfeccionado:

01.07.1997

P6aina:

1

618

I

]Rev. Nr.: flnntrn ““, ,”

“

rwI.+mc-UE “Ww,=a—,,,

! QA “T.”,

l17QA

I

“7 QA II

I

“-r

Ntimero pedido-KF ]30063616/01 8 Proveedoc BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Luaar de entreaa: WMch , I Fmi-r. -,, ,,-, . I 1

LRta pieza Pos.

I

I

T I

30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania

I

Sec.pos Lists pieza N“ _pieza suetta

I

I

Piano numero

I

,

I

+“-~–””-’]

!IICaeh= =-1!0

J ..~

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido ‘“ de-a

Denominaci6n SPIE—

1 r

1 1 1

Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 15001g Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 750ig Canal con aislaci6n/ Canal con aielaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aislaci6rd air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal con aislaci6rd air duct with isolation, 200/300 10OOlg Canal con aisJaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8001g Curva de canal con aietacibrd air duct bowe, with ~nl=fion. 200/300 Tt---:llJ------~f~ X 20 , UI [ IIIIU/SGI (SW, Md Tuerca/nut, M8 Arandela/slice, M8 ‘Casquillo roscadoflong nut, M8 Placa de carroceriahasher great, M8 Placa de absorci6n de vibraciones/ vibration absorber, M8 Grapas de sustentaci6n/ cramps for installation, M8 ,,.”v,

75n -“.

650 750 50 150 50 100

””,_

An UG

—Cantidad etiquetas

I

1 1 1 1

I

1

Comis. N“.: 809727- Sulbhidl

1

!

I

—

_____

andaiAn. G1lllUIUII.

n4 U1.

1

n7 4 IXJ7 ul .Iclal

Peso Fecha de neto kg d~ponibiiidad embalaje —

I !

1

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

Krupp Fordertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas

———..——

Confeccionado:

01.07.1997

PAgina:

718

Rev. Nr.: Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] 30063616/01 8 Numero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Afemania Lugar de entiega: Willich Emisor:

I Comis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl

— Fecha de emishh:

—.

Lista pieza Pos.

Piano ntimero

Referencia Cantid, ME pos.pedldo de-a 1

~––---”

1

17n . --

120 50m 12 500m 600 600 10 500 1200 100 600 20 50 20 20 50m+20m 20

20

Denominaci6n SPIE

I

Cantidad etiquetas

I

.Anal IIA Ahld Z - angle for duct installation, M8 Barra roscadalthread rod, M8 x 1000 Perfil-C para fijaci6n de canall C-profil for duct installation, 27 x 18 h4asa sellante/sealing compound Cinta sellante/sealind band Tomillo para chapalsheet screw, 4,2 x 13 Tomillo para chapalsheet screw, 4,2x 19 Estera de gomai vibration absorber for unit, 400 x 400 TomiUo/screw, Ml O x 20 Arandela/stice, Ml O Tomillo/screw, Ml O x 50 Tuerca/nut, Ml O Tomillo/screw, Ml 2 x 60 ArandelalsJice, Ml 2 Tuerca/nut, Ml 2 Anillo el&iico/spring washer, Ml 2 Perlif de frjaci6n para uni6n de brida/ cramps for flanges, SB20+SB30 Patas para perfil-C/feet for C-profile Tomillo/screw, M20 “.~-,..

Peso neto kg

I

-“-,”,

–

01.07,1997 I

I

I

Sec.pos LBta ieza N? pieza suetta

-

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje I

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

I

Krupp Fordertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas ——-

Centro ccrstes-KF 64.078484 [ 30063616/018 Numero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchieyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAtemania Lugar de entrega: Wi!lich Emisor:

Sec.pos Lista ieza N! pieza suelta

~-. Piano ntfimero

Lists pieza Pos.

I

I

I

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

;

I

I

I

I 4 ___ I

I

I

I Sel

3

I I

I

I

4 I ;

I

I

I

I

I

I

,

1

I

●

; 1

I

I

;

I

i

I

I

I

1

I

I

I

I

4

I

i

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas

Peso neto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

1

818

=1 Otros (p.ej. item Cliente)

I Per fii angular/angle profil, 50x 50x 5 Penfil angufar/angle profil, 100 x 50 x 5 n.. rw Wprofil, U100 Termostato/thermostate Agente retiigerantelre frigerating R22 ~--*-lLdlAUl -’-- .UNllp, n- -~r==fir/contactor-compressor IUUI

——-

-w-

IContactor-Ventilator/ ‘contactor-fan 1=-—-‘---–-:+-llA. wmrea uapezomaw dlt

BSK-Sonda fundible/fire damper-fusible link u Ie control de canal/air duct control sensor lVr#vula de “- eJ ‘-q)ansi6n t6rmica/expansive valve In-– ->––l>—.. aecaacwaryer Vdtvulalvalve EVR 6 v~lu, da/ualua .“ f+ 220V -,. ___ 1 . -..”,-.”, I C$Gllwl ‘A----

I I

I

Pdgina:

I

—-—

-nZulll

I

I

lComis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl

42m 20m

1

01.07.1997

1“=’”‘“’”,--~-— 1

lReferencialCan , -. ]tid. ME Pos.pedido de-a I

1 14kg *

Confeccionado: D,.., Al.-.

Presostato/pressosta te FL. LP/HP

-–am,,ri I1~--—--~-~I ermus~atu ae stwu, ,dad/safety thermostat

—

LISTA DE PIEZAS HEZAS SUELTAS

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas —.—

Krupp F&dertechnik

Confeccionado:

Pdgina:

01.07.1997

118

Rev. Nr.: Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAlemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:

Comis. N“,: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997

!

Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza N“ suelta

Lista pieza Pos.

Piano ntimero

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

\

3 1 1 1 2

—

1

!

1 3 1 3 8 2 3

1

-

Denominaci6n SP/E

Cantidad etiquetas

Peso neto kg

Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, ROCA ASA-I 5 Aparato resistencia electrica Dewi/ heater Dewi At)arato HVAC / Air handlirm unit VK 18 Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, Eureco 6 VX Supervision de filtro/difference Dessure switch for filter. EKM 1000 Superv.diferencia presi&/difference ~essure switch for ventilator, KS I OOOC2 Comtmerta antiincendio/ 1 fire damper, FK-K90, 357 x 357mm Compuerta antiincendio/ —..—— ——. fire damper, FK-K90, 400x 357mm — Compuerta de celoskd multi-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 357 x 357mm Compuerta de celosla/ mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 400 x 357mm Reja de ventilaci6n/ grilles, TR-DG, 625x 225mm Reia de ventilaci6n/ , gri~es, TR-DG, 425 x 125mm Reja protecci6n intemperie con compuerta sobrepresi6n/ weather-resistant Iouvres with multi-leaf dam~er. WG-KUL 2.600 x 345mm IReja’ de ventilaci6n/’ I arilles. TR-AG. 625 x 225mm

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

—

,

Krupp Fordertechnik

Lists de ——— piezas J Piezas sueltas

Con feccionado: Rev. Nr.:

&%tso costes-KF 84.078484 I Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, 47877 Wiliich Lugar de entrega: Willich — Emisor: ————— .—. —.— -.—— I t—-t--+”-i—-—--t–-–~-’-t-t---Sec,pos] Lista pieza Lista pieza Piano numero pieza N“ Pos. I welts I I I 1

115.

I 1

16.1

1

Fecha de emisitm: 01.07.1997

------—-”--—-”----

-

1

2405925

1

1

2405925

3

1

Denominacitm SPIE 1

IUni6n el&tica/ 1-,, . . -----ttexmle auct, wu x wumm Uni6n el&itica/ flewihlp ------ r+ d 3A(I Y ti75mm ,

-“”.

-: L-

I

I 17.1 17.2 18,1 18,2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6

2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925

218

Comis. No,: 809727- Otide

Referencia\Cantid.1 ME Pos.pedido I de-a I II 1

P@ina:

01.07.1997

-,

-

”

-,-......

I Cantidad etiquetas I I

Peso nefo kg

3 3 12m 3 1 3m 1 1 5

---11-:-

I

.-.,

dlmt

33A Y fW7mm ---

“--

A, .-b

-?A4

.

.

..”-..

..,,...

E49--

,

1

I

I

I

1

I

I

I

1

I

I

I I

+.—--.–+

I

~~

C61krvcrlruuut, I+ I x WI .X IIIII Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D1 OOmm Curva/bowe 90°, DIOOmm ------... .-,- .., -------. . ... -., ~1 Compuerta de esbangula~i~nlr~~l lrjn~ ~arnn~r ~omm -Tlzsmm T&o plegadolau duct hok, u Curva/bowe 90°, D125mm Protecci6n de manipulaci6rdgr ‘ab protection, 0125mm Fntrerrnscakxmnt=dirm

i

1

-1 A-U--I

\&nal/air “,,..

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

!

Iflexible duct, 750x 620mm I

Fecha de ] d~onibifidad I embalaie

DN1 OC ?mm

, I

I

Krupp Fordertechnik

L

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas

Con feccionado:

01.07.1997

Pdgina:

318

Rev. Nr.:

;Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I lNtimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:

_—. -—_. Comis. No.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisirh:

01.07.1997

—----~ Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza No suelta

Lista pieza Pos.

Piano numero

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

Cantidad etiquetas

Denominaci6n SP/E

Peso neto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad ambalaie

---~Y”” _,____,

‘—-—----

_,____

Otros (p,ej. Item Cliente)

a , I

,

I

I

—— I

I

I

1 Bm

1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

carlal con esquinas de union/ air duct flan{ ~es with caner connection —— Canal/air ducet, D 125/500 X 500 aI Curva de Cahaualr ‘-’’-:‘“~ct bowe 90°, 345 x 315 Canal/air due+ CfWVC u,, “U”,uoo 7oolg ,,- vu.,. UC A- ~~nal/air --duct bowe 90°, 600/600 c#ul Canal/alr duc Curva de car Canal/air duel, ~wm Canal/air dud. 450/6 W?!!l Canal/air duc 15oolcr Canal/air duc 450/600 15001g -. qm.uowu Arnlenm oouig e-n, Canal/air ducx, 1 Canal/air duct -., 4!501600 ------ -. 40016 --, 300 AcfilAnn .4=nnv.b .tiWWU I iMJIY Canal/air duel, 1 Canal/air duct 450/400 1000lrI

ltWlda de

—

I

I

)/400 la A,

!Jtiwrvwu

I

Icuulg

:t, 330/400

11Oolg ece, 330/400 300/400 -------------

1

1

Krum J–Pnn4.n WGIIUU

.n.+n.

bualctrnr

I

Fordertechnik

ILista de l)ieZaS / Piezas sueltas

lConfeccionado:

01.07.1997

WE

lQA 4170A Iu?. uluw

nA u-?

I

I 1

I

I

1

I

I

+-

.... —-

I

Numero pedido-KF 130063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:

Pacrina: 418

1

lRev. Nr.: I

I

Comis. N“.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997 1

Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza N“ suelta

Piano rirmero

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

-——~~-------”

[

1

1

1

I

I

I

I

L—— t

Lista pieza Pos.

,

‘~

1 –J—-–

1

I

Denominacidn SPIE

..-.

-

Canal/air ——. duct; 300/360

duct, 300/360

1

Curva de canal/ ——— air duct bowe, 300/360 Canal/a~r duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/a~ duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct. 360/360 Canal/air du~; 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct. 360/400 Canal/air duct; 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct. 360/400 ICanaUair duct: 360/400 Canal/air duct; 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct, 200/300

Fecha de disponibilidad embaiaje

Otros (p.ej. ttem Cliente)

I

I

lCanal/air duct, 300/360 10OOla lCanal/air

Peso neto kg

—–t~t-–--’~

--.

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Cantidad etiquetas

10OOi~

9401g

---’-I -----”

360/360 15001g 15001g 15001g 10OOlg 10OOlg — 11601a , 10001~ 10001g 15001g 11OOlg 1100lg —. ..— 15001a w 15001g 1100lg 15001a 15001a -----”~ 11001~ 15001g 1390ig

1

Krum

mm

I

Fordertechnik

I ‘Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I ‘Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Luger de entrega: WiMch Emisor:

Sec.pos Lista pieza J?!!ZZl suetta

No

Lists pieza Pos.

ILista de ~iezas / Piezas sueltas #_

—

Piano ntimero

—

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 15 1 1 1

Pagina:

5/8

—

—— Comis. N“.: 809727- Oxide ==-’=’=’’”=

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a

01.07.1997

Rev. Nr.:

— 30, D-47877 Willich/AJemania 1=:

lConfeccionado:

Fe*adJemisi6nol’071997

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas —

_—.

Canal/air duct, 2001300 250/550 — Canal/air duct, 3001200 250/550 Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300/200 Can;Uair duct, 300/200 57019 Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300~00 Curva de canaL/air duct bowe, 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300f100 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 7001g Curva~e canaUair duct bowe,~007200— Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 13001g CanaVair duct, 345/6002601g Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Collar de protecci6n a la Iluvia/ rain protection 1OOOlg Angulo tangle 50/501000lg Protecci6n a la Iluvia - Brida de canal/ rain protection - air duct flange 10OOIg Curva de canal con aislaci6n./ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Cufia de canal con aisIaci6n/ air duct h~ vAih isolaticm 200/300

Peso neto kg

Fecha de dsponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ejd Item Cliente)

Krupp F&dertechnik

Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas —

Con feccionado:

01.07.1997

Pagina:

618

Rev. Nr.: Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I Ndmero pedido-KF 3006361 6/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H .-M.-Schieyer-Str 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Wiilich Emisor: – T

-

Comis. N“.: 809727- Oxide —

——— —.— .....— ———Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997 1

Lists pieza N“

Sec.pos

pieza suetta I I

Lista pieza Pos. 1

Piano numero

I

Referencia Cantid. ME pos,pedido de-a I

{

___

—.

—..

-——.

1

I

I

1 1 1 1 I —.– 1 1 1 1 250 650 750 50 150 50 100

Fecha de disponibiiidad embalaje

Peso neto kg

.— .-

I

I

Cantidad etiquetas

Denominaci6n SP/E

Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 15001g Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 7501g -..-7-–--–. Canal con aislaci6n/ —-. .— Canal con aislaci6rd air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal con aislaci6rd air duct with isolation, 200/300 10OOlg Canal con aislaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8001g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Tomillo/screw, M8 x 20 Tuerca/nut, M8 Arandela/slice, M8 Casquillo roscadoflong nut, M8 Placa de carrocerhdwasher gre~, M8 Placa de absorci6n de vibraciones/ Ivibration absorber, M8 \Grapas de sustentaci6rd — ,

-

1

Otros (p.ej. ttem Cliente)

I

Lists de piezas I Piezas sueltas

Krupp Fordertechnik

Confeccionado:

01.07.1997

Pt@ina:

718

Rev. Nr.: Centro costes-KF 84.078484 ] Numero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAJemania Lugar de entiega: Willich Emisor: / I

*~ L

‘ListsPieza

Comis. No.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997

suetta ~

Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido _—. de-a

“—–F—

120

N“

Dsta Pi=a Pos.

Piano ntimero

Angulo

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas

Peso neto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Ctiente)

— doblel

Z - angle for duct installation, M8

20 20

Barra roscadahhread rod, M8 x 1000 Perfil-C para fijaci6n de canal/ C-profit for duct installation, 27x 18 Masa sellante/sealing compound Cinta sellante/sealind band Tornillo para chapa/sheet screw, 4,2x 13 Tomillo para chapa/sheet screw, 4,2 x 19 Estera de gomal vibration absorber for unit, 400 x 400 Tomillo/screw, M1O x 20 Arandela/slice, Ml O Tornillo/screw, Ml O x 50 Tuercahwrt, Ml O Tornillo/screw, M12 x 60 “” Aandela/sIice, Ml 2 Tuerca/nut, Ml 2 Anillo el/mtico/spring washer, Ml 2 Perfil de fiiacidn Dara uni6n de brida/ cramps fo; flanges, SB20+SB30 Patas para pertil-C/feet for C-profile Tornillo/screw, M20

70

Aranriela/slice

120 50m 12 500m 600 600 10

I I

500 1200 100 600 20 50 20 20 50m+20m

——

M20

—

lKruDt) Fordertechnik

lLista de DieZaS/ PieZaS SUehaS

L ~Centro costes-KF

lConfeccionado:

01.07.1997

,Paaina:

818

Rev. Nr.:

84.078484 ] Numero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H,-M.-Schleyer-Str Lugar de entrega: Wiliich Emisor: I

—. 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania

.—

‘“

1 Comis. N“.: 809727- Oxide T I ‘-–”--’ Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997

1

Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza No suelta

Lista pieza Pos.

Piano ntimero

ReferencialCantid. Pos.pedido de-a I 42m 20m 20m 1 14kg 2 2 1set 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ME

Denominaci6n SPIE

Cantidad etiquetas

Perfil angular/angle profil, 50x 50x 5 Perfil angular/angle profil, 100 x 50x 5 Perfil/profil, Lfl 00 Termostato/thermostate Agente refrigerante/refrigerating R22 Contactor.Compresor/contactor-compressor Contactor-Ventila dorlcontactor-fan Correa trapezoidal/bett 1 BSK-Sonda fundible/fire damper-fusible link Sensor de control de canal/air duct control sensor Wrlvula de expansi6n t&mica/expansive valve Secador/d~er VWn.da/vatve EVR 6 V4ivuIa/valve coil 220V Presostatolpressostate FL. LPIHP Termostato de seguridacilsafety thermostat

Peso neto kg

Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje

Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)

LISTA DE RECAMBIOS

-1-

REP. CANTIDAD 1 1

fl 1

1 1 1 1 1

2 1

1 1

1 1

TiPO/REFERENCIA

DENOMINATION Compresor Malefactor

de caja

de compresor Condensador Evaporator Ventilator Ventilator Motor Poles

de condensador de evaporator

de comprasor de compresor

Correa de motor de compresor Correa de transmission compresor

de

Guia de compresor Termostato de valvula Tobera para valvula Coiector de iiquido Valvula solenoide

ex. ex.

1

Serpentin soienoide

1 1 1

Secador Mirilla Presostato BP/AP Valvuia de recuperaaon

1

de vaivuia

TUBOS

2 1 2 4 3

0,8 3

0,25 1 1 1 1 1

6 1 1

Tubo de succion Tubo de descarga Tubo de iiquido Tubo reguiador Refrigerant Aceite Aislamiento de caja Cubeta de goteo Tubo de drenaje de condensacidn Imprimacion de cubierta Pintura bamiz de cubierta Filtro de evaporator Equipo eiectrim Elemento malefactor Termostato de sala Termostato de seguridad de caiefa~on

-2-

Recambios

para aparato de atemperado

Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

fl Compresor 1 Ventilator de evaporator 1 Rotor de ventilator con carcasa 1 Interrupter de altahaja presion 1 Secador 1 Termostato 1 Valvula de expansion termka 1 Ventilador-Motor-Condensador (14 kg) 2 Botellas de agente refrigerant

10

41. Aceite

?1 ?2 13

2 Esteras

POS.

Pos. POS.

Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.

Sala electrica:

para refrigeration 20 m3/rollo para motor de compresor para motor de ventiiador

filtrates

2 Contactores 2 Contacton?s Evaporator

Recambios

para unidad de ventilation

Pos. 14 Pos. 15 POS. 16 Pos. 17 POS. 18 Pos. 19

1 Ventiiador 1 Juego de rodamientos de bolas 1 Soporte de ventiiador 1 Soporte de motor 1 Juego de correas trapezoidales 1 Motor

Recambios

para unidad principai

Pos. 20 Pos. 21 Pos. 22 POS. 23 POS. 24 POS. 25

Presostato Unidad de contmi 1 Sensor de canai 1 Presostato diferenciai Fiitro 1 Presostato diferenoia Correas tipezoidaies 8 Juegos de fiitro de piacas a 12 Unidades Etapa de fiitro 8 Juegos de fiitm de boisiiios a 4 Unidades Etapa de filtro 3 3 Juegos de avisos de proteccih contra fuego (mercurio 72 %) 1 Microintenuptor (Finai de camera)

POS. 26 POS. 27 POS. 28

Central de techo:

de controi y eiktrka:

Pos.25 y 26: intervaio de recambio

= 3 mesas segun ei grado de suciedad

Ascensor

Ascensor

23.01.98

4.7

COLLAHUASI

Ascensor

23.01.98

Hoja en blanco

COLLAHUASI

7

I

Champion Elevators. h-u

CHAMPION

4 ELEVATORS

j

Modelo - US-2200-R

ASCENSOR DE PASAJEROS DE ACCIONAMIENTO POR PINON Y CREMALLERA

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO con Iista de piezas Krupp Fordertechnic Gmbh Planta de trituracion semimovil para Compafiia Minera Doria Ines de Colahuasi Ese de Iquique, Chile

No. de trabajo

97 S160, 97S161

No. de serie F08G1447,

P.O. Box 12869

A

Houston, Texas 77217

A

Phone:

F08G1448

i’13-64(k8500°

A

Fax: 713-640-8549

Indite

tematico

DESCRIPTION

..... ... .... ............... .................................. ...........................................................................i-i

ESPECIFICACIONES

........................................................................................ ......................................... ii-i

Especificaciones

SECCION

de torsion de pernos

ytornillos

de presion

...............................................................ii.ii

1- OPERACION

Controles

.............................................................................................................................................l.l

Operation

en la cabina ........................................................................................................................ 1-1

Operation

desde

Operation

de Ilamada

Operation

de emergencia

Interrupciones

SECCION

el techo ..................................... ...... ......................................................................... 1-1 remota

............................................................................................................. 1-2

................................................................................................................... 1-2

del suministro

electrico

................................................................................................ 1-3

2- MANTENIMIENTO

Reglas

de seguridad

Cronograma

................................................... .........................................................................2.l

de inspection

..................................................................................................................2.l

Cuadro

de inspection

..........................................................................................................................2.3

Cuadro

de lubrication

..........................................................................................................................2.5

Dispositivo

de seguridad

Mantenimientode Resolution Diagrama

- Inspection

de problems., de conexlones

.................................... .............................. ..............................................2.l3 electrical

3- PIEZAS

SECCION

4- PROCEDIMIENTOS

GARANTiAS

.............. ..................................................................2.7

Ios frenos .................................... .......... ..................................................................2.9

SECCION

Dispositivo

y pruebas

de seguridad

...................................................................................................2.l8

DE SERVICIO

parasobrevelocidad

TECNICO ........... .........................................................................4.l

—

Dcscripci(’)n - I’(lgil]a i - I

Description El :Isccnsol- (Ic pcrs[Jn:Il y Ill:ltcIIalcs US-2200” dc E]llsc[)]/Cl;:lr]lJ)io]l c!i un;i tlmd;I(l dc cl-ccci6n au(tinn:llllicll[(~, La po[cncia monotilsica (ie 3S0 voitios cs suminislracia a 10s t’renos poi mcdio cic un rcld cic con[roi en ]a c;l.ja ptincipal de con[rol. Los t’renos sc libcran con l:] potcncia enccnciida, sc fijarr con ia po[encia apagada (cn caso cic pdrdicia de polcncia, 10s t’renos se t’ijan autornhlicamcnte). La parada de emergencia es provista por un disposi[ivo CIC seguridad para sobrevclocidad quc se fija Zlu[onlfl[ic:lr]lcntc nl aicanzarsc la vclocitlad predeterminxhr.

H

It’ ,1 \

,Ircas cic dcscmlxrrco

F —xl____

Los interruptores tie enclavamierr[o de la compucl[a impiden e] movimicnto dc la cal)ina cuando ias compuertas csth abiertrrs.

“’per’’)’”

TORRE

!, -

L

&-—————Torrc

t\

i

+~o

_.’

CABINA

+

.._

(JAULA)

La cabina es la unidad de [ramspor[c (Jc cwga quc proporciona un rwin[o sc~ur~>para cl pcrwnal y/o }0s materials quc se dcsplazan Jcr[icalmcntc por la torrc. El movirnicnto vertical cs pro~islo por dos molorcs dc acclonamicnto con piironcs in[lcpcnciicnlcs quc sc enganchan cn ]a cremallcm dc la lorrc. La polcncia clectrica Int’i]sica cic 3S0 voltios y 50 Hz cs suministrada a ia cabinil pw ]Ilcdi(l LIclcabic rni)vii. Un transformador dc controi dc i [)()()VA suminiswr Ios ci]-cui[os (ICi]un]inacibn y control dc ia cabina, cic I I5 voitios y 60 Hz.

La torre es la estruc[urrr ver[ical a la CUQIcsth nfianzada Ia cabina. Las secciones de la torre se construycn CICacel-o es[ructural, dondc 10S micmbros vcr[ica]es propo]cionan una supcrficic plana con cojinctcs sobrc la CU:IIptIcIJc dcsplazarse la cabirra. Toclas Im secciones son intercambiables, con cxtrcrnos maquinados y suias dc alineac ion. Sc incluye una crcrnaliel-a dc cn:ranajcs maquinada cmpcrnacia cn posici6n cn cxla scccion de In [orre. En aca[amicn[o a Ios codi:os. cl sopor[e latcrnl cs provis[o por amarres horizontals de pared a in[ervalos qoc no (icben sobrepasar 10S[rcin[a (30) pies.

AREA m

DEsEMEIARcO

DE LA BASE

La ~rea dc dcscmbarco dc la base cs un firca con ccrco quc encierra la cabina y la torrc. Las Coillpttcrtas au[otrabarttcs impidcn quc cl pcrsonai entre al Area cuando ]a cabina no se cncucn[ra en c1 irca (ic dcscrnbarco. Los in[crrup[orcs dc la compucr[a impidcn ci n~ovimicnto de ]a cabin;t con ias compucrtas abiertas. LOS rcsor[cs cic amortiguamicnto partc de la tome CICbase.

para la cabina tornlan

La altura dcl (wca dc ticscmbarco dc 1:1base cs (1c 4S pu]gadas en c1 asccnsor US-2X)(). Sc ciebc provccr Ll[lil rrampa o pla[at’orma dc firca dc ticscmbarccr para pcrmil]] ci acc’cso a ia altura dci ir-ca dc cicscrn bar-co dc 48 pulgad as.

I’igina

i -2-

I)cscripci6n

f’llC(iC

b]l]](li~l>~liI C[l[l”:ld;l ;II nivcl ({c !;I pclldicntc pc)r

lllCdlo

dC und l“(JSil C](IC Cll UICll”il 1;1b:lbo[oncs pulsadores JOG UP (movimicn~o interrni[enlc hacia arriba) y JOG DOWNT(movimicnto in[crrnitente hacio ~bajo). Los bo[ones se DEBEN MANTENER presionados: de lLI contrario, la cabina se dc;cndrfi al sol[arsc e] bo[on. Al volver a la OPERACION EN LA CA BINA, cl in[erruptor OPERATE/STOP/DROP TEST dcbe vol~er a girarse a 1:] posici6n STOP. Cumxlo la cabina se encuenlra cn 10mod:lliclacldc opcr;wi(m dcsdc cl [cc11o.las pucr~as y compucrtas es~fin[rabadm conlinuamcrrte, NOTA: Al u[iliznr la csli)ci(jn dc con[rol (lcl Iccho para I;I inspcccir5n de segurida(f del dispositivo, consu]le Vcrilicaci6n dcl clispositivo dc squridad sin carga o Prucbu dc ciaida a plcna cargn (p~lginas 2-7 y 2-8). o

* I

@@

r

C.u

I

I

k. risH)”(// -3 ESTACION DE LLAMADA REMOT,~

DE

LLAMADA

- I’figina 1 -2

REMOTA

Las Ilanutdas pucdcn hwcl-se cn un firc:l (Ic dcscmbarco LICWIC una (Jc I:ISCs[i]cio[]cs dc Ilan]ada rcnm[;l (VC;IWla Figura I -3), El bo[bn STOP LIc10cswibrr princip:ll dc control (v6asc la Figura 1-1) dcbc cslar hacia afucra y sc debcn salisfaccr Ios c[lclal!:llllicll[os. L:]s !Iamadas sc rc:llilan cn un (uta Lk dcscmbarc{~ prcsionando cl bo(tin pulsador CALL (Ilanmda). El bmhn pulsador sc dcbc nmnlcncr Imcin adcn[rw basta que sc cnciendn la Iuz quc rcconoce la Ilnnmdfl. Iuz del bot6n pulsador sc apaga cum(fo la cabina Ilega al piso en cl cunl sc bizo la Ilamxfa, indicando que la misma se ha salisfccbo. La ciibin:l cntra cn pamsa clurantc dicz ( 10) segundos en un iirca LIcdcsembarco. Si no se abren las compuerlm c!entro LIclpcriodo de ticmpo de dicz ( I0) se:undos, la cabina puedc proccdcr a lfi siguienie ]Ianmda. La cabina no se movcrfi siemprc y cuando Ias compucr[as cst&r abiertas. La

OPERACION

DE

EMERGENCIA

Se actiw una alarrna audible en la base por medio del interrup[or de alnrma (ALARM) (Figura I -1). Al prcsionarse el interrup[or, sonarfr la alarm. El in[crrup[or sc man[ienc; la alarma se cunc-ela lirando cl inlcrruplor IIilci.t afucra. ILUMINACION

DE

EMERGENCIA

Un sis[cma dc iluminacion de emergencia prcrporciona In iluminaci6n de la cabina cn caso de p6rdicla clc suministro e16ctrico. Sc dispone aproximadamcnrc dc un minilmo CIC cfos (2) horas de iluminaci6n dcspu& de una inlel-iupcitin dcl suministro clectrico. NOTA: El circuito de alarma tambi~n exwae potcncia dc la batcria dul-ante la inwrupciim (IcI suminis[ro cldc[rico: por 10 tanto, un uso excesivo de] circuito dc alarma disminuirfi la cantidad dc ticmpo que permancccrfi cnccndida la ilumirmcion (Ic emcrgcncia. Duran[e la opcracion normal, la ba[cria sc manticne cargada y sc suministra potcncia a la Iimparo por mcdio clc un transt’ormador quc uliliza la polencia normal dc la cabina. La potencia de la bateria se encicndc au[on~iticamcntc si sc picrdc po[cncia. Sc propcrrciona un intcrrup[or Iuminoso ON-OFF (Figura I -1 ), cl cual sicmpre dcbcrfi apagarsc al bajarsc dc la cabina. NOTA: Si se apaga la po[cncia cx[crnamcntc con la li’mlpara cnccrrdida, cl suminis[ro de la batcria sc cnccnderfi au[omfi[icarncn[e, 10 quc causarfi una dcsg:ls[c de la ba[eria.

INTERRUPCIONES ELECTRICO

DEL SUMINISTRO

Scpmporcionaun frcn(lcclllril’[lg(~p:lr:t pcrmili]un dcsccnsocoi][]ola(lo(lc lacabinaencasodc unapcl-dida de po[cncia y de fallmcn c1 circuilo de ron[ml, El Ircno ccnlrit’ugo pcl-nlitc quc dcscicmk ia cabina a un:~ vclocidad cntrc la opcracion nol-mal y la vclocidml dc clispmodc disposilivodc seguridad. [’itrabajarl~~c:lbilln, girt la [:]pa SL)bl’C ]a pa]anca nl:l[]U:l]dc] i’rcno (u bicada deIl[10 (IC ]~ cabina, adhcrida a la pfircd - vcasc la Figura 1-4) has[:l su position abierta, y gire la palanca en scntido central-io a Ias lllanecill:ls dclrcloj. Lac:~bina descender5 alavcloci(la(l controlada por el t’rcno. La cabina puede de[cncl-sc cn cualquicr momcnto soltando la palanca del freno. Pam impcdir una acumulacibn cxccsiva de calor en cl frcno. baje la cabina en una scric dc ciclos de encendido-apagado. quince ( 15) se,gundos encendidos y sesenta (60) scyunclos apagado. iSiempre detengasc en c1 primer piso disponible! Observe que la leva puede lirarse, n~antcnicndo Ias puertas y

c(~mpucl[m bloqucadm c[)lumna siguicnlc).

PRECAUC1ON: Incluso si existc una interrui}citin de la potcncia, N’O salga del interior de la cabina n rntmos qi]e w bubicra empujado hacia atlentro c1 illtcrroptor S“1’01’ dc la Cstacion principal dc control (Figlira l-l). I)c 10 contr-ario, pueden causarsc ]esiones cn caso dc rwtaurnrse potcncia a la cabinn. INOTA ESPECIAL: La puerta de la cabin:) y Ias compuertas dcl firca de desembarco estin cnclavadas rnecfmica y cl+ctricamente. En caso de una inlcrrupci6n del surninistro electrico, ser(i nccesario ir 11:1s[2la parte superior cle la cabina y desactivar Ios pestillos tanto cn las compuer[as de la cabina como en la pucrta LIcl(wca dc desembarco (suponiendo que la cabina sc encuentra cn e] area de desembarco - vease la columns anterior). Una vez Iiberado el pestillo de la compucrta CICla cabina, Icvan[c la compucr[a. La pucrta dcl hrea dc desembarco se libera empujando manual rncnte el pcstillo a la posici6n de apertura.

n

LIBERAC1ON

Fi:llll]cnlo

bosc

:Ompllcll a(s) (IC 1:1

GIrL, la compucml

dc la Conlpt!clll

el bmzo de] in[cm]p[o[

y 10s

Immi]los de mootaje,

c Imyeclolna Funclonamierrto

elcctrico

El funcionamien[o

nolmlol cfcl in!emoplor

(Ic pamdas aulomi[icas funcionr.micn(o

de] inlcnuplol

dt Iimilc

cabioa eo e] fires de desemharco inkr]op[or

superior

enceml]clo

(POWER)

ningund

de k

c;ib Ina deberia Iilni[c

en si] posicibll

(Jirecciones. responder

solamcmc

I (IOS pIcs

el interrup[or

de la

mancra sigoicnle:

FINAL

pulsatdo

cl inferior

cncima

clel firca

LIMIT

con

la palirnca dcl

bacia ahnjo. La IUZ & LIMIT

en

OVERRIDE. flsccndcn[e

La

(L JP).El

de 10s (Jos inlcrroploucs (Jc cfcscmb;trco

coan

La

inferior.

o Ios com;~ndos en ninguna de Ias dirccciooes

FINAL

por nle(

El

y 10cabina no clcbc]-ia KsponclcI

al comando de nlovim]cn[o

poI

sc vcrifica

c ]!~fcrlor.

nmnualmcnlc

activadfl en IJ direcci6n

Pwsione c1 inlelrup[or

cabioo no de beria responder Rocf!llos (Ic ~oin -

sosleng

debcria cs[ar apagda

se encueno’a

prcsionarsc

final se verifica

inferior,

final supe]-ior se cOnlprucbn

la cfibina

CJClirrli[e de [raycc[oria

CII Ins itc:is de dcscrmbarco superior

hasl~

OVERRIDE.

I

Lobrlcocitin

Vcrifique

la lubric~ci on,

r,~Jlllclcs

Verifiquc

la exislcnc ia dc jucgo y ho]gora cxccsi\, os.

Reso]-[cs k

LOS ICsor[es (Je[xm esl~r

ablna

a una mala alinencion. anlO]tigtl ;\lllietllo

de Ifi

Vcrifique

viswdmcnle.

Verifique

visunlmcn!e

Veritique

\,isualmcnlc.

ct~locados y alincados \ cr[!cdlmentc

.abina Disposllivo

dc

COOJ11OIO (JCguia (fCl

Ik

in>pcccion

v]so:l]

Rccci(~ilclcl~lisp~}sl[i\ c)~lcseguricl:\ clcc]]~s[:i{lc la complobaci(~n dc Iosc]clncnlos siguicnlcs: Scllo - Vcrl[lque el alamb]-t dcl SCIIOy cl scllo dc plonm. El alambl-c debe scr continuo y no quebraclo, a [ravds CIC loscabcz:lles dclt~stc>lnill( ~sclc Ia [apa. Pernos de montaje - Vcrit’iquc la torsion en 10s pc]mos de montajc. Apriete a 190 pies-lb de torsi6n. Piii60 - Revise el piii6n pwa dctectar dientes daiia(los. Revise e] anillo suje[aclor de rclencion para cerciorarsc de que est6 en su ranura, manlcnicncfo al piiibn en position. SCIIO de fecha - Verifique la Fccha de rccambio cn cl dispositivo de se,gul-idad. INOTA: El dispositivo dc seguridad para sobrevclocidxl dcbe reemplazarse cada tres aiios con una unidad ccrtificacla inspeccionada cn t’fibrica. Consulte PROCEDIMIENTOS DE SERVICIO - REEMPLAZO DEL DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD (pAgina 4-1 ) para conocer e] procedimiento de rccambio. INSPECTION

FUNCIONAL

Prueba de seguridatl sin carga Esta prueba cons[a dc disporar manualrncnte el dispositivo dc seguriciacl mientras el montacmgas esth en funcionamicnto. Es[a prueba vcrifica la operation del frcno y del interrupter dc se:uridzd. La prucba de scguriclad sin carga puede reemplazar la prueb:l de sc:uridad a plena carga una vcz al silo, de :icueKIo con la INSPECTION SEMI ANUAL (v6asc la pigina 2-3). Esta prucba sc ]-caliza sin carga en la cabina, de la mancra siguicn[e (no sc debt eliminar el frcno centrifuge para cs[as prucbas): r

\

BOTOX

DE

DISP,\RO REG( 1.\[>OR

- J’iigina 2 - 7

Sc rccomicnda la par1icipaui6n dc dos personas para cs[a prucba, un opcrado]” dc monlaca]”gas y a]guicn cn la partc superior dc la c:lbina para opcrar cl bo[bn dc disparo regulfldol-. PRECAUC1ON: Todos Ios trabajadores en cl tccho dcben pcrmancccr cotnplctamente dcntro de Ios pasamanos cuanclo la cabina csld cl) movimicnto.

2. El opcrador dcl montacargas dcbe u[ilizar la cs[acion de control dcl tccbo (v6asc la p~!ginn I-2) cn la p:lrtc superior dc la cabina para operar c1 asccnsor. PRECAUTION: Mantenga 10Sarticulos, tales como las herramicntas u otras pcrtencncias en e] techo, Iejos de la abertura. 3. Opl-ima c1 boton DOWN en el estacion de control dc techo, y rnan[engalo presionado. 4. Micntras la cabina sc muevc hacia abajo, oprirne firrncmcnte el botbn dc disparo reg,ulador (vcasc la Figura 2-6) para aplicar e] dispositivo de seguridad para sobrevelocidad. La cabina debt de[enerse dcn[ro de 10s cinco (5) pies o menos. NOTA: El boton de disparo debe moverse libl-crnente. Debcril rcvismse cualquier cvidencia de atascamicnto. 5. Eleve la cabina aproximadamente cinco (5) pies al terminal la prucba parea restaurar automa[icamenlc e] disposi[ivo cie sc~uridad para sobrevcloci(fad. Una accibn de rest fiuro corrects se evidcncia por mcdio de una sc]-ic dc sonidos de chasquiclos al subir la cabinn. Los “cbasquidos” son causados pm la acci6n dc triquc[eo del mccanismo de rcstauro dc scguriclad. Cuando se deticnc el chasquido, se rcstaura el dispositivo de seguridad. PRIZCAUCION: Si no se escuchan Ios chasquidos, el dispositivo cs dcfectuoso y tleber5 scr recrnplazado. Prueba

(Jc scguridacl

a plena carga

Esta prucba consta dc cmgar c1 montacargas hasta su valor nominal y pcrrnitir que caiga libremente. Cuando la cabina alcanza la vclocidad dc disparo prcviamentc establccida, se ponc cn funcionamicrtto cl f’reno, dc[cnicndo la cabina. Esta prucba verifica la vclocidad dc disparo y la distancia dc dctcncibn. Es[a prucba debt set- rcalizacla o supcrvisada por un rcprcsentan[c ccl-lificack) por la compafiia y dcberfi ser obscrvada por un inspcclor quc represcn[c la autoridad de acatamicn[o legal.

-——’ —.

Figl//u 2-6 DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD SOBREVELOCIDAD

!

PARA

prucba dc L’iii(ld a p!cnd C: II”:: I cn c1 instalacion initial, cad:] ic.z qNc sc hag:) una nl(xlillcacion impor[an[c, c:kl:t vcz quc sc baya lroto cl SCIIOdcl disposi[ivo de scguritlad, cada vcz quc sc haya rccmplazado el clispositivil dc scguridad y dc acucl-do con la INSPECC1ON SEMI ANUAL (\L:Isc 10pfigina 2-3).

Sc rcquicrc mon)cn[o

una

dc la

Esla prucba sc realiza (Icsdc la [icrm usando la csmcion de control dcl [echo. Consultc la Figura I-2. 1. Rc[ilc el frcno ccntrifugo (vdasc la Figura 2-7) de la mancra siguiente: Girt Ios tomillos LIcpresi6n monwtos latcralmen[c dos \’LIcllas complctas en la dircccion hexagonal

npropiada de Y2”.

para

quitarlos,

y retire

e] perno

Debt qui[a[-sc cl rotor dcl freno del

Cjc. NOTA: La cabina no Ilegwi n la vclocidad de disparo de scguridad del regulador a mcnos que sc quite el freno ccntrifugo. 2. Con la cabina en la base, abra el recinto electrico pl-incipal e inscrte la nave de la prucba de caida (cmi!ida solamentc al reprcscntante certificado por la con]pafiia) en el intenuptor de IIavc OPERATWTEST. Girt cl intcrruptor a la position TEST. NOTA: Con el in[crruptor OPERATE/TEST cn la posicihn TEST, la cabina no rcspondcri a 10S conlarrdos de wiba-abajo desdc su in[erior. 3. Coloque un peso, equivalcnte a la capacidacl nominal LIcla cabina, sim6tricanlcn{e cn cl piso (un cuatro de 1:1 carga nominal clistribuida cn cada cuarta parte). 4. El intcrruptor STOP dc la cstaci6n principal de control dcbc cstar oprimido y cl intcmup[or DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE cn al cstacion dc con[rol clcl [ucho (Figura 1-2) dcbe cslar girado a ia posici6n OPERATE. 5. Usanclo la cstaci6n de control dcl tccho desrle e] SUCIO. conduzca la cabina hasta una altura CICvcintc (20) pies. PR12CAUCIOIS: Cerci6rese de quc c1 cable conectado a la cstaci6n clc control de] techo no tenga obstrucciones. 6. Girt cl intcrruptor DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE a la posici6n DROP TEST. Dicho in[cmup[or dcbcrfi man[cncrsc cn csta posici(’m, pucs[o quc la cabina se dctcndrfi al sonar c1 in!crruplor. 7. La cabina cam-i Iibrcmcn[c, acclcrindosc hasta Ilcgar a la vclocidad LIcdisparo (:~proxill~tld:inlcnlc cinco (5) pies).

Fi,gura 2-7 FRENO Centrifuge

s. El disparo CICIdisposi[ivo dc scguridad se evidcncia por mcdio de un sonido de golpeteo de la carga. La cabina dcbcr{l frcnarse hasla de[cncrse en menos de cinco (5) pies adicionalcs. 9. Si cl dispositivo dc seguridad no se dispwa dcspuds dc quc la cabina sc ha dcsplazado diez (10) pies, sueltc c1 iolcrrup[or DROP TEST. La cabina se deterx.hi. PRECAUC1ON Si c1 dispositivo de seguridad no Iogra tlctcner la cabina dcntro de la distancia cspccificada, dicho dispositivo CS(5 tfefectuoso y debcrh ser rccmplazado o rcparado por un represcntantc autorizado dc Champion Elcvntors, Inc. La opcraci6u de la cabina se consi(lcra illsegura. 10. Para restaurar el disposi[ivo dc seguridad, girt cl in[crrup[or DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE ktsta la position OPERATE y conduzca la cabina hacia arriba :Iproxilnad:ll]]enlc dicz ( IO) pies. Una acci6n dc rcstauro corrccta sc cvidcncia por mcdio dc una scric cic sonidos CICch:~squidos al subir la cabina. Los “chasquidos” son causados por la accit% dc lriquc[co lIc I mccanismo dc rcslauro dc scguridad. Cuando sc dc[icnc c1 chasquido. sc rcs[aum cl disposi[ii, o dc scgurida(l. I’llECAUCl ON: Si no sc cscuchan IOSchasquicfos, cl dispositivo cs cfcfectuoso y dcber6 ser rccrnplamdo o rcparado por un rcprcscntante autorizado dc Champion Elevators, Inc. La operaci6n dc la cahina se consitlcra insegura.

l’rueba de scguridad

a plena carga (continl]:lcitin)

I 1.L:I pmcba ya sc ha con~plc[ado. fJajc la cabina h;ls[ii Ii] bwc y coloquc la cs[aci(~n (Ic con[ro] dcl [c~bo nucv~mcn[c sobre 10Sriclcs dc pro[eccion con cl inlcrrupwr DROP TESTiS1’OP/OPERATE cn la posiclbn STOP. a arrnar cl t’rcn(~ccn[[ifu:o en cl ejc. Rccmplace c1 perno dc Y:”-cn el extrcmo dcl ejc y apricte 10s Iornillos dc pl-csi6n montados I:l[cl-a]nlcn[c pal-a lijar c1 ro[or.

I ?. Vuclva

I 3. VUC]va

a co]ocar

e]

inlc]mtp[or

cic

IIavc

OPERATE/TEST en cl rccin[o eldc[rico principal en la posici6n OPERATE y rc[ilc la Ilove. La cabina ya CS1{I lists para la operation EN LA CABINA. NOTA: No romps cl SCIIOdcl dispositivo de seguridad. No conliene piezas rcpal-ablcs por cl usua]-io en su intcrio]. MANTENIMIENTO

DE

LOS

FRENOS

El frcno es un freno de disco Iibcmdo electromagneticamen[e, fijado pol resortes, que contienc dos discos de friccion giratonos. conclucidos por un cubo morr[ado al eje de] motor, El tlcno sc ajusta .automiticamente para el dcsgaste de] disco de fricci6n. La scparaci6n de aire clel solcnoide se ajusta en fiibrica y norrnalmente no requiere lrcajustc incluso al cambiar Ios discos de friccion. Un cm brayuc dc rcsor[c bobinado pcrmile corregir autornfiticanlcntc la scparacidn (Ic aire del solenoide para compensal- por cl desgas[c por friccion cic la expansi6n normal. No se dcbc rnodificar e] valor cs[ablccido en fiibrica dcl pa] mrso[’ dc ]OSfrenos de ajus[c automhtico, PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSTALACION (Veasc la Figtra 2-8) 1. Dcsconecte la palanca dc Iibcracibn manual. Dcstornillc y quite Ias [ucrcas del alojamicnlo ( 1) y cl alojamicn[o mismo (2). 2. Oprirna el Lmbo!o LIclsolcnoidc (2, Figura 2-9) y itclo al bastidor para bloqucar cl mccanisnm dcl freno cn la posici6n dc Iiberacion manuiil. 3. Dcsconcctc Ios cables dc dcl-ivaci6n dcl bobin~ldo dcl solcnoiclc (1 5) y rc[irc Imlo cl conjurtto Licla placa dc ilpoyo (5) dcslornillando y quilando 10s [wnillos (3) y 1;1s arandclas dc pl-csitin (4).

4, RCI!K Iii plwa LIcprcsion (6), 10Sdiscx>s dc !’riccibn (7). c1 d]sco cs[acionario (8) y cl cubo (9). \OTA: Los frcnos mon[a~ios vcl-ticalmcn[c disponcn (1c pilwdol”cs cspccialcs quc guian 10s rcsorlcs cspaci:ltl[)ws >, cn algun(ls cases, dc arandelas dc rcs(w[c. Observe la sccucncio codificwla con colorcs dc 10s rcsol-lcs y 1:1 ubicacioll dc las al-anclclas, sl SCulilizan. 5. Concctc la placa Iinnl ( 12) a la cara dc Inonlajc de] motor uli]izando [orni]]os dc cabczn hucca (]as cabczm cic Ios mismos no LIcbcn sobresalir po]- cncima dc la cola dc (ricci6n). 6, Coloque cl cubo (9) y la nave cn posici6n sobrc cl cje dc motor, y apric[e con firmeza ambos tornillos cic tornillos de f’ijacion ( 10, consultc Ios pares torsorcs de asen[amicnto recomendados por cl fabric an[c). El cubo es[a correctamcnte colocado cuando sobresalc m~is fill~ de la cara dcl rlltimo disco C!Cfricci6n entre 1/32 cie pulgada y I/16 de pu]@a, No cnsamblc IOSresortes vet”ticales de rnontaje al tomar Ias rne(iiciones de la position dcl cube. En algunas aplicaciones (particularmcnte en la posici6n \,crtical), se recomicncla perforar un hoyuelo para el tornillo de fijacion cn el eje. 7. Vuelvfi a armar 10S discos de friccion (7), c1 disco cstacionario (8) y la placa dc presion (6) cn la sccucncia > position corrcctas. Si cl freno se monta vcr[icalmcnte, vuelva a armar 10s rcsortes y espaciadores cn la sccuencia . .. y postcion corrcctas. NOTA: Los discos de fricci6n (7) deben tencr la libcrlad (Jc dcslizarsc sobrc cl cubo (9), micn[ras quc IOSdiscos estacionarios (S) y la placa dc presi6n dcbcn Icncr la Iibertad de dcslizarse sobrc la placa final (12). En el caso de frcnos montados vcrlicalmen[c, comprima cl cmpaquc para cerciorarse de quc IOScomponents se desliccn con Iibcrtad sobrc Ios pasadorcs. Si IOSrcsortes NO vuelven a los componcntes, es posible que 10S pasadorcs es[tln doblados y que sc IOSdcba enderczar. 8. Mon[c c1 conjun[o de la placa dc apoyo (5) a la placa final (12) utilizzmdo [ornillos 93) y arandclas de presi6n (4), Inscrlc 10s [ornillos dc mancra uniforme. NOTA: Si cl Lmbolo (Jc1solcnoiclc no cstaba oscgurado en la posicith dc Iibcracion manual (consul[e e] paso 7) y ha permitido cl sobrcajus[c dcl mccanismo, sc 10 deberi I-cstablcccr. En cstc case, In garymta de] brazo dc palanca (~. Figura 2- 10) cstarfi Ccrca o tocando ]OSdicn[cs dc piiibn (2. Figura 2- 10). Atloje cl lornillo dcl rcsortc dc prcsi6n (4, Figura 2- 10) basta quc c1 rcsol”tc dc pl”csibn (5. Figura 2- 10) cskl Iibrc, mon[c cl conjunlo dc la placa LIc ;Ipoyo :1 la placo final y \ILICIV;La aprc[aI- cl [ornillo dc rc.sor[c (4, Fig,ura 2- 10). NO APRIETE DEMASIADO.

l%:ina

2- 10- \lailltcl]illlicllltJ

CONJUNTO

Fi$ur(] 2-8 COMPLETO

9. Lcvante manualmentc c1 cmbolo dcl solcnoidc a su wiycctoria mixima y su~llclo. Complelc Ias concxioncs el@ctricas. Oprima el Llnbo!o dcl solcnoidc manualmcn[c y pcl-mila queseenganche. Rcpitacslc l]r~>cesol’ariasvcccs para fijar la separation dc airc cn cl solenoicle. En cl caso de frcnos montados ver[icalmcn[c, suje[e la ar[iculacion del solcnoide (7, Figura 2- 10) para man[cner al embolo cn una posici6n horizontal libl-c y mudj’alohaciocl marrodcl solcnoidc (5, Figura2-9) hmtascn[irsc ]aprcsibndcl rcsortc. Sujete la ar[iculaci6n dc] solcnoidc firmcmcnlc cn cs[aposicion ymidala scparaciondc ailccntrccl cmbolo del solcnoide (2, Figura 2-9) y cl marco dc] solenoiclc (5, Figura 2-9). Consulte la sccci6n MANTENIMIENTO DE AJUSTE AUTOMATIC pma dctcrminar la separaci6n corrcctn. Verifique la separacibn sujet:ln(lonllel’:lll)cn[c e] cm bolodc acuerdo con las insumccioncs. lo.Vuclv3a ins[alarel ;lloj:illlicnto( 2)al; \plac:lfin:ll (1 2). Vue]va a instalar 12s tucrcas dc alojamicnto (1) y vuclva

a conectar la libcraci6n manual,

CIJIDADO: No haga funcionar c1 nlotor con cl frcno en la posici6n de libcraci6n manual. Sirve solamcnte pnra cl mol’imiento manual de cnwygencia de la carga conducida, y no como rccmplazo de una libcraci6n cl~ctrica completa. REEMPLAZO DE LA BOBINA (vJasc la Fi:ura 2-9) 1. Desencrgicc

y dcsconcclc

la bobina (6) dcl cirwi[o.

2. Rc[ire Ios tornillos dc mtmtajc y Ias arandclas dc cicwc (7) y tire de] marco del w)lcnoide (5) y dc la bobina (6) para I-etirarlos dcl nticlco n16vil (2).

DEL FRENO

QQ

Figura 2-9

CONJUNTO

DE LA BOBINA

3. Retire cl tornillo dc guia de] nbcleo m6vil (1) y ambas guias dcl cnlbolo (4). Revise Ias guias dcl nticlco n]6vil para dcterminar cl dcsgastc y reempl~celm en caso de scr nccesario. 4. Deslicc la bobina Iatcralmentc de] marco (si fucra ncccsario, golpcc Iigcramcnte con un martillo suave). Si se ha qucmaclo la bobina antigua, ccrci6rcsc dc habcr eliminado todo cl material extraiio CICIconjun[o del solcnoidc. 5. lnstalc la bobina nucva cn la n~isma posicitin rclativa quc la bobin:l an[igua, siguicndo Ios paws an[criorcs cn orden invcrso. 6. Sig,a c1 pmo 9 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO INSTALACION.

DE

jYlailltelli[llicllt(J - I’figilla 2 - 11 RENOVATION FRICCION

DE LOS REVESTIMIENTOS

DE

1. Dcscncrgice la bobina (Icl w)lcnoide y siga Ios pasos DE INSTALACION, a 4 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO ~cl”~l(~rhndosc dc dcs~ol]~~l.11” )os bi]L)s de] LX)lldUC[[)l” la bobina.

1

Llc

3. En LaSO(Ic dCS;IpWCCCtla wparaci6n dc airc, cs posibk quc sc haya fiplicado accilc LI o[ro lubric:lntc a la palanca dcl solcnoiclc y al conjon[o dc piilon (2). RCIIIC c1 conjunto dc la placa dc apoyo. Aflojc c1 [ornillo dc rcsoi”lc CICprcsibn (4) hasla qoc e] resorlc dc prcsi(~n (5) qucde Iibre. Retire c1 pasador dc cho\>cI:) dc la palanca del solcnoidc y el anillo de re[cncibn LIcl pasador dc pivote. Observe la ubicaci6n dc la arandc]a cspaciadorfi, cn caso LIC habcrsc usado, y ernpujc c1 pasador & pivotc hac Ia afucra para Iiberar cl conjunto afcctado. Rc~ire e] anillo de retenci6n del piii6n y dcsiumelo. Limpie Ias piczas comple[amente en un solvcnte Iimpio que no dcjc unn pclicula. Seque todas las piczas cornplctamente y vue]va a nrmar. cercibrcsc dc quc el resorte dc arrollamien[o cst~ aprctxlo con[ra la cara lateral de la palanca de] solenoidc, y que e] cx[remo de la ultima vuelta toquc (sin prccarga) c1 topc protuberance cuadmdo de la palanca del solcnoide. Vuelva a armar cn ordcn invcrso. No vLIc]va a apretar e] torni]lo dc] rcsortc de presion (4) hasta quc e] conjunto de la placa dc apoyo estd montado cn la placa final. Consu]lc 10s pasos 8 y 9 de] PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSTALACION para complctm c1 m-made.

2. Sign cl paso 7 del PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSI’ALACION, rccmplazando IOSan[iguos discos dc l’ricci6n, Para asc:urar la opcraci6n corrects de frcno, ccrci(’)resc de quc 10s discos dc fl-icci6n se dcsliccn con Iibcr[ad, pel-o no (femasiado Soc]tosl sobrc c] cube. 3. Siga Ios pasos 8 a 10 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO lNSTALACION. MANTENIMIENTO DEL AJUSTE (Vcasc la Figura 2-10)

DE

AUTOMATIC

Dado quc e] freno dc ajuste ao[ornfi[ico se ajus[a para tener cn cuenta e] desgaste de] disco LIcfriccion, cl mantcnimien~o requerido cs minimo. El solenoide se ajus[a cn fibrica con una separaci6n LIcairc de 13/16“ a 15/16”, y no requierc restauro, incluso al carnbiar de discos de friccion.. La separation se dctermina por la position de] topc CICI resorte de arrollamiento ( 10). Dcbido al “desgaste initial” de las piezas, la separaciim opera[iva normal es de 13/16° a 15/16”. En caso de que csto cambie, siga 10S pasos cnumerados en la pi~ina siguiente:

4.

Vcrifiquc la condici6n y posicionamicn[o del piiibn (par~e de] conjunto dc la palanca de] solenoide - 2) y la crcmallera (partc clel conjunlo de] brazo de palanca - 3), Reemplacc las piczas scgtin considere neccsario, con conjuntos complctos.

1. Si IOStornillos de tope (1 1) se han aflojado y reaprctado, es posible quc la separacibn LIcairc rcquiera res[auro. La separacibn se mide entre superficies casantes de] nucleo rn(wil (2, Figura 2-9) y e] marco del solenoide (5. Figura 2-9), y se puede aumen[ar levantando Iigeramcnle e] [ope del resorte de m-rollamiento ( 10) o disminuir bajfindolo ligeramcntc. No olvidc volver a aprc[ar e] tomillo de tope (1 1). Manualmente Ievante c1 n(lclco mbvil hasta la n~~xin~:i distancia dc desplazamicn[o y pcrmita que se engancbc. Repita esto varias vcces. y lucgo vuelva a comprobar la scparacion de airc (consultc el paso 9 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO DE lNSTALACION). 2. El extrcmo macizo dcl rcsortc (fc arrollamicn[o (partc del conjunto de la palanca del solcnoidc - 2) debt estar dcbajo del tope del rcso]tc dc arrollamicnto ( 10), dcbicndo conectarse con CSICtil~in~o, cuando sc Ievarrla manoalmcntc la pnlanca dc solcnoidc (2). Si el tope cs[~ doblado hacia afuera. pcrmiticndo quc c1 cxtrcmo n]acizo 10 past pm alto. \Llclva a Lloblarlo hmta la posici6n cncuadrncla, {Irmclo col”l-cclamcnte y rcslaLII”c la scparacibn de airc dc wlcnoidc dc acuerdo con las ins[rucciones del p(ural’b 1. Considcrc c1 reernplazo LIc las piczas daiiadas.

CONJUNI-O

Fi,q/frd2-/0 DE LA PLACA DE APOYO

P5gina 2-12-

Nlailltcllilllicllt{)

RESOLUTION

DE PROBLEMAS

Los prtlblcnlas mecfinicos ~cncralmcntc vicncn acompai iados dc sonidos (~l“ll~[-acic)ncsinusualcs. NO IGNORE ESTAS SE~ALES DE ADVERTENCIA TEIMPRANA. En la mayoria de IOSCMOS,Ios problcnlas mccinicos son simplcs y pucdcn rcpararsc ficilnlcntc. Una :Ilcncibn opor[una puccie ciilar L1I1O PtIIWl~ por :lvcri~l y rcducir c] l“icsgo de Una Siluacibn pc]igrosa Cn c! fL]lul”o. Encuen[l-c cl origcn dc cualquicr problcma y haga 1:]s rcparacioncs nccewtrias. Algunos de IOSproblemas mccinicos tipicos quc pucdcn encontrarse sc cnumcran a con[inuaci6n:

●

Si cl t’rcno murmurs, c1 solcnoidc tira hncia adcntro Icntarncntc o la bobina se c]ucma, revise 10 si:uicnte: PRECAUTION: Nunca energice la bobina con el alojarniento abierto, a menos que exista una attntisfera no explosiva en el rnotncnto de la prucba. ●

FRENOS ●

PRECAUTION: Cerci6rcse dc quc la cabina cst~ tljada de manera segura a la torrc o cst6 descansan(lo sobre 10s resorte de amortiguamiento, antes de tratar de realizar cualquier tipo de rcparaci6n cn e] freno. La cabina se caer% si se suelta el freno. Un freno que se resbala vicne indicado POT’dcsl izamicn~os inusualmente prolongados al aplicarse el freno. Si el t’rcno no se cictiene corrcctamen[e o se sobrecalienta, revise 10 siguiente:

9 ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

~La liberacibn manual CS[Aapagada y el n~o[or cstfi encrgizado? Los discos de fl-icci6n pucdcn estar gastados excesivamen[e, quemmlos o rotos. El cubo puede baberse soltado y dcsplazado cn c1 ejc. ~El cubo estii Iimpio y Ios discos sc dcslizan con libcrtad? {,Los discos estacionarios sc cieslizan librcmcntc cn la placa final o es[fut alabcados? ~,La placa de presi6n es[fi instalacia cn la position corrccta y se clesliza librcrncnte en la placa final? ~Los resortes cst~n colwados cn el cmpaquc dcl disco? El rcsorte de presion pucdc cs[ar mal arm;do o roto. ~Sc ha ajustado correclamcnlc la scparaci(m dc airc dc solenoide (consulte MANTENIMIENTO DEL FRENO - Mm-itenimicnto dcl ajustc automitico)? El eslabon~micn[o dcl solcnoiclc dcbe movcrsc con Iibcr[ad (la prcsibn aprminlad:l cn cl nticlco mbvil has[a cl nticlco mhvit dcl asicnlo dcl marco dcbc scr LIc3 a 12 Iibras). El topc dc la palanca dcl solcnoidc (9, Fi~ul-a 2-9) dcbc cstar en p&ici6n cn la placa dc apoyo. ~,Es corrccto cl suministro dc vol[ajc cn la bobirra? Examine c1 rele del frcn[iprueba de caida (consulte c1 diagrama dc cablcado, pilgina 2- 17) y dc[cl-rninc si CS[Ldefccluoso.

Si cl ticmpo de parfid:l cs de mis dc dos scyun(ios (rcgla :cnctal), cotnprucbc la carga cn la cabina, la cual no (icbcr~l sobrcpasar la capacidad nominal cic la cabina.

●

●

●

El suministro de voltaje en la bobina comparado con e] valor nominal dc la bobina. ~La scparacion de aire de] solcnoide es exccsiva? (Consuitc MANTENIMIENTO DE FRENO Mantcnimiento de] ajuste automfitico). Es posiblc que est6n rotas las bobinas auxiliarcs. Las :uias de] nticleo movi] pueclen cstar exccsivarncnte gastadas. ~El nticlco movil de] solenoicic se rnueve sobre Ias larninficioncs del rnarco del solcnoi(ic? Es posible que est~n cxcesivamente gastacios cl marco del solenoidc y c1 nticlco m6vil. ~,Estfi sucio e] solcnoide? Es posiblc que sc hayan soltado IOStornillos cic montajc (ic solcnoide, causando quc sc desplacc c] rnarco y que el nticleo m6vil sc asiente de manera incorrccta. El cslabonarniento de solcnoide dcbe moversc con libertmi (la pl-csi6n aproximada cn cl nticlco movi] al nticlco mhvil dcl asiento en c1 macro dcbe ser de. 3 a 12 libras). Es posible quc sc cst6n atascon(lo IOSengrannjcs del sector y ios dicntcs (IcI piii6n dcbido a un dcs:as[c exccsivo de IOSdicntcs. Caida dc vol[aje cxccsiva a] arrancarse c1 motor. Revise c1 tamaiio dcl cable dc 10Shilos conductors hasta la caja dc cortacircuitos dc la base (intcrrup~oldc dcsconcxi6n).

COJINETES

ENGANCHADOS

(CONGELADOS)

Los cojinctcs cnganchados gcneralmcnic caL]san un ruido considerable y son fficiics dc cncon[rar. En algunos casms. c1 lrodi]lo pucdc tcrminar con un punto piano cicbido al frotamicn[o contra la pa[a dc la torrc. En CSIOS cases, cicber;l rccmplazwsc cl conjunto clcl cojinc[c (icl r{xiil]o.

— NIainlenin]ic]lio

DISPAROS FALSOS SEGURIDAD)

(DISPOSITIVO

DE

El clisposltiv~) dc SC~Urid;d ~uCdC CSla~ son)ctido a dispararsc [lc:lsl(lll:lll]lcnlc (ponicndolo cn fullci[>l];llllicntc>) dcbido a jun[;ls dc!’cctuosas dc Iii torrc (plmtubcrarwias cn la l~lrrc) o cn IOScases cn quc cl ICSOI-[C rcgulador CSIC Llcbilitado. Si c1 disposi[lvo dc scguridod sc dispara trccucnten]cntc cn LIn pun[o par[iculw de la [ol-1-e,probab]enmn[c se debt n una junta dc!’cc[uosa de ta lorrc. Deberfi inspcccionwse la junta de la lorrc cn ese punm y rcalizwsc las rcpamciones neccsarias. Si e] clisposi[lvo LICseguridad sc clispara dc rnanera aleatorin y no cx isle ninguna raz6n apwcnlc (tales como protuberanciils causadas por junlas dcfcciuosas dc la torrc), es posible quc cl rcsorw del rcgulador cste dcbilitado. dcbicndo rccmplazarsc c1 disposi[i\,o de segul-idad. NOTA: S61C [icncn pcrrniso (Ic rcpmar cl dispositivo dc sc,guridad personal “certificado por la ffibrica”. NO ROMPA EL SELLO. SE TRABA

O ATASCA

LA COMPUERTA

Las compucrtas sicmpre debcn funcionar dc manera uniforme, tanto 01abrirsc como al cewwsc. Una inspection visual de la compuerta determinarft rhpidamen[e la causa dc cualquicl- atascamicnto o pcrcusion de la compucrta. La causa mhs comtin del a[ascamiento de compuertas es un marco y/o un rlcl doblades dc la compucrta. En algunos cases, la compuerta y/o e] ricl sc pucdcn VOl VCI- a plegar a ia posici6n corrects, pcro pal-a obtener un rcndimicn[o bptimo, sc Irccomicnda recmplazar Ias piczm dci’cc[uosas.

- l’iiginil 2- 13

El pcrcusi(in dc la compucll;l ~cncralmcnlc cslil rclaci{mada al cable y a Ias roldanas. Exarninc l;! SCJ::l(1c olambrc y dc[crminc si rcsul[an cvidcn[cs nxIIcm dc dcs::I\Ic. Talnbitn cxalninc c1 1:1sroltl:mas (IcI u:Iblc cn la P;l!-[c

sl]pcl’]()~

dc

];]

~oi])pL]cr[d

> dc[c]”m]l]c

Rccmplacc cualqtlicr s~~il dcf’cc{uwa o cojincics dc Ias roldon;i~.. Ii bwmcntc.

si (Ic

L)pcl’i]fl

alambrc

Revise IOStopcs dc caucho y 10Sbloqucs dc guia dc plis[ico para determiner dcsgas[c y flojedatl. Rccn]p]acc si tucra ncccsario. RESOLUTION

DE PROBLEMAS

ELECTRICOS

Si no sc ob[iene una respuesta a un comando (o si la l“espucsta es crritica), generalmcn[c significa problemas c16c[ricos. El ascensor rnontacargas cs comple[amcnte automi[ico pcro pucdc ser opcrado cn una modaliclad manual. En caso de algtln despcrfcc[o clcctrico. consul[e primcro la Tab]a 2-3 (Resolucibn CICproblcrnas de IOS controles en al cabina). Si la cabina corr[int’ta a funcionar dc manera dcfectuosa despu& LIchabcmc vcrificado y/o cormgido Ias condicioncs delincadas, hay funcionar la cabina cn la modalidad de con[l-ol dcsdc e] WCI1Oy operc la cabina dcsde la estacion de control de] [CCI1O(consulte OPERACION DESDE EL TECHO DE LA CA BINA, en la p(tgina 1 -2). El sistema dc control autom~l[ico sc ignorfi cn la modal iclad de control dcsdc c1 techo. Si la cabina con[inija a funcional. de mancra de fcctuosa al u[ilizar la cs~acion dc control dcl [echo, consul[c cl final dc la Tabla 2-3 para proccclimicntos LIcrcsolucitk de problcmas cn la modalidad de control dcsdc c1 tccho. S] la cabina L)pcra de la rnancra normal usando la es[acibn principnl dc control y la cs[acich LIccontrol de] [ccI1o, sirvasc consul tar la scccifm titulada PRO BLEMAS CON EL CONTROL AUTOMATIC (pfigina 2- 15).

Tabla 2-3- Cuadro

de resolution C;IIIW

In(licdci(m l,tllqw.1

(h. 1,1